Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User s Guide.pdf

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
User’s Guide

Version Number: V8.0
December 2012
Copyright (c) 2001-2012 by Aspen Technology, Inc.All rights reserved.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the aspen leaf logo and Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Burlington, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of
the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,
ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.
200 Wheeler Road
Burlington, MA 01803-5501
USA
Phone: 781 221-6400
Toll Free: 888 996-7100
URL: http://www.aspentech.com

Contents 3
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................3
Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator .............................................................13
Main Features ................................................................................................ 13
Detailed EPC Estimates ......................................................................... 13
CPM Schedules .................................................................................... 13
Information Tracking ............................................................................ 14
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project Workflow .................................................. 14
The Guide ..................................................................................................... 14
Organization........................................................................................ 14
Related Documentation................................................................................... 15
Installation Notes ................................................................................. 15
Known Issues and Workarounds............................................................. 15
New Features in Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 .................................... 16
Icarus Reference .................................................................................. 16
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings ..................................................... 16
Technical Support .......................................................................................... 16
1 Getting Started...................................................................................................17
Starting Aspen Capital Cost Estimator............................................................... 17
Starting a Project Scenario .................................................................... 20
Creating a New Project Scenario ............................................................ 20
Importing a Project Scenario ................................................................. 24
Opening an Existing Project Scenario................................................................ 26
Palette Shortcut ................................................................................... 27
Working with Templates.................................................................................. 28
Adding a Template ............................................................................... 28
Creating a Project by Importing a Template............................................. 28
Understanding the Icarus Interface .................................................................. 29
Project Explorer ................................................................................... 30
Main Window ....................................................................................... 32
Palette................................................................................................ 35
Customizing the Icarus Interface............................................................ 41
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar...................................................... 43
Run Menu............................................................................................ 45
View Menu .......................................................................................... 46
Tools Menu.......................................................................................... 46
Window Menu ...................................................................................... 47

4 Contents
Help Menu........................................................................................... 48
Working with Project Scenarios ........................................................................ 48
Saving Project Scenarios....................................................................... 48
Deleting Project Scenarios..................................................................... 49
Salvaging Project Scenarios................................................................... 50
Unlocking Project Scenarios................................................................... 51
Copying Project Directories.............................................................................. 52
Preferences ................................................................................................... 52
General............................................................................................... 53
Forms................................................................................................. 54
Spreadsheet Views ............................................................................... 55
Backup ............................................................................................... 55
Process ............................................................................................... 56
Locations ............................................................................................ 56
Logging............................................................................................... 57
Unit Costs ........................................................................................... 58
Start Page........................................................................................... 59
Logging............................................................................................... 62
Schedule............................................................................................. 62
Importing and Exporting Spreadsheets ............................................................. 62
Accessing the Spreadsheet Import/Export Feature ................................... 62
Exporting Spreadsheets ........................................................................ 64
Importing Spreadsheets........................................................................ 66
Spreadsheet Structure .......................................................................... 67
Features Common to All Worksheets....................................................... 68
Features for Specific Worksheets............................................................ 70
Instructions for Working with Spreadsheets............................................. 70
Fixing Spreadsheet Errors ..................................................................... 71
Using Custom User Attributes with Spreadsheet Data Exporting ................. 71
2 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................73
Project Properties........................................................................................... 74
General Project Data ...................................................................................... 75
Basis for Capital Costs .................................................................................... 76
Input Units of Measure Customization..................................................... 77
Electrical Specs.................................................................................... 80
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization .................................... 82
Design Basis........................................................................................ 83
Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs......................................... 111
Escalation ......................................................................................... 112
Engineering Workforce........................................................................ 114
Construction Workforce....................................................................... 120
Code of Accounts ............................................................................... 128
Overriding Code of Accounts at the Component Level ............................. 133
Choosing between the Icarus Code of Accounts and User Code of Accounts at
the Component Level.......................................................................... 135
Indexing ........................................................................................... 135
Equipment Rental............................................................................... 142
Systems............................................................................................ 144
Contracts .......................................................................................... 151
Importing old Standard basis files .................................................................. 160
Merging Projects .......................................................................................... 161

Contents 5
Merging Areas Into Projects........................................................................... 161
Customer External Files ................................................................................ 162
Project Execution Schedule Settings ............................................................... 163
Adjusting Schedule and Barcharts ........................................................ 164
Setting Delivery Times for Equipment Classes........................................ 165
Scheduling Individual Project Components ............................................ 166
Adding Bar Chart Items....................................................................... 167
IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................ 168
Using Aspen Icarus Project Scheduling Features in the Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Environment ....................................................................... 168
Schedule Appearance Adjustments ....................................................... 169
Schedule Adjustments by Duration ....................................................... 173
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic .......................................... 178
Primavera Information ........................................................................ 188
Process Design............................................................................................. 190
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name............................................... 190
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs............................................ 190
Project Component Map Specifications .................................................. 193
Default Simulator Mapping Specs ......................................................... 194
Design Criteria................................................................................... 199
Utility Specifications ........................................................................... 212
Investment Analysis ..................................................................................... 216
Investment Parameters....................................................................... 216
Operating Unit Costs........................................................................... 221
Raw Material Specifications ................................................................. 222
Product Specifications......................................................................... 225
Developing Streams ..................................................................................... 228
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream ............................................... 229
Mixture Specs Dialog Box .................................................................... 232
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator .......................................................................................... 233
Stream Connectivity ........................................................................... 234
Creating A New Stream....................................................................... 234
Deleting a Stream .............................................................................. 237
Specification Libraries ................................................................................... 238
Customizing Specification Libraries....................................................... 238
Customizing Steel Costs Using an External File ...................................... 243
Selecting Specification File for Use in a Project....................................... 248
Changing File Directory Location .......................................................... 248
Instrument Field Hook-Up Customization......................................................... 249
Using the Plot Plan Layout Tool ...................................................................... 252
Workflow for Plot Plan Layout Tool: ...................................................... 253
3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................257
Overview..................................................................................................... 257
Preparing Simulation Reports......................................................................... 257
AspenPlus Report Generation............................................................... 258
AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link .................. 261
ChemCAD Report Generation............................................................... 262
HYSIM Report Generation.................................................................... 263
HYSYS – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link....................... 265
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation............................... 266

6 Contents
Loading Simulation Data ............................................................................... 268
Viewing Data Derived from Simulator ................................................... 270
Working with Block Flow Diagrams ................................................................. 271
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram ....................................................... 271
The Drag & Find Feature ..................................................................... 272
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram.................................... 273
Zooming ........................................................................................... 273
BlockFlow Diagram View Menu............................................................. 275
Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components.................................... 276
Component Status.............................................................................. 281
Deleting Mappings.............................................................................. 281
Tower Configurations.................................................................................... 282
Sizing Selection ........................................................................................... 292
Project Sizing Selection................................................................................. 292
Specifying Additional Components.................................................................. 294
Working with Process Flow Diagrams .............................................................. 294
Editing the Layout .............................................................................. 295
Process Flow Diagram View Menu......................................................... 295
Setting Grid Properties........................................................................ 298
Editing Connectivity............................................................................ 298
Adding a Stream ................................................................................ 300
Drawing a Disconnected Stream........................................................... 302
Working with Streams......................................................................... 303
4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components.................................305
Adding a Report Group.................................................................................. 305
Adding an Area ............................................................................................ 306
Copying a Report Area over another Report Area ............................................. 307
Defining Area Specifications........................................................................... 308
Method 1: Defining area specifications using Project View ....................... 308
Method 2: Defining area specifications using Spreadsheet View................ 310
Adding and Defining Pipeline Areas................................................................. 311
Adding a Project Component.......................................................................... 312
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette ................................ 312
Method 2: Using the Pop-up Menu........................................................ 313
Entering Component Specifications................................................................. 315
Defining Installation Bulks............................................................................. 317
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments .............................................................. 318
Mat’l/Man-hours Additions ................................................................... 322
Pipe – General Specs .......................................................................... 322
Pipe – Item Details............................................................................. 323
Duct ................................................................................................. 325
Civil.................................................................................................. 325
Steel ................................................................................................ 325
Instrumentation ................................................................................. 326
Electrical ........................................................................................... 329
Insulation.......................................................................................... 329
Paint................................................................................................. 329
Quoted Cost Items ............................................................................. 329
Importing Areas and Components .................................................................. 330
Importing an Entire Scenario ......................................................................... 331
Copying Components.................................................................................... 332

Contents 7
Cut and Paste .................................................................................... 332
Drag and Drop ................................................................................... 332
Modifying Components.................................................................................. 332
Copying Areas ............................................................................................. 333
Deleting Components.................................................................................... 334
Re-numbering Components ................................................................. 334
Deleting Areas ............................................................................................. 335
Re-numbering Areas........................................................................... 335
Using the Custom Model Tool......................................................................... 335
Creating a Template ........................................................................... 339
Running the Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update............ 340
5 Sizing Project Components...............................................................................343
Overview..................................................................................................... 343
Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items .................. 343
Interactive Sizing Expert ..................................................................... 344
Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items ............ 345
Resizing Project Components............................................................... 345
Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items ............................................ 346
Using the Interactive Sizing Form................................................................... 349
Utility Resources ................................................................................ 352
Global Sizing Selection.................................................................................. 356
Sizing Areas ................................................................................................ 358
Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults .............................................. 360
Air Coolers ........................................................................................ 360
Agitated Tanks................................................................................... 362
Compressors ..................................................................................... 363
Crushers ........................................................................................... 364
Crystallizers....................................................................................... 365
Dryers .............................................................................................. 365
Dust Collectors .................................................................................. 366
Filters ............................................................................................... 367
Heat Exchangers ................................................................................ 367
Pumps .............................................................................................. 370
Screens ............................................................................................ 372
Towers.............................................................................................. 373
Vessels ............................................................................................. 385
6 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................393
Overview..................................................................................................... 393
Using the P&ID Editor ................................................................................... 393
Features of P&IDs .............................................................................. 393
P&ID Modes....................................................................................... 393
P&ID Layout and Structure .................................................................. 394
The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID Layout: Radpfs Interface ............... 396
Working with Ports ............................................................................. 399
Editing P&IDs .................................................................................... 401
Adding Instrumentation Loops ............................................................. 404
Efficient PID Creation.......................................................................... 409
Cosmetic Tips .................................................................................... 410
Custom Equipment Symbols ................................................................ 413
Modifying a system equipment symbol.................................................. 414

8 Contents
Importing an equipment symbol........................................................... 414
Creating an equipment symbol from scratch .......................................... 415
Line sizing Tutorial ............................................................................. 416
Using Custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ............................. 420
Working with Non-Graphic P&ID Data ............................................................. 425
Saving Component Information as Non-Graphical P&ID........................... 425
Creating Non-Graphical P&ID Libraries Outside a Project ......................... 425
Importing External P&ID Data........................................................................ 426
Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines............................................................ 431
Open a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project ......................................... 431
Run Interconnect Piping Lines.............................................................. 431
Connecting Piping Lines ...................................................................... 432
Disconnecting Piping Lines................................................................... 433
Renaming a Line Tag .......................................................................... 434
Saving All Connections and (optionally) Updating the Project................... 435
Getting the Connected Line List Report ................................................. 435
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines.................................................................... 436
Importing 3D Piping and Structure Data Using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus
Interface ..................................................................................................... 436
Overview........................................................................................... 437
Step 1: Exporting Data from SmartPlant 3D .......................................... 437
Step 2: Importing the data to Aspen Icarus........................................... 439
Step 3: Loading the Data .................................................................... 444
Adding or Updating Codes to this Interface............................................ 444
Known Issues .................................................................................... 446
7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................447
Overview..................................................................................................... 447
Equipment Model Library (EML)............................................................ 447
Unit Cost Library (UCL) ....................................................................... 448
Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML).................................. 448
Creating an EML................................................................................. 448
Adding an Item to an EML ................................................................... 450
Adding an EML Item as a Project Component......................................... 451
Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL) ............................................... 454
Creating a Unit Cost Library................................................................. 455
Adding an Item to a UCL ..................................................................... 456
Adding a UCL Item to a Project ............................................................ 458
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items...................................................... 461
Working with Cost Libraries ........................................................................... 465
Copying a Library Item ....................................................................... 465
Deleting a Library Item ....................................................................... 465
Escalating Library Costs ...................................................................... 465
Importing a Cost Library ..................................................................... 466
Duplicating a Cost Library ................................................................... 467
Deleting a Cost Library ....................................................................... 468
8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location..............................................................469
Changing Plant Capacity................................................................................ 469
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) ................................................................... 471
How ASM Works................................................................................. 471
Scale-Up Rule Set .............................................................................. 471

Contents 9
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis ...................................................... 472
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) ................................................................. 473
Relocation Terminology....................................................................... 473
Workflow........................................................................................... 473
How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works ......................... 474
Relocating the Project......................................................................... 476
ARM Knowledge Base.......................................................................... 477
ARM Notes: ....................................................................................... 486
9 Aspen Utility Modules.......................................................................................487
Introduction ................................................................................................ 487
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design and Scope Generators for Utility
Systems............................................................................................ 487
AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module ....... 488
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design
Module.............................................................................................. 488
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water) ............................... 489
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water ................... 489
1. Overview...................................................................................... 491
2. Working with the Cooling Water Model ............................................. 492
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets............................ 498
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model ......................................... 506
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:......................................... 516
AUM_Air...................................................................................................... 517
Utility Design and Scope Generator for Instrument and Plant Air .............. 517
Overview..................................................................................................... 517
Project areas and their project components ........................................... 517
Benefits: ........................................................................................... 518
How AUM_Air Works ........................................................................... 518
General AUM_Air Workflow............................................................................ 518
Using AUM_Air............................................................................................. 519
Accessing AUM_Air ............................................................................. 519
The Initial Design ............................................................................... 521
Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data ................................................. 522
Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM) .............................................................. 525
SPECS Organization Chart ................................................................... 526
About this SPECS Book ....................................................................... 526
About an Air Plant Unit........................................................................ 527
About Distribution Piping for an APU ..................................................... 528
Schematic ......................................................................................... 529
Configuration of Air Utility Project Components ................................................ 529
Project Components ........................................................................... 530
An “Air Plant Unit” - APU ..................................................................... 530
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit.............................................................. 531
General Layout .................................................................................. 532
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas .............................................. 532
Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up ........................... 533
Design Considerations .................................................................................. 533
Units of Measure ................................................................................ 533
Air Utility Area ................................................................................... 534
Air Utility Project Components ............................................................. 534
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate ................................... 534

10 Contents
Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate............................................ 535
Compressor Model Selection Method..................................................... 535
Interactive Specs ......................................................................................... 539
User Preferences ................................................................................ 539
Equipment Redundancy....................................................................... 540
Equipment Configurations ................................................................... 540
Basis for Design: Preferences - 1......................................................... 541
Configuration Layout Method and Distribution........................................ 543
Example layout – group of areas served by APU “A” ............................... 544
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs............................................ 544
Sample Layouts: One APU.................................................................. 545
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs ........................................................... 545
Design Methods ........................................................................................... 545
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping................................................... 545
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets ......................................................................... 547
List of AUM_Air Worksheets................................................................. 547
Welcome Worksheet ........................................................................... 548
Control Center Worksheet ................................................................... 548
Guide Worksheet................................................................................ 549
Status Worksheet............................................................................... 554
Preferences Worksheet ....................................................................... 556
Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant Air to Areas Not Requiring
Instrument Air ................................................................................... 558
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas to an APU.............................. 558
Report – Equipment Component Stats .................................................. 559
Report – Pipe Stats............................................................................. 561
10 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................563
Running a Project Evaluation ......................................................................... 563
Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor .................................................................. 565
Accessing.......................................................................................... 565
Printing a Single Section ..................................................................... 566
Icarus Editor Toolbar .......................................................................... 566
Report Sections.................................................................................. 567
Project Schedule ................................................................................ 570
Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter..................................................... 574
Accessing Aspen Icarus Reporter.......................................................... 574
Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar ............................................................... 577
Which Report Mode?........................................................................... 578
Standard Reports ............................................................................... 578
HTML Reports .................................................................................... 588
Management Reports.......................................................................... 589
Excel Reports..................................................................................... 593
Update on Demand Reports................................................................. 597
Data Trending.................................................................................... 598
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter............................................ 601
Creating a User Database.................................................................... 602
Splitting Very Large CCP Reports.......................................................... 603
Reviewing Investment Analysis ...................................................................... 604
Viewing Investment Analysis ............................................................... 605
Equipment Summary .......................................................................... 605
Project Summary ............................................................................... 606

Contents 11
Cashflow ........................................................................................... 613
Executive Summary............................................................................ 618
Using the Reporting Assistant .............................................................. 620
Item Evaluation ........................................................................................... 624
11 Introducing IPS..............................................................................................629
12 Getting Started With IPS................................................................................631
Installing Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) ......................................................... 631
Installation Steps and Sequence .......................................................... 631
System Requirements for the Integration .............................................. 638
Primavera Enterprise Client and Server................................................. 638
Starting Icarus Project Scheduler ................................................................... 638
Primavera Addendum ................................................................................... 640
Prerequisites for Primavera P6 V8.2...................................................... 641
Installation Steps and Sequence .......................................................... 641
13 IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................651
IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................ 651
Schedule Appearance Adjustments ....................................................... 652
Schedule Adjustments by Duration ....................................................... 656
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic .......................................... 661
Primavera Information ........................................................................ 672
IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers.......................675
Numbering Convention ................................................................................. 675
Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers.....................699
Numbering Conventions ................................................................................ 699
List of Activity Numbers ................................................................................ 700
Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions ............................................................705
Appendix D: Equipment Codes.............................................................................707
Appendix E: Tutorial............................................................................................711
Index ..................................................................................................................717

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 13
Introducing Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, formerly known as Aspen Kbase, is a fully
integrated, design, estimating, and scheduling system designed to help you
evaluate the capital cost of process plants worldwide.
Main Features
Detailed EPC Estimates
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the equipment models contained in the
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) – a knowledge base of design, cost, and
scheduling data, methods, and models – to generate preliminary equipment
designs and simulate vendor-costing procedures to develop detailed
Engineering-Procurement-Construction (EPC) estimates. Volumetric models
generate a costed, quantity takeoff for the bulk materials without using
factors or user input. The volumetric models also produce the quantities of
pipe, valves, concrete, steel, and instruments identified by the associated
equipment or area. Components of each line of pipe and instrument loop are
quantified and costed, enabling you to view and adjust construction tasks.
The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Work Item Models produce the required
man-hours by craft and task needed to install Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator-generated bulks, as well as the equipment Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator designed, by simulating detailed design construction tasks. Finally,
the Engineering Models in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator produce man-hours
by discipline and engineering work product.
CPM Schedules
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator has a built-in activity network generator to
automatically prepare Critical Path Method (CPM) schedules. The EPC
estimate and the planning schedule are in tune with one another, each having
been prepared from the same project scope.

14 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Information Tracking
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides tree diagrams that allow you to view,
track and revise information such as power distribution, process control
networks, tiered contracts, areas and their equipment specs, and installation
procedures.
Project Workflow
Before using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, it may be helpful to review the
recommended project workflow:
Note: Early in the life of a project, when limited mechanical design detail is
available, you need only enter a rough outline of scope to produce the initial
estimate of cost and schedule. As more information becomes available, the
details of the project can be entered and new reports can be generated and
analyzed.
1 Create project scenario and define properties like country base, units of
measure, and currency.
2 Define design basis (general mechanical design rules), wage rates and
productivities, code of account definition and allocation, material and
man-hour indexing, equipment rental, and project execution schedule
settings.
3 Define the Power Distribution system (if desired).
4 Define the Process Control system (if desired) and link to areas and
substations.
5 Add contractors and redefine responsibilities (if desired) and link to areas
and substations.
6 Run an item evaluation to produce direct costs for an individual
component or run a project evaluation to produce design and cost results
needed to prepare project reports.
7 View and/or print reports.
The Guide
Organization
This guide contains the following:
Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator an overview of Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator and the user's guide, as well as a list of related documentation
and information on technical support.

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 15
Chapter 1  Getting Started  instructions on how to start Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, open a project, enter project specifications, and work with the
Icarus Interface.
Chapter 2  Defining the Project Basis  instructions on defining
specifications: units of measure, standard basis, component map, design
criteria, investment analysis, raw material, product, operating unit costs, and
utility.
Chapter 3  Loading and Mapping Simulation Data  instructions on
preparing different kinds of simulator reports for use in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, loading simulator data, mapping simulator models to Icarus project
components, adding additional components to simulator models, and viewing
and defining simulator models in Block Flow Diagram (BFD) and Process Flow
Diagram (PFD) view.
Chapter 4  Defining Areas, Report Groups, and Project Components 
instructions on how to define areas and report groups and then populate them
with project components, which are the pieces of the process plant that, when
linked together, complete a process.
Chapter 5  Sizing Project Components  instructions on sizing project
components.
Chapter 6 – Piping and Instrumentation Models  instructions on accessing
the P&ID Editor and creating and selecting custom P&ID’s.
Chapter 7 – Developing and Using Cost Libraries  instructions on developing
cost libraries and adding library items as project components.
Chapter 8 – Changing Plant Capacity and Location  instructions on using the
plant scale-up and relocation modules available if you are licensed to use
Aspen Decision Analyzer.
Chapter 9 - Analyzer Utility Modules – instructions on using Analyzer Utility
Modules for cooling water and air.
Chapter 10  Evaluating the Project  instructions on running a project and
item evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating costs, and investment
analysis reports.
Related Documentation
In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided to
help users learn and use Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. The documentation set
consists of the following:
Installation Notes
Aspen Engineering Suite V8.0 Installation Guide
Known Issues and Workarounds
Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 Release Notes

16 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
New Features in Aspen Economic
Evaluation V8.0
Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 Release Notes
Icarus Reference
Aspen Icarus Reference Guide, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings, 3rd edition
Technical Support
AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance
agreement can register to access the online AspenTech Support Center at:
Hhttp://support.aspentech.comH
This Web support site lets you:
 Access current product documentation
 Search for tech tips, solutions and frequently asked questions (FAQs)
 Search for and download application examples
 Search for and download service packs and product updates
 Submit and track technical issues
 Send suggestions
 Report product defects
 Review lists of known deficiencies and defects
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins.
These e-Bulletins are used to alert users to important technical support
information such as:
 Technical advisories
 Product updates and releases
Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and email. The most up-to-
date contact information is available at the AspenTech Support Center
at Hhttp://support.aspentech.comH.

1 Getting Started 17
1 Getting Started
Starting Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
After completing the installation, you can start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
To start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
1 Click the Windows Start button.
2 Point to Programs | AspenTech.
3 Point to Economic Evaluation 8.0; then click Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator starts.

18 1 Getting Started
The Start page appears:
You can now open an existing project or begin a new one. In either case:
 the Main window appears on the left
 the Palette appears in the upper right
 the Properties window appears in the lower right
Note: You can change the position of the Main Window, Palette, and
Properties Window, as explained under Customizing the Interface
Arrangement on page XXX41XXX.

If you are also licensed to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator displays at startup the Options dialog box, in which
you can choose to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator environment.
If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS), you can also
select to use IPS with any of these options.
Your selection makes certain features of the selected product available in
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Starting a Project Scenario
Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator before creating a new one allows you to familiarize yourself with
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator without having to fill out specifications. To open
the sample project, follow the instructions under “Opening an Existing Project
Scenario” on page XXX26XXX.
Creating a New Project Scenario
To create a new project scenario:
1 Do one of the following:
 On the File menu, click New.
-or-
 Click on the toolbar.
The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: Under Preferences, you can create scenarios in project directories
other than the default one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See
page XXX56XXX for instructions on adding project directories.
3 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter
a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
4 Enter the Scenario Name.
This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name,
long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such

as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are
not allowed.
If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses
“BaseCase” as the default.
5 Click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears.
6 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in
length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You
can enter or revise the description later on the Project Properties form
accessed from the Project Basis view (see page XXX74XXX).
In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis of Inch-Pound
(IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure selection cannot be changed after
creating the project scenario.
7 If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in the Remarks
field. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be
comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You can enter and revise
remarks later on the Project Properties form accessed from the Project
Basis view (see page XXX74XXX).
8 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Input Units of Measure
Specifications dialog box, which lets you customize the units of measure that
appear on specification forms.

For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H
(meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project,
do the following:
A Select Velocity and Flow Rate and click Modify.
B On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, type CM/H as the new
unit name for M/H. Then type the conversion factor between the two
units in the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor
between the two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
C Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog
box.
9 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the General Project Data form.
Most specifications on this form can be entered later by selecting General
Project Data in the Project Basis view (see page XXX75XXX). However, country
base, currency description and symbol, and allowing pipeline areas can only
be selected at this time.
Selecting Country Base and Currency
The default country base is US and the default currency is Dollars (USD).
Changing the country base to UK, EU, JP, or ME automatically changes the
currency to Pounds (PS), Euros, K-Yen (KY), or Saudi Riyals (SAR),
respectively. You can, however, enter a currency different than that of the
country base. Just be sure to also enter a currency conversion rate, which is
the number of currency units per one country base currency unit.
Allowing Pipeline Areas
2 If this is to be a pipeline project, select P in the Allow Pipeline Areas
box.

In a pipeline project, items marked with a double asterisk in Project Explorer’s
Project Basis view (see page XXX73XX) are not applicable.
A pipeline project has no multiple contractors.
A pipeline project has both main (process) and pipeline areas. Process
equipment can be defined in the main (process) area(s), but not in the
pipeline areas.
Suppressing Default Equipment/Area/Project Bulks
3 If you want to suppress equipment volumetric model bulks and most of
the system developed area and project bulks, click the M option in the
Suppress Default Equipment/Area/Project field on the General
Project Data dialog box.
If you select the M option:
• Engineering and Construction (crew mixes, craft names) Workforces,
Power Distribution, Process control, Panel Board, Contracts, and
Project Execution Schedule is ignored.
• All area design basis options to develop estimate and reports are
ignored.
• Only Interactive Reports (for example, Reporter) are available. No
standard Aspen Capital Cost Estimator evaluation report (CCP) is
developed.
4 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.
The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See
“Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page XX28XX for instructions on working
with these and other features now available on the interface.
Importing a Project Scenario
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides an Import feature so that you can
import Analyzer 2.0B, Icarus 2000 9.0, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
5.0/5.1, IPM 5.0, or Questimate 14.0 project scenarios into Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
To import a project scenario:
 On the File menu, click New.
-or-
 On the toolbar, click .

The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See “Preferences,” particularly
the “Locations” subsection on page XX56XX, for instructions.
2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter
a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3 Enter the Scenario Name.
Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation
marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and
asterisks (*) are not allowed.
After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import button
becomes active.
4 Click Import.

The Select Import Type dialog box appears.
5 Select the project type you wish to import and click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2 Select the project scenario folder and click OK.
The project scenario’s settings are imported into the new project scenario.
Opening an Existing Project
Scenario
To open an existing project scenario:
 On the File menu, click Open.

-or-
 On the toolbar, click .
The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.
In the pictured dialog box, the project named Expansion_P6 has been
expanded on the tree structure to show the scenario named Expansion_P6.
The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the projects in
the default project folder:
...AspenTechEconomic Evaluation V8.0DataArchives_Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
Clicking + next to a project expands the view to display the scenarios under
that project.
3 Select a scenario and click OK.
The project scenario opens. The Main window now displays Project Explorer
and the List view. See “Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page XX28XX for
instructions on working with these and other features now available on the
interface.
Palette Shortcut
You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the right of
the Main Window in the default interface arrangement (it can also be floated
in the Main Window or dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized, as shown
below).
1 In the Projects tab view, right-click on a scenario.
2 On the menu that appears, click Open.

This opens the selected scenario.
Working with Templates
Adding a Template
To add a new template:
1 Click File | New Template.
The Create New Template dialog box appears.
2 On the Create New Template dialog box type the Scenario name.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Project Properties dialog box, enter:
o the project description
o the units of measure (IP or Metric)
o any (optional) remarks
5 Click OK.
The project is created. Note that the Title Bar indicates Templates (name
you entered for the scenario).
Creating a Project by Importing a Template
You can create a new project based on an existing template.
To do this:

1 Launch the Aspen Economic Evaluation application.
2 Click File | New.
3 On the Create New Project dialog box that appears, specify the project
and scenario name.
4 Click the Template button on the right of the dialog box.
The Import Template dialog box appears showing all available templates.
5 Click the template you want to import; then click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears, on which you can continue to
enter information for the new project.
Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,
not all of the buttons on the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar are
available.
Understanding the Icarus
Interface
The Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can
customize the interface arrangement. The following is the default interface
arrangement, with a specifications form open in the Main Window.
The Icarus interface includes the following features:
This feature Does this
Title Bar Displays the project file name and current Main Window
view.

Menu Bar Displays menu options.
Toolbar Allows access to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
functions. See page XX43XX.
Main Window Provides workspace for all Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
documents, List view, specification forms, and other
views. See page XX32XX.
Project Explorer Organizes project items in tree format. See page XX30XX.
Palette Allows access to libraries, projects, components, and
templates. See page XX35XX.
Status Bar Displays Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system status.
Properties Window Describes the field selected on specifications form. See
page XX39XX.
Project Explorer
Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has three
views: Project Basis view, Process view, and Project view. Each view
organizes items in a tree format. Switch views by selecting the appropriate
tab at the bottom of Project Explorer. (Stretching the width of the Project
Explorer displays the full names on the tabs.) The different views are
described on page XX30XX.
To expand a tree level:
 Click the PLUS SIGN (+) next to the condensed level.
To condense a tree level:
 Click the MINUS SIGN ( -) next to the expanded level.
Project Explorer Views
Project Basis View displays project basis specifications. Double-click on a
specification to view and/or modify it. A red arrow on an icon in this view
indicates that you can right click on the icon for options.
Level Icon Description
2 Specifications folder
3 Specification
Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator
items can be mapped to Icarus project components. Mapped items can then
be sized, modified, and/or deleted.
Note: Simulation data can only be used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if
you are licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer) or Analyzer.
As in a process simulator, such as AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks represent
different operations within the process. A block is sometimes referred to as a
unit operation.

2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas
3 Process simulator area
4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)
Mapped simulator block (green)

Project View displays project data information. In this view, you can size,
modify and/or delete mapped items. In addition, new areas and Icarus project
components can be defined.
1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any user-added
areas
2 Report Group, displayed only if Show Report Group in Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator is selected in Preferences (see page XX54XX
for instructions)
3 Area
4 Project component
Main Window
The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by default. The
Main Window is a workspace for all Aspen Capital Cost Estimator documents,
the List view, and other views. You can adjust the relative size of each
window by clicking on the division bar and dragging it to the desired location.
Note: Here, the Main Window in Workbook Mode displays several tabs
because a component specifications form (component A1) and a project
specifications form (Escalation Specs) have been opened.
By default, the Main Window is in Workbook Mode. In this mode, tabs are
placed at the bottom of the window. These tabs represent all windows open in

the Main Window. Clicking on a tab brings the associated window to the
foreground.
Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all windows open in
the Main Window. Regardless of the window arrangement, the tabs are still at
the bottom of the Main Window when in Workbook Mode. Clicking the
maximize button ( ) on a window returns all windows to full tab view.
Clicking the condense button ( ) on the menu bar displays all windows open
in the Main Window as they were when last condensed.
This is how the Main Window appears when in Workbook Mode with
Cascade selected as the condensed window arrangement.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you float Project Explorer, the Palette, and
the Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these windows
behave just like other windows that are part of the Main Window. See
“Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page XX41XX for details.
You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode on the
View menu. When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed; to bring a
window to the front, you must click on the desired window or select the
desired window from the Window menu.
List View
The List view in the Main Window displays details on items selected in Project
Explorer. For example, when you click on an area in Project Explorer’s Project
view, the List view displays a list of all components in the area. This is
referred to as the “area-level” list (shown below), in which the components
are displayed in rows with component details in columns. When you click on a
component in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List provides information
only on the selected component, with component details listed in rows. This is
referred to as the “component-level” list.

Note: In the interface arrangement pictured here, the Palette and the
Properties Window have been hidden to make room for the Main Window.
Press alt+1 to hide or display the Palette and press alt+2 to hide or display
the Properties Window. Press alt+0 to hide or display Project Explorer.
Filtering Mechanism
You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component. To do so,
click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar and click on a category.
For example, if you click ? Incomplete Items the list will only include
components that still have specifications that need to be entered in order for
the component to be included in an evaluation.
Column Settings
You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in which
order.
To change column settings on the area-level list:
1 Right-click on any of the column headings.

A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently displayed are
checked.
2 To simply hide/unhide a column, you can click it on the menu.
2 To change the order, click Settings on the menu.
The Settings dialog box appears.
3 To move a column to the right on the List View, click Move Down. To
move a column to the left, click Move Up. The Reset button returns to
columns to the default setting (shown above).
4 Click OK to save the settings.
When you restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, all columns will be displayed
in the default order unless Save Window States is selected in Preferences (by
default, Save Window States is selected). See “Saving Window States” on
page XX42XX for more information.
Palette
The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project scenario. If
you think of Project Explorer as a picture of the project scenario, you might

think of the Palette’s contents as the pigments and dyes used to first sketch
out and then color in that picture.
For example, if you wish to import areas or components from another
scenario into your current scenario, you can double-click on the scenario in
the Palette to get a listing of its areas and components and then drag the
area/component to the Project Explorer’s Project View. (See “Importing
Project Components” on page XX330XX.)
Likewise, the Palette’s Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basis
specification files that, in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, you can select
to use. From the Palette, you can develop the libraries by creating new files,
modifying existing files, and importing files. (See “Specification Libraries” on
page XX238XX.)

When you add a component to the project scenario, you can choose from the
components listed in the Palette’s Components view. Then, after you add the
component, it appears in Project Explorer’s Project view. (See “Adding a
Project Component” on page XX310XX).
Finally, you can use the Palette’s Templates tab to access templates, both
those supplied with Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, and any you or others may
have created.

In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the right side of
the screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed in a variety of ways. See
“Customizing the Icarus Interface” (page XX41XX) for display options. To
hide/display the Palette, press ALT+1 or used the checked command on the
View menu.
As indicated previously, the Palette has four views: Projects, Libraries,
Components, and Templates. The Components view, shown below, has a
scrollable split window that displays details on equipment items. The division
bar can be adjusted to hide or expand the details section.
Note: The Palette pictured in this section has been dragged onto the Main
Window and re-sized.

In addition to letting you import the contents of other scenarios, the Projects
view provides options for opening scenarios, viewing scenario properties, and
deleting scenarios. Right-click on a project scenario to access the pop-up
menu of options. The Projects view displays all projects in the default project
folder and any other active project folders. (See “Preferences,” particularly
the “Locations” subsection on page XX56XX, for instructions.)
Properties Window
When you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties Window
provides a description of the field. The description often includes minimum,
maximum, and default values.

Here, the Properties window (docked on the right side of the screen)
displays information on the Item Description field, which is selected on the
specifications form.
Click on the Properties window to freeze and unfreeze the content. When
the content is frozen, you can move to another field while retaining the
description of the original field in the Properties Window.
Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can be
displayed in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on
page XX41XX for display options.
To hide/display the Properties window, press ALT+2 or use the checked
command on the View menu.

Templates Tab
Use the Templates tab to access templates. Shown below are the ten
templates included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. If you had created
custom templates, they would appear on this list.
Customizing the Icarus Interface
In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the left edge
and the Palette and the Properties Window share the right. When docked,
windows remain attached to an edge and all other windows are sized to fit in
the remaining space available.
Right-clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a pop-up
menu from which you can select Allow Docking. When Allow Docking is
marked, the window can be docked to any edge.
Note: When Float In Main Window is selected on the pop-up menu, the
Allow Docking option is inactive.
To dock to a different edge:
1 Click the border that contains the Close button ( ) and hold down the
left mouse button.
A bounding outline will appear as you drag the window.
2 Drag the outline to the desired edge and release the left mouse button.

Here, Project Explorer is docked to the top of the screen.
When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use the
division bar to adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the
Contract/Expand ( / ) buttons to either switch from one window to the
other or split the side.
Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window
One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main Window. Its
size can then be adjusted.
Float In Main Window Option
You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up menu. In
this state, the window behaves like the List view or a specifications form, with
a tab at the bottom of the Main Window.
Saving Window States
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves
the interface arrangement. This way, when you open Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator the arrangement is the same as you left it.
You can also set the Preferences so that Aspen Capital Cost Estimator opens
displaying the default arrangement. See the section on the General tab view
of the Preference dialog box (page XX53XX) for more information.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar
By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However, you can float
the toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar and dragging it. You can
also dock the toolbar to the bottom of the screen or vertically to the edge of
the Project Explorer, Main Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbar
over any one of these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Release
the mouse button when the outline appears in the desired area.
The following toolbar buttons are available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
Click
this
to
Create a new project scenario. See “Creating a New Project Scenario” on
page XX20XX.
Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing Project
Scenario” on page XX26XX.
Save the current project. See “Saving a Project Scenario” on page XX48XX.
Print.
Run project evaluation. See “Running a Project Evaluation” on page XX563XX for
instructions.
Load Capital Costs and other reports. See “Reviewing Reports in Aspen
Icarus Reporter,” page XX574XX, for instructions.
Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.
Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed links.
Other buttons that appear on the toolbar are always inactive in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. They are for use in other Icarus programs.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Menu Bar
Click
this
to
New Start a new project scenario. Details on page XX20XX.
New
Template
Start a new template
Open Open an existing project scenario. Details on page XX26XX.
Open
Template
Open an existing template.
Close Close the current project scenario.
Save Save the current project scenario. Details on page XX48XX.
Save As Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details on page XX48XX.
Import Access instructions for importing areas and components. Details on
page XX330XX.
Import
SP 3D
Import Pipe Runs and Fitting Spreadsheets.
Import
PID
Drawing
Import PID Drawings.
Export to
SPECS
file
Save the current project scenario as an SPECS (*.ic2) project file.
Print Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.
Print
Preview
Preview how form or report will appear printed.
Print
Setup
View and modify printer name and properties, paper size and source, and
orientation
Page
Setup
Define page specifications.

Exit Close Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Run Menu
Click this to
Load Data Translate the specified process simulator report file into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. See page 268 for details.
Map Items Convert each simulator block (that is, model or unit operation) into one
or more Icarus project components. See page 276 for details.
Evaluate
Project
Run a project evaluation. See page XX563XX for details.
Decision
Analyzer
(Only active if you are using Aspen Decision Analyzer in the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator environment.) Accesses options for changing
plant capacity and location. See Chapter 8.
Utility Model Select a utility.
Scan for
Errors
Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.
Basic
Engineering
Link
Access Aspen Basic Engineering.
Interconnect
Piping Lines
To connect piping lines between equipment.
Re-number Re-number project components or project areas so that the numbering
contains no gaps. Details on page XX334XX.
Merge Merge projects and/or areas.

View Menu
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page XX43XX for description of the toolbar.
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page XX28XX for description of the status
bar.
Project
Explorer
View or hide Project Explorer. See page XX30XX for a description of Project
Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page XX35XX for description of the Palette.
Properties
Window
View or hide the Properties Window. See page XX39XX for a description of
the Properties Window.
Workbook
Mode
Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page XX32XX for an explanation of
Workbook Mode.
Capital
Costs View
Specify which report to view.
Spreadsheet
View
Specify which spreadsheet view to display. Areas, components, and so
on.
Error
Messages
Display error messages.
Tools Menu
Use this to
Report
Editor
Access ICEdit program.

External
Simulation
Import Tool
Import information from a simulator.
Manpower
Productivity
Expert
(MPE)
Launch MPE.
Options Access Options sub-menu. See below.
Options Sub-menu
Use this to
View
Spreadsheets
in Excel
Access Excel spreadsheets.
Reporting
Assistant
Access the Reporting Assistant feature that lets you create your own
customized report spreadsheets, combining information from all other
Icarus generated spreadsheets.
Custom
Tasks
See the Application Programming Interface (API) and Object
Definitions guide available from the Help Documentation menu.
Custom Tasks are only available in ACCE and APEA.
Preferences Access Preferences. See page XX53XX for details.
Window Menu
Use this to
Cascade View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See page XX32XX.
Tile View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page XX32XX.
Arrange Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the Main Window.
# XXX View opened window in the Main Window.

Help Menu
Use this to
Contents Access Aspen Icarus Help.
What’s New Access What’s New for this release.
Show Cost
Basis
Display the cost basis for this release.
Documentation Access Docs.pdf, which links to pdf’s of all Aspen Icarus
documentation. You must have Acrobat Reader to access this file.
Training Access Aspen Capital Cost Estimator training information on the web.
Product
Support on the
Web
Access support.aspentech.com.
About Access program information, version number, and copyright
information.
Working with Project Scenarios
This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock project
scenarios.
Saving Project Scenarios
To save a project scenario:
 Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves any changes.
To save the scenario with a new name:
1 Click Save As on the File menu.
Note: Save As is useful when studying alternatives.

Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than the default one
provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See Preferences, particularly the
Locations subsection on page XX56XX, for instructions.
2 Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves the scenario as specified.
Deleting Project Scenarios
You should delete project scenarios when they are no longer needed. Deleting
old scenarios opens free disk space and makes working with scenarios easier.
To delete a project or scenario:
1 To delete a project scenario, right-click on the scenario within the project
directory and click Delete on the pop-up menu.

A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see
page XX53XX).
2 Click Yes to delete the project scenario.
-or-
Click No to retain the project scenario.
Salvaging Project Scenarios
If you exit Aspen Capital Cost Estimator abnormally without being able to
save the current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario from
cached project information.
To salvage a project scenario:
1 Restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. A window appears asking if you
wish to save the cached information found in storage.
2 Click Yes. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Salvage Project As
dialog box.

3 Specify a project and scenario name.
You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged; you must specify a project
and scenario name different from that of the original scenario.
4 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the new scenario. Except in name, this
project scenario will be identical to the scenario that was open when Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator was abnormally exited. After creating the new
scenario, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator asks if you wish to open it.
Unlocking Project Scenarios
If Aspen Capital Cost Estimator crashes while you have a project scenario
open, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator remembers that you have the project
scenario checked out. When you re-open Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you
will have to unlock the project scenario before opening it.
Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and provided with a
message that states the time the project scenario was checked out, the user
name of the person who checked it out, and the computer on which it was
checked out.
A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or by an
administrator.

To unlock a project scenario:
1 Right-click the project scenario in the Palette.
2 On the menu that appears, click Unlock.
You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.
Copying Project Directories
Within a project directory, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates an
independent folder for each project and also creates, within a project folder,
an independent folder for each project scenario. This makes it easy to move
project scenario files from one computer to another on the same network.
Simply copy and paste the folder in Windows Explorer.
You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project and project
scenario folders. Doing so creates an identical set of folders and files in the
new location.
See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX56XX, for
information on adding project directories and setting a new default project
directory.
Preferences
The settings in Preferences let you specify how Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
will act each time it is used.
To access Preferences:
1 On the Tools menu, click Options; then on the sub-menu that appears,
click Preferences.

On the main menu, click Tools | Options | Preferences.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Preference dialog box.
2 Click To do this
OK Save changes and close the Preferences.
Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.
Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking Apply and then
immediately clicking Cancel would have the same effect as clicking OK.)
General
In the General tab view, you can select the following:
Prompts - Select which prompts appear.
Close Project – prompt to save any changes when closing project.
Overwrite Project – prompt to confirm overwriting project that has the
same name as the one being created.
Delete Project – prompt to confirm deletion of project.
Delete Area – prompt to confirm deletion of area.
Delete Component – prompt to confirm deletion of component.

Cancel Component Edit – prompt to save changes when you click Cancel
after editing a Component Specifications form.
Delete Library – prompt to confirm deletion of a specifications library.
Delete Report Group – prompt to confirm deletion of a report group.
 Evaluation
Display results after evaluation - mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator open a detailed results report after you run an evaluation.
Scan for Errors before evaluation – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator scan for errors before evaluation.
 Item Report
Select which type of report you wish to display when generating an Item
Report.
HTML Item Report – mark to display the HTML Item Report, like the one
shown on page XX624XX, in the Main Window.
Capital Cost Report – mark to display the Capital Cost Report in Icarus
Editor.
Reporter Report – mark to display the Single Component Summary,
exported from Aspen Icarus Reporter, in the Main Window.
 Display
Save Window States – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator save the
position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the Palette, and the Properties
Window, as well as selected columns on the List view. Unmark to have Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator open with the default interface arrangement (shown on
page XX28XX).
Display Options Choice Dialog on Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Startup – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ask you at startup
whether to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator environment.
Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator – mark to display
report groups. For more information on report groups, see page XX305XX.
Forms
The Forms tab view provides options related to Component Specification and
Installation Bulk forms.
Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator display all items on the Installation Bulk specification forms for Pipe
and Instrumentation. If you unmark the checkbox, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator lets you select, when opening the form, the items to include.
Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to Main Component
Form – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator return you to the main
Component Specifications form when you click OK at an Installation Bulks
form. Otherwise, clicking OK simply closes the Component specifications.
Save Component When Switching to Different Installation Bulk or
Main Component Form – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator save

the Component specifications when you switch to a different form on the
Component’s Options menu.
Spreadsheet Views
The Spreadsheet Views tab lets you customize individual spreadsheet
views.
Use the Spreadsheet View field to specify the spreadsheet view you want to
customize.
When you have selected the spreadsheet view you want to customize, use the
Units of Measure group to specify what units of measure to use. You can
select both.
Use the Fields group to specify which fields will be visible on the spreadsheet
view you selected.
To make fields visible:
 Move the field(s) from the Available to the Visible pane.
To hide fields:
 Move the field(s) from the Visible to the Available pane.
Backup
The Backup/Recovery tab lets you select when backups are to be
performed. You can select both options.
Automatic Task Backup – select this check box to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator perform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a project
evaluation.
Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) – select this check box to have
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator perform a backup at a specified interval. Specify
the interval in the box provided.
Timed Recovery (Interval, in minutes) - select this check box to have
Aspen Economic Evaluation write a recoverable file at the specified interval.
Specify the interval in the box provided. If an Economic Evaluation application
crashes, when you open the Aspen Economic Evaluation application that
crashed, you are prompted to recover your file and save it with a new name.
Note: After a project has crashed and been recovered (under the new name),
the original project that crashed should be deleted as it may no longer be in a
stable state.
After deleting the crashed project, you can rename the recovered project to
the previous name if you want.
You can also select to either have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator overwrite the
project backups or create unique backups.
Overwrite Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
overwrite the previous backup every time the program performs a backup.
Unique Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
retain previous backups by creating a unique backup each time. Depending

on the frequency of backups (see task and timed backup options above),
selecting Unique Project Backups could result in large amounts of disk space
being consumed by backups.
Process
The Process tab view provides options for importing from an external
project.
Import Connected Streams – mark to include connected streams when
importing an external project.
Import Installation Bulks – mark to include installation bulks when
importing an external project.
The Process tab view also provides options for unsupported simulator models
and custom models.
Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item – mark to have Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator map, by default, unsupported simulator models to
quoted cost items.
“Unsupported Models” refer to models not listed in the Project Component
Map Specifications dialog box shown on page XX193XX. Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator does not recognize them and, therefore, cannot map them to Icarus
project components. If this option is left unmarked, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator will not map unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation
could appear disconnected in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD).
Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as place markers to
ensure that unit operations remain connected in the PFD.
Note: Marking this option will not affect the mapping of supported simulator
models. If a simulator model is listed in the Project Component Map
Specification dialog box, then the specified mapping will be used. Further, if
a simulator model is listed and has no default mapping (that is, Current Map
List section is blank), then it is assumed that the user does not want to map
such simulator models to any Icarus project components.
For example, if this option is marked, a USER unit operation in Aspen Plus can
be mapped to a quoted cost item if this option is marked. This ensures that
the unit operation remains connected in the PFD.
Activate Custom Model – mark to activate the Custom Model tool explained
on pages XX335XX through XX341XX.
Locations
In the Locations tab view, you can select:
 Project Directories
Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default project directory.
See “Adding Project Directories” on page XX59XX for instructions.
 Other Location Specifications

To specify the location of various specification files and data:
1 Click an item in the list to display its description and location.
2 Click Browse to select a new location.
Notes:
 In some cases the description warns against changing the location.
 Make sure to create the IP and MET subfolder structure when changing
the source locations for library files that are units dependent (for example,
Basis for Capital Cost, EML, UML, Custom Piping Specs, and so on).
Logging
The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be used
to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.

Unit Costs

Start Page
Use the Start Page tab view to customize the News feed tab name and the
Start Page news channel on the Start page. You can also specify to have the
page show on startup and the interval at which to download content.
Adding Project Directories
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comes set up with two project directories:
...AspenTechEconomic Evaluation V8.0DataMy Econ_Project
Projects
...AspenTechEconomic Evaluation
V8.0DataArchives_Econ_Project
These directories, by default, are the sole choices of project directory when
opening or saving a new project, as well as the only directories displayed on
the Palette’s Projects view.
On the Locations tab, however, you can enter alternate project directories,
which will then appear on the Palette’s Projects view and as choices when
opening and saving projects. You can also select an alternate project directory
as the default.

To add a project directory:
1 Click Add.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2 Click the folder you want to add as an alternate directory; then click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the directory to the Alternate Project
Directories list.

3 To set an alternate project directory as the default, click it; then click Set
Default.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a prompt asking you to confirm the
change. Click Yes to set the new default.
If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project directories,
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays another prompt asking if you wish to
add it to the list.
Note: Adding the old default directory to the alternate project directory list
lets you easily revert to it.
3 Click Yes or No.
4 Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.
Before the added project directory appears on the Create New Project
dialog box and elsewhere, you must either:
 Restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
-or-
 Right-click on the current project in the Palette and click refresh on the
pop-up menu.
Changing Location Specifications
You can modify the location specification of any of the specification files.
For example, to change the location of the Standard basis file:
1 Click StandardBasisRefDir.
2 Use the Browse button below to select another location.
3 After each change, click Apply to save your change.
Note: If you are using more than one Icarus tool, remember to repeat the
above steps for other systems (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator, and so on.).

Caution: Before performing the steps mentioned above, copy the system
defaults (library folder structure) to the “myStd_Basis_[System]” folder.
System Defaults:
Economic Evaluation V8.0DataStdBasis_Aspen Capital Cost
EstimatorIpDefault.d0*
Economic Evaluation V8.0DataStdBasis_Aspen Capital Cost
EstimatorMetDefault.d0*
Should Resemble:
CoABCmyStdBasis_Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerIpDefault.d0*
CoABCmyStdBasis_Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerMetDefault.d0*
Logging
The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be used
to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.
Schedule
In the Schedule tab view, you can specify your Primavera user name.
The Schedule tab view also contains the Schedule Administrator Tool for
registering users and access rights in cases where Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator and the scheduling program run on a network. This tool should only
be used by a network administrator.
Importing and Exporting
Spreadsheets
The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature lets you:
 export Economic Evaluation project data to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
 import project data from MS Excel spreadsheet into Economic Evaluation
project.
This feature is compatible with MS Office 2007 and 2010.
The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature is available for:
 process equipment, plant bulks and installation bulk options in Economic
Evaluation
 basic Area specifications (Parent Report Group, Area title, Area type, Area
dimensions)
Accessing the Spreadsheet Import/Export
Feature
To access the Spreadsheet Import/Export feature:
 On the ACCE GUI, click File | Spreadsheet Import/Export.

This launches the Spreadsheet Import/Export dialog box.
Note: The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature is accessible only when a
project is open. This ensures units of measure customizations and currencies
for a project will be available in the spreadsheet.
Exporting Spreadsheets
You can use the Export Spreadsheet feature to:
 Create empty worksheets for each of the selected type of items from the
tree.
 Create a spreadsheet using data for existing project components in the
project.

To create empty worksheets for each of the selected type of items
from the tree:
1 On the ACCE GUI, click File | Spreadsheet Import/Export.
2 If it is not already selected, click Export Spreadsheet.
3 In the File field, specify a name and location for the spreadsheet.
4 On the Export Spreadsheet dialog box, in the Options box, click Create
empty spreadsheet.
5 If you want to have ACCE remember your component type selections for
the project, select the Remember component type selections check
box.
6 Select the components, plant bulks, installation bulks, and quoted
equipment to be included in the spreadsheet.
7 Click Create.
Note: If the Creation operation is successful, a confirmation message
appears. If there are any errors or exceptions, you are taken to the Export
Spreadsheet dialog box.
8 Click Exit to exit the Export Spreadsheet dialog box.
Note: You can export all components in the system, even components that
are not present in the project. For example, if you specified all ANSI Pumps in
a project and then decide you want to change them to API 610 pumps, you
can export the desired components with data along with components that
may not exist in the project; then delete the ANSI pumps in the spreadsheet
and add the API Pumps.
To export only the components that are in the project, use the export by area
feature (and select all areas if you want every component) which will export
only the contained components.
To export all components in the system:
4 On the Export Spreadsheet dialog box in the Options box, click Export
data from project.
5 In the Select box, click Components by Type.
6 Select the All Items check box.
7 Click Create.
8 After the spreadsheet has been successfully exported, click Exit to exit
the Import/Export feature.
To create a spreadsheet using data for existing project components in
the project:

4 On the Export Spreadsheet dialog box in the Options box, click Export
data from project.
Notes: Project data is exported only for the user selected types. For
example, if you select Process equipment | Pumps | Centrifugal | DCP
API 610, data for all pumps of the type DCP API 610 will be exported.
Installation bulks are exported only for those project components which have
a user tag number specified.
Project components that have bulks associated to them without user tag
numbers are flagged in error/warning messages.
5 If you want to have ACCE remember your component type selections for
the project, select the Remember component type selections check
box.
Note: When you click Export data from project data can be exported for:
 Selected component models
 Selected project areas. When data is exported for selected project
areas, installation bulks are also be exported for the components in
the areas.
 All components in the system.
This option is disabled when Create empty spreadsheets is selected.
6 In the Select box, select whether to export data for selected component
models or selected project areas.
7 Select the components, plant bulks, installation bulks, and quoted
equipment to be included in the spreadsheet.
Note: If you want to export all components in the system, including
components which may not be in your project, select the All Items check
box.
8 Click Create.
9 Click Exit to exit the Export Spreadsheet dialog box.
Note: If the Creation operation is successful, a confirmation message
appears. If there are any errors or exceptions, you are taken to the
Errors/Exceptions dialog box.
General Notes:
The spreadsheet will contain information about:
 Minimum/maximum/default values of input fields.
 Explanatory notes about input fields.
Input fields with min/max values will automatically have data validation in the
spreadsheet to flag incorrect input values.
Importing Spreadsheets
To import a spreadsheet:
1 On the main menu, click File | Spreadsheet Import/Export.
The Spreadsheet Import/Export dialog box appears.
2 On the Spreadsheet Import/Export dialog box, click the Import
Spreadsheet tab.

The Import Spreadsheet dialog box appears.
3 On the Import Spreadsheet dialog box, use the Browse button to
locate the spreadsheet you want to import.
4 Select the spreadsheet.
5 Click Import.
6 Click Exit to exit the Import Spreadsheet dialog box.
Note: Any errors will be displayed so you can repair them in ACCE or in the
spreadsheet.
Important: If you have a spreadsheet open, save it before click Import.
Data Pre-Check Before Spreadsheet is Imported
 Min./Max. limits are validated by data validation added to the Excel sheet
to prevent entering data outside the limits.
 Program pre-checks that user tag numbers in the worksheets are unique
to ensure correct association of installation bulks with project.
 Program pre-checks that number of pipe lines and loops for any
equipment does not exceed the system limits in ACCE.
 Errors are flagged and displayed so that you can correct them in the ACCE
project or the spreadsheet.
 Program validates that every area specified for components has the area
specified in the Area Worksheet.
 Program checks for the Project/Scenario from which the spreadsheet was
created and the Project/Scenario in which the spreadsheet is being
imported. If these are different from each other, a warning dialog pops up
to remind you that the project currencies and unit of measure may differ
and that ACCE does no conversions during the import. At this point, you
have the option to proceed with the import or cancel.
Spreadsheet Structure
 One worksheet for each type of project component (process equipment,
plant bulk, quoted cost item)
 One worksheet for each of the installation bulk options (items on the
Options drop-down)
 One worksheet for area specs (area name, report group, area type,
dimensions)
 Worksheets are created only for the items you choose in the tree-view of
the spreadsheet import/export dialog
 One Contents worksheet at the beginning to aid navigation to all the
worksheets. It contains hyperlinks to other worksheets.

Example of a AREAS worksheet:
Example of a component worksheet:
Features Common to All Worksheets
The following features are common to all Worksheets.
 One row defines a single item

 Input fields are in columns (for example, there is one column for Design
Pressure)
 Input field columns show min/max/default values and descriptive notes
for that field
 Input fields with drop-down lists in the GUI will have corresponding drop-
down list in the spreadsheet
 There is an Action column to indicate the “action” for each row of input.
The Action options for each row are:
This option does this
New creates a new item
Change If an input field for a component in the ACCE project has a value
and you use the CHANGE action to modify that value, the value is
updated. Also, if an input field for a component in the ACCE project
is blank and you assign a value in the spreadsheet, the value is
added.
If an input field has a value which you delete (that is, the cell is
blank), the value in the input field for the component in the ACCE
project is deleted.
Note: Not available on the AREAS worksheet.
Delete deletes an existing component
Note: Not available on the AREAS worksheet.
Ignore skips the item during read
Similar to the Volumetric model flag for pipe item details.
Notes:
The CHANGE and DELETE actions in the spreadsheet are designed to work
only when the data for the components existing in the project has been
exported to the spreadsheet first.
For example:
 You create components in an ACCE project from a spreadsheet,
starting with a blank spreadsheet and using NEW actions.
 If you need to perform CHANGE or DELETE actions on any of these
items, you must re-export the data from the project.
Similar to the ACCE input forms, in the Spreadsheets:
 Required fields are highlighted with red borders .
 Alternate required fields are highlighted with green/yellow borders.
Caution: The spreadsheet does not validate input fields with drop-down
lists. For example, you could type anything in the cell that contains the drop-
down list (or copy and paste in the wrong text) and if the action is set to
Change or New, the drop-down field in the ACCE GUI would be updated to
the value you specified value that might not be a valid choice on the drop-
down.

Caution: The spreadsheet application has a tree view in which you can select
process equipment types or plant bulk types for which they want
spreadsheets to be generated. In this tree view there is an option to select
Installation bulks. This option causes all the spreadsheets for the different
installation bulk options to be created. However, this option cannot be
selected on its own. It has to be accompanied by some equipment and/or
plant bulk selections. If you select this option only and click Create, an error
dialog is generated.
Features for Specific Worksheets
Project components (process equipment and plant bulks) worksheets:
 There is a column to indicate the parent area for the project equipment.
Installation bulk options worksheets:
 Each row contains one installation bulk item associated with a project
component. For example, on the Pipe – Item details worksheet, each
row of input contains one piping line associated with a project component.
 There is a User Tag column to indicate the project component associated
with the installation bulk.
Notes:
 The user tag number input is mandatory and must match user tag of a
project component that is unique
 User tag number uniqueness required only for spreadsheet
import/export. It is not enforced within the ACCE GUI.
Instructions for Working with Spreadsheets
To access the contents of the spreadsheet:
 Click the Contents worksheet or click Contents at the bottom of any
worksheet.
To add a new line of input:
 Insert a row above the LAST ROW.
To remove a line of input from the spreadsheet:
 Delete the input row completely.
On AREAS and installation bulks sheets:
To add new areas:
1 Insert a row above the LAST ROW.
2 Set the ACTION field for the new row to NEW.
3 Enter the area name and parent report group.
4 Enter other area data.

On Components sheets:
 Do not delete rows 1–10 or the LAST ROW.
 Do not delete columns A-F.
To add new items:
1 Insert a row above the LAST ROW.
2 Set the ACTION field for the new row to NEW.
3 Enter item description and parent area.
4 Enter other input data for the new item.
To modify the input fields to match your preferences:
 Delete, hide, or move whole columns past column F.
Fixing Spreadsheet Errors
If there are errors or exceptions on Import or Export, the Errors/Exceptions
dialog box appears, showing the errors and exceptions. Use this dialog box to
fix the errors; then run the Import or Export operation again.
If you have errors when exporting a spreadsheet, repair the errors in the
ACCE GUI.
If you have errors when importing a spreadsheet, repair the errors in the
spreadsheet.
Caution: The spreadsheet application has a tree view in which you can select
process equipment types or plant bulk types for which they want
spreadsheets to be generated. In this tree view there is an option to select
Installation bulks. This option causes all the spreadsheets for the different
installation bulk options to be created. However, this option cannot be
selected on its own. It has to be accompanied by some equipment and/or
plant bulk selections. If you select this option only and click Create, an error
dialog is generated.
Using Custom User Attributes with
Spreadsheet Data Exporting
Support for Custom User Attributes is the same as in ACCE and will appear in
the worksheets. However, any defined scroll lists for custom user attributes
will not appear in the exported worksheets.
When using custom user attributes as defined in UserAttributesCust.xls,
please note the following restrictions:
 Avoid the use of “special” characters (for example, ‘/’, ‘,’, ‘$’, ‘#’, etc.)
when defining the variable names in UserAttributesCust.xls (Column D
in the screenshot below). The Excel API generates an exception if such
characters are included which will prevent data from being exported into
the Excel Spreadsheet. Note: These characters can be included in the
Display Names (Column E below).

 Only numbers can be defined in the min, max columns (columns M and N
below) in UserAttributesCust.xls. Only numbers are permitted since
data validation is made on these values. Including letters in these fields
will prevent data from being exported into the Excel Spreadsheet.
 Notes can be added in the Long Description (Column P below) in
UserAttributesCust.xls. These will appear in the properties window in
the ACCE UI as well as in Excel after exporting the spreadsheet with data
(as a comment to the attribute name).
 It is recommended that Slot Type definitions (Column G below) and
Default (Column J) be consistent. Example: If the slot type is defined as
integer, it is recommended to define any defaults as integer values (not
alpha numeric values).

2 Defining the Project Basis 73
2 Defining the Project Basis
The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall project
scenario. These specifications influence the design and cost estimate by
defining system defaults and environmental variables.
Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis view in
Project Explorer.
Notes:
 A red arrow on an icon indicates that you can right click on the item to
access a pop-up menu.
 In a pipeline project, specifications marked with a double asterisk (**) do
NOT apply.

74 2 Defining the Project Basis
This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as well as
how to customize specification libraries.
Project Properties
Project Properties are initially specified when creating a new project.
To access project properties:
 In the main Project Basis folder, right-click Project Properties; then
click Edit.

You cannot edit Project Name, Scenario Name, or Units of Measure; they
can only be specified when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
Project Description: The description entered here appears as the Project
Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet and as the Brief Description
on the Executive Summary spreadsheet. All scenarios under the project share
the project description. The description can be up to 500 characters in length
and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation.
Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after the Title Page
of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters
in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation.
Remarks might include, for example, the intended purpose of the estimate,
executive summary of results, or an explanation of assumptions.
General Project Data
General Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.
To access General Project Data:
1 Right-click General Project Data in the main Project Basis folder.
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.
You cannot edit Units of Measure, Country Base, Currency Symbol or
Currency Conversion Rate; these can only be specified when creating a
new project. You can, however, change the Currency Conversion Rate for
specific items within the project.
You can edit the following:
Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen Icarus
Reporter and Icarus Editor, and also appears as the Scenario Description on
the Project Summary spreadsheet.
Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Intended to
indicate the purpose of specifications (for example, budget).
Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by Aspen Icarus
Reporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at the top of the
Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by Aspen Icarus Reporter also
include an Estimate Date; however, the Estimate Date shown in Aspen Icarus
Reporter is the date on which the project evaluation was run.
Basis for Capital Costs
The Basis for Capital Costs folder includes:
 Units of measure customization.
 General mechanical design rules for equipment, piping, civil, steel,
instrumentation, electrical, insulation, and paint.

 Contingency and miscellaneous project costs.
 Escalation indices for material and labor costs.
 Engineering workforce specifications by phase, discipline, and task.
 Construction workforce wage rates and productivities, for both the overall
project and by craft and workweek definition.
 Code of Account (COA) re-definitions, additions and allocations.
 Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA.
 Equipment rental items, durations, and rates.
Input Units of Measure Customization
Input Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units of measure
that appear on specification forms.
Input Units of Measure Customization can only be accessed from outside of
the project in the Palette’s Libraries view or when creating a new project. It
appears in read-only form in the Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.
To customize input units of measure:
1 With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs folder in the
Palette’s Libraries view. Expand the appropriate units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. Right-click on the specifications file that
will contain the customized units of measure; then click Modify.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Basis for Capital Costs library in
Project Explorer.

2 In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click Input; then,
on the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
3 If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, click Velocity and Flow Rate and then click Modify.
4 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter CM/H as the new unit
name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in
the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
5 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.
6 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Electrical Specs
Notes:
The default cable type for 34.5kV high voltage cables is changed to
ARMOR type for US/ME basis.
 The default cable type for HV, MV, LV cables is generally W-C type for a
US/ME basis project.
 34.5/33 kV HV cables cannot be W-C type since the cable diameter is
more than 6” and the maximum conduit size is limited to 6”.
 So, if you change the high voltage to 34.5/33 kV and select W-C as the
cable type, ACCE generates a warning message saying “34.5/33 KV CABLE
CANNOT BE W-C TYPE, ARMOR TYPE WILL BE USED” and the cable type is
changed to ARMOR type.
Cable drop support are neglected for 34.5/33 kV W-NC and M-NC
cables.
 Cable drop supports can either be conduit type or tray type depending
upon your selections. But when the high voltage is selected as 34.5/33kV
the engine automatically omits the cable drop supports since it is
unnecessary to design trays/conduits for cable drops for 34.5/33 kV HV
cables.
Change in calculations for the control cable lengths and number of
terminations at the electrical installation bulk level for equipments.
 Beginning with V7.3.2, the control cable lengths and number of
terminations calculations have been changed at the electrical installation
bulk level.
 Generally there are four fields which govern the control cable lengths and
their terminations.
i. Distance to substation
ii. Number of push buttons
iii. Control cable length
iv. Control cable no. of conductors

 The best practice is to fill out all the fields such as no. of push buttons,
Control cable length and control cable no. of conductors.
Examples:
Case 1: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘2’ and leaves
everything blank. Then the number of control conductors would be 2*4 = 8
conductors and the number of terminations would be 8*2 = 16 terminations.
The control cable run length would be:
‘Distance to substation field’ specified here or if left blank the
‘Distance between MCC and equipment’ set at the area level electrical
specifications whose default is ’25 feet’.
+
‘Distance between MCC and CC’ set in the process control tree whose
default is ‘100 feet’
So, the control cable run length will be 100+25 =125 feet.
Hence, the total control cable length will be (125+10)*8 = 1080 feet.
Case 2: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘3’ and specifies
the ‘control cable run length’ also as ‘100 feet’. Then the no. of conductors
would be 3*4= 12. The number of terminations would be 12*2 = 24
terminations. So, the total cable length will be (100+10)*12 = 1320 feet.
Case 3: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘4’ and also
specifies the ‘control cable no. of conductors’ as ‘5’. Then the no. of

terminations would be 5*2*4= 40 terminations and the total control cable
length would be ((100+25) + 10)*5*4 = 2700 feet.
Note: The control cable wire lengths change with the control cable wire
type selection made by the user. For example, Multi core cable lengths for
the above Case: 3 would be 5C, 540 feet and single core cable lengths would
be 1C, 2700 feet.
Output (Reports) Units of Measure
Customization
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units
of measure that appear on Capital Costs and other reports.
To customize output units of measure:
1 Right-click Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization in the
Basis for Capital Costs folder in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, and
then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Output Units of Measure dialog box appears.
2 You can change the basis for all output units of measure by selecting a
different basis in the Unit of Measure Basis section; however, note that
this voids all previous customizations.
To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow rate units, select
the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each unit you wish to change, enter
the new unit name and the conversion factor (between the old and new
units).

Note: In this example, centimeters per hour (CM/H) replaces meters per hour
(M/H). A conversion factor of 100 has been entered because 100 CM/H = 1
M/H.
For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then, enter the
conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this
example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100
CM/H = 1 M/H.
3 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.
When finished modifying output units of measure, click Close.
Design Basis
Design Basis defines the general mechanical design rules for the entire
project. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses built in, industry-standard design
procedures for the preparation of mechanical designs. The standards used
include ASME (American Standards), BS5500 (British Standards), JIS
(Japanese Standards), DIN (German Standards), or EN 13445 (European
Standards).

Design Basis influences the way Aspen Capital Cost Estimator evaluates all
components of the facility (for example, equipment and bulk items —
materials, manpower and indirects) and lets you define custom pipe
specifications and custom insulation specs.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses default values if Design Basis information
is not specified. The default values depend upon the selected country base.
You can make one set of Design Basis selections and then override those
selections for a particular area. See “Defining Area Specifications” on
page XX308XX for instructions.
Design Basis specifications are divided into the following categories:
 Equipment Specs
Equipment design specifications, including design code for pressure
vessels, size limits for shop fab equipment, maximum diameter of vessels
fabricated using pipe, maximum horizontal deflection of vessels as a
percentage of vessel height, when to apply vessel stress relief (always,
never, or when required by code), whether to use welded or seamless
tubes for heat exchangers and reboilers, percent of the rotating
equipment cost for spare parts, and which equipment to use for heavy
lifting (gin poles or cranes).
 Piping Specs
General: Design specifications for all piping.
You can change the length of pipe per fitting going to Remote Shop.
To do this:
1 In the project basis, go to Basis for Capital Costs | Design Basis |
Piping Specs | General.
2 Right-click General; then click Edit.

The General Piping Specs dialog box appears.
3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the Length/fitting to
remote shop field, enter the length of pipe to be procured in the
remote shop. Default is 10 ft (3 m). Minimum is 4 ft (1.5) and
Maximum is 40 ft (12 m).
When entering the length of pipe to be procured in the remote shop:
Assume:
 Length per fitting to remote shop = L_fit
 Total length of pipe = L_total
 Number of fittings = N (including flanges generated for valves)
Then,
Length of pipe sent to remote shop = N*L_fit
IF (L_total - N*L_fit) >= L_fit

IF (L_total - N*L_fit) < L_fit, the length of pipe procured in remote shop
= L_total
Note: Pipe is procured and fabricated in remote shop when it meets the
following criteria:
 Pipe diameter is within remote shop range
 Pipe fabrication type is not FIELD
 IF fabrication type is RMT, then there are fittings specified for the
pipe to be sent to remote shop
You can specify to send pipe supports to Remote Shop.
To do this:

3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the Pipe supports to
remote shop field, enter the percent of pipe supports to be sent to
remote shop. Default is 0.
Notes: If the pipe is being sent to remote shop (pipe diameter is within
remote shop range, pipe fabrication type is not FIELD, if fabrication type is
RMT), the portion of the total number of pre-fab pipe supports you specify
will be procured in remote shop.
 The rest of the pre-fab pipe supports will be procured in the field.
 The man-hours to erect all pipe supports will be booked in the field as
well.
These specifications apply to:
 Installation bulk pipe associated with project components.
 Plant bulk pipe
 Utility piping and utility stations
 Yard pipe

The same code of account (366) is used for pipe supports procured in remote
shop or field.
The subtype 951 is specified for pipe supports procured in remote shop. You
can use this subtype to create code of account exception and book the
remote-shop pipe supports to a new user-defined code of account. You can
then index the code of account as needed.
You can specify to have welded valves installed in the Remote Shop.
To do this:
3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the Welded valves in
remote shop field, select Y. Default is N.

This applies only to:
 pipe less than 2 inch (50 mm) NPS with SW (socket-welded)
connection type
 pipe with 2 inch (50 mm) or more NPS and WW (Weld pipe/weld
valves) connection type
Notes: When you set the Welded valves in remote shop field to Y and
when the pipe diameter is in the remote shop pipe diameter range:
 non-flanged valves are counted as fittings to determine the length of
pipe that is sent to remote shop.
 The number of welds in remote shop is increased to account for
welding of the valves in the pipe spool. The number of field welds is
decreased appropriately.
 Valve erection man-hours are also accounted in the remote shop; line
item for valve erection in the field are not generated.
Note: For SC, SB, VC, VS and PF connection types, even when the pipe
diameter is in remote shop diameter range, the pipe is fabricated in the field.
So these connection types are not affected by the Welded valves in remote
shop field.
For DIN pipe, you can specify the pipe thickness method. You can specify to
allow pressure class (PN) input on pipe schedule fields OR to have pipe
thickness calculated per DIN EN 10220 and EN ISO 1127 standards.
To specify which DIN pipe thickness method to use:

3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the DIN pipe thickness
option, specify PN or DIN EN. Default is DIN EN.
If you specify PN:
 You can specify PN numbers in the schedule field for DIN pipe. PN
numbers will be output in detailed bulks for pipe and fittings.
If you specify DIN EN:
 PN numbers are not allowed on the schedule field for DIN pipe. Instead
thicknesses are calculated according to the appropriate DIN EN standards
mentioned below.
 If PN numbers are input on the schedule fields for DIN pipe warnings are
generated and the PN number input is ignored.
 The method for calculating wall thickness is as follows:

 The dimensional standards that govern the pipe thickness in DIN
piping are:
o DIN EN 10220 for seamless and welded carbon steel pipe. (This
replaces earlier DIN 2448 and DIN 2458 standards for seamless
and welded CS pipe respectively).
o EN ISO 1127 for stainless steel pipe. (This replaces earlier DIN
2462 and DIN 2463 standards for seamless and welded SS pipe
respectively)
 For DIN pipe, thickness is calculated based on material properties, design
temperature and pressure and corrosion allowance. Then the next higher
standard thickness, based on the dimensional standards mentioned above,
is selected and reported. Pipe weight is calculated per the equations given
in the dimensional standards mentioned above.
 The standard thickness determined for pipe is also used for fittings such
as elbows, tees and reducers, and so on.
 In the detailed bulk section of the output report, thicknesses are output
instead of PN numbers for pipe and fittings.
 You can enter pressure classes in the Flange class input for DIN pipe.
These classes are used for flanges, valves and gaskets. Note: In the cost
engine, for DIN piping flange classes are not calculated based on p/t
rating tables in DIN standards (now replaced by EN 1092-1: 2007). The
rating is calculated based on ASME B16.5 and then mapped to a PN
number as follows:
Flange Class Equivalent PN
125 10
150 10
250 25
300 25
600 40
800 63
900 63
1500 100
2500 160
3000 250
You can select pipe bends in lieu of elbows and fabricated branch connections
in lieu of tees at the general and pipe spec level.
To select pipe bends in lieu of elbows:
 On the Design Basis | Piping Specs | General dialog box, use the
Bend for elbow field.
The options are B (Bend) and E (Elbow). Elbow is the default.
To select fabricated branch connections in lieu of tees:
 On the Design Basis | Piping Specs | General dialog box, use the
Branch for tee field.
The options are B (Branch) and T (Tee). Tee is the default.

Notes:
 The selection in this form applies to all the installation bulk lines
specified for that component.
 You can override these specifications by specific input for these fields
on the individual plant bulk pipe.
Material: Design specifications for specific piping material. The
information entered here lets you redefine default specifications for any
system material. For example, if you define a material and later select
that material when defining installation piping for a component, your
material specifications are used instead of the system default
specifications.
Custom: Custom piping specifications. These specifications may consist of
your company’s standard piping specifications or simply the most
commonly used specifications for pipe on the current project. You can
have up to 999 custom piping specs.
To use custom piping, you have to first select a piping spec file to open.
To do so:
1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click Select on
the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides two custom pipe specs files to help
you get started:
 CARBONST.DAT
 DEFAULT.DAT
2 Click the file you want; then click OK.
To edit your custom pipe spec file:
1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click edit on the
pop-up menu.

The External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box appears.
The External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box has three options, shown
below:
o Remarks
o Units of Measure
o Specifications
Remarks dialog box

Units of Measure dialog box

Specifications dialog box
2 On the External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box, click the dialog box
you want to modify; then click Modify.
3 When you have finished modifying your custom piping spec, on the
External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box, click Close.
(Refer to the flowcharts in Icarus Reference, Chapter 18, for information
on developing various aspects of piping.)

Note: The Make minimum schedule mandatory field is N as default.
When this field is set to Y, the inputs in the Minimum schedule fields for
each diameter range (small, medium, large) are treated as mandatory
schedules for that diameter range. Any pipe with a custom spec in which the
Make minimum schedule mandatory field is set to Y always has the
schedule specified in the minimum schedule input.
When this field is set to Y and the calculated schedule is larger than the input
on minimum schedule, you will get a warning message but the user input on
the minimum schedule will still be used as the mandatory schedule.
This option has no effect when DIN piping is selected in the Piping design
option field in Design basis | piping | general specs.
Click New on the Customer Piping Specs Manager to add a custom pipe
specification. You can have a maximum of 100 custom piping specs per
project and 600 in one file.
After creating a custom piping spec, you must export it to the library,
giving it your new name.
To export the file to the library:
1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click Export to
Library on the pop-up menu.
The Duplicate Custom Piping Specs file based on PIPESPEC dialog
box appears.
2 In the File Name field, type a file name for this piping spec. You can
also add a description of the piping spec in the File Description field.
3 Click OK.
A dialog box appears confirming that you have successfully added your
newly-created piping spec to the library.
 Civil/Steel Specs
Civil and Steel design specifications, including wind data, seismic data,
comprehensive strength, concrete ready-mix costs, concrete overpour
percentage, rebar type and cost, seal slab thickness, number of formwork
reuses, concrete type (standard, higher grade, or chemical-resistant),

structure analysis type, unit cost and percent of purchased backfill when
used in place of excavated soil, excavation slope ratio, steel finish type
(painted or galvanized), grating and grating type, and steel galvanizing
cost per weight unit.
 Instrumentation Specs
Instrumentation design specifications, including instrumentation type
(electronic or pneumatic) and specifications for instrument transmission
and thermocouple transmission: control valve type, control valve
positioner, control valve position switch, temperature element type, flow
element type, instrument transmitter type, distance from component to
junction box, whether to exclude air regulators if low pressure air is
available, control valve center type (analog, digital, or none), and whether
to have a conventional 4-20 mA wired system or a digital Fieldbus system.
Unlike a 4-20 mA system in which each instrument in the field requires its
own set of wires to run to the local junction box and back to the control
center, a Fieldbus system allows multiple instruments to share one set of
cables. The Fieldbus systems are designed based on the distances
involved (cable length), number of field instruments, instrument type, and
power requirements.
If you select to use a Fieldbus system, also select, in the Connection
Type box, the type of bricks and cable termination. Select “SC” for spring
clamp connections. Select “ST” for screw terminal bricks and terminations.
Both “SC” and “ST” use standard instrument cable. Select “MP” for a
system designed with cable that is pre-cut and molded with pluggable
terminations (and bricks with pluggable terminals). “MP” does not require
installation hours to connect “pig-tail” terminations – the cables snap onto
the bricks. An “MP” implementation requires the purchase of one
pluggable device gland per instrument.
In an explosion-proof area, the Fieldbus system will consist of bricks and
power supply units that are rated for intrinsically safe applications (I.S.-
rated non-pluggable components by Hawke International). You can also, if
using a Fieldbus system, select to include Fieldbus short-circuit
protection for each “spur” in the Fieldbus segments. For 3-drop bricks, the
short-circuit protection units are purchased separately; for all bricks of
larger size, short-circuit protection is incorporated within the brick itself (if
selected).
For the Fieldbus system, you can also specify:
 Whether the fieldbus has short circuit protection (area or project
level)
 The percent of active bricks (area level only)
 Whether the fieldbus has a backup power supply (area or project
level)
You can override these project-level instrumentation specs for a particular
area when defining an area (see page XX308XX). For example, you can select
to use a Fieldbus system in the Design Basis, but then make an exception
for one area by selecting the conventional 4-20 mA wired system in the
area’s instrumentation specs.

Fieldbus short-circuit protection can be defined at the project-level or the
area-level.
Notes:
 The percent of active bricks can be specified at the area level only.
 When you specify a percent active brick value for the MP connection
type, two cost lines are generated:
o Bricks with short circuit protection
o Bricks without short circuit protection.
 For molded pluggable connection types with short circuit
protection specified as Y, the brick as a whole has short circuit
protection capability.
 For Spring clamp/screw terminal connection types with short
circuit protection specified as Y, the short circuit protection
capability is in the connection between the field devices and the bricks.
When you specify a percent active brick value for these two
connection types, the following cost lines are generated:
 Field bus screw terminal brick (for Screw terminal type)
or
 Field bus spring clamp brick (for Spring clamp type)
and
 Field bus short circuit protection (for Spring clamp/Screw
terminal type)
Effect of Selecting Backup Power Supply Required (General
Instrument Specs form):
 If you select that no backup power supply is required (the default),
the generated report appears as follows, with one Fieldbus item:
 If you select that backup power supply is required, the generated
report appears as follows, with two identical Fieldbus items:
 Electrical Specs
Electrical design specifications, including power supply frequency, class
and division or zone, whether to use 3- or 4-wire distribution system,
voltage levels, wire specifications at the different voltage levels, and cable
placement.
Communication and Alarm Systems include:
 Paging and General Alarm Systems (PAGA)
 Telephone Systems
 Closed Circuit TV Systems (CCTV)
 Area Networking (LAN)
 Radio Systems

 Access Control Systems
 Intrusion Detection Systems
 Meteorological Monitoring Systems
The estimate for each system include:
 Equipment Cabinets
 Cable Runs
 Raceways (Cable Trays)
 Junction Boxes if necessary
 Field Devices
 Monitors if necessary
 Mounting Poles if necessary
Notes:
 The minimum area for an area or a building for a Communication and
Alarm System is 400 square ft. (37 square meters).
 Telephone handsets are not included if a PAGA system requested.
 For detail specifications and defaults of Communication and Alarm
Systems, see Aspen Icarus Reference, Chapter 22, Electrical.
You can specify the Communication and Alarm Systems at the Project Level
and at the Area Level.
Project Level
Area Level

At each level, you can specify whether the estimation of that model would be
done at the project level or at the Area level or not.
At the project level and the area level, the defaults for the field “distance
equipment cabinet to field devices” are the” Distance from the equipment
cabinet to the JB” + “Distance from the JB to the field device.”
You can specify these fields at the project level Instrumentation
specifications. At the area level if left blank this field inherits the values from
the project level.
Note: When you select the high voltage as 34.5kV (US, ME) / 33kV (UK, EU,
JP) in the general electrical specifications, then all the high voltage motors in
the project should be powered at the corresponding medium voltage, because
all the motors in the system are at the most rated for 15kV (US, ME) / 11kV
(UK, EU, JP) only.
Public Address and General Alarm Defaults:
Description Defaults used by Aspentech at Project level and Area level
Public Address General Alarm
(PAGA)
PAGA - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per 150 total devices
PAGA - Raceway Length 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray)
PAGA - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
made in the LAST AREA electrical specs
PAGA - Cable Run per Item Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet
PAGA - Junction Boxes 1 each per 10 speakers and strobes combined.
PAGA - Outdoor speakers 1 per every 60 ft X 60 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor speakers 1 per every 40 ft X 40 ft per level
PAGA - Outdoor Strobes 1 per every 80 ft X 90 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor Strobes 1 per every 80 ft X 80 ft per level
PAGA - Outdoor Handsets 1 per every 120 ft X 120 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor Handsets 1 per every 20 ft X 20 ft per level. ill not be estimated if the area
has a Telephone system. (since it’s already estimated in the
Telephone system)
PAGA - Acoustic Hoods 1 per each outdoor handset
PAGA - Poles 1 pole per 2 outdoor speakers and 1 strobe
Closed Circuit Television

(CCTV)
CCTV - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per project
CCTV - Raceway Length 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray)
CCTV - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
CCTV - Cable Run per Item Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
CCTV - Junction Boxes 1 JB per camera
CCTV - Cameras 1 camera per area
CCTV - Monitors 1 monitor per 4 cameras (calculated at the LAST area from the
number of total monitors)
CCTV - Poles 1 pole per camera
Telephone System
Telephone - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per project
Telephone - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (8 cables per tray)
Telephone - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Telephone - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Telephone - Junction Boxes 0
Telephone - Outdoor Phones 1 per every 120 ft X 120 ft per level. Will not be estimated if the
area has a PAGA system. (since its already estimated in the
PAGA system)
Telephone - Indoor Phones 1 per every 20 ft X 20 ft per level.
Telephone - Video Conference 1 per administration building (ONLY 1 for the whole project).
Area Network System
(LAN/WAN)
Area Network - Equipment
Cabinets
1 cabinet per project
Area Network - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Area Network - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Area Network - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Area Network - Junction Boxes 0
Area Network - Switches 1 per building
Radio Systems
Radio Systems - Equipment
Cabinets

Radio Systems - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length and 1 cable per tray
Radio Systems - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Radio Systems - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Radio Systems - Plant Radios 6 radios per area
Radio Systems - Marine Radios 0
Radio Systems - Aviation Radios 0
Radio Systems - Antenna/Towers 1 per project
Access Control System
Access Control - Equipment
Cabinets
Access Control - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Access Control - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Access Control - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Access Control - Junction Boxes 1 each per card reader/door operator
Access Control - Workstations 2 per each area
Access Control - Card Readers 2 per building
Access Control - Controllers 1 per gate
Access Control - Door/Turnstile
Operators
2 per gate
Intrusion Detection
Intrusion Detection - Equipment
Cabinets
Intrusion Detection - Raceway
Length
None
Intrusion Detection - Raceway
Width
None
Intrusion Detection - Cable run per
item
Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet. Will be always
buried type.
Intrusion Detection - Junction
Boxes
1 per each pole
Intrusion Detection - Workstations 1 per 45 cameras
Intrusion Detection - Detectors 1 per 350 feet of fence
Intrusion Detection - Cameras 1 per 100 feet of fence
Intrusion Detection - Monitors 4 per work station
Intrusion Detection - Poles 1 per camera
Meteorological Monitoring
System
Meteorological Monitoring -
Equipment Cabinets

Raceway Length
90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Raceway Width
4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Meteorological Monitoring - Cable
Run per Station
Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Weather Station
1 station per project
Structured Cabling for Buildings
Fiber optic cable length 550 meter cable/building (24 fiber armor cable)
Fiber optic cable terminations 2 terminations/building
CAT5 cable length 350 meter cable/building (25 pair OSP CAT5 armor cable)
CAT5 cable terminations 2 terminations/building
Notes:
 Icarus estimates the above mentioned devices for each area and adds
all those together after the LAST AREA and reports it with the LAST
AREA.
 Icarus estimates grounding costs for the poles.
 For buried cable Icarus estimates excavation costs.
 Cables are estimated depending upon the number of devices in the
system. Equipment cabinets, Junction boxes are not considered as
devices
 Icarus estimates 25 feet cable for each monitor, and work station.
 The comm. and alarm systems project level model is always estimated
when the report group is in the ISBL. Even though if the 8 systems are
set to Y at the project level, the report groups which are in the OSBL
does not generate any comm. and alarm systems cost. The user has to
go to the area specs. of the OSBL report group and set each of the
systems as Y. Then only the comm. and alarm systems cost would be
seen.
 All the calculations are the same except the building area should be
subtracted from the outdoor area and the outdoor items should be
calculated based on this area. If the outdoor area, open concrete
structure, open steel structure area is less than 400 sq. ft then Icarus
does not generate any outdoor items. This is also true with the
buildings, if the building area (Length*width*levels) is less than 400
sq. ft Icarus does not generate any indoor items.
 If the area is less than 400 sq. ft then the system does not generate
any CCTV system and Radio system for that area.
 There will be ONLY 1 video conference system for the whole project
 When an area has both PAGA and Telephone system as `YES'
previously we were estimating Indoor/Outdoor handsets in the PAGA
system ONLY. There is a change to this, now we will be estimating
Outdoor handsets from the PAGA system and Indoor handsets from
the Telephone system.

 The calculation for the indoor items like PAGA indoor speakers, indoor
strobes, indoor handsets, CCTV indoor handsets, Switches for Area
network system, Card readers for Access control system should be
different for the different building types. Refer to How Public Address
and General Alarm Systems apply to buildings: below for details.
 If the building area is less than 400 sq. ft then Icarus does not
estimate Switches for Area network system and Card readers for the
Access control system.
How Public Address and General Alarm Systems apply to buildings:
 Insulation Specs
Insulation design specifications, including thickness schedule, minimum
temperature for hot insulation, equipment insulation type, equipment
insulation jacket type, fire resistance rating for fireproofing on skirts,
equipment fireproofing type, whether to include fireproofing on the
outside or both sides of skirts, steel fire resistance fireproof rating, and
steel fireproofing type, coverage, and installation (field or remote shop).
You can specify a named insulation library for a project for a particular
use.
You can specify a named insulation library for an area for a particular use.
You can create, duplicate, modify and delete:
 Hot Insulation Schedule libraries
 Cold Insulation Schedule libraries
 Libraries of Insulation Equivalent Length rules
You can create any number of Hot Insulation Schedule libraries with
one insulation specification table/file. Each library has a name associated
to it. You can use 20 Hot Insulation Schedule tables in a project.
Hot Insulation Schedule files are named:
INSHOT##.DAT, where ## is the number (up to 20) of the Hot Insulation
Schedule file.

You can create any number of Cold Insulation Schedule libraries with
one insulation specification table/file. Each library has a name associated
to it. You can use ten Cold Insulation Schedule tables in a project.
Cold Insulation Schedule files are named:
INSCLD##.DAT, where ## is the number (up to 10) of the Cold
Insulation Schedule file.
You can create any number of Insulation Equivalent Length libraries
with one insulation specification table/file. Each library has a name
associated to it. You can use one Insulation Equivalent Length table in
a project.
Example File Format (one Table/File)

Example Insulation Equivalent Length Table
The Insulation Equivalent Length libraries included in Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator are named:
 Default
 INSSPC_BLANK
 INSSPC_IP
 INSSPC_METRIC
You can then specify in the project design basis insulation specifications
using either the internal default Hot Light, Medium, or Heavy tables or
you can specify a named insulation table to use as the default for all
areas.
You can then specify in the project design basis insulation specifications
either using the internal default Cold table or you can specify a named
insulation table to use as the default for all areas.
You can then specify for each area Hot and Cold insulation specifications
either an internal default table or you can specify a named insulation table
to use.
To create a new Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:
1 On the Palette’s Libraries tab, click Customer External Files.
2 On the Customer External Files dialog box, right-click Insulation
Thicknesses and Rules.
3 On the dialog box that appears, click New.
4 On the New Insulation Thicknesses and Rules dialog box that
appears, enter the name of the new library file and, optionally, a
description of the new library file.
5 Click OK.

To Modify an Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:
3 Right-click the library file you want to modify.
4 On the Insulation Thicknesses and Rules dialog box that appears,
enter your modifications.
5 Click Modify.
To Duplicate an Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:
3 Right-click the library file you want to duplicate.
click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Insulation Thicknesses and Rules dialog box appears.
5 In the File Name field, type the name of the file to be a duplicate of
the one you are basing the duplicate on.
6 Click OK.
A duplicate file is created.
To Delete an Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:
2 On the Customer External Files dialog box, right-click
Insulation Thicknesses and Rules.
3 Right-click the library you want to delete.
4 A warning appears asking whether you want to delete this library file.
Click Yes.
The file is deleted.

To Create a New Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule File:
2 On the Customer External Files dialog box, right-click Hot
Insulation Schedule or Cold Insulation Schedule.
3 On the menu that appears, click New.
4 On the New [Hot/Cold Insulation Schedules] dialog box that
appears, enter the name of the new file and, optionally, a description
of the new file.
5 Click OK.
To modify a Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule Library:
3 Right-click the file you want to modify.
4 On the External Insulation Specs dialog box that appears, enter
your modifications.
5 Click Modify.
To Duplicate a Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule Library:
3 Right-click the file you want to duplicate.
click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Hot/Cold Insulation Schedules file dialog box appears.
5 In the File Name field, type the name of the file to be a duplicate of
the one you are basing the duplicate on.
6 Click OK.

A duplicate file is created.
To Delete a Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule Library:
3 Right-click the file you want to delete.
4 A warning appears asking whether you want to delete this library file.
Click Yes.
The file is deleted.
To Use an Insulation Equivalent Length Rules Library in a Project:
1 On the Project Basis tab, click Basis for Capital Costs | Customer
External Files.
2 On the Customer External Files folder, click the Insulation
External Files folder.
3 On the Insulation External Files folder, right-click Insulation
Equivalent Length Rules.
The Select an Insulation Thickness and Rules File dialog box appears.
4 On the Select an Insulation Thickness and Rules File dialog box,
select the file you want to use in the project.
5 Click OK.
To Use a Hot or Cold Insulation File in a Project:
1 On the Project Basis tab, click Basis for Capital Costs | Customer
External Files.
2 On the Customer External Files folder, click the Insulation
External Files folder.
3 On the Insulation External Files folder, right-click Hot/Cold
Insulation Schedules.
4 Click Select.

The Select Hot/Cold Insulation Specification dialog box appears.
5 Select the insulation specification(s) that you want to include in the
project. You can select up to 20 Hot Insulation specifications and up to
10 Cold Insulation specifications.
6 Click OK.
The specifications you selected are available in the project.
 Paint Specs
Paint design specifications, including number of primer coats, number of
finish coats, and whether painting is performed in field shop or remote
shop.
To edit Design Basis specifications:
1 Right-click the specification category that you want to define; then click
Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a specifications form for the selected
category in the Main Window.

2 Enter the Design Basis specifications for the selected category.
3 Click OK to add the specifications to the project and close the
Contingency and Miscellaneous Project
Costs
Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs include material contingency (as
a percentage of each contract cost) and miscellaneous special charges for
royalties, licenses, land, and so on.
To define Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs:
1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on Contingency and
Misc. Project Costs and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the cost specifications in the Main
Window.

2 Enter the cost specifications.
3 Click OK to add the specifications to the project and close the
Escalation
Escalation provides the ability to incorporate the effects of the constantly
changing local and world economies. The Escalation feature lets you specify
escalation indices for the following material and labor cost categories:
 General materials
 Design engineering
 Construction manpower
 Construction management
To define escalation:
1 Right-click Escalation in the Basis for Capital Costs folder; then click
Edit.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Escalation Specs dialog box in the
Main Window.

2 In the Escalation Method field, you can choose one of two ways for
reporting escalated costs:
Click to
SPREAD Define escalation to be included in all reported
costs.
ACCUM Define escalation to be segregated from all costs
and to be accumulated (into each of the four
categories above) for summary reporting, and with
costs to be reported at a user-defined condition.
Note: The system base indices are published in Icarus Reference.
All user-entered costs (quoted cost items, quoted equipment costs, library
items, material/labor lump sum additions, project indirects, and so on) are
assumed to be valid at the user base time point. This may be a
corporate-standard time point chosen as a basis for all projects.
Three indices are used to develop escalated costs:
o System Base Indices (SBI): System-defined indices that
represent costs inherent to the particular version of the system.
o User Base Indices (UBI): User-entered indices that reference
user-entered cost values. All system-developed costs
(developed at SBI) are adjusted to UBI by multiplying the ratio
(UBI/SBI).
o Escalation Indices (EI): User-entered indices that escalate all
costs (both user-entered and system-generated) from the user
base (UBI) to some other point in time. This is done by
multiplying all costs by the ratio (EI/UBI).
3 Enter or revise your specifications.
4 Click OK to apply your specifications to the project and close the

Engineering Workforce
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you define up to nine engineering
workforces. For each engineering workforce, you can specify:
 a percentage adjustment to the base (default) wage rates by engineering
phase.
 the exact wage rate of any discipline, replacing the base wage rate (as
well as any percentage adjustments to the base).
Icarus Reference, Chapter 31, lists engineering disciplines and their base
wage rates. The disciplines are grouped by phase and assigned numbers.
In addition to specifying engineering wage rates, you can specify:
 engineering hours (by phase or discipline) and
 engineering costs (either as lump sums or as percentages of total costs)
Once defined, an engineering workforce can be linked to one or more
contractors. If no workforce is specified, contractors use the default
engineering workforce.
Engineering Phase
To define an engineering workforce by phase:
1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click By Phase; then on
the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Engineering Phase Info dialog box appears in the Main Window.

In defining a workforce, use one item column per engineering phase. A single
item column (Item 1) is provided. Add more columns using the Add button
.
2 Specify the engineering workforce number.
3 Select an engineering phase. The choices are:
* All phases
B Basic engineering
D Detail engineering
P Procurement
H Home office construction services
F Field office supervision
S Startup, commissioning
E Engineering management
C Construction management
Phases E and C are for multi-contract projects only.
4 To replace system-calculated hours and/or costs for the selected phase,
enter engineering hours and/or engineering costs.
5 To increase or decrease wages for all disciplines under the selected phase,
enter the percentage of the base wage rate. For example, entering “200”
would double the wage rates; entering “50” would cut wage rates in half.
6 If desired, enter the payroll burden, indirects, and expenses for the
selected phase, either as lump sums or as percentages of the total
manpower cost.
If you want to define additional phases, click Add and complete the process
(steps 2 through 6).

Note: In the form pictured here, Items 1 and 2 each define a phase for
Engineering Workforce Number 1.
Item 1 defines Basic Engineering (B). It sets the manhours at five percent
over those calculated by the system (expressed as 105% of the calculated
hours). It sets wages for all disciplines under Basic Engineering at ten percent
above the base (expressed as 110% of the base wage rate).
Item 2 defines Detailed Engineering, setting the wages for all disciplines
under Detailed Engineering (D) at five percent below the base (expressed as
95% of the base wage rate).
7 Click OK to include the entered information in the project specifications
and close the specifications form.
Engineering Discipline
Defining an engineering workforce by discipline lets you replace base (default)
wage rates and/or system-calculated hours.
To define an engineering workforce by discipline:
1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on By Discipline
and click Edit on the pop-up.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Engineering Discipline Info
dialog box in the Main Window.
A single item column defines up to four disciplines under a single phase. One
item column (Item 1) is provided. Add more columns using the Add button
.
2 Enter an engineering workforce number.
3 Select an engineering phase.
4 Enter the number of an engineering discipline under the selected phase. A
list of discipline numbers and wage rates, grouped by phase, is provided
in Chapter 34 of your Icarus Reference.
5 To replace the base wage rate for this discipline, as well as any
adjustments to the base wage rate made on the Engineering Phase Info
form, enter a new discipline wage rate.
6 To replace or adjust the system-calculated hours for this discipline, either
enter discipline hours or enter a percentage adjustment.
7 Space is provided for defining up to three more disciplines under this
phase. To define beyond three additional disciplines or to define disciplines
under another phase, click Add and repeat the process (steps 2 through
7).
Note: Item 1 defines two disciplines under Basic Engineering (phase B) for
Engineering Workforce Number 1. It does the following:

Sets Engineering Workforce Number 1‘s wage rate for process engineering
(discipline number 02) performed in the Basic Engineering phase at $42.00
and increases by ten percent the system-calculated hours for this discipline.
Sets Engineering Workforce Number 1‘s wage rate for instrument design
(discipline number 04) performed in the Basic Engineering phase at $39.20.
8 When you are finished, click OK to save the specifications and close the
form.
Drawing Types and Counts
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you account for additional drawings that
may need to be produced during the Basic Engineering and Detailed
Engineering phases.
To add a drawing type:
1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on Drawing Types
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Drawing Type Info dialog box in
the Main window.

2 Select either Basic or Detailed as the engineering phase.
3 Enter either an existing drawing number (see Icarus Reference, Chapter
31, for drawing types and numbers) or enter a new drawing number in the
range of 91-99.
4 Enter the title of the new drawing to be used in reports.
5 If you entered a new drawing number, select a drawing class account. For
example, select P (piping account) for a piping model drawing.
6 If you entered a new drawing number, select a drawing class discipline.
For example, select 4 (model building) for a piping model drawing.
7 If you entered a new drawing number, enter the total manhours required
to produce the drawing.
8 Click OK to save specifications and close the form.
To specify quantity of a drawing type:
1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on Drawing Count

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Drawing Count Info form in the
Main window.
2 Select either Basic or Detailed as the engineering phase.
3 Enter a drawing number.
4 Enter the number of the contractor to which the drawing is assigned.
5 Use the Action Code field to select whether to ADD to the calculated
number of drawings, ADD new drawings (number 91-99), or CHANGE the
calculated number of drawings.
Note: The CHANGE option is not allowed for drawing numbers 91-99.
6 Depending on whether you chose ADD or CHANGE as the Action Code,
enter the number of drawings to add to the system-calculated quantity or
the number with which to replace the system-calculated quantity. If you
selected CHANGE, you have the option to instead enter a percentage
adjustment in the Percent of Calculated Drawings field.
7 To change manhours to reflect the changed drawing count, select “A” in
the Labor Adjustment Selection field.
If you want to adjust the count of a system developed drawing and also
want to change engineering manhours to reflect the changed drawing
count, DO NOT use the Action code ADD; always use the Action code
CHANGE and Percent of calculated drawings for adjustments.
8 Click OK to save the specifications and close the form.
Construction Workforce
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you define construction workforces, which
you can then link to contractors (see page XX153XX). For each construction
workforce, you can specify wage rates (globally or by craft), workweek,
productivities, overtime, and crew mixes. You can also make modifications to
craft names, which apply to all construction workforces.

If no construction workforce is defined, contractors use the default
construction workforce.
General Rates
The General Wage Rates information defines wage rates, productivities,
workweek, and overtime for all crafts in a construction workforce. To access,
right-click Wage Rates in the Construction Workforce subfolder; then click
Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the General Wage Rate/Productivity
specifications form in the Main window.
In the column labeled Item 1, you can define your first construction
workforce. To define additional construction workforces, click Add.
Descriptions of the specifications follow.
Field Description
Construction
workforce
number
Number representing the workforce being
defined.
Number of
shifts
Number of shifts used during construction. If
any premium pay is involved with second and
third shift work (beyond overtime pay), such

Field Description
premium should be indicated by a properly
averaged craft rate per shift.
Productivity
adjustment
Specifies whether to use multi-shift
/workweek adjustments or not.
Indirects If wage rates are to be treated as
all-inclusive, the indirects may be deleted for
this workforce by specifying “-”. Selecting an
all-in rate suppresses all construction
indirects: fringes, burdens, small tools,
construction rental equipment, and so on
ALL CRAFTS
PERCENT OF
BASE
Workforce
reference base
Enter B for system base.
Wage Rate
percent of
base
Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage of
reference base wage rates.
Productivity
percent of
base
Productivities for all crafts as a percentage of
reference base wage rates.
ALL CRAFTS
FIXED RATES
Wage rate all
crafts
Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the project
currency) for all crafts in the workforce. See
discussion in Icarus Reference.
Productivity all
crafts
Specifies the fixed productivity value for all
crafts in this workforce. See discussion in
Icarus Reference. If no value is specified, the
system defaults to 100%.
WORK WEEK
PER SHIFT
Refer to the description of workforces in
Icarus Reference for the effect of changing
the work week and number of shifts upon
productivity and job duration. The standard
workweek plus overtime must not exceed 84
hours per week per shift.
Standard work
week
Specifies number of standard hours per week
per man per shift.
Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours per week
per man per shift.
Overtime rate
percent
standard
Specifies overtime pay expressed as a
percentage of standard pay (for example,
time and one half = 150%).
GENERAL
CRAFT WAGES
Helper wage
rate
UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for craft
help as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.
Helper wage
percent of
craft rate
UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate for
craft help as a percent of the principal craft in
the crew. This value must be less than 100%.

Field Description
Foreman wage
rate
Specifies the wage rate for foremen as a fixed
rate to be used in all crews. Default: 110% of
rate of highest paid craft in crew.
Foreman wage
percent of
craft rate
Specifies the wage rate for foreman as a
percent of the highest paid craft in crew. This
value must be greater than or equal to 100%.
Default: 110% of rate of highest paid craft in
crew.
Craft Wage
Rates
Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity
individually for each craft.
Note: Right-click the red arrow to define craft
rates for a construction workforce. You can
define up to 99 separate construction
workforces.
Craft Rates
Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft.
To access Craft Rates:
1 In the Construction Workforce subfolder, click Construction
Workforce | Wage Rates.
2 On the General Wage Rate/Productivity dialog box that appears, right-
click the red arrow in the Craft Wage Rates field, as shown below.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Craft Wage Rate/Productivity
dialog box.

Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually for each
craft in a workforce.
Field Description
Craft code Identifies the craft to which the following
wage rate and productivity apply.
The craft code must be an existing system
craft code.
Craft Wage rate Specifies the wage rate (in the project
currency) for this craft for standard hours.
Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craft as a
percentage of the system’s base. (See
discussion in Icarus Reference.)
To Add a Construction Workforce:
 On the General Wage Rate/Productivity dialog box, click Add.

A new construction workforce column appears to the right of the current
construction workforce.
To Delete a Construction Workforce:
1 On the General Wage Rate/Productivity dialog box, highlight one or
more columns to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 When prompted as to whether you want to delete the column(s), click
Yes.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator deletes the column(s) you highlighted.
Note: If you do not highlight a column and perform a delete, the right-most
column is deleted.
To Copy Craft Wage Rate/Productivity Information to an Excel
Spreadsheet:
1 On the Craft Wage Rate/Productivity Information dialog box, click
CopyAll.
2 Navigate to the Excel spreadsheet to which you want to copy the
information.
3 Click CTRL-V.
The information is pasted into the spreadsheet.
Crew Mixes
Use the Crew Mixes specifications form to allocate a percentage of
man-hours from one craft to another for the purpose of modifying crew
mixes.
To modify crew mixes:
1 in the Construction Workforce subfolder, right-click Crew Mixes.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Mixture Info form in the
Main window.
For each item, you can make up to seven different re-allocations of man-
hours. To add a new item: Click Add.

3 Enter the number of the Construction Workforce to which the modification
applies.
4 In the From Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft that will
lose man-hours.
Note: See Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for craft codes.
5 In the To Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft that will
gain man-hours.
6 In the Craft Transfer Percent column, enter percentage of man-hours to
be re-allocated.
7 Click OK to save the modifications and close the form.
-or-
Click Cancel to close the form without saving modifications.
Craft Names
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you modify the default craft names, which
are listed in Chapter 30 of Icarus Reference.
To modify craft names:
1 Right-click on Craft Names in the Construction Workforce subfolder.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Name Info form in the
Main window.
For each item, you can make up to three name changes. To add a new item,
click Add.
3 In the Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft you are re-
naming. Craft Codes are listed in Icarus Reference, Chapter 30.
4 In the Craft Name column, enter the craft’s new name.
5 Click OK to save the modifications and close the form.
Code of Accounts
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator contains a base set of 3-digit Code of Accounts
(COA) to which costs and man-hours are allocated. See Icarus Reference,
Chapter 34, for a detailed Icarus COA list. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets
you add your own COA’s and re-allocate costs from Icarus COA’s to your new
COA’s. When you completely re-define your COA’s, you must also define and
allocate all indirect COA’s.

First, you must select the COA file.
To select a COA file:
1 Right-click on Code of Accounts in the Basis for Capital Costs folder,
and then click Select on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides the file named DEFAULT. After
selecting this file, you can modify it and save it as another file. You can then
have multiple COA sets from which to choose.
2 Select the file and click OK.
Adding a COA Set and Allocating Costs
The following instructions provide an example COA set for you to add. The
instructions will then show you how to allocate material and labor costs to the
new COA set.
To add a COA set:
1 Right-click Code of Accounts in the Basis for Capital Costs folder; then
click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Code of Accounts dialog box appears.
2 Click Definitions; then click Modify.
The Code of account definition dialog box appears.
3 Click Add.
A new item (in this example, Item 501, is added at the bottom of the grid.

4 For the new item, enter an account number, select a COA group, and
enter a description (all in upper-case).
5 Repeat this step for each new COA in the set.
Example set:
COA COA Group Description
1000 EQ ALL CATEGORY A EQUIPMENT
2000 EQ ALL CATEGORY B EQUIPMENT
3000 P ALL PIPING
4000 C ALL CIVIL
5000 ST ALL STEEL
6000 I ALL INSTRUMENTATION
7000 E ALL ELECTRICAL
8000 IN ALL INSULATION
9000 PT ALL PAINT
6 When you are finished adding COA’s, click OK.
To re-allocate costs from Icarus COA’s to your new COA’s:
1 In the Code of Accounts dialog box, double-click Allocations.
The Code of account allocation dialog box appears.

2 In the Code of account allocation dialog box, enter an Icarus COA or
range of Icarus COA’s (using the From Icarus COA and To Icarus COA
fields) and then enter the new COA to which you want to allocate the
Icarus COA’s material and labor.
Entering a COA only in the Alloc to Icarus/ User Matl COA field
allocates both material and labor to the COA entered in the Material
field. You could allocate material to one COA and labor to another.
3 Click OK when you are finished making the entry, and then continue to
allocate each Icarus COA or range of Icarus COA’s to one of the new
COA’s.
Example set:
From To Material
100 199 1000
200 299 2000
300 399 3000
400 499 4000
500 599 5000
600 699 6000
700 799 7000
800 899 8000
900 999 9000
Specifying Exceptions to Account Allocations
After you have defined the account allocations, you may choose to specify
exceptions to these new allocations.
Example: We have allocated the costs of all piping — Icarus COA’s 300-399
— to COA 3000. However, we wish to allocate the material costs of 6-8 INCH

304P Pipe to a new account, COA 3201, and we wish to allocate the labor
costs of 6-8 INCH 304P Pipe to another new account, COA 3202.
To specify the exceptions in the above example:
1 First, create COA 3201, type P, with the description MATL SS PIPE 6-18
INCH and create COA 3202, type P, with the description MATL SS PIPE
6-18 INCH.
2 Identify in Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, “Code of Accounts,” which range
of Icarus COA’s to allocate to 3201 and 3202. In this case, it is COA’s 320
to 327, representing stainless steel pipe.
3 Click in a cell above which you want to add the new item, then click
Insert.
4 Enter “320” in the From Icarus COA field and “327” in the To Icarus
COA field. Enter “3201” in the Alloc to Icarus/ User matl COA field and
enter “3202” in the Alloc to Icarus/ User labor COA field.
5 In the COA exception flag field, from the drop-down select E (Allow
account exception)
6 In the Material selection field, enter “304P” as the Material.
Note: Icarus Reference, Chapter 28, “Material Selections,” provides the
symbols for stainless steel and other materials. Many stainless steels are
available. This example is limited to 304P for brevity.
7 In the Pipe diameter – lower limit field, enter “6.” In the Pipe
diameter – upper limit field, enter “18.”
8 Make sure that I (Inch-Pound) is selected in the Pipe dia. units of
measure field.
Note: COA Modifier and Subtype let you be more specific about the items you
want allocated to a new COA. They are described in Icarus Reference, Chapter
35, “Database Relations”.
9 Click OK. This moves all material costs for all 6-18 INCH 304P pipe,
fittings, and valves to COA 3201 and all labor costs for these items to COA
3202.
10 When you are finished, review the Account Allocation order to see that the
accounts are in the correct order. Then click OK to save your work and
exit the COA code of account allocation dialog box.
Overriding Code of Accounts at the
Component Level
You can override a Code of Account for a specific component.
To Override a Code of Account for a specific component:
1 In a project, on the Project View tab, right-click the component whose
Code of Account you want to change.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.

The Equipment Spec sheet appears.
3 On the Equipment Spec sheet, left-click the red arrow in the Code of
account field.
The Slot Template dialog box appears.
4 On the Slot Template dialog box, click Select.

The Equipment COA Selection dialog box appears.
5 On the Equipment COA Selection dialog box, scroll to the Equipment
and COA you want to assign to your equipment; then click Select.
The Equipment Spec sheet reappears with the COA you selected in the
Code of Account field.
Choosing between the Icarus Code of
Accounts and User Code of Accounts at the
Component Level
To specify whether an equipment unit should use the Icarus Code of
Accounts or the User Code of Accounts:
1 In a project, on the Project View tab, right-click the component whose
Code of Account you want to change.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.
The Equipment Spec sheet appears.
3 On the Equipment Spec sheet, in the Icarus/User COA Option field,
click the drop-down arrow.
4 Click the appropriate COA option.
Indexing
The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing folder let
you manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs for process equipment

and installation bulks. You can also adjust these indexes by location by using
the Location specification form.
For example, you could specify to increase the material costs associated with
a type of process equipment.
Indexing is used to tailor Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to mimic your work
methods and costs. If your equipment costs for a category are consistently
offset from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator’s values, use Indexing to correct
that.
When calibrating a new cost basis, you can update an existing Project Level
Indexing file into a new one. In this case the old and new Project Level
Indexing will not be different but will be direct replacements.
Material, Manhour, and Location indices are externalized to a single external
file. You can select an external indexing file at the project level, edit it, and
use the local file in a project.
At the area level, you can edit the indexing, but you cannot choose another
external indexing file. The evaluation engine uses indices from the external
file for project evaluation.
Adjusting Indexes
To adjust the Material or Man-hour index:
1 Right-click Material or Man-hour and click Edit.
2 To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the installation
bulks, enter the index value in the box provided. For example, entering
“200” in the Equipment box will double the material costs for all items
under the equipment account group.

To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button in the box. This
accesses a similar form listing sub-categories corresponding to the Code of
Accounts (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments
to a sub-category over-ride adjustments to the account-group.
3 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
To adjust by location:
1 Right-click on Location and click Edit.
2 Type the location description.
3 Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the COA range, or
click the red arrow; then click Select by the subcategory on the COA
Subcategory Selection window.

The Equipment COA Selection dialog box appears.
4 Click Select again by the COA.
The COA is entered on the form.
5 Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range.
6 Type the amount to escalate material costs and/or the amount to escalate
man-hour costs.
7 To escalate another range, click Add.
8 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
Editing an Index file inside a project
To edit an Index inside a project:
1 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing.
2 Click Select.

The Indexing dialog box appears with three options (Material, Man Hour, and
Location.)
3 Click the type of index you want to edit; then click Modify.
4 Edit the index; then click OK.
Deleting an Index File
2 Click Select.
A list of the available index files appears.
3 Click the type of index you want to delete; then click OK.
The Index file is loaded.
4 In the Project Basis view, right-click Indexing.
5 Click Remove Selection.
A warning message appears telling you that the specifications file will be
deleted.
6 If you want to remove the Index file you selected, click Yes.

Adding Modified Index Files to the Library
To add a modified index file to the library:
2 Click Select.
The Indexing dialog box appears with three options (Material, Man Hour, and
Location.)
3 Click the type of index you want to edit; then click Modify.
4 Edit the index; then click OK.
6 On the menu that appears, click Export to Library.
A warning message telling you that the current COA specifications must also
be exported appears.
7 Click OK.
The Duplicate Code of Accounts file based on Indexing dialog box
appears.

8 On the Duplicate Code of Accounts file based on Indexing dialog
box, type a file name (required) and description (optional) for the new file.
9 Click OK.
A message appears indicating the new indexing file was successfully created
in the Library. The new indexing file appears in the Palette window under
Indexing.
Modifying an empty Indexing file outside the
project
1 Launch Aspen Capital Cost Estimator without any project open.
2 In Palette view, click the Libraries tab.
3 On the Libraries tab, expand the Indexing Library folder.
4 Double-click EMPTY to open the Indexing dialog box.
The Indexing dialog box appears displaying four options.
5 Right-click COA file; on the menu that appears, click Modify.
The Select a Code of Account File dialog box appears.
6 In the Code of Account Files list, click DEFAULT COA file as the
Indexing COA.

7 In the Indexing dialog box that appears, click one of the following:
o Material
o Man Hour
o Location
All indices are initialized to 100%. You can modify the indices to your
specifications.
8 When you have modified the index or indices, save the external file.
Equipment Rental
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically develops rental equipment
durations and costs based on your project work items. You can adjust or
delete these items and/or add your own to more accurately reflect the
project.
Adjusting and Deleting System Items
To adjust or delete system equipment rental items:
1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on Equipment Rental,
then, on the menu that appears, click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Equipment Rental
Info specifications form in the Main Window. A column for the
first rental item, labeled Item 1, is provided. If you need to
add a column, click Add.
2 Enter an item description and rental equipment number. See Icarus
Reference, Chapter 32, for a complete list of construction equipment and
associated equipment numbers.
3 Click a Rental Action Code.
Click to
ADD Add days to the rental item’s Rental Days Required.
You cannot use this option to adjust Monthly Rental
Rate.
CHANGE Replace the rental item’s Rental Days Required
and/or the Monthly Rental Rate.
DELETE Delete the rental item.
Note: To change an existing item’s rental rate, you must select CHANGE.
4 In the Rental Days Required field, depending on the action code, either
enter the number of days to add (action code is ADD) or the total number
of days (action code is CHANGE).

5 If you’ve selected the CHANGE action code, you can enter a new rate in
the Monthly Rate field or leave it blank to use the system’s default rate.
You cannot adjust an existing item’s monthly rate using the ADD action
code.
Here, the number of days required for Item 1, DUMP TRUCK, is being
changed to five, and its monthly rate is being changed to $6,500. Four
days are being added to the days required for Item 2, CRANE.
6 Click OK to save the specifications and close the specifications form.
Entering New Rental Items
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides empty slots in every equipment class
for user-entered equipment items. Any that you enter are added to those that
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops based on your project work items.
To enter a new rental item:
1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click Equipment Rental;
then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the equipment rental specifications
form in the Main Window. A column for the first rental item, labeled Item 1, is
provided. If you need to add a column, click Add.
2 Enter an item description. The first 20 characters will appear in the
Description column on the Equipment Rental Summary report. The
next 16 characters will appear in the size column on the Equipment
Rental Summary report.
3 Enter an equipment number. Numbers 1-20 are for the equipment class
AUTOMOTIVE. All other numbers will share the equipment class of the
equipment number before it. For example, an item assigned equipment
number 79 would be classified EARTHMOVING because that is the
equipment class of equipment number 78. Each equipment class includes
unused numbers for user-entries. Refer to Icarus Reference, Chapter 32,
for a complete list of construction equipment and associated equipment
numbers.
4 Click Add as the Rental Action Code.
5 Enter the Rental Days Required.
6 Enter the Monthly Rate.
7 Click OK to save the specifications and close the specifications form.

Systems
Use the features of the Systems tree diagrams to define, track, and revise
power distribution and process control networks.
Power Distribution
The Power Distribution tree diagram lets you define the electrical
configuration and loads in areas and process control centers.
You can specify:
 the quantity and size of transmission line(s)
 main and unit substation(s)
 the degree of redundancy
 the type and method of placement of distribution cable
The Power Distribution specifications work in conjunction with the electrical
specifications at the project and area levels.
Most users define the distribution configuration (for example, which main
substation is to feed which “downstream” unit substation) and cable
placement. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator then sizes the items to satisfy the
start-up and running electrical loads (drivers, lighting, tracing, and so on)
always heading “upstream.”
To define power distribution:
1 In the Systems subfolder, right-click Power Distribution; then click
Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Power Distribution tree in the
Main window.
New projects include one default main substation feeding a default unit
substation. The main substation is assumed to be an existing one, so no
electrical bulk quantities will be generated for it. If the electrical bulk
quantities are required in the estimate, you should change the input
parameters for this default main substation. All newly added and imported

areas, and newly added process control items, are automatically linked to the
default unit substation.
2 Use the tree diagram to define the power distribution network. A
description of the tree diagram actions follows.
Adding Power Distribution Items
Power distribution items include:
 Transmission lines
 Main substations
 Unit substations
Power distribution items are sized and cost estimated based on information
provided with the project design basis, power distribution specifications, area
specifications, and the list of equipment and bulk items requiring electrical
power.
To add a power distribution item:
1 Select an item in the tree diagram.
The added power distribution item is added to the tree diagram under the
select item.
To add Do this
Transmission line Select the “Project” item.
Main substation Select the “Project” or a transmission line item.
Unit substation Select the “Project,” a transmission line, a main substation, or a
unit substation item.
2 Right-click on the item and, depending on the item selected, click:
Add Transmission Line
–or–
Add Main Substation
–or–
Add Unit Substation
A dialog box appears in which to enter a name for the item.
3 Enter a name and click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the new
item.

4 Enter the specifications; then click OK.
Adding Links to Areas
You can link a unit substation to an area (or multiple areas), making it the
power source for load centers in the specified area(s).
To add a link to an area:
1 Right-click the unit substation in the tree diagram; then click Link Area
on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Link to Area dialog box.
2 Select an unlinked area and click OK.
On the tree diagram, the linked area is shown under the unit substation.
Adding Links to Control Systems
You can link a unit substation to a process control system (or multiple
systems).

To add a link to a process control system:
1 Right-click on the unit substation and click Link Control System on the
pop-up menu.
2 Select an unlinked control system and click OK.
On the tree diagram, the linked control system is shown under the unit
substation.
To unlink a control system:
 Right-click on the control system in the tree diagram; then click Unlink on
the pop-up menu.
Unlinking
The Unlink command lets you disconnect an area or process control item
from a unit substation:
To unlink an area from a process control item:
 In the tree diagram, right-click on the area you want to delete; then, on
the menu that appears, click Unlink.
Deleting Power Distribution Items
Should power distribution network specifications for the project change, or
when you want to explore alternatives, it may be necessary to delete
previously defined power distribution items (transmission lines, main
substations, unit substations).
To delete a power distribution item:
1 In the tree diagram, right-click the item you want to delete.
2 Click Delete.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation dialog box.
3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Process Control

If you do not enter Process Control specifications, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator assumes that process control is provided to all areas by a default
digital control system consisting of a digital control center reporting to an
operator center. The control and operator centers are automatically sized to
meet requirements.
You can define a process control network using the Process Control tree
diagram. The tree diagram items represent the process control network,
consisting of:
 Operator centers (digital only)
 Control centers (digital or analog)
 Programmable Logic Control (PLC) Centers
 Specialty (SPC) centers
Use the tree diagram to define the network from the top down. Reporting to
the “Project” item, you can add operator centers, control centers, or PLCs.
Control centers can report to operator centers. Digital, analog, and PLC
control centers can be mixed within the same project.
When a project estimate is run, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator sizes all process
control items and reports their sizes, ratings, and installation details at the
end of the report for the last area. Details on field instrumentation and final
control elements with their associated air supply details are reported on a
component basis. Details for area junction boxes, cable trays, and so on are
reported on an area basis.
To define process control:
1 In the Systems folder, right-click Process Control; then, on the menu
that appears, click Edit
The Process Control tree diagram appears, displaying the process control
network.
2 Use the tree diagram to define the desired process control network and its
reporting structure. A description of the tree diagram actions follows.
Adding Process Control Items
Process control items include:
 Operator centers
 Control centers
 PLC centers.
 Specialty centers

To add a process control item:
1 Select an item in the tree diagram. The new process control item will be
placed under the selected item.
To add Do this
Operator center Select the “Project” item.
Control center Select the “Project” item (for analog or digital) or
an operator center item (for digital).
PLC center Select the “Project” item or operator center.
Specialty center Select the “Project” item or operator center.
2 Right-click the item and, depending on the item being added, click one of
the following on the pop-up menu:
o Add Operator Center
o Add Control Center
o Add PLC Center
o Add SPC Center (Specialty center)
A dialog box appears in which to enter a name for the item.
3 Type the name of the item; then click OK.
The item is added to the tree diagram.
4 To edit the item’s specifications, right-click the item; then click Edit on
the pop-up menu.

5 To save the specifications, click OK.
Adding Links to Areas
You can link control centers, PLC centers, and SPC centers to areas. A center
serves instrumentation within the area(s) to which it is linked.
To add a link to an area:
1 Right-click the item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
Link Area.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Link to Area dialog box.
2 Click an unlinked area; then click OK.
On the tree diagram, the linked area is shown under the selected process
control item.

Unlinking
The Unlink option lets you disconnect an area from a process control item.
To unlink an area from a process control item:
1 In the tree diagram, right-click the area you want to delink.
2 On the menu that appears, click Unlink.
Deleting Process Control Items
As the specifications for the project scenario change, or when you want to
explore alternatives, it may be necessary to delete process control items
(operator centers, control centers, PLC centers, and SPC centers).
To delete a process control item:
1 In the tree diagram, right-click the item you want to delete.
2 Click Delete.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation dialog box.
3 Click Yes to confirm deletion.
Contracts
The tree diagrams in the Contracts folder let you define responsibility and
assign scope of effort to contractors for engineering, procurement, and
construction. There are two tree diagrams:
 Contractors: Use to specify each contractor’s indirect cost structure and
establish the responsibility of one contractor to another for cost reporting.
In addition, engineering and construction workforce characteristics can be
assigned to each contractor.
 Scope: Use to specify sets of contractors and assign scope of work to
each contractor in each set.
Contractors
To access the Contractors tree diagram:
 In the Contracts subfolder, right-click Contractors; then, on the menu
that appears, click Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Contractors tree diagram in the
Main window.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comes set up with one default contractor with
the name Owner.
From the pop-up menu accessed by right clicking on an item in the tree
diagram, you can:
 Add contractors
 Link contractors to workforces
 Edit contractor definitions
 Delete contractors
 Close the tree diagram
Descriptions of these actions follow.
Adding a Contractor
To add a contractor:
1 In the tree diagram, right-click Owner; then, on the menu that appears,
click Add Contractor.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Add a New Contractor dialog box.
2 Type the name of the contractor; then click OK.
Adding Links to Workforces
Workforces are defined in the Project Basis view’s Engineering Workforce
folder (page XX114XX) and the Construction Workforce folder (page XX120XX). Once
you have defined workforces, you can link contractors to them.
To link a contractor to a workforce:
1 Right-click on the contractor in the tree diagram and, depending on the
type of workforce you wish to add, click:
Link to Constr. Work Force
–or–
Link to Engg. Work Force
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a dialog box listing workforces by
number.
2 Click the number representing the desired workforce; then click OK.
In the tree diagram, the workforce appears under the contractor.
Unlinking
The Unlink command lets you disconnect a workforce from a contractor.
To unlink a workforce from a contractor:
 Right-click on the workforce in the tree diagram and click Unlink on the
pop-up menu.

Editing Contractor Definitions
To edit a contractor definition:
1 Right-click the contractor in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that
appears, click Edit.
2 Type or revise specifications on the Contract Definition dialog box.
3 Click OK to save and close.

Deleting a Contractor
To delete a contractor:
1 Right-click the item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
click Delete.
You are prompted to confirm deletion of the contractor from workforce link.
2 Click Yes.
Scope
Use the Scope tree diagram to specify contractor sets and assign scope of
work to each contractor in each set.
To access the Scope tree diagram:
 In the Contracts subfolder, right-click Scope; then click Edit.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the tree diagram in the Main window.
Note: All areas (whether added or imported), power distribution items, and
process control items are automatically linked to the default contract set until
otherwise specified.

Adding Contractor Sets
A contractor set (Conset) is a subset of all contractors defined in a project. A
contractor joins a Conset when it is assigned responsibility for categories of
work.
To add a Conset:
1 Right-click Project in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
click Add Conset.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Contract Scope specifications
form.
2 Use the Scope Description field to describe the responsibilities for the
Conset (for example, All Engineering, Above Ground Mechanical,
Substations).
3 To assign a contractor to a category of work, click the drop-down arrow in
the category field and select a contractor number.
4 Click OK to apply the specifications to the project and close the
specifications form. The newly added Conset will appear in the tree
diagram.
Adding Links
The Link commands allow you to assign each contractor set responsibility for
the scope of work in a segment of the project.
To link an item to a contractor set:
1 Right-click a Conset in the tree diagram; then click one of the following
commands on the pop-up menu that appears:
To do this Click
Link a previously defined
area to the selected
contractor set.
Link Area
power distribution item to
the selected contractor
set.
Link to Power Distribution
process control item to
the selected contractor
set.
Link to Process Control

2 A dialog box appears corresponding to the selected link command. The
following dialog box appears if you select the Link to Process Control
command.
Note: All areas, power distribution items, and process control items are
automatically linked to the default Conset until otherwise specified; therefore,
you may first have to unlink items from the default Conset in order to make
them available. See “Unlinking” on page XX158XX for instructions.
3 Click OK to link the selected item to the Conset.
The item appears under the Conset on the tree diagram. In the tree diagram
shown below, the process control item named Monomer CTL (CTL 2) is
linked to the Conset named Substations (Conset Number 2).
Unlinking
The Unlink command lets you remove responsibility for the scope of work in
a segment of the project.
To unlink an item from a Conset:
 Right-click a linked item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that
appears, click Unlink.
The item no longer appears under the Conset and is now available to be
linked to another Conset.
Editing Contractor Sets
The Edit command lets you assign responsibility for engineering, purchasing
materials, and installation to previously defined contractors for the selected
contractor set (Conset).
To edit a Conset:
1 Right-click a Conset in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
click Edit.

The Conset Specifications dialog box appears.
2 Select a specification.
to Select
Assign esponsibility for engineering
tasks.
Engineering
Assign responsibility for purchasing
on an account-by-account basis.
If you select Purchase Materials,
skip to Step 6.
Purchase
materials
Define responsibility for installation of
all field material on an account-by-
account basis. Construction
equipment rental appropriate for each
work item is automatically assigned
to the installation contractor.
If you select Installation, skip to
Step 6.
Installation
If you selected Engineering:
3 Click Modify to assign responsibility for engineering.
The Contract Scope Form appears.
4 Enter the specifications.
5 Click OK to apply your specifications to the project and return to the
Conset Specifications dialog box.

If you selected Purchase Materials or Installation:
6 Click Modify to assign responsibility for the selected task.
A form appears listing categories of materials to be purchased or installed
(depending upon your selection).
7 Click the arrow on a material category field to select the contractor who
will be responsible for purchasing/installing this category of material in
this Conset.
8 Click OK to apply the specifications to the project and return to the
Conset Specifications dialog box.
9 Click Close to close the dialog box.
Deleting Contractor Sets
The Delete command lets you delete previously defined contractor sets
(Consets).
Note: Consets can only be deleted if no items are linked to the contractor
set. Any linked items must first be unlinked.
To delete a Conset:
 Right-click the Conset in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that
appears, click Delete.
Importing old Standard basis
files
1 Open Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
2 Go to the Libraries tab.
3 Click Basis for Capital Costs.
4 Right-click either Inch-Pound or Metric.
5 Click IMPORT.

The dialog that appears defaults to looking for the ICARUS 2000 specs file.
6 Browse to the specs file you want to import.
7 Click the specs file to import.
Your ICARUS 2000 template (standard basis file) is now in the new Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator system.
Merging Projects
You can create a merged project from multiple projects that have identical
project bases.
To Merge Projects:
1 Create a starting project basis for use in all sub-projects.
2 Create ‘partial’ projects to work on different parts of the project, using this
starting project basis in all projects.
3 Open a copy of one of the ‘partial’ projects (or a fresh copy of the starting
design basis). The project in the open state from which other ‘partial’
projects will be merged into is known as the target project.
4 On the main menu, click Run | Merge | Merge Project.
5 On the Select Projects to Merge dialog box, select a second project to
merge into the current (that is, the ‘target’) project.
6 Click OK.
The projects are merged.
Notes:
o If any of the projects’ bases are not identical, you receive a warning
message specifying which basis is not identical, and the merge is
aborted.
o None of the project basis data is copied and any links to project basis
definition are disconnected.
o All target project links are preserved.
o All source project links are un-linked.
o Source project RG/Areas are added at the end of the project.
Merging Areas Into Projects
You can merge areas from separate projects into a ‘target’ project. The
project from which the areas will be merged and the ‘target’ project must
have identical project bases.
To Merge Areas into a Project:
1 Open a project into which you want to merge areas from other projects.
This project is the ‘target’ project.
2 On the main menu, click Run | Merge | Merge Areas.

3 On the Select Projects to Merge dialog box, select a project to from
which to merge areas into the ‘target’ project.
4 In the source project select the area(s) to merge.
5 Click OK.
The areas from the source project are merged into your ‘target’ project.
Notes:
o If the two projects’ bases are not identical, you receive a warning
message specifying which basis is not identical, and the merge is
aborted.
o None of the project basis data is copied and any links to project basis
definition are disconnected.
o All target project links are preserved.
o All source project links are un-linked.
o Source project RG/Areas are added at the end of the project.
Customer External Files
When certain specifications, such as pipe insulation thickness, are not entered
by the user, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator refers to ASCII format files to make
the appropriate selection. These files are accessible in the Palette’s Libraries
view. There, in the Customer External Files library, these files are divided
into subfolders that correspond to the categories in Project Explorer’s
Customer External Files folder. When no project is open, you can create in the
Palette a duplicate of a default or template file, assigning it a different name
(see page XX241XX for instructions). You can then open the file (stored at
AspenTech/Economic Evaluation V8.0/Data/Libraries, unless the
location is changed in Preferences) in any ASCII text editor and customize the
rules and specifications. (Refer to Icarus Reference when customizing files.
Chapter 23 of Icarus Reference provides instructions on how to customize an
insulation specs file.)
To use a customer external file, you must select it in Project Explorer.
Otherwise, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the default file.
To select a file:
1 Right-click the category.

2 On the menu that appears, click Select.
A selection dialog box appears.
3 Click the file you want to use.
4 Click OK.
Project Execution Schedule
Settings
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates a CPM barchart planning schedule
based on the scope of work defined for the project. The project schedule
includes dates and durations for the following:
 Design engineering
 Procurement
 Delivery of materials and equipment
 Site development
 Construction
 Start-up and commissioning
The construction schedule is integrated with the cost estimate to provide a
basis for the schedule-dependent costs such as equipment rental
requirements, field supervision, and construction management.

Adjusting Schedule and Barcharts
To adjust schedule and barcharts:
1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on Adjust
Schedule and Barcharts and click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Schedule Adjustments specifications dialog box appears in the Main
Window.
2 In the Start Engineering Phase field, select whether to start engineering
with the Detailed Engineering or Basic Engineering.
3 Specify starting dates for engineering and construction (required to
generate barchart schedule reports).
4 Specify percent adjustments to the system-generated schedule for
engineering, delivery of equipment and plant bulk items, and construction
manpower activities.
5 Specify total construction duration in weeks. Construction includes
sitework, civil, and mechanical erection.
6 Specify up to five equipment classes for which to include separate
procurement/installation activity bars (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 36,
Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items, for a list of equipment classes). See the

next subsection for instructions on setting delivery times for equipment
classes.
7 If desired, change the symbols used for printing elements of the barchart.
8 Click OK to save the schedule and barchart adjustments and close the
-or-
Click Cancel to close the form without saving changes.
Setting Delivery Times for Equipment
Classes
To set vendor fabrication and shipping times for equipment class:
1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on
Equipment Class Delivery Times and click Edit.
The Schedule Equipment Classes specifications form appears in the Main
Window.
2 For each equipment class, specify the number of weeks needed to
fabricate and ship equipment after vendor data approval.
-or-

Scheduling Individual Project Components
You can specify up to five project components to appear with separate
procurement and installation activity bars in the barchart. For each specified
component, you can set vendor fabrication and shipping time.
To schedule project components:
1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on
Equipment Item Delivery Times and click Edit.
The Schedule Equipment Items specifications form appears in the Main
window.
2 Enter the tag number of the project component for which to include a
separate activity bar in the barchart.
3 Enter the number of weeks required for the vendor to fabricate and ship
the project component.
4 Repeat this process (steps 2 and 3) to schedule up to five project
components.
-or-

Adding Bar Chart Items
You can define up to four custom-designed bars. For example, you might
define specific bars for funding approval and permits. (These bars have no
effect on the calculated construction duration.)
To add bar chart items:
1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on Add
Barchart Items; then click Edit.
The Schedule Bar Items specifications form appears in the Main
Window.
Note: A blank column is included for Item 1. To add an additional item, click
Add.
2 Enter a description for the activity bar being added.
3 Specify a start and finish date for the activity.
4 Select a bar position: top of barchart (T), basic engineering (B), detailed
engineering (D), procurement (P), sitework (S), construction (C), end of
barchart (E).
5 To add another bar, click Add and repeat steps 2-4. You can have a
maximum of four user-defined bars.
-or-

IPS Project Schedule Settings
Note: IPS Project Schedule Settings are only included in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS).
If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) and you
selected at startup to use IPS in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
environment, the IPS Project Schedule Settings folder is included in the
Project Explorer’s Basis view.
Using these settings, you can make adjustments to the Primavera Enterprise
schedules produced by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Using Aspen Icarus Project Scheduling
Features in the Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Environment
At startup, select the Project Scheduling Features check box in the
Options dialog box. This option is not selected by default.
Note: If the Options dialog box does not appear at Startup, open
Preferences (Tools | Options | Preferences). On the General tab, select
the Display Options Choice Dialog on Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Startup check box.
As a result of selecting to use scheduling features within Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, an additional folder for Project Schedule Settings appears in
Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.
Note: Double-asterisks (**) indicate that the specifications do not apply to
pipeline projects.

Changes made to the IPS Project Schedule Settings will be reflected in the
scheduling reports generated for display in Primavera. The following are
descriptions of the settings.
Schedule Appearance Adjustments
Title
To enter a project schedule title to replace the system-generated
title:
1 Right-click Title; then click Edit.
2 Enter a title, up to 60 characters.
3 Click Apply.

Description Modification - Engineering
To modify an engineering activity description:
1 Right-click Engineering; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
If you have not previously entered a description modification, there should be
one blank column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to add a
new column in which to enter a modification.
2 Select an activity or group of activities for which the description
modification is to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Activity Number.
The parts of the Activity Number are broken up into the fields under
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Activity Numbers, which are listed on pages XX676XX
through XX698XX in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a
group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least
one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
Note: See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers.
 Preset engineering field 1
The first three characters of the Activity Number are fixed and the same
for all activities. They are always “000”.
 Engineering phase
The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major
engineering phase:
0 – Basic engineering phase
1 – Detail engineering phase
2 – Procurement phase
To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*).
 Engineering contractor number

The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the
engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these
characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined
based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs
in the Project Basis (see page XX151XX). It must be a number between 01 and
98. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two
asterisks (**).
 Account group number
Exception: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are
defined in Appendix C.
The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group
number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts.
0, 1, 2 – Equipment or general
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
6 – Instrumentation
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk
(*).
The eighth character of the Activity Number is fixed and the same for
all activities. It is always “0”.
 Sequence in account group number
The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within the
major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers within a
sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the
Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26).
Equipment classes are defined on page XX705XX.
3 In the Description and tag mod. Option field, select whether to modify
both the description and the tag (default), only the description, or only the
tag.
4 If you are modifying the activity description, enter the new description in
the Engg. activity description field (up to 32 characters).
5 If you are modifying the tag, enter the new tag in the Tag field (up to 12
characters). It will be used in place of the tag (if any) provided by the
system. The tag may be used as a continuation of the description.
6 To modify another activity description, click Add. A new column will
appear. Repeat the process for the other activity description.
7 Click Apply when done.
8 Click Cancel to close the form.

Description Modification – Construction
To modify a construction activity description:
1 Right-click Construction; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
one blank item column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to
add a new item column in which to enter a modification.
Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY
NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B,
have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can
enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the
fields must contain numbers.
o Area number
The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the
Area number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as
substations, control panel and power transmission lines, which always
use 91. If activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two
asterisks (**).
o Identification number
The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified reference
number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant
bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the
substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not
specified, the System default reference number of 00. If all reference
numbers are to be selected, enter three asterisks (***).
Note: See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.

o Equipment type
The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See
Appendix D, page XX707XX, for Equipment Code definitions. All other
activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the
activity number, as listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table on
page XX700XX. Enter two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are
to be selected.
Note: The construction activities are listed, beginning on page XX700XX (in
Appendix B), by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last
three characters form the account group number and account code.
o Account group number
The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of
work performed in the activity. The account group number combined
with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character
code by which the construction and site development activities are
listed beginning on page XX699XX (Appendix B). If all account group
numbers are to be selected, enter an asterisk (*).
o Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth digits of the Activity Code for the activities to
be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character,
which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to
be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
o Contractor number
The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all
contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**)
tag.
the Constr. activity description field (up to 32 characters).
7 Click Apply when done.
Schedule Adjustments by Duration
The activity duration and construction crew size are interrelated, such that an
adjustment to the duration will cause an inversely proportional adjustment to
the activity crew size, and vice versa. You may specify either a duration
adjustment, a maximum crew size, a minimum crew size, or all three. If a
conflict occurs, the crew size adjustment will override the duration
adjustment.
If not adjusted, durations are calculated for each activity based on the type of
activity and associated direct construction man-hours.

Crew Size
You can adjust the system activity durations by entering minimum/maximum
crew sizes for various construction activities within each account group.
To adjust crew size:
1 Right-click Crew Size; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
2 Specify minimum and maximum crew sizes; then click Apply.
Crafts
The Craft Adjustments form lets you modify the system-defined crafts. The
craft code and craft description may be completely replaced by a user-defined
code and description.
In addition, the maximum craft pool sizes may be modified as required.
Modifying the craft pool sizes will affect the activity durations and the overall
job durations.
To adjust a craft:
1 Right-click Crafts; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
2 Select the craft to be adjusted by entering the System craft code. See
Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for lists of craft codes by Country Base.
3 Enter a numeric (01-99) User craft code to substitute for the preceding
System craft code.

Note: If you specify a craft code already in use (that is,, a system craft
code or a previously added user craft code), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
will combine all pool sizes and resource requirements for the specified
craft code and the existing code.
4 Enter a description for the craft in the User craft description field, up to
20 characters.
5 Enter the number of men in the user craft pool or enter an adjustment
relative to the system craft pool size. The system craft pool size is
calculated based on the system craft man-hours and schedule duration.
6 Enter a 4-character user craft symbol. If nothing is entered, the system
craft symbol is used.
7 To enter another adjustment, click Add. This adds another column where
you can repeat the process.
8 When done, click Apply.
Durations
You can use to the specification forms for engineering, construction, and
procurement durations to adjust the durations by percentage.
 Engineering
o Engineering Duration Adjustments
You can enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by
the system for Basic Engineering, Detail Engineering, and
Procurement.
o Client Review Period
You can use the Basic engineering review period field to set the
duration of Activity 0000003013, “CLIENT APPROVAL-ESTIM&SCHED”.
Since all Detail Engineering activities are preceded, directly or
indirectly, by this activity, you may impose a delay of any duration on
the continuation of engineering activity. This effectively breaks up the
work flow to simulate, for example, budget approval delay.

 Construction
You can enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the
system for nine different construction activities. Any change in activity
duration will cause a corresponding change in activity resource (crew).
 Procurement
For each equipment group, you may enter the number of weeks needed to
fabricate and ship the equipment to the site after vendor data approval.

If you make no adjustment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the
following durations:
Equipment Group Duration
Vessels 24 weeks
Towers 36 weeks
Storage Tanks 32 weeks
Pumps 22 weeks
Compressors 50 weeks
Turbines 50 weeks
Heat Exchangers 32 weeks
Boilers 55 weeks
Furnaces 40 weeks
Air Coolers 28 weeks
Package Refrigeration 44 weeks
Generators 26 weeks
Air Dryers 24 weeks
Conveyors 28 weeks
Mills 45 weeks
Fans 16 weeks
Elevators 26 weeks
Motors 16 weeks
Dust Collectors 30 weeks
Filters 16 weeks
Centrifuges 40 weeks
Mixers 16 weeks
Cooling Towers 32 weeks
Miscellaneous
Equipment
26 weeks

Package Items 36 weeks
Packings and Linings 20 weeks
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic
Logic Modification
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides sequencing logic, varying with the
activities present, for all engineering and construction activities, except as
follows:
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted for system-designed
activities, such as project site development.
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted because the activity is
user-specified.
 Where a logical chain of activities has been substantially broken by
deletion of activities.
The Logic Modification forms provide the means to either add relationships
between successor and predecessor activities not provided by the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator logic or to modify the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
logic by adding and deleting relationships. Separate forms are provided for
engineering and construction sections of the network. When adding
relationships, a particular relationship type may be specified. However, when
deleting relationships, all relationships between the specified activities are
deleted, regardless of relationship type.
For engineering activities, only engineering predecessors are allowed. For
construction activities, engineering and construction predecessors are
allowed.

To add or delete an engineering relationship:
1 Right-click Engineering; then click Edit to display the Logic
Modification form for engineering.
2 In the Add/delete logic option field, select + or – to indicate whether
you are adding or deleting a relationship.
3 Select a successor activity, or group of activities, for which logic
modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Activity Number.
SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Activity Numbers, which are listed on pages XX676XX
through XX698XX (in Appendix A), have 10 characters. If you want to modify a
group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least
one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
The first three characters of the Activity Number are fixed and the
same for all activities. They are always “000”.
engineering phase:

in the Project Basis (see page XX151XX). It must be a number between 01 and
asterisks (**).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
defined in Appendix C, page XX705XX.
The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account
group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of
Accounts.
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one
asterisk (*).
o Preset engineering field 2
o Sequence in account group number
Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes
are defined in Appendix C, page XX705XX.
4 Select an activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as
predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. Use the fields under

PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY to select an activity the same way you
selected a successor activity.
5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence
to use when adding relationships:
A – Finish-to-Start (default)
S – Start-to-Start
F – Finish-to-Finish
Finish-to-Start (A) and Start-to-Start (S) relationships use the
Predecessor’s work week to calculate calendar lag between activities.
Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week.
The Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting
relationships; all relationships between the specified activities will be
6 Enter the Lag time, in whole working days, associated with the
relationship type to be added. The default is 0 days.
7 Click Apply.
8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat the process.
To add or delete a construction relationship:
Note: Enter either an engineering or a construction predecessor, not both.
1 Right-click Construction; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.

3 Select a successor construction activity, or group of activities, for which
logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of
the Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR
ACTIVITY. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B,
o Area number

asterisks (**).
Note: See Appendix D, page XX707XX, for the Equipment Code definitions.
o Equipment type
to be selected.
Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last three
characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the
account group number and account code.
o Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth characters of the Activity Code for the
activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first
character, which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity
Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
o Contractor number
contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
4 You can select either an engineering or a construction activity, or group of
activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified
Successor. This is done by entering all or part of an engineering or
construction Activity Number.
5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence to
use when adding relationships:

Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week. The
Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting
7 Click Apply.
Activity Modification
The Activity Modification forms for engineering and construction allow you to
modify the coding of activities. Activities may be combined within a common
activity number or deleted entirely.
Activities can be combined by changing an activity number to another existing
number. Specify all or part of an existing activity number, then all or part of
the other activity number that will replace it. Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)
will sort the activities into numerical order, merging all identically numbered
activities, including the craft resources.
Activities can be deleted by selecting an activity and then entering asterisks
instead of the number of a modified activity.
To modify engineering activities:
1 Right-click Engineering; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 Select a source activity by specifying all or part of the Engineering Activity
Number.
The parts of the Engineering Activity Number are broken up into the fields
under SOURCE ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in
Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities,
you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields
(besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
Note: See Appendix A for a list of Engineering Activity Numbers.
o Engineering phase
engineering phase:
o Engineering contractor number
characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is

determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis
for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page XX151XX). It must be a
number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are
to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
Exception: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the
Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page XX705XX.
Accounts.
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
are defined in Appendix C, page XX705XX.
3 In the fields under MODIFIED ACTIVITY, specify the changes that are to
be made to the source activity.
4 Click Apply.
5 To modify another activity, click Add and repeat the process.
To modify construction activities:
1 Right-click Construction; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 Select a source activity by specifying all or part of the Construction
Activity Number.
The Construction Activity Number is broken up into the fields under
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in
Appendix B, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of
activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at
least one of the fields must contain numbers.
o Area number
asterisks (**).
Note: See Appendix D, page XX707XX, for the Equipment Code definitions.
o Equipment type

to be selected.
Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last
three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters
form the account group number and account code.
o Account code
Enter the tenth and eleventh characters of the Activity Code for the
o Contractor number
4 Click Apply.
Primavera Information
To edit Primavera information:
1 In the Primavera information folder, right-click Project manager
information; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 You can specify the following information:
o User name
o Password
o Database name
Name of Primavera database where Aspen IPS data will be loaded (for
example, pmdb).
o Remote or local host server
Indicates mode of operation, remote server (RMT) or local machine
(LCL).
o Enterprise project structure ID
Project structure ID for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.
o Enterprise project structure name
Project structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered,
the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.
o Enterprise project manager name
Name of manager (OBS) responsible for Primavera Enterprise. If
nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will
be used.
o Enterprise project WBS name
Work Breakdown structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing
is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.
3 Click Apply to save changes.

Process Design
Note: Process Design specifications are only included in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you are licensed,
you can select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
The Process Design specifications are used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
projects that contain a simulator input. These specs allow Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator to map simulator models into Icarus project components. For
example, a distillation column model in a simulator may be mapped to a
combination of equipment such as a double diameter tower, an air-cooler (for
a condenser), a horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a general service pump
(for a reflux pump) and a thermosiphon reboiler.
The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that the
system uses for mapping all models of the same class. These specs can be
customized in files and used in many projects.
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under Loading
Simulation Data on page X268X.
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs
The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in mapping simulator
units to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units, serving as the cross-reference. To
access, right-click on Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs in the
Project Basis view’s Process Design folder.
The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.
Note: Each simulator cross-reference UOM file contains a basis (which may
be METRIC or I-P). The basis indicates the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
base units set to which simulator units will be converted.

The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The right side
of the screen displays the corresponding Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units.
The conversion factors between the two units are entered in the lower-center
section of the screen.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides a set of common simulator units and
their conversions to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units. You can modify
and/or add units to these files.
Specifying the Mapping for a Simulator Unit
To specify the mapping for a simulator unit:
1 Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the Simulation
Output section. In the example below, the simulation unit is CM/HR
(Centimeters/Hour).
2 Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list in the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator section. In the example below, the units category is
Velocity.
3 Select the appropriate Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit from Units list in
the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator section. In the example below, the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit is M/H (Meters/Hour).
4 Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the simulation unit and
the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit) in the Conversion Factor box. In
the example below, the conversion factor between the two units is 100
because:
100 CM/HR = 1 M/H

Note: If an equivalent Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is not found,
select Miscellaneous as the Units Category and map the simulator unit to
Other in the Units window.
5 Click Save to save the mapping. When a unit has been mapped and
saved, a green box appears next to the simulation unit. A yellow box
indicates the unit is not mapped.
Deleting a Mapping
To delete a mapping, select the simulator unit and then click Delete.
Removing a Unit
To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list, first select the unit
and then click Remove.
Adding a Unit
To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New Units to
Add box in the Simulation Output section and click Add. Changes will not
affect existing project components.
Changing Existing Components
To change existing components, you should unsize the item or unmap the
items and then re-map and re-size.
Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and save the
specifications.

It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator units. When the simulator output is loaded, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units not mapped in
the project’s current simulator cross-reference UOM specification are
automatically added to the list and you are alerted to the need to define the
mapping and re-load the file.
You must correct this in order to continue without problems. Complete the
steps above to specify the mapping for a simulator unit. Scroll through the
Units Used list for any yellow-tagged units. Map all these, save the file, and
re-load the simulator data.
Project Component Map Specifications
The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a list of
models for the selected simulator and a list of the corresponding Icarus
project components to which the simulator models will map.
To access:
1 Right-click Project Component Map Specifications in the Project Basis
view’s Process Design folder.

Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an asterisk (*). If
no asterisk is present, then that model will not generate any project
components when loaded, mapped, and sized.
3 Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by selecting the
simulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.
You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that item. To
change one of the mappings, select an item in the Current Map List, click
Delete One Mapping, and then create a new mapping.
To create a new mapping, click New Mapping and then select an appropriate
Icarus project component.
For simulator column models, an additional specification can be made. Since a
column may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator requires an identification for each of these mappings. Refer to
Mapping Simulator Models in Chapter 4 for tower/column configuration
mapping identifications.
Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
map unsupported simulator models (that is,, models not included in the list
of simulator models on the Project Component Map Specifications dialog
box) to quoted cost items. See page XX56XX for instructions.
Default Simulator Mapping Specs
The following tables list models that are mapped to Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator project components. Models that are not supported can be mapped
to a quoted item if you mark “Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item”
in Preferences (Process tab).

AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs
Model
Name
Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Default
CCD Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL
COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas
turbine with combustion chamber
CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher
CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector
DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process
DISTL Shortcut distillation rating Single-diameter trayed tower
DSTWU Shortcut distillation design Single-diameter trayed tower
ESP Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse
FILTER Continuous rotary vacuum Rotary drum filter
FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FSPLIT Stream splitter
HEATER TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HEATX TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYCYC Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral
PUMP Pump/hydraulic turbine Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump
RADFRAC TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger  Single-diameter trayed tower
(column)
 Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
 U-tube reboiler (reboiler)
 Horizontal drum (accumulator)
 Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump (reflux pump)
PETROFAC TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger  Single-diameter trayed tower
(column)
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
 Furnace block
RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RCSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor
jacketed
REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor-gibbs Agitated Tank – enclosed, energy

jacketed minimization
RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
SCREEN Wet or dry screen separator Vibrating system
SWASH Single-stage solids washer Rotary drum filter
VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector
ChemCAD V Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default
BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector
COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or
polytopic Compression
Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor
CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basket centrifuge
CRYS Crystallizer or melting by
cooling/heating
Batch vacuum crystallizer
CSED Solid-wall basket centrifuge
separating solids from liq
slurry
Solid bowl centrifuge
CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector
DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer
EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor
ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger
FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure
filter
Rotary disk filter
GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor
HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation equipment)
HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow or
continuous stirred tank
reactors)
Agitated tank reactor
LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
MIXE Stream mixer (flash
calculation at output
pressure)
Vertical cylindrical vessel
PUMP Liquid pump (to increase
pressure of liquid stream)
Centrifugal pump
REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor

SCDS Simultaneous correction
rigorous fractionation (single
column)
 Single diameter trayed tower
(condenser)
 Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
(reflux pump)
SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibrating screen
TOWR Inside/out rigorous
fractionation (single column)
 Single diameter trayed tower
(condenser)
(reflux pump)
WASH Washer Washer dust collector
Hysim Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column  Single-diameter trayed tower
 Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
(reflux pump)
COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor
CSTR Continuous stirred-
tank
Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATEX Simple heat
exchanger
Floating head heat exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid
hydrocyclone
Water only cyclones - mineral separation
PIPING Pipeline
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat
exchanger
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric
reactor
Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
HYSYS Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default
AIR COOLER Air cooler Air cooler, free-standing or rack-mounted.
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
CSTR Continuous stirred-
tank
Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER TEMA Shell and Tube
Exchanger
HEATX TEMA Shell and Tube
Exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid
hydrocyclone
Water only cyclones – mineral separation
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
SimSci’s Pro/II Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Default
CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge
COLUMN UNITS Distillation column  Single-diameter trayed tower
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
CRYSTAL Crystallizer Oslo growth type crystallizer
CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state
depressure
Vertical vessel - process
DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer

FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump
REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Design Criteria
After the simulator model is loaded into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
mapping and sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sized
inside the simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically brought into
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and used.
Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the instructions in
Chapter 5. In addition to process information obtained from the simulator,
certain design specifications may be required before sizing can be
accomplished.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator’s Sizing Expert uses design values based on the
user-defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteria
sub-folder. The values on these forms provide the basis for developing design
specifications from operating conditions for all equipment to be sized.
You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature) for all
equipment (using the Common form) and also enter design conditions for
types of equipment. (Conditions entered on the equipment type forms
override those on the Common form).

Common
Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common specifications form
applies to all equipment except equipment for which you have separately
specified these design conditions.
 Design Pressure
Click in the Design Pressure field to open the Design Pressure
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for
calculating the design pressure based on the range in which the operating
pressure falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operating
pressure using the formula shown on the form. You can modify the
pressure limit (upper and lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.
Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the
Design Pressure – Multiplier field was used. This field has now been
replaced by the Design Pressure Specifications form. If projects
created using these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A
and B are automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.
This ensures that old projects can be carried over using the same design
criteria.
 Design Temperature
Click in the Design Temperature field to open the Design Temperature
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for
calculating the design temperature based on the range in which the
operating temperature falls. The design pressure is calculated from the
operating temperature using the formula shown on the form. You can
modify the temperature ranges (upper and lower limit) as well as
parameters A and B.

Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the
Design Temperature - Increase field was used. This field has now
been replaced by the Design Temperature Specifications form. If projects
created using these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A
and B are automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.
Pumps
In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions
under Common, page XX200XX), you can enter the following design criteria for
pumps:
 Pump Overdesign Factor
The pump overdesign factor is used by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to
increase the volumetric throughput of the pump and the power
requirement of the pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated from
the simulator information is multiplied by the value provided in this field
to estimate the design flow rate for the equipment.
For example:
o Operation flow rate: 250 GPM
o Pump overdesign factor: 1.1
o Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM
Compressors
compressors:
 Driver Type
Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default value is None.
The selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE, MOTOR, TURBINE.
Heat Exchangers
Using Shell&TubeMech detailed Heat Exchanger costing for Icarus cost
estimation of TEAM Heat Exchangers.

To use Shell and Tube Mechanical for heat exchange sizing:
1 In your project, add a TEMA shell and tube heat exchanger to the main
area.
2 Enter values to all the required fields (boxes with red and yellow highlight)
3 Enter values for the following Material of Construction fields:
o Tube material
o Shell material
o Tube sheet material
o Channel material
4 Click the arrow next to the Size button.
5 Click Shell&TubeMech for sizing.
The Icarus window will be hidden and, in a couple of seconds, the Icarus
project evaluation dialog will appear
After the evaluation is over – in a second or two - a message box saying The
Shell&TubeMech GUI will now be launched appears.
6 Click OK to launch the Shell&TubeMech GUI.

The Shell&TubeMech GUI appears.
7 In the Shell&TubeMech GUI, specify the details of the heat exchanger.
8 When you have specified the details of the heat exchanger, click Run |
Run Shell&TubeMech | Calculations + Cost Estimate.
A program status dialog box will pop up during the Shell&TubeMech run.
9 After Shell&TubeMech has finished calculations, close the program
status dialog box.
10 Close the Shell&TubeMech GUI by clicking File | Close.
After the Shell&TubeMech GUI closes, the Icarus window reappears.
11 Evaluate the heat exchanger to import Shell&TubeMech design values
into the Icarus item report.
heat exchangers:
 Launch MUSE
MUSE™ performs detailed simulation of multi-stream plate-fin heat
exchangers made from brazed aluminum, stainless steel or titanium.
A valid MUSE version 3.3 license is required to use this feature.

Select “Yes” to launch MUSE during interactive sizing of plate fin heat
exchangers. Select “No” to run MUSE in the silent mode.
 Furnace Fractional Efficiency
The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed duty. Total
fired duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty by fractional
efficiency. This value should be <1.0.
 Fuel Heating Value
The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel consumption by
fired furnaces.
 Air Cooler Inlet Temperature
This field represents the default value that shall be used as the inlet air
temperature in the case of Air Coolers.
 Air Cooler Exit Temperature
Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the surface area of
air cooled heat exchangers. The value given in this field is used as the exit
temperature for the air cooler.
If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert assigns the
exit air temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater than the inlet air
temperature.
For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG F and you do
not enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
uses 87.0 DEG F as the default value.
 Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design engineers
sometimes apply the 2/3rd
rule in calculating the design pressure. As per
ASME heat exchanger code, if the design pressure of the lower-pressure
side (either tube or shell) is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on the
high-pressure side, then overpressure in the high-pressure side will not
result in rupture in the lower-pressure side (provided relief devices have
been properly sized).
When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure of the low
pressure side to at least 67% of the design pressure of the high pressure
side, even when the operating pressure on the low pressure side could
result in a lower design pressure as per the Design Pressure field.
 Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value given in the
field.
The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer area.
For example:
o Calculated surface area = 1000 SF
o Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1
o Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 = 1100 SF
Note that the final surface area in general is greater than the calculated
value because of mechanical considerations.

Towers
under Common, page XX200XX), you can enter the following design criteria on the
Towers form (applies to all towers):
 Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that
required for separation is provided at the bottom for liquid level and
reboiler return.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
 R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)
The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the number of
theoretical stages required for different ratios of operating reflux ratio (R)
to minimum reflux ratio (R-Minimum).
The number of stages should be available in the simulator report for the
ratio chosen.
 Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that
required for separation is provided at the top for vapor disengagement
before passing to the condenser.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
Packed Towers
packed towers:
 Packing Type
Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in packed towers.
The type of packing affects the flood point pressure drop estimation and
the packing efficiency (HETP) value.
The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the calculation of the
tower diameter and height.
 Packing Factor for Packings
Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to estimate
pressure drop at the flood point. Once the pressure drop is known, the
flood velocity is calculated using the latest versions of the generalized
pressure drop correlation (GPDC) charts for both the random and
structured packings.
 Packed Tower Derating Factor
With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such
discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load
obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated flood
load for the given system.

The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of
the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating
factor.
If you do not enter a value, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses 1.0 as the
derating factor.
 Packed Tower Flooding Factor
Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the flood point
velocity. This allows a sufficient margin for uncertainties associated with
the flood point concept and prediction and to keep the design point away
from the region at which efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the flood
point).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided
value is not available.
 HETP
The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate) enables
comparison of efficiency between packed and plate columns. Because
there are only a few variables that significantly affect HETP and due to the
unreliability of even the best mass transfer models, rules of thumb for
HETP successfully compete with the mass transfer models.
For the packing types available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (given in
the Icarus Reference), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimates the HETP
value based on the packing shape, dimensions and type of material. If a
user-provided value is available, then the Sizing Expert uses the value in
the above field for calculating the height of the packed tower.
 Packed Section Height
The value represents the height of each packed section and is used in the
design of packed towers to estimate the number of packed sections.
 Surface Area Per Unit Volume
Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume) increases
vapor-liquid contact area and therefore, efficiency. For structured
packings, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator determines this value empirically
and uses it in estimating HETP if you have not already specified an HETP
value.
A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a user-entered
value.
Trayed Towers
trayed towers:
 Trayed Tower Flooding Factor
Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is sufficient to
cause the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to the tray spacing plus
the weir height. At this point, the liquid backup in the downcomer is just
at the point of overflowing the weir on the plate above. When this
happens, the column fills with a foamy liquid and becomes inoperable.

The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding, that is,,
(Actual Vapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of flooding).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided
value is not available.
 Foaming Tendency
Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure systems.
However, vapor disengagement from downcomer liquid in foaming
systems is difficult as the liquid hangs on to the entrained vapor.
Sufficient residence time must be provided in the downcomer to allow
adequate disengagement of vapor from the descending liquid. Industrial
practice has created a guideline for the mum downcomer velocity of clear
liquids based on their foaming tendency.
The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are used based on
the choice for the above field.
Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)
Tray Spacing, INCHES
Foaming
Tendency
18 24 30
Low 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 0.6 0.6 – 0.7
Moderate 0.3 – 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 - 0.6
High 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 - 0.3
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such
discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming tendency of
factor. If the user-specified value is not available, a derating factor is
selected based on the value of foaming tendency.
The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.
 Trayed Tower Derating Factor
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such a
discrepancy, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of
factor.
If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is entered in
the field, then the derating factor is selected based on the foaming
tendency of the liquids in the column.
 Relative Volatility of Key Components

The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained from the
simulator report. The actual number of trays is calculated by using the
tray efficiency value provided by the user in the design criteria file.
However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray efficiency for
the separation is estimated by using the correlation of relative volatility of
key components with tray efficiency. The O’Connell correlation is used to
estimate the overall tray efficiency.
 Tray Efficiency
Overall column efficiency is defined by:
E_oc = N_t/ N_a
where:
N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation minus the
sum of theoretical stages provided by the reboiler, condenser, and
intermediate heat exchangers.
N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.
Several empirical correlations are available in the literature. Also, rigorous
theoretical predictions based on gas and liquid film resistances are
available to assist in predicting the tray efficiency.
If the user specification is not available for the field, then the value is
estimated using empirical correlations from the literature.
Configurations Towers
Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.
Vessels
under Common, page XX200XX), you can enter the following design criteria on the
Vessels form (applies to all process vessels):
 Residence Time
The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the liquid
volumetric flow through a vessel in a specified amount of time. The vessel
volume divided by volumetric flow rate is defined as the residence time for
the vessel.
For example:
 Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM
 Residence time: 5 MIN
 Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500 CF.
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and
Horizontal Vessel Design)
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator defaults for this field are used if the field is
empty or has the value of “0.0.” The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator defaults
depend on the operating conditions for the vessel. Based on the operating
pressure of the vessel obtained from the simulator report, the following
values are used:
Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio

0 – 250 3
250 – 500 4
> 500 5
For example:
 Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA
 Diameter: 6 FEET
 Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET
Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.
 Minimum Vessel Diameter
The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel diameter
calculated by the sizing routines is less than this value.
 Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method
When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators, Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity using the
method selected in this field.
 Liquid Entrainment Method:
This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and is a function
of vapor and liquid densities, and the parameter Kv, which itself is a
polynomial function of vapor and liquid flows and densities.
 Particle size separation method:
This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the liquid droplet
in the continuous vapor phase. The design velocity is determined as a
percentage of the disengagement velocity.
 Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation
method)
This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter. This value
is used in the design of horizontal and vertical vessels by the particle size
separation method (which can be selected in the Vapor/Liquid
Separator Sizing Method field right above this field).
 Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For particle
size separation method)
This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable design
velocity, which is a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
For example:
 Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5
 Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5 FEET/SECOND
 Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method)
In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used to
determine the maximum allowable vapor velocity. The separation factor is
either entered by the user in this field or computed by Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator using the relation described in the vessel sizing design
procedure.

Agitated Vessels
agitated vessels:
 Agitator Type
The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are described
in the Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected determines the
default driver power and impeller speed. This is used to estimate the
agitation requirements in tanks.
Storage Vessels
storage vessels:
 Number of Holding Days
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid
required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
uses this field to determine the liquid volume stored in the vessel.
For example:
 Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day.
 Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user).
 Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.
 Holding Hours in a Day
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid
required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
uses this field to determine the liquid volume required per day.
For example:
 Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH.
 Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user).
 Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.
 Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on the process
fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual dimensions (height and
diameter) of the equipment must be estimated. You can specify the
dimensional requirements of the equipment using this field.
A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The default
depends on the operating conditions for the vessel.
 Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)
A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required liquid
volume.

Horizontal Vessels
horizontal vessels:
 Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area
Once Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculates the maximum vapor
velocity, the velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor space
required. The vapor space is then divided by the vapor area /cross-
sectional area to get the total required cross-sectional area.
The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.
 Separation Factor Multiplier
For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher under
similar operating conditions than for vertical vessels. Therefore, the
calculated separation factor is multiplied by the separation factor
multiplier.
 Minimum Boot Length
When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations, the heavy
second liquid phase is removed in the drip leg situated at the bottom of
the vessel.
 Minimum Boot Diameter
This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed to remove
the heavy second liquid.
 Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid velocity field
specified in this field and the process vessel height to diameter ratio.
Vertical Vessels
vertical vessels:
 Minimum Disengagement Height
This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.
 Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator
Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.
 Height of Mist Eliminator
Height of mist eliminator section.
 Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps
The liquid level based on residence time should meet this minimum
specification. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
 Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap
Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and the high
liquid level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels
section.)
 Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line

Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the tangent
line. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
Miscellaneous
 Vibrating Screen Feed Material
This field specifies the solid material type used by solids handling
equipment. The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is
defined as the amount of solids (TPH) flowing through one square foot of
screen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth
having 50% or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening size, the
screen unit capacity is estimated.
The following choices are available for this field:
 Sand and Gravel
 Limestone/Crushed Stones
 Coal
 Cinders
 Coke
 Wood
 Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity
of 150 FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.
Configurations Flash
Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.
Utility Specifications
Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility fluids to
operate. The choice of which utilities to use often plays an important role in
determining the total project cost, since the utility type affects heat transfer
equipment sizing. In addition, utility costs form an important part of the
operating costs of the plant.
In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
permits you to select appropriate process utility fluids for the application. You
can select utility fluids from those already available in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator or create your own based on utility fluid classes allowed by Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator. Once the utility resource for the equipment is selected
(either by you or the Sizing Expert), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates a
utility process stream for the equipment. The utility stream information
includes the amount of utility used by the equipment. During the operating
cost evaluation, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator processes all the utility streams
connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost for every utility
resource used in the project.
You can override these selections by a combination of disabling/enabling
appropriate utilities and re-mapping and re-sizing the equipment items.

Alternately, you can specify the desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert.
This method is available even if the utility has been disabled.
To modify or create a utility stream:
1 Right-click on Utility Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Process
Design folder; then, on the menu that appears, and then click Edit.
The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides 11 default utility streams
resources:
 Cooling Water
 High Temp Heating Oil *
 Low Temp Heating Oil **
 Refrigerant – Ethane
 Refrigerant - Ethylene
 Refrigerant - Freon 12
 Refrigerant - Propane
 Refrigerant - Propylene

 Steam @165 PSI
 Steam @100 PSI
 Steam @400 PSI
 High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
 ** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM
E.
2 To modify an existing utility stream, highlight it on the Modify Existing
Stream list and click Modify.
To create a new utility stream:
1 Click Create in the Option section.
2 In the Create New Utility Stream section, type the name and select one
of the following fluid classes:
 High Temp Heating Oil *
 Low Temp Heating Oil **
 Refrigerant – Ethane
 Refrigerant – Ethylene
 Refrigerant – Freon 12
 Refrigerant – Propane
 Refrigerant – Propylene
 Refrigerant 50 Utility
 Steam
 Water
 High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
 ** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM
E.
3 Click Create.
4 Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility Specifications form.

The form contains the following fields:
o Description:
Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report generated by
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. Also, the field value is used to represent
the utility fluid usage and its related cost on the Project Summary
investment analysis spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
o Fluid:
Determines the type of utility fluid described by the current
specification. The fluid class is used to determine the heat transfer
coefficient, fouling tendency and related thermal and transport
properties used by Sizing Expert.
o Design Temperature
Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the estimation
of the design temperature for the process equipment carrying the
utility fluid.
o Design Pressure:
Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the estimation of
the design pressure for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.
o Inlet temperature:
Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.
o Exit temperature:
Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.
o Pressure:
Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.
o Energy transfer per unit mass:
Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by the utility fluid
over the specified temperature range. The value in this field is used to
estimate the amount of utility required for the given process
conditions.
o Unit Cost:
Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for the project.
o Unit Cost Units:
Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost field.
When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the information on
the specification form must be provided; otherwise, the Sizing Expert
will not be able to use the utility fluid resource properly.
Using the utility specification form, you can specify a maximum of 20
utility fluids.
If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation, then it is
added to the utility resource in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
o Utility type:
Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat source or
Heat sink.
5 When you are done entering the utility specifications, click OK.

Investment Analysis
Note: Investment Analysis specifications are only included in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator. If
you select at startup to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator in the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator environment, the Investment Analysis specifications
appear in the Project Basis view.
Investment Parameters
To specify parameters required for investment analysis:
1 Right-click on Investment Parameters in the Project Basis view’s
Investment Analysis folder.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Investment Parameters in the Main
Window.
A description of the parameters follows.
General Investment Parameters
 Period Description
This field lets you enter text indicating the name/description of a period.
The period is defined in “Number of Weeks per Period.” The period
description is used in the display of some of the results in the
spreadsheets.
 Number of Weeks per Period
The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of number of
weeks.
 Number of Periods for Analysis
The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project totals
and calculations.
 Tax Rate

The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period, is
used to calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that must be
paid to the government.
 Desired Rate of Return
The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.
 Economic Life of Project
This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which
capital costs will be depreciated.
 Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the end of
the Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a percent of
initial capital cost.
 Depreciation Method
There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator. The description of each follows:
 Straight Line
The straight line method is used most commonly. In this method, the
Salvage Value is subtracted from the Total Project Cost. This result is
then divided by the Economic Life of Project, so that the project is
depreciated evenly over its economic life.
 Sum of the Digits
When this method is used, the Depreciation Expense decreases during
each period of the Economic Life of Project. Therefore, the highest
value for the depreciation occurs in the first period and decreases
every period thereafter. The sum of the digits multiplier is
n/((N(N+1))/2), where N is the Economic amount is the Total Project
Cost less its Salvage Value. For the duration of the project’s economic
life, this factor is multiplied by the depreciable amount.
 Double Declining (Balance)
When this method is used, the project is depreciated in geometric
increments. The multiplier for the first period is 2/N, where N is the
Economic Life of Project. For the second period the depreciation rate,
D2, is (1-D1)D1 where D1 is 2/N. For the third period, the depreciation
rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2. For the fourth period, the depreciation rate is
(1-D1)D3. These factors are multiplied by the Total Project Cost. This
process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost) continues until the
Straight Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation.
When the Straight Line Method produces a higher value, this higher
value is used for the remaining depreciation calculations.
 Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS)
The ACRS approach assumes that operations begin during the second
half of the first period and stop during the first half of the last period.
Therefore, as a result of the two half-periods (one at the beginning
and one at the end of the operating cycle), it takes 6 periods to
depreciate a project which has an Economic Life of 5 periods. The
ACRS adapts the Double Declining Balance Method to the half-life
system. The depreciation rate for the first period, D1, is 2/N, where N
is the Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life convention
reduces this factor to 1/N. For the second period the depreciation rate,
D2, is D1(1-1/ N). For the third period the depreciation rate, D3, is

D1(1-1/N-D2). This process (multiplying the factor by the Total Project
Cost continues until the Straight Line Method produces a higher value
for the depreciation. When the Straight Line Method produces a higher
value, this higher value is used for the remaining depreciation
calculations.
Escalation Parameters
 Project Capital Escalation
This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses may
increase expressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-
Procure-Construct (EPC) period and start-up period is greater than one
whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used to escalate the capital
expenses for periods beyond the first period.
 Products Escalation
This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility are
to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
 Raw Material Escalation
This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to be
escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
 Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the
facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period. The
operating labor costs include operators per shift and supervisory costs.
 Utilities Escalation
User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase
each period.
Project Capital Parameter
 Working Capital Percentage
The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital expense per
period indicates the amount required to operate the facility until the
revenue from product sales is sufficient to cover costs. It includes current
assets such as cash, accounts receivable and inventories. When the facility
starts producing revenue, this cost item can be covered by the product
sales.
Operating Costs Parameters
 Operating Supplies
This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are required in
order to run the plant in terms of cost per period.
 Laboratory Charges
This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product analyzed
each period.
 Operating Charges
This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is specified as
a percentage of the operating labor costs. (If you specify a value for either

“Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory Charges”, the system will add the two
entered values and calculate the percentage of Operating Labor Costs.
(This is done for compatibility with earlier releases of the system.)
 Plant Overhead
This field consists of charges during production for services, facilities,
payroll overhead, and so on This number is specified as a percent of
operating labor and maintenance costs. This number should not be used
for the construction of the facility, only for operation after start-up.
 G and A Expenses
This represents general and administrative costs incurred during
production such as administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product
distribution and sales costs. Specify this number as a percentage of
subtotal operating costs.
Facility Operation Parameters
 Facility Type
This field defines the facility type. The following types are currently
available:
 Chemical Processing Facility
 Food Processing Facility
 Oil Refining Facility
 Petrochemical Processing Facility
 Pharmaceutical Facility
 Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility
 Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty chemical is defined
as a chemical which is produced in low quantity and has a usually high
price per unit.)
The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenance
costs of facility equipment.
 Operating Mode
This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available options are:
 Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day
 Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
 Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day
 Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift
 Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift
 Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day
 Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
The operating mode of the facility affects the number of operators/shift
and maintenance costs of facility equipment.
 Length of Start-up Period
After the facility has been constructed (that is,, gone through engineering,
procurement and construction), the plant must go through the owner’s
start-up period until it starts producing the product to be sold. This period
is referred to as Length of Start-up Period in weeks and is added into the
EPC duration.

 Operating Hours per Period
This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant will be
operating.
 Process Fluids
Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process. The
selection affects operating and maintenance costs. The selections are:
 Liquids
 Liquids and Gases
 Liquids and Solids
 Liquids, Gases, and Solids
 Gases
 Gases and Solids
 Solids
Operating Unit Costs
To specify operating unit costs:
1 In the Project Basis view’s Investment Analysis folder, right-click
Operating Unit Costs.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Operating Unit Costs in the Main
Window.
The Operating Unit Cost form specifies Labor Unit Costs and non-heat
transfer Utility Unit Costs.

Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The total cost of
operating labor is calculated by:
1 Determining the total number of operators and supervisors necessary to
run the facility for a certain number of hours.
2 Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility operates per
period.
3 Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs and adding
them together.
Labor Unit Costs
 Operator
The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the cost
per operator per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is associated
with operating the facility.
 Supervisor
The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per
supervisor per hour. Supervision includes all labor associated with
overseeing personnel who operate the facility.
 Utility Unit Costs
The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file as
“over the fence” costs. Utilities used for process heating and cooling are
given in the Utility Specifications file.
 Electricity
The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.
 Potable Water
The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.
 Fuel
The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.
 Instrument Air
The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.
Raw Material Specifications
An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide an
accurate figure for total project expenditure. Since operating costs are usually
a large part of this cost, it is important to accurately account for all raw
materials consumed in the process.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you identify simulator streams as raw
materials for the process.
The raw material costs will be directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS
spreadsheet for use in cash flow analyses.
To develop raw material specifications:
1 Right-click Raw Material Specifications in the Project Basis view’s
Investment Analysis folder; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
2 In the Option group, click Create.
3 In the Create New Stream group, type a name for the stream.
4 Select the Basis (Mass, Volume, or Energy) and the Phase (Solid, Liquid,
or Gas) for the stream.
5 Click Create.
The Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
6 The following input information is required in order to estimate the raw
material costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project:
o Process Stream (or “none” if user-defined)

o Rate (do not specify a rate if a process stream is selected)
o Cost Per Unit.
In addition to the above minimum information, you must specify certain
field values for the raw material fluid program to estimate the raw
material rate necessary for the cost estimate.
If you specify “none” in the Process Stream field, then the value for the
Rate field must be specified in the appropriate units. If you specify a
process stream, then the program determines the raw material rate in the
desired Specification Basis and units.
You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.
The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following fields:
 Description
The value you provide in this field will be used to describe the raw
material in the Project Summary investment analyses spreadsheet
(PROJSUM.ICS)
 Specification Basis
This field describes the raw material properties from the following list:
o Mass, Gas
o Mass, Liquid
o Mass, Solid
o Volume, Gas
o Volume, Liquid
o Volume, Solid
o Energy
 Process Stream
This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the current project.
You can select any stream to represent the raw material. Also, there is
a provision in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for you to provide actual
value for the raw material rate if none of the process streams
represent the raw materials for the project. In this case, you must
specify the field value as “none.”
 Rate
This field gives the total rate of raw materials consumed for the
process in the desired rate units.
When a new raw material fluid is specified, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator checks whether enough information has been specified to
estimate the raw material cost.
 Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current raw material. The
choices available for the field vary with the selection made for
Specification Basis and your choice of Base UOM:
Specification Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Gas LB/H
KLB/H
MLB/H
TPH
KG/H
MEGAG/H
TON/H

Mass, Liquid LB/H
KLB/H
MLB/H
TPH
KG/H
MEGAG/H
TON/H
Mass, Solid LB/H
KLB/H
MLB/H
TPH
KG/H
MEGAG/H
TON/H
Volume, Gas GPH
MMGAL/H
CFH
KCFH
M3/H
L/S
Volume, Liquid GPH
MMGAL/H
CFH
KCFH
M3/H
L/S
Volume, Solid GPH
MMGAL/H
CFH
KCFH
M3/H
L/S
Energy BTU/H
MMBTU/H
MEGAW
CAL/H
W
KW
 Unit Cost
This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume or energy used to
estimate the raw material cost for the project.
7 When you are done entering raw material specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop
Raw Materials Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of
150 raw material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Product Specifications
An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include an
accurate figure for the project’s total revenue. In order to do so, it is very
important to accurately account for all the products obtained from the
process.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you identify simulation streams as product
materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator determines the necessary amount of product materials
generated based on the information provided in the product material
specification file.
The product material costs are directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS
spreadsheet, where they are used for further cashflow analyses.

To develop product specifications:
1 Right-click Product Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Investment
Analysis folder; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.
2 In the Option group, click Create.
3 Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase, and then click
Create.
The Product Specifications dialog box appears.
4 The following input information is needed for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
to estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of the
operating costs for the project:

 Description
The value specified in this field is used to describe the product material
fluid in the investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
 Specification Basis
This field describes the product material properties from the following
list:
o Mass, Gas
o Mass, Liquid
o Mass, Solid
o Volume, Gas
o Volume, Liquid
o Volume, Solid
o Energy
 Process Stream
This field provides a list of streams present in the current project. You
can select any of the streams to represent the product material. Also,
there is a provision in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for providing an
actual value for the product material rate if none of the process
streams represent the product materials for the project. In this case,
you must specify the field value as “none.”
 Rate
This field defines the total rate of product materials obtained for the
process in the desired rate units. Do not enter a value if you have
specified a process stream.
When a new product material is specified, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator checks whether the minimum information necessary to
estimate the product material cost has been specified.
The following minimum information must be present before Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator can proceed with the estimate.
 Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current product material.
The choices available for the field vary with the selection made for
Specification Basis and your choice of Base UOM:
Mass, Gas LB/H
KLB/H
MLB/H
TPH
KG/H
MEGAG/H
TON/H
Mass, Liquid LB/H
KLB/H
MLB/H
TPH
KG/H
MEGAG/H
TON/H
Mass, Solid LB/H
KLB/H
MLB/H
TPH
KG/H
MEGAG/H
TON/H

Volume, Gas GPH
MMGAL/H
CFH
KCFH
M3/H
L/S
Volume, Liquid GPH
MMGAL/H
CFH
KCFH
M3/H
L/S
Volume, Solid GPH
MMGAL/H
CFH
KCFH
M3/H
L/S
Energy BTU/H
MMBTU/H
MEGAW
CAL/H
W
KW
Unit Cost
The field provides the cost value used to estimate the product material cost
for the project.
5 When you are done entering product specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop
Product Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150
product material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Developing Streams
After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have the option
to develop completely new streams or use an existing stream as a base.
When an existing stream is used as a base, the new stream can be either
copied from the existing stream (Absolute Basis mode) or copied from and
linked dynamically to the existing stream (Relative Basis mode).
To develop streams, right-click on Streams in the Project Basis view’s main
folder (at the bottom), and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Develop Streams dialog box appears.
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream
To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the Modify tab
view. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a stream if a large
number of streams exist in the project. With the desired stream highlighted,
click Modify to have the stream information displayed in a specifications
form.
The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form
are explained below:

Click To do this:
OK Perform a check on the information currently present in the Develop
Stream specifications form to ensure that all information needed to
specify the stream is completed. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates
error messages indicating missing data.
Generate estimates for any specifications not entered.
Save the information in the Develop Stream specifications form. The
Develop Stream specifications form closes and the Develop Streams
dialog box re-appears.
Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the Develop Stream
specifications form. This lets you review the estimates and revise the
data.
Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary Fluid Component, the
Temperature, and/or the Pressure were changed, then all the physical
properties of the stream will be estimated using these new values.
Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form without making checks and
does not save or change any information in the database.
Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream specifications form to the
values previously saved into the database. Any changes have been made
since opening the form will be lost.
Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture Information dialog
box discussed below.
Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation. Those that
do are described below.
 Primary Fluid Component
One of the most important specifications in this form is Primary Fluid
Component, which is classifies the chemical components of a stream. The
fluid selected here is used as the basis for any properties that are
unavailable and need to be estimated to complete the specifications for
the stream. The available general fluid classifications are:
o Alcohol
o Aromatic Liquid
o Halogenated Gas
o Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Hydrocarbon Gas
o Inorganic Gas
o Light Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid
o Miscellaneous Organic Gas
o Organic Acid
o Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Solid
The following pure components are also available for selection as the
Primary Fluid Component of a stream:
 Acetic Acid  Glycerol  Phosphoric Acid

 Ammonia  Hydrogen  Propane
 Argon  Isopropyl Alcohol  Propanol
 Carbon Monoxide  Methane  Propylene
 Carbon Dioxide  Methanol  Steam
 Ethane  N-Butanol  Sulfuric Acid
 Ethanol  Nitric Acid  Toluene
 Ethyl Benzene  Nitrogen  Water
 Ethylene  Oxygen
If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed information
will be filled in with default values. This feature is only apparent when no
temperature or pressure is entered into the Develop Stream specifications
form and the Primary Fluid Component is changed. After changing the
Primary Fluid Component, either press Enter or click on another field and
the default values will be loaded. If either the pressure or temperature
value is changed from the default value, clicking OK , Apply, or Update
will estimate the properties at the new condition(s).
 Base Stream
The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on which the
displayed stream was based. This cannot be changed.
If the name begins with the character “$”, the stream was created using
Absolute Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the
parent stream. A stream created using Absolute Basis uses the data from
the parent stream; however, if the parent steam’s data changes
afterward, the Absolute Basis stream is not updated.
If the value begins with the character “@”, the stream was created using
the Relative Basis and the stream name following this character is that of
the parent stream. A stream created using Relative Basis is updated when
its parent stream’s data changes.
 Description
Select information from the menu to describe the particular stream. For
example, you can indicate the source component of the stream (for
example, From Pump P-103) or tag it with one of the available utility
stream names.
 Mass Flow
The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the stream. For
instance, if the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow specified, the stream is
totally liquid; therefore, it will have no vapor properties estimated for it.
The reverse is true for a case with only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For
cases with both types of flow, all properties will be estimated and the
Primary Fluid Component will belong to the phase of the largest mass
flow.
Note: Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically calculates Total Mass
Flow from the individual mass flow values.

 Density
The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a particular phase
has a mass flow rate specified, then the corresponding density must also
be specified. Clicking Update will estimate any required Density fields
based on the flow rate, except in the case of Solid Mass Density. It is
recommended that you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is available.
Mixture Specs Dialog Box
Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form accesses the
Mixture Specs dialog box.
Note: After you click Apply, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer normalizes the
Fraction values to total a sum of one.
The values shown to the right would change into the values shown on the
next page.
The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to estimate
properties as a mixture of the specified composition. If no mixture information
is present, the stream is assumed to be pure Primary Fluid Component. The
fraction information can be entered on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis,
as specified in the Fraction Basis section.
The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their respective
buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form.
The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as their
respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form, except the
checking is different. Here, a check is made to ensure that the fractions have
a total sum of one. If not, the values are normalized to give a total sum of
one, as indicated below.

The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by combining the
two fraction specifications.
After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of decreasing
fractional amount, as shown above. When you click OK, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator loads into the specifications form the name of the fluid with the
highest fraction and the properties of the mixture generated from the
contributions of the individual components.
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting
Costs in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the streams
that are present in the project are taken into consideration for the estimation
of the utility usage for the project. This includes all utility streams, user-
defined streams, simulator streams, and pre-map Streams. The Description
field on the Develop Stream spreadsheet can be used to designate streams as
utilities. If the Description field for a stream exactly matches (exact text
characters and spaces) the Description field for any utility resource as given
on the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream is included in the
utility usage calculation. If you change the description of any of the simulator
or pre-map streams, then the new description you provided is used for this
calculation.
Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature of the
stream. If the stream is being generated then it is considered to be revenue
for the project, and if it is being consumed it is considered an expense.
Note: Streams that are connected at both ends to process equipments are
ignored in estimating the utility usage costs. Also, utility streams that have a
zero unit cost do not show up in the final report.
User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do not show
up in the PFD) are considered as input streams, that is, consumption.
System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage calculation
as long as they are connected to equipment. A case where they would be

disconnected would be if you manually disconnect these streams or if the
equipment to which these streams are connected is deleted.
Stream Connectivity
Process streams are “connected” to project components in a real way. You
can see this in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD), which you can display after
loading and mapping simulator blocks. Each stream has a Source end and a
Sink end. The Source end connects to an Outlet port on a component and the
Sink end to an Inlet as depicted below:
In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page X298X) for the Sink
end of a stream and move the cursor over a component, only Inlet port(s)
turn green, thereby indicating their availability for making a connection to a
Sink end.
The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see
page XX349XX). Only streams whose Sink ends are not connected are listed in the
pulldown for any Inlet. This explains why the Inlet and Outlet pulldowns will
include different streams.
Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form are two
ways of looking at the same information, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator tracks
your changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if you change the
connectivity in one view, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically changes
it in the other view.
When you first map and size components, the streams in the simulator will be
connected to the project components and the underlying process conditions of
those streams are available for further use. For example, you may create new
streams based on the properties of any stream, connected or not, then use
these new streams as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (you
might do this to set up spares). You may also add a New Mapping to an item
already mapped and the newly mapped and sized item utilizes the underlying
stream properties.
Creating A New Stream
You can create streams from scratch or by using a base stream.

To create a stream from scratch:
1 Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box. Without
selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click Create. (The Basis
selection will not matter.)
The Create Stream dialog box appears.
2 Type a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog box. This
name must not be the same as any existing streams in the project. Click
OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears.
Note: See page XX229XX for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this form.
3 Type values for the new stream. See page XX230XX for descriptions of the
different fields. When done, click OK.
To create a stream based on an existing stream:
1 On the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box, click the
stream to be used as the base.

2 Select the Basis mode.
o If the Basis mode is Relative, the data from the two streams
will be linked so that when the base stream is changed the new
stream will inherit these changes.
o If the Basis mode is Absolute, the data from the base stream
is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is
created. Changes in a base stream will not affect a new stream
created via Absolute basis.
3 Click Create.
4 On the Create Stream dialog box Stream Name field, type a name for
the new stream. This name must not be the same as any existing streams
in the project.
5 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the newly
created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream. Data appears gray
(dimmed) to indicate that it is relative to a referenced Base Stream.
Note: See page XX229XX and XX230XX for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this
form.

Even in a Relative Stream, you can override any value with a manual entry. If
you do so, the text turns black, indicating that that value is absolute and
therefore no longer references a Base Stream.
6 Make modifications to the data; then click OK.
Deleting a Stream
To delete a stream:
1 On the Delete tab view, click the stream to be deleted. You may need to
use the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist in
the currently opened project.
Note: Only user-added streams and streams added by the Sizing Expert as
utilities can be deleted.

2 Click Delete.
A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete action.
3 Click OK to delete the stream.
– or –
Click Cancel to retain the stream.
Specification Libraries
The default specifications are derived from files that you can access, when
outside of a project, from the Palette’s Libraries view.
When you create a project scenario, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator selects the
specification files to use based upon the selected units of measure basis.
However, you can right-click on any of the Project Basis specification that
have corresponding libraries in the Palette, click Select on the pop-up menu,
and select a different file from which to derive the default specifications.
Customizing Specification Libraries
When no project is open, you can create your own specification files or edit
existing files. Then, when in a project, you can select your specification files.
For example, if you frequently created project scenarios that used the same
design basis, you could create a Basis for Capital Costs specification file
with those design basis specifications. Then you could just select this file,
instead of entering the specifications every time.
If, after making modifications to your libraries, you wish to revert to the
original libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the installed libraries
provided in the following folder:

…AspenTechEconomic Evaluation V8.0ProgramSysLibraries
Creating a File
To create a specification file:
1 With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the Palette, and
expand the desired specification category.
2 Except for Code of Accounts, right-click on the units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. For Code of Accounts, right-click the
Code of Accounts folder.
3 On the menu that appears, click New.
The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.
3 Type a file name and, if desired, a file description.
4 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the file and displays the specifications in
a separate window.
5 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
6 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
See page XX248XX for instructions on selecting the newly created file for use in a
project.
Modifying a File
To modify an existing specification file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the specification file.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify.
Importing a File
You can import specification files from elsewhere on your computer or
network.
To import a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which you wish to
import a file.
2 Except for Code of Accounts, right-click on the units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. For Code of Accounts, right-click the
Code of Accounts folder.
3 On the menu that appears, click Import.

4 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file and then click
Open.
The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.
Duplicating a File
To duplicate a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file you want to
duplicate.
2 On the menu that appears, click Duplicate.

3 Type a file name and description (optional) for the new file.
3 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the file and displays the specifications in
a separate window.
4 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
5 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
See below for instructions on selecting the newly created file for use in a
project.

Deleting a File
To delete a specification file:
 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file to be deleted, and
then click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.
Customizing Steel Costs Using an External
File
You can customize the unit prices for steel plant bulks in the system using an
external file. The weight break-down for structural steel columns and beams
can also be customized. You can specify the prices of the following plant bulk
steel items using the external file:
Plant bulk steel items Weight used by the system
Extra heavy steel > 80LB/FT [122KG/M]
Heavy steel 40 to 80LB/FT [60 to122KG/M]
Medium steel 20 to 40LB/FT [30 to 60KG/M]
Light steel 12 to 20LB/FT [18 to 30KG/M]
Extra light steel < 12LB/FT [18KG/M]
Reinforcing bars (Rebar)
Ladders with cage 18 LB/FT
Ladders without cage 10 LB/FT
Handrails 17 LB/FT
Stair channels 13.4 LB/FT
Stair treads 30.4 lb/each
Platforms 20.62 LB/SF
Grating 1x3/16 IN [25x5 MM] CS welded bar
Diagonal Bracing
To use the external steel file:
1 In the project basis view, under Customer External Files, right-click
Steel Material; then click Select.

A Default file is provided as an example for you.
2 Click OK to select this file. You can modify this file and save it for future
use. You can also create new files in the libraries view similar to other
external library files.
To edit the selected external file:
 Right-click Steel Material; then click Edit.
In the dialog box that appears, you can edit:
 Units of measure
 Currency conversions
 Steel cost specifications

Units of Measure: You can specify whether the weight values in the file are
in I-P (Inch-Pound) or METRIC units of measure. The Default file has I-P
units of measure. The weights in the Default file are in LB and the costs are
in Currency/LB.
Currency Conversions: The costs specified in your external file are
interpreted to be in the currency you are using. You must specify conversion
rates from the user currency to the various project basis currencies. In the
Default file, all the costs specified are in USD/LB. Therefore, the conversion
rate for US country base is 1.00. If you want to enter costs in another
currency, you must specify the appropriate conversion rates (your
currency/country base currency) in the Currency Conversions dialog box.

Specifications: Use the Specifications dialog box to specify the weight
break-downs for structural steel and the unit costs for all the items.
Specify the weight only for the structural steel members. Weights specified
for other items are ignored by the system.
To specify the weigh break-down for structural steel members:
 Enter the minimum weight for a given category. For example, in the
Default file all structural steel above 80 LB/FT is considered Extra heavy
steel and will get the COA modifier 5 for Extra heavy steel.

Specify the costs should be specified in your currency per unit weight. If using
I-P units, costs should be in your currency/LB. For metric units costs should
be in your currency/KG.
The cost-base year should not be greater than the cost-base year for the
version of Economic Evaluation being used. If the cost-base year is less than
the cost-base year of the system, the costs are indexed to the current year by
the system. The COA modifier is given for reference only and cannot be
edited.
Notes:
Reinforcing bars (Rebar) costs: If you have specified the Rebar costs in
the Design basis | Civil/Steel Specs dialog box, then the value specified in
the external file are ignored and the value you entered in the design basis are
used.
Grating costs: The grating costs in the external file are applicable only to
the default (1x3/16 IN [25x5 MM] CS welded bar) grating in the system. If
you specify any other grating type then the cost specified in the external file
will not be used for that grating.
Exporting a Customized External Steel Costs File
To save a customized external steel costs file for future use in other
projects:
 Right-click Steel Materials; then click Export to Library.

You can also create customized external steel files in the libraries outside of a
project. Files created in the libraries can then be selected for use within any
project.
Selecting Specification File for Use in a
Project
After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in Project
Explorer for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to use its specifications.
To select a specification file:
1 Open the project scenario in which you wish to use the file.
2 In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right-click on the appropriate
specification category.
3 On the menu that appears, click Select.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a dialog box listing the files available
for the selected category.
4 Select a new file from which to derive default specifications; then click
OK.
Changing File Directory Location
If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other than the
default, move the default files to the new location and recreate the same sub-
folder arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will generate an error when you point
to the new location.

Instrument Field Hook-Up
Customization
When you include a component with an instrumentation loop in your project,
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator accounts for instrument field hook-up in the
project’s direct costs and includes the parts for the instrument field hook-up
on the Direct Costs – Overall Installation Details report.
The defaults are detailed in two ASCII files:
 Sample_Inasmbly.dat
 Sample_Inparts.dat
These two files are stored in the UserData folder.
To customize the instrument field hook-ups:
1 Open and modify these files in Wordpad or any other ASCII text editor.
2 Save the files as Inasmbly.dat and Inparts.dat.

The Sample_Inasmbly.dat file is shown below.
There are extensive instructions for use provided toward the top of the
scrollable document. Be sure to read these carefully before modifying. The
editor must not introduce non-printing characters other than a space or
CR/LF, that is,, no tabs are allowed.
The field hook-up assembly data is organized into the following columns:
 LOOP SYMBOL: Symbol that describes the sensor loop.
 DESCRIPTION: Place for comments; does not affect usage.
 PART NO.: A reference to the part number in Inparts.dat file for the part
used in this assembly.
 QTY: Quantity of this part to include in this assembly.
FG: Flag identifying this part as Piping or Instrumentation. The
Piping parts are drawn from items in Inparts.dat with IDs of
1,000 or less. Their material of construction matches the
material on the process side (component or pipe). These parts are
the ones eliminated when you turn off the process connection when
defining modifications to a loop. The Instrumentation parts are
drawn from the remaining items in Inparts.dat, which includes
specifications for their materials of construction.
Note: When you create/edit an InAsmbly.Dat file, and you are specifying a
loop, you have the option to set the FLAG column field to A instead of the
default which is blank (Or P).
For loops that you've created an A version of, the system expects you to also
have defined a primary (default) version. Then by selecting A instead of P in
the project (at the design basis on the loop) you can cause it to pick your A
version instead of the usual selection of P.

Important: The A vs. P choice is not about selecting the internal default or
the Instrument Assembly.Dat loop definition. It is about choosing between
two loop definitions in the selected Instrument Assembly.Dat file, of
you've picked one.
 NOTE: Additional place for comments; does not affect usage.
By changing the part types and quantities for each, you change the results
developed for the field hook-ups.
You can:
 delete the parts of a hook-up
 revise each line
 add parts to a particular field hook-up from Inparts.dat
The Sample_Inparts.dat file is shown below:
There are extensive instructions for use provided toward the top of the
scrollable document. Please read these carefully before modifying the file,
with the same limitations as described above.
The field hook-up assembly parts are organized into the following columns:
 ID: A unique, four-digit part number. This shows up as the PART No. in
Inasmbly.dat.
 COA: A valid Icarus instrumentation Code of Account (COA). You should
use an Icarus COA even if you plan to redefine the COA sets (see Icarus
Reference, Chapter 34, “Code of Accounts”).
 QT: Quantity- must be set to 1.
 UT: Unit of measure.

 DIA I/P: Diameter (if applicable) in Inch-Pound (IP) units. This is
included in the line item details print out to identify the item.
 DIA MET: Same as above, but for Metric.
 DESCRIPTION: Name for the line item to print in the details section of
reports.
 MATL: One of the valid Icarus materials of construction listed in the file.
 BCOST (USD): Material cost of the part in USD for the YEAR indicated in
the file. This is automatically converted to the currency of the project. The
currency units are not important- the USD symbol here is for reference
purposes only. You may change the symbol and/or enter your own cost
values. However, it is critical that you enter the conversions between this
currency and the four country currencies known to Icarus. That is done
using the four CURCONs listed in the file.
 MH: Installation man-hours per indicated quantity (for example, per LF or
M, EA, etc).
 CREW: Select one of the available Icarus instrumentation crews to
perform the work.
 YEAR: The system will automatically escalate the user-entered material
cost (see above, under BCOST) to the base year for the version of Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator that is running the estimate.
For example, if a cost is specified as being valid in 2002, and you are running
a First Quarter 2004 (1Q ’04) version of the system, then the cost in this file
is escalated to 1Q ‘04 before appearing in any report. It is important to note
that the escalation index used is specific for the instrumentation account. This
usually differs from the global system base indices listed in the Icarus
Reference. The Release Notes provided with each cost release details the
year-to-year changes by major account.
Using the Plot Plan Layout Tool
Note: To enable the Plot Plan Layout Tool, you must set Print Equipment
Coordinates on the Equipment Specs sheet to Y (Print coordinates on
datasheet). Default is N (Do not print coordinates on datasheet).
To enable the Plot Plan Layout Tool:
1 On the Project Basis tab, click Basis for Capital Costs | Design Basis.
2 In the Design Basis folder, click Equipment Specs.
The General Equipment Specs dialog box appears.
3 On the General Equipment Specs dialog box, set the Print Equipment
Coordinates value to Y, as shown below:

Note: This feature does not apply to ACCE Versions V7.0 or V7.1.
Workflow for Plot Plan Layout Tool:
1 Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. Add areas and equipment
in each area according to your project scope. If you want the system to
calculate area size for any area, keep the length and width fields of that
area blank. For structural areas, specify the number of levels/floors. The
system does not calculate area sizes for MODULE type areas; you must
specify the area dimensions. For equipment on structure, you must specify
the floor/level number of the structure on the equipment form as the
location of equipment on the structure.
2 On the main tool bar, click Run | Evaluate Project for cost evaluation of
the project. For areas without specifications of lengths and widths, the
system calculates lengths and widths from the equipment dimensions in
the respective areas.

3 On the main tool bar, click Basic Engineering Link to launch an Aspen
Basic Engineering application. The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
application is put to sleep, and the costing interface to Aspen Basic
Engineering is launched. All area dimensions and equipment footprints
are exported to Aspen Basic Engineering.
4 Open the drawing editor and create a new plot plan document.
5 On the plot plan, place a scale symbol; the default scale is 100, but you
can change the scale.
Labels and a piperack symbol are available in the Aspen Basic Engineering
plot plan drawing. No other symbols are available. All the exported
equipment, open steel/concrete structure, building and area symbols are
seen under the stockpile, in the plot plan tab. No other symbols (other
than exported components, labels, and pipe rack) can be placed on the
drawing. All areas and components may be placed in one drawing.
6 For a new project, all areas and equipment are displayed in the Stockpile
of Aspen Basic Engineering. Move areas and equipment from stockpile to
the main drawing area. For an existing project with equipment and areas
placed in the plot plan drawing, all old areas and equipment will be placed
in the proper locations of the drawing area.
7 In the Plot Plan interface, all equipment in a single area must reside in
the area. You can move areas in the main drawing area, but you can
move equipment inside its parent area only. You cannot move any
equipment from its parent area to other areas. No new equipment can be
added to the plot plan other than those imported from Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator.
Equipment can be placed one above the other in an open steel structure,
but then only the topmost equipment will be visible. All equipment
located one above other or at different elevations in an open steel
structure must be differentiated by user specified elevation parameter
(level or floor number).
8 Place all the areas and the equipment in each area in the desired locations
(X, Y coordinate) of the Plot Plan area.
9 Close the Plot Plan interface in Aspen Basic Engineering. Area
coordinates (bottom left corner X, Y) with respect to Plot Plan datum (0,0
coordinate of Plot Plan) and equipment coordinates (X, Y, Z) with respect
to parent area coordinates (bottom left corner) will be passed to Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator interface. Area sizes will be passed to Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator from Aspen Basic Engineering.
10 On the main tool bar, click Run | Interconnect Piping Lines to connect
piping lines between equipment.
11 Evaluate the project cost. All lengths for interconnected piping lines will be
calculated using the relative equipment locations and the lines not
connected will inherit default lengths from the system volumetric model.
The connected piping line length will be derived from: (a) a function of the
design parameters of equipment and (b) the coordinates of the
equipment. This length will be divided equally between the equipment if
they are in the same area. For equipment in different areas, the system
assumes that the connected equipment piping line will run to the
respective shortest area boundary and will be on a pipe rack along the
boundary of the areas. The length along the pipe rack will be divided

equally between the equipment. In addition, each line on a piece of
equipment will have a height coordinate where it joins to the equipment
nozzle (available internally) so that the vertical run length of piping can be
calculated.

3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 257
3 Loading and Mapping
Simulation Data
Note: Simulation data can be used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only if
you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you are licensed, you can
select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Analyzer in the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
Overview
If the process you wish to evaluate in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer is
based on a simulator file report from a process simulator software program,
the first step, after creating a project scenario and defining the Design Basis,
is to load and map simulation data.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer supports reports from the following
simulators:
 AspenTech’s AspenPlus Version V7.3.2 and V8.0
 Chemstations’ ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2
 HYSIM Version STD/C.271
 AspenTech’s HYSYS Version V8.0
 SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.61
 Pacific Simulation’s WINGEMS 2.0
 WinSim’s DESIGN II for Windows Version 8.17
Preparing Simulation Reports
For Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to load the simulation data, an
appropriate ASCII output report needs to be generated from the simulator.
Most simulators describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII reports.
This section provides additional procedures to generate reports in an
Analyzer-compatible format.

258 3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data
The procedures provided here start with the default report generation options.
If changes have been made from the default report generation options, then
it may be necessary to change them back to the default settings for creating
an output report for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
AspenPlus Report Generation
AspenPlus provides a template containing the property sets that a project
needs in order to generate an output report for Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer.
Note: If you use the template, the following component specification, if
entered in AspenPlus, must be re-entered in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer:
Block - CCD
STAGE EFFICIENCY
To use the template:
1 Open the project in AspenPlus.
2 On the File menu, click Import.
3 Navigate to:
Program FilesAspenTechEconomic Evaluation V8.0ProgramLoad
Note: This is the default path; it may differ depending on where you installed
Aspen Icarus.
4 Depending on the simulation units of measure, select the appropriate
simulator directory (for example, AspenPlus) and then the corresponding
template (.apt) file.
To create the required property steps in Aspen Plus without using a
template:
1 On the Data menu, click Properties. This will open the data browser to
the property specifications.
2 In the data browser tree structure, open the folder Prop-Sets located in
the Properties folder.
3 Click New to create a new property set.
4 Type a name for the property set or use the default name.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Substream field, select All.
7 Scroll down the list of available properties, clicking those you wish to
select. To start the scroll window, click in a physical properties cell:
o MASSVFRA
o MASSSFRA
o MASSFLMX
o VOLFLMX
o MASSFLOW

o TEMP
o PRES
o MWMX
The specifications for this property set are complete as indicated by the check
mark displayed on the tree view of the data browser.
8 Click the Prop-Sets folder. You will see the property set you just created
in the object manager and the status should be Input Complete.
9 Create the second property set by once again clicking New.
10 Type a name for the property set or use the default name.
11 Click OK.
12 Click the Qualifiers tab.
13 In the Phase cell, click Total.
14 Click the Properties tab.
15 In the Substream field, click ALL.
16 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pick
either of the following units:
o KJ/KG-K
-or-
o BTU/LB-R
The specifications for this property set are complete.
17 Click the Prop-Sets folder. The newly created property set will appear in
the object manager with an input complete status.
18 Create the final property set needed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
by clicking New.
19 Type a name for the property set, or use the default name.
20 Click OK.
21 Click the Qualifiers tab.
22 In the Phase cell, click Vapor.
23 Click the Properties tab.
24 Select the following properties for this property set:
o VOLFLMX
o MASSFLMX
o KMX
o MUMX
o CPMX
o MWMX
25 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pick
either of the following units:
o KJ/KG-K
-or-
o BTU/LB-R
The creation of property sets is complete.

Now these property sets must be specified for use in the generation of a
report.
To specify these property sets for use in report generation:
1 If the Setup folder is not already expanded, expand it by clicking on the
plus sign next to the folder symbol.
2 Click Report Options.
3 Click the Stream tab.
4 Click the Property Sets button.
5 Move the three property sets you just created to the Selected property
sets box.
6 Click the > button to move them to the Selected property sets box.
7 Click Close.
The specifications required for loading an AspenPlus report file are now
complete. You can close the data browser window.
After running the simulation, you must create an output report.
To create an output report:
1 On the File menu, click Export.
2 In the Save As dialog box, use the drop-down menu to select Report
Files (*.rep) or XML files (*.xml).
3 Type a file name or accept the default value.
4 Click Save. This will create the ASCII report file needed to load into Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer with the name given above.
Note: The order on any of the tower models must be set to TOP-DOWN in
order for the tray information to get loaded into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer correctly. This is the default setting.
Aspen Plus Utilities
If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resource
specifications and usage data will be transferred into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. After loading the simulator data, a preference screen will appear.
Specify any missing data for the Aspen Plus utilities in order for the Aspen
Plus utility to be properly handled. The Aspen Plus utilities will appear as new
utility resources. The appropriate project components will use the specified
utility resource, based on the Aspen Plus utility used in the simulation.
A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or deleted from the
Aspen Plus simulation prior to a reload of data into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. You can choose to delete the old imported Aspen Plus utility
resources in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, or just add/update existing
imported utilities in Aspen Plus.

AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer Simulator link
A link from AspenPlus to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to load
changes into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are
changed in AspenPlus.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer link into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
scenario:
1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.
Note: If the Activation dialog box appears, click Close. Use the Activation
dialog box to stay in AspenPlus instead of transferring to Aspen Process
Economic Evaluator.
2 On the ribbon, click Economics | Send to Economics.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from AspenPlus.
AspenPlus will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed,
any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommended
that the scenario name designated by AspenPlus be left as it is for maximum
usability.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator
Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear
to do so. Define all AspenPlus units with those available in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into an
existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.

Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and
sizing can be performed at this time.
ChemCAD Report Generation
These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version 5.3.2, and
for previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications are the same for all
versions.
1 On the main menu, on the Output menu, click Report.
Note: In ChemCAD for Windows, just click the Output menu from the menu
bar.
2 Specify the following for report options:
 Select Streams
 Print All Streams: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows
 Select Unit Operations
 Print All Unit Operations: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows.
 Stream Properties
3 Select or deselect the following stream properties as indicated below:
Property Select De-Select
OVERALL PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Temperature X
Pressure X
Mole Vap frac X
Enthalpy X
Molecular wt. X
Total act.dens X
VAPOR PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Vap. Act. Dens X
Vap. Viscosity X
Vap. Cp X
Vap. Thrm. Cond X
Liq. Surf. Tens. X
LIQUID PROPERTIES
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X

Property Select De-Select
Liq. act. Dens X
Liq. Viscosity X
Liq. Cp X
Liq. Thrm. Cond. X
SOLID PROPERTIES*
Mass flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Density X
PSD X
DISTILLATION OPTIONS
Tray profile X
Tray properties X
Tray sizing X
Packed column sizing X
TRAY COMPOSITIONS
Mass flow rate X
* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream Properties in ChemCAD for
Windows.
The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be included in the
output report.
4 Navigate to the Stream Flowrate/Composition menu under the
Reports/Output menu.
5 Pick Mass Flowrate.
If you want Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to use tray sizing information
from the simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing information.
6 To do this, go to Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output
menu; then select the appropriate sizing section (packed or trayed).
7 After the completion of all these specifications, generate the output report
by selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should generate an output
report. You can rename it if you wish. This is the file to be used as input
for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
HYSIM Report Generation
1 Copy the following .spc files from the ProgramLoadHysim directory
to your HYSIM working directory before generating output inside the
simulator.
 MIXER.SPC
 TEE.SPC
 HTXRATE.SPC
 BALANCE.SPC
 CALC.SPC
 MASSBAL.SPC

 MOLEBAL.SPC
For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by Hyprotech.
2 For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream format file
STRSUM.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory of your HYSIM working directory. If you have
HYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy the stream format file
STRSUM2.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory to your HYSIM working directory and rename it
STRSUM.FMT. You must either delete or rename the existing
STRSUM.FMT file to perform this.
The output report generated from HYSIM should contain operation output
(defined as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the complete stream summary. Both
of these outputs must be saved under the same file name. The information is
appended to the file and does not get overwritten.
To generate the operation output and stream summary (Required):
1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
o operation output
o stream summary
2 On the main menu, click Print.
3 On the print option, click File; then press Enter.
4 Select the same file (file_name) as above; then press Enter.
5 Click the Print option; then press Enter.
6 Select the Stream option; then press Enter.
7 Inside the Stream option, select Summary; then press Enter.
8 The list of streams present in the current project is displayed. Click the <-
> option for all the streams to be written in file_name.
The procedure creates the required report (file_name), which can be loaded
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used for project evaluation.
If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you want the
information to be carried over to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the
following steps must be performed in addition to the above procedure:
1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
sizing summary
2 On the main menu, click Size.
3 Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired; then press
Enter.
4 Select the particular equipment (for example, col-101) ; then press Enter.
5 Select auto_section or user_section; then press Enter.
6 After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print.
7 Select File; then press Enter.
8 Select the same file name (file_name) ; then press Enter.
9 Click Summary; then press Enter.
Important:

 The operation names and stream names can not contain the following
characters:
+, -, *, or spaces
 The ASCII report has to be created in the default units specified by HYSIM
for the ENGLISH and the SI modes of operation. You can run a simulation
in any simulator-provided units. However, prior to creating the report file,
you must convert the units to the default specifications provided by
HYSIM.
 During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if user_section is
chosen, care should be taken to check that the stage numbers are not
repeated in the different sections of the same column operation. The
following two examples demonstrate the correct and incorrect
specifications.
Correct Incorrect
user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1
(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10
user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3
(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15
 The user_section name should not contain the following characters:
+, -, *
 The report format should be such that the width of the report should be
less than or equal to 4 streams wide. This can be accomplished from the
format option provided in HYSIM.
 Stream summary should follow the operation output in the report, that
is, the order should be maintained.
HYSYS – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
Simulator link
A link from HYSYS to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to load
changes into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are
changed in HYSYS.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer link into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
scenario:
1 Run the simulation in HYSYS.
Note: If the Activation dialog box appears, click Close. Use the Activation
dialog box to stay in HYSYS instead of transferring to Aspen Process Economic
Evaluator.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from HYSYS.
HYSYS will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed,

any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommended
that the scenario name designated by HYSYS be left as it is for maximum
usability.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator
Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear
to do so. Define all HYSYS units with those available in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into an
existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in HYSYS.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.
Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and
sizing can be performed at this time.
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report
Generation
Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II with
PROVISION.
 You can change the input keyword file (*.inp) to include the required
print options using keywords for those using PRO/II directly
-or-
 You can change the print options from within the PROVISION user
interface.
For either method, the operation names and stream names should not contain
the following characters:
 +
 *

Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be identified by
a unique four-character name. Currently, sidestrippers are not always
identified by their full user-given names in PRO/II with PROVISION report
files. Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four characters of the
user-given names. Therefore, to properly load sidestripper information into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, sidestripper Unit identifiers (UID’s) must
be used, which are only four characters long.
To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION:
1 On the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure that the
Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must be entered.
2 On the Output menu, select Report Format.
3 On the Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data.
4 Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION default
value).
5 On the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties.
6 Select Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction.
7 On the Report Format menu select Unit Operations.
8 For each column unit operation:
A On the Unit Operations list, select Column.
B Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted.
C Select Molar Basis from the Column Summary list.
D From their respective column print options window, select:
o Molecular Weights
o Actual Densities
o Actual Volumetric Flowrates
o Transport Properties
o Flowing Enthalpies
o Standard Liquid Densities
E Click OK.
F Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.
Note: See the note in the KEYWORD section regarding COLUMN sidestripper’s
UID’s.
9 Click Close to finish.
10 Use the default options for remaining unit operations.
Using Keywords
For General Print Options, use the following keywords:
Print INPUT = ALL
STREAM = ALL
RATE = M
WIDTH= 80

For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:
Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL
Loading Simulation Data
The following loading procedure translates the specified process simulator
report file into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data:
1 In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click Simulator Type in
the Process Design folder; then click Edit.
The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.
2 Select one type from the list; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a message saying what the new
simulator type is.
3 Click OK.
4 In the Process Design folder, right-click Simulator File Name; then
click Edit.

The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the Report
folder. You can browse other drives and folders as well.
5 Select a file; then click Open.
Note: The List view now displays the pathname of the selected simulator file
when you select Simulator File Name in Project Explorer.
-or-
 On the Run menu, click Load Data.
A confirmation window appears.
7 Click Yes.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads the simulator data.
When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of Project Explorer
is populated with simulator areas and simulator blocks.

Viewing Data Derived from Simulator
To access simulator-derived data (read-only):
1 Right-click a block, and on the menu that appears, click Modify.

2 Click Cancel to close.
Working with Block Flow
Diagrams
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow
Diagram (BFD) from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphical
representation of the process, the BFD displays computational blocks and
their connections.
The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the Project
Explorer’s Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in both the Process view
and the BFD agree; mapped items are displayed green and unmapped items
are displayed yellow.
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram
To display the Block Flow Diagram:
 On the View menu, click Block Flow Diagram.

The BFD appears in the Main Window.
Note: A block can be moved by clicking on the center of the block and
dragging it to the desired location. Doing so will also move the streams
connected to the block. If the simulator data is reloaded, the block and
stream locations will be regenerated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD displays
streams, direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.
The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active. (See Block
Flow Diagram View Menu on page X271X more information.)
The Drag & Find Feature
There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD.
Drag the block from the Project Explorer’s Process view and drop it anywhere
in the BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so that the block you want
to find appears in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.

Drag a block from Project Explorer (Process view) to the BFD
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer finds the block on the diagram
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow
Diagram
Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands available
when you right-click a block in Project Explorer’s Process view.
Block commands
Clicking View accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as shown on
page XX270XX.
The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained in the
next section, Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components, starting
on page XX276XX. Alteration of mapping will alter the blocks' color based on its
status.
Stream commands
You can double-click a stream to access the Develop Stream specifications
form. This form is explained on page XX229XX.
Zooming
You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or decrease the
magnification by degrees:
You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom dialog box.

To use the Zoom dialog box:
1 On the View menu, click Zoom.
The Zoom dialog box appears.
2 Click the desired magnification, or click Custom and type a percentage
between 10 and 1,000.
3 Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.
-or-
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing magnification.
The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:
Fit into one page
Mark this box to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator re-size the BFD to fit onto
one page when printed. This automatically selects the next option, What-You-
See-Is-What-You-Get, since the screen image will reflect the size required to
fit on one printed page.
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)
When WYSIWYG is cleared, zooming in or out will only affect the
magnification factor on the screen, while the printer always prints at 100%.
However, if WYSIWYG is selected, the magnification factor on the printer will
be changed so that the printed image will have the same size as the image
appearing on the screen.

BlockFlow Diagram View Menu
The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow
Diagram is active
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page XX43XX for
descriptions of toolbar buttons.
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page XX28XX
for description of the status bar.
Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page XX30XX for description of Project
Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page XX35XX for
description of the Palette
Properties Window View or hide the Properties Window. See
page XX39XX for a description of the Properties
Window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See
page XX32XX for an explanation of Workbook
Mode.
Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen, HTML, or
Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation

reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluation
needs to have already been run. See
page XX574XX and page XX565XX for details.
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis
spreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment
Analysis on page XX604XX for instructions.
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded
simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This
command is not active until you have
mapped the simulator items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-
derived stream properties in a
spreadsheet. You can customize some of
the features of the spreadsheet (which
stream properties to display, whether to
display names of the properties, and the
display style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template file:
...Economic Evaluation
V8.0DataICSstrlist.fil
Grid Visible View or hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments corresponding
to the grid lines when dragging to new
location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. When
displayed, you can see where page breaks
will be when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports in the Process Flow
Diagram. Does not apply to Block Flow
Diagram.
Zoom Access Zoom dialog box. See page XX273XX.
Mapping Simulator Items to
Icarus Project Components
Mapping is the process of converting each simulator block (that is, model or
unit operation) into one or more Icarus project components.
To map simulator items:
1 If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by doing one of
the following:
-or-
 On the Run menu, click Map Items.

2 If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, do one of the
following:
 In Process view, right-click a block or area; then click Map on the
menu that appears.
-or-
 In the Block Flow Diagram, right-click a block then click Map on the
menu that appears.
The Map Options dialog box appears.
Select the desired mapping options.
Option Description
Source
Map Selected Unit
Operations(s)
Map the selected simulator block or the simulator blocks in
the selected simulator area. This option is available only if
you selected Map from a pop-up menu.
Map All Unit
Operations
Map all simulator items in the project.
Basis

Option Description
Last Mapping Map a block according to the last time it was mapped. This
option retains only the type of Icarus project component(s)
to which the block was last mapped.
Default Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis.
Default and Simulator
Data
Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis, but
override the mapping using specific data in the simulator.
For example, if you select this option and a reboiler type is
specified in the simulator report, an equivalent reboiler
type will be used in the mapping.
Users are encouraged to review these recommendations
and either accept them or select a different equipment type
based on their knowledge of their processes and practices.
Options
Size Icarus Project
Component(s)
Size the mapped Icarus project component(s).
If you are mapping a single item to a single component
that can be sized using the interactive Sizing Expert (see
list on page X360X), the Interactive Sizing form will appear
after mapping.
Otherwise, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses its
automatic sizing.
Although the Sizing Expert is unavailable when sizing
multiple components, you can still use it later (assuming
the component is one of those that can be sized
interactively). Just right-click on the mapped component
and click Re-Size on the pop-up menu.
Note: See Chapter 5 for instructions on using the
Sizing Expert.
3 Click OK.
The Map Preview dialog box appears.
Note: All simulator items are displayed because Map all Items was selected
at the previous dialog box. Those components being mapped have asterisks
next to them.

If you selected Map Selected Unit Operations(s) on the Map Options
dialog box, the Unit Operations list displays just the selected simulator
block(s). If you selected Map all Unit Operations(s), the Unit Operations
list displays all simulator blocks.
The Current Map List displays any components that are already mapped to
the simulator block highlighted on the Simulation List.
The Configuration option box is active only for blocks representing column
models.
You must use the arrow scroll buttons to see all 12 possible configurations.
Selecting a configuration type automatically fills in the Current Map List with
the components required for that configuration type. See Tower
Configurations on page X284X for more information.
Click Tower Suffixes To indicate
bottoms split bottoms splitter
bot exchanger bottoms exchanger
bottoms pump bottoms pump
cond condenser for the tower
cond acc condenser accumulator
ovhd exchanger Overhead exchanger
overhead split Overhead splitter
ovhd pump Overhead pump
precooler first heat exchanger in “split” configuration”
reb reboiler for the tower
reflux pump reflux pump
Tower main tower
Trim second heat exchanger in “split” configuration”
Other user selectable.
spray cond Spray condenser
spray cond exit pump Pump for recirculating the spray condenser exit
sc tot recycle splitter Splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration that generates

Click Tower Suffixes To indicate
the total recycle stream
sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
sc tot recycle trim splitter Trim splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration 2
sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
4 Select a component.
The Map Preview dialog box now displays the component category's item
symbol, equipment type, and description.
Each component mapped from the block must have a unique name; if another
component already has the default component name, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you select
another component.
5 Click OK to complete the mapping.
If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer also performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item is
being mapped to a single component for which interactive sizing is available,
the Interactive Sizing form appears. See Chapter 5, Sizing Project
Components for information on this feature.

With the block now mapped, the List view displays the components mapped
from the simulator block.
Component Status
You may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component mapped
from the simulator block. This indicates that there are still specifications that
need to be entered for the component. To enter the specifications, right-click
on the component and click Modify Item on the pop-up menu. Entering
specifications in the required fields will change the status to OK. Required
fields are indicated by color-coding explained on page XX316XX, under Entering
Component Specifications.
If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the Status
column, the item will not be included in the project evaluation and will have
"0" cost associated with it. It will not cause SCAN messages.
Deleting Mappings
To delete mappings:
 Right-click in the simulator area or simulator block in Process view; then,
on the menu that appears, click Delete.

Tower Configurations
Because a column can be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer requires that you select a tower configuration on
the Project Component Map Preview dialog box.
You can select from among ten possible configurations:
 Standard – Single
 Standard – Total
 Standard – Total w/Circ.
 Standard – Split
 Standard – Split Total
 Standard – Split Total w/Circ.
 Full – Single
 Full – Single w.Circ.
 Full – Split
 Full – Split w/Circ.
This term means
Single Tower has one condenser.
Split Tower has multiple condensers.
Total the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow from
the accumulator. In such configurations, the splitting into
a reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after the
reflux pump.
Circ. there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and the
reboiler giving a forced circulation configuration around
the reboiler.

Note: Full configurations include the following equipment not found in
Standard configurations:
 overhead pump
 overhead product heat exchanger
 bottoms product pump
 bottoms product heat exchanger
Based on the tower configuration selected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically creates a model for each tower block and then maps the model
to an Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how the
condenser requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim
cooler on the Design Criteria specifications form.
If subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense the overhead
vapor and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specification
on the Design Criteria specifications form will be ignored when subcooling
is present.
The following figures display the ten possible configurations. The default item
description suffixes (see page XX279XX) are used to identify the configuration
parts, each of which is mapped to an Icarus project component.

Figure 1: Standard – Single
Figure 2: Standard Total

Figure 3: Standard Total w/Circ

Figure 4: Standard Split
Figure 5: Standard Split Total

Figure 6: Standard Split Total w/Circ.
Figure 7: Full – Single

Figure 8: Full – Single w/Circ.
Figure 9: Full – Split

Figure 10: Full – Split w/Circ.

Figure 11: Spray Condenser Configuration 1 w/Circ.
Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculated
using Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVH
LIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates
is an input specified in the Design Criteria.
mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.
mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.
mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.

Figure 12: Spray Condenser Configuration 2 w/Circ.
The duty for the SC COOLER and SC TRIM exchangers are calculated using
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QSCTRIM / QCONDENSER
QCONDENSER = QSCTRIM + QSCCOOLER
where:
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty is an input specified in the Design
Criteria
QSCTRIM = Spray Condenser Cooler Duty
QSCCOOLER = Spray Condenser Trim Duty
QCONDENSER = Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained from
Simulator Data
Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Cooler
and Spray Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using:
a Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.
Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC Tot Recycle Trim Splitter are
determined using:
SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mSCRTSEx1 / mSCCEx
mSCCEx = (mSCRTSEx1 + mSCRTSEx2)

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria
mSCCE = mass flow rate of the SC Cooler Exit Stream
mSCRTSEx1 = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1
Stream
(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger)
mSCRTSEx2 = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2
Stream
Sizing Selection
This section outlines the workflow of the sizing selection feature available in
Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator. Sizing selection is a mechanism that lets you
pre-define and/or define sizing rules for project components. Specifically, you
can set rules on equipment models or specific project components to be sized
with one or more custom models.
Project Sizing Selection
Typically, you load data from a simulation and then choose to map the
simulator unit operations. In the mapping screen that appears, there is a
check box to Review Sizing Selection. If selected (the default is based on
the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process | Sizing selection on the
item-size menu), the sizing selection appears.
You select any custom model for sizing the project components listed.
 If an item is selected, the sizing preview screen appears during a size or
re-size performed on one or more project component(s).
 If an item is not selected, the mapping preview screen does not appear for
editing during these steps, but the sizing selection specifications is applied
to the selected project component(s).

Figure 13: Mapping with option to size equipment
If selected, you will see the MapPreview dialog box for a chance to edit how
the project components are sized (see Figure 14).
Figure 14: Sizing Selection preview for specified project components
You can specify the sizing routines (System Sizing and custom models) for
each project component (created by mapping from a simulator or manual
creation) that will be applied during the size-all step.
If a custom model is specified in the current sizing list for a project
component, the project component will be sized in the order shown in the
Current Sizing List (see Figure 14). Any custom models listed will be sized
using the custom model tool automatically without any user-interaction
required. After sizing is complete, the system returns to a ready-state for
you to perform additional project tasks.
For Global Sizing Selection information, see page XX356XX.

Specifying Additional
Components
Icarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a simulator
report. However, these project components must initially be added in a user-
added area. You can later rearrange the components in Project Explorer’s
Project view, drag components from a user-added area to an area mapped
from the simulator report.
Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page XX310XX.
If the component you add is process equipment, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer adds an icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-
hand corner of the Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section, Working
with Process Flow Diagrams, includes instructions (under “Editing
Connectivity” on page XX298XX) for connecting an added component to a stream
in PFD view.
Working with Process Flow
Diagrams
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of Icarus
process equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the interconnecting
streams. You can edit the layout and connectivity of the mapped items from
PFD view. You can also add streams. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
provides intelligent port selection, so that when drawing a stream you see the
candidate ports highlighted in green as the mouse is moved over them.
To access PFD view:
1 On the View menu, click Process Flow Diagram.

2 Use the Drag-and-Find feature to locate any equipment item on the PFD.
3 Drag an equipment item from Project Explorer (Project view) and drop it
on the PFD.
The icon in the PFD that corresponds to the selected equipment will be
positioned in the upper left-hand corner (regardless of magnification).
Editing the Layout
To change the position of an item:
 Use your mouse to drag the item to its new position.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to the
item.
To change the route of a stream:
 Click the stream; then drag the stream to straighten it or to create an
elbow-bend.
Note: If you eventually select Reroute All Streams on the Run menu,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for all
streams.
Process Flow Diagram View Menu
Note: The View menu contains some options that are displayed only when
the Block Flow Diagram is active.

Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See
page XX43XX for descriptions of toolbar
buttons.
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See
page XX28XX for a description of the
status bar.
Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page XX30XX for a description of
Project Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See
page XX35XX for a description of the
Palette.
Properties Window View or hide the Properties
window. See page XX39XX for a
description of the Properties
window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and
off. See page XX32XX for an
explanation of Workbook Mode.
Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen,

HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor
for evaluation reports (.ccp). The
Project Evaluation needs to have
already been run. See page XX574XX
and page XX565XX for details.
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis
spreadsheets. See Reviewing
Investment Analysis on
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of
the loaded simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram.
This command is not active until
you have mapped the simulator
items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all
simulator-derived stream
properties in a spreadsheet. You
can customize some of the
features of the spreadsheet
(which stream properties to
display, whether to display names
of the properties, and the display
style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template
file:
...Economic Evaluation
V8.0DataICSstrlist.fil
Grid Settings Access Grid Properties dialog
box, where you can set the grid
increments and select to view or
hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments
corresponding to the grid lines
when dragging to new location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation
lines. When displayed, you can
see where page breaks will be
when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports.
Zoom Access Zoom tool. This is the
same as in the Block Flow
Diagram (see page XX273XX).
Add Stream Access the Develop Streams
dialog box. See Adding A
Stream, page XX300XX, for details.
Draw Disconnected Stream Access the Disconnected Streams
dialog box. See “Drawing a
Disconnected Stream,” page XX302XX,
for details.
Edit Connectivity
Activate the Edit Connectivity
feature. See “Editing
Connectivity,” page XX298XX, for
details.

Setting Grid Properties
You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you can select
the color of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid mode.
To set grid properties:
1 On the View menu, click Grid Settings.
The Grid Properties dialog box appears.
2 Set the Across and Down grid increments in the Increments section.
Specify in the Units section whether the specified increments are in
inches or centimeters.
3 Select the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid mode. When
you drag a block in this mode, the block’s bounding outline moves in
increments corresponding to the grid.
4 Click Color to select a grid color.
5 Finally, in the Visibility section, click whether to show or hide the grid.
6 Click OK to apply the settings.
Editing Connectivity
The Edit Connectivity feature lets you make changes to the layout of items
in the PFD. Because this involves connecting and disconnecting streams to
ports, the Ports Visible option should be on, as it is by default.
If the ports are not visible, click the Ports Visible button .
Connecting a Stream to Different Inlet Port
To connect a stream to a different inlet port:
 On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button
-or-

 On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the end of the stream you want to connect to a
different inlet port.
The cursor becomes an arrow.
3 Click the end of the stream.
The cursor now appears as a crosshairs.
4 Move the cursor to another inlet port.
When the cursor is in close proximity to a component, the component's
available inlet ports display green.
5 Click the new inlet port.
Connecting an Added Project Component to a
Stream
Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the PFD and are not connected to any streams.
To connect an added project component to a stream:
 On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button
-or-
 On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the added project component that you wish to insert
into an existing stream.
The cursor becomes a hand.

3 Click the component.
A bounding outline, representing the component, appears around the cursor.
4 Move the cursor over a stream. Click when you have placed the cursor
over the desired stream.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the stream
from the inlet port on the current component, then automatically re-connects
it to the inlet port on the inserted component.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also creates a new stream, which appears
white and has properties relative to the initial stream. Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer connects the Source end of this new stream to the outlet
port of the inserted item and the Sink and to the inlet port of the original.
The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item option,
which either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive sizing is available,
accesses the Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert, explained in Chapter 6, will
utilize the newly connected streams.
Adding a Stream
From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its connectivity. The
process of developing streams is explained in detail under Developing
Streams, page XX228XX.

To add a stream:
 On the toolbar, click the Add Stream button .
-or-
 On the View menu, click Add Stream.
 To create a stream from scratch, click Create and proceed to Step 3.
-or-
 To create a stream based on an existing stream, in the Base Stream
section, click the existing stream; and then click a Basis:
o Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data from the base
stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is
created. If the data of the base stream is altered at any time after
this point, the data of the new stream remains unchanged.
o Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new stream’s data is
dynamically linked to that of the stream on which it’s based. This
means that alterations to the data of the base stream immediately
affect the new stream.
3 Click Create.

4 Type a name in the Stream Name field; then click OK.
The Develop Streams specifications dialog box appears.
5 Make any desired modifications; then click OK.
6 Move the cursor, which appears as a square, to an outlet port.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection,
highlighting the candidate ports in green.
7 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired outlet port.
8 Move the cursor, which now appears as crosshairs, to an inlet port.
9 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired inlet port.
Drawing a Disconnected Stream
To draw a disconnected stream:

 On the toolbar, click the Draw Disconnected Stream button .
-or-
 On the View menu, click Draw Disconnected Stream.
The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.
2 Click a stream; then click OK.
3 Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for Adding a
Stream.
Working with Streams
Right-clicking on a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the following
commands.
Use this to
Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box listing the stream’s
specifications, which you can modify.
Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store it, so that you
can select it when using the Draw Disconnected Stream
feature (see page XX302XX).
Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.
Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.
Delete Delete the stream.

4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components 305
4 Defining Report Groups,
Areas, and Project
Components
When developing a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, you can add project
components to areas in Project Explorer’s Project view. Project components
are the pieces of the process plant (or mill) that, when linked together,
complete a process. Components are categorized as follows:
Note: See Icarus Reference for information on individual components.
Category To define
Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solids handling and
off-site/packaged systems.
Plant Bulks Material commodities that service a section of the plant or
the whole plant. Plant bulks are divided into categories:
Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation, Electrical, Insulation
and Paint.
Site Development Modifications that must be done to the site. Site
development items are divided into categories: Demolition,
Drainage, Earthwork, Fencing, Landscaping,
Roads-Slabs-Paving, Piling and Railroads.
Buildings Civil structures directly involved in the process or for
off-site use.
Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not found in Process
Equipment above.
Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. See Chapter 7.
Equipment Model Library Items from an Equipment Model Library. See Chapter 7.
Adding a Report Group
Areas in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator are divided into report groups. Some
reports summarize costs by report group. A report group is a user-defined
category that can contain any number of areas.

306 4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components
Note: Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator must be
marked in Preferences, General tab view, to see report groups displayed in
Project Explorer. This Preferences option is marked by default. (See page XX53XX
for information on Preferences.)
New projects include one default report group, with the name Main Area. You
can rename the report group by right-clicking and clicking Rename Report
Group on the pop-up menu.
To add a report group:
1 Double-click Main Project.
-or-
Right-click Main Project and, on the pop-up menu, click Add Report
Group.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds a report group with the default name New
Report Group.
2 Right-click on New Report Group and click Rename Report Group.
3 Type a name for the report group and press enter.
To delete a report group:
 Right-click the report group; then click Delete Report Group.
Adding an Area
To add an area:
1 In Project Explorer’s Project view, double-click a Report Group folder.
The Area Information dialog box appears.

2 Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.
The area type determines the default area specifications. For example, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator generates an open steel structure for the area type
OPEN, but does not generate one for the area type EXOPEN. See page 36-4 of
Icarus Reference for details on which specifications Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator generates for each area type.
You do not have to use all the default area specifications. The following
section explains how to define area specifications.
Area Types:
 EXOPEN
 FLOOR
 GRADE (Default)
 MODULE
 OPEN
 PAD
3 Click OK.
Project Explorer now displays the new area.
Copying a Report Area over
another Report Area
To copy a Report Area over another Report Area:
1. Right-click on a Report Group (for example, Battery limit).
2. Click Copy All.
3. Right-click the report group you want to replace.
4. Click Copy specs.

5. Right-click project node.
6. Click Paste.
The target Report Area now contains the same information as the source
Report Area.
Defining Area Specifications
You can define mechanical design and cost basis specifications for the newly
added area. You can define or modify area specifications in two ways:
 using the Project view
 using the Spreadsheet view
Method 1: Defining area specifications
using Project View
To define area specifications using Project view:
1 Right-click the area in Project Explorer’s Project view; then, on the pop-
up menu that appears, click Modify.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Area Specifications dialog box.
2 Select the specification category you want to define:

Select To do this
Area Title Info Change the area title.
Area Equipment Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.
Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this
area only.
Includes:
 Design allowance
 Weld efficiency
 Wind design required
 Design deflection
 Stress relief option
 Diameter option
 Rotating equipment spares
 Shop fab maximum diameter
Area , Piping, Civil, Steel,
Instrumentation,
Electrical, and Paint
Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.
area only.
Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/low
ambient temperatures.
Area Insulation For Hot Insulation Schedule: If you have not selected an
external Hot Insulation Schedule, select:
 L-Light ave low ambient > 40DEG F (4 DEG C)
 M-Medium ave low ambient > 20DEG F (-6 DEG C)
 H-High- ave low ambient < 20DEG F (-6 DEG C)
OR
 One or more hot insulation libraries selected from
external files
For Cold Insulation Schedule:
 C-Cold
OR
 One or more cold insulation libraries selected from
external files
Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structural
module); beam, column, and bracing options; structure
costs; shipping costs; and impact loads.
Material Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated material costs by a
percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project
level for this area only.
Man Hour Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated man-hours by a
percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project
level for this area only.
3 Click Modify to access the selected area specifications.

The Area equipment specs dialog box appears.
4 Enter area specifications; then click OK.
Method 2: Defining area specifications
using Spreadsheet View
To define or modify area specifications using Spreadsheet view:
1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | Areas.
The Areas spreadsheet view appears.
2 On the Areas spreadsheet view, click Options.
3 On the menu that appears, select the specification category you want to
define/modify.
Select To do this
Area Title Info Change the area title.
Area Equipment, Piping,
Civil, Steel,
Instrumentation,
Electrical, Insulation and
Paint
Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.
area only.
Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/low
ambient temperatures.
Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structural
module); beam, column, and bracing options; structure
costs; shipping costs; and impact loads.
4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.
5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.
6 Click OK.
Your modifications are made in the project.
Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that
would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.

Adding and Defining Pipeline
Areas
If you selected Allow Pipeline Areas when creating the project (see
page XX23XX), there will be a default report group with the name Pipeline Area.
You can rename the report group by right-clicking and clicking Rename
Report Group on the pop-up menu. The default report group contains one
area called Pipeline Area.
To add a pipeline area:
1 Right-click on the pipeline report group and click Add Pipeline Area.
The Pipeline Area specifications form appears.
2 Select a pipeline title, fluid type (oil, gas, or water; default is oil), main-
line length (used for productivity adjustment in various work items),
whether to have double-jointed piping (default is double-jointed for pipe
diameter equal to or greater than 20 IN [500 MM]), length of delivered
pipe section (default is 80 FT [24 M] if double-jointed and 40 FT [12 M] if
not double-jointed), and internal lining type (fusion-bonded epoxy,
cement, or none; default is none).
3 Click OK.
You can now add pipeline segments to the area.
4 When adding a component (explained in next section), click Plant Bulks |
Piping. Pipeline segments are at the bottom of the list of piping plant
bulks.

To edit a pipeline area:
 Right-click the pipeline area; then click Modify.
Adding a Project Component
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides two methods for adding a project
component:
 Drag-and-drop
Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project Explorer’s
Project view and enter an item description. This adds the component to
the area without displaying the Component Specifications form; the
specifications are left to be entered at your convenience.
 Pop-up menu
Right-click on an area and click Add Project Component from the
pop-up menu, then select a component from the Project Component
Selection dialog box and enter an item description. This adds the
component and also displays the Component Specifications form, where
you can complete the component definition right away.
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the
Palette
To add a component using the drag-and-drop method:
1 With the Palette (Components view) and Project Explorer (Project view)
displayed, drag a component from the components list to an area on the
Project Explorer.
Note: The Recent Items folder in the Components view stores the last 10
project component selections.
2 To drag, click on the component and hold down the mouse button, move
the cursor until over an area, and release the mouse button.

The New Component Information dialog box appears.
3 Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number (optional), and
then click OK.
The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the component
under the selected area. The List view displays general information. You may
notice a question mark (?) in the Status column on the List view. This
indicates that there are still specifications that need to be entered for the
component. To enter the specifications, follow the instructions under
“Entering Component Specifications” on page XX315XX.
Method 2: Using the Pop-up Menu
To add a component using the pop-up menu:
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on a non-simulator area and
click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.
2 Enter the Project Component Name.
3 Highlight the category to which the desired equipment belongs (process
equipment, plant bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment)
and click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a list of sub-categories. Continue to
narrow down the selection to a specific component. Then click OK.
The component is added to the area.
The Component Specifications form is automatically displayed. You can
either complete the definition of the equipment item now or later.

Entering Component
Specifications
After adding a component, you still need to enter at least some component
specifications to complete the component’s definition. Many component
specifications have default values used when no value is entered, but most
component specifications require further input. If a component added still has
any specifications requiring input, a question mark (?) appears in the status
column of the List view for that component.
You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding a
component; you may wish to wait until more information about a project
becomes available.
As more information about a project becomes available, you may also wish to
modify previously entered component specifications. The following
instructions apply as well to modifying previously entered specifications.
To enter or modify component specifications:
1 If the Component Specifications form is not already displayed in the
Main window, display the form by right-clicking on the component and
clicking Modify Item on the pop-up menu. You can right-click on the
component in either Project Explorer (Project view) or List view (Area
level)

Double-clicking the component will also display the Specifications form.
Color coding
 Red Border: An entry must be made in the field. All specifications forms
have at least one required entry field.
 Green Borders and Thick Yellow Borders: An entry must be made in either
the field with the thick yellow border or in the two fields with the green
borders. The field with the thick yellow borders and the fields with the
green borders are mutually exclusive. In the form pictured above, either
the pump size must be selected or the fluid head and liquid flow rate must
be entered. The Properties window notes this in the Description. Enter
the specifications.
Note: While on either the component or installation bulks specifications form,
you can quickly determine the net effect of all your changes by clicking the
Evaluate button and reviewing the resulting report. See page XXXXXXXXXX624XX for
more information.
To define installation bulks for the component, click the Options drop-down
and select the type of bulks to define.

See “Defining Installation Bulks” on page X317XX for a complete description of
installation bulks.
2 After defining the component and installation bulks, save the
specifications form by clicking OK.
Defining Installation Bulks
Installation bulks are items directly associated with the component being
defined and are used to complete the installation of the item, for example, a
foundation for a vessel. The difference between an installation bulk and a
plant bulk is that an installation bulk is associated with a component, whereas
a plant bulk services the whole plant or mill.
You can define Installation bulks when entering or modifying equipment or
plant bulk specifications.
To access installation bulk specifications:
1 Display the Component Specifications form.
2 Click the down-arrow on the Options button.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to an installation bulk indicates that it has been
edited. On the menu pictured below, asterisks indicate that the Pipe - Item
Details and Civil installation bulks have been edited.

3 Click the type of installation bulks you wish to view or define.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the selected
installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow for descriptions of the
different types of installation bulks.
4 When you are done defining the installation bulk, save your changes in
either of two ways, depending on what you intend to do next:
o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation
bulks or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes. You can now select either Project Component or
another type of installation bulks from the Options menu.
o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications window.
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments
Using Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent adjustments of
system-calculated values as follows:
Category Percent adjustment for
Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)
Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)
Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 300-399)
Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 400-499)
Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 500-599)

Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 600-699)
Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 700-799)
Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 800-899)
Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA 900-999)
These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing applied to the
same COA’s. User-entered material costs and man-hours (entered using
either Quoted Equipment or Mat’l/Man-hours % Additions) are not
affected by these adjustments.
The Special Options section at the bottom of the Mat’l/Man-hour
Adjustments form lets you specify that the component is a spare, supplied
by owner, or existing. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adjusts the component
costs accordingly. In addition, the Special Options section lets you select
demolition (that is, dismantlement) of the component and its installation
bulks.
To demolish a component item:
1 Click Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments on the Options menu of the
Component Specifications form.
NOTE: Starting with the V8.0 Release of Economic Evaluation, the
Installation Option can be accessed from the main component form. The
functionality remains the same.
2 Scroll down to the Special Options section and, from the Installation
Option scroll list, select DEML.

Note: The form shown above applies to V7.3.2 and earlier.

Note: The form shown above applies to V8.0 and later.
For example, selecting the demolition (DEML) option causes the following
changes to the component:
 Material costs are set to zero.
 Man-hours and labor costs are charged to demolition COAs (for example,
109, 309, 409, and so on.)
 Piping and civil man-hours are down-adjusted:
 Shop fab man-hours are removed from piping man-hours.
 Civil formwork/bracing man-hours are removed.
3 Go back through the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form and make the
proper adjustments to account for the relative difficulty of demolition
versus new build.
For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15% easier than initially
setting it, then enter 85% in the Setting labor adjustment field.
4 Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on what you intend
to do next:

o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation
bulk or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes to the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments. You can now
select either Project Component or another installation bulk
from the Options menu.
o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications window.
Mat’l/Man-hours Additions
Using Mat’l/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material costs and/or
man-hours to a specified COA. All additions are reported “as is.” Additions are
neither indexed nor adjusted by Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20
additions may be defined per component.
Example: in the Mat’l/Man-hour Additions form for the CLAD TECHNOCAL
STORAGE TANK component, 20 labor hours have been added to COA 304 and
30 labor hours have been added to COA 604.
Pipe – General Specs
Use Pipe – General Specs to define the rules for developing all installation
piping on the selected component. You can use many fields to define general
piping specifications, such as:
 Material
 Pressure
 Temperature
 Installation - above or below grade
 Fluid or electric tracing
 Flange class and type
 Stress relief
 Insulation type

 Insulation jacket type
 Paint treatment
Note: In Aspen Kbase Version 2004.2, under General Piping specs, there
was a field called fitting spec filename to use to select the fitting spec
filename to use for the project.
In newer Kbase and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator versions, the fitting
specification is moved a Customer External file.
To access this file:
1 Right-click the Fitting external file.
2 Click Select.
A selection dialog box appears in which you can select which external fitting
specs file to use.
Pipe – Item Details
Use Pipe – Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and associated
fittings, tracing, paint and insulation. The line is developed using the rules
defined in Pipe – General Specs unless they are re-defined with Pipe – Item
Details. Up to 40 lines may be defined/adjusted for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple items
have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display
P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preference dialog box
(General tab view), selecting Pipe – Item Details will display a dialog box
from which you can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new
item. See page XX53XX for instructions on entering Preferences.
The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation
Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s piping and
instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the
Component Specifications form. It displays the piping you are adjusting on
the Pipe Details Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-line.
Specifications on the Pipe – Item Details Installation Bulk form override the
project, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determine
the design of all lines of pipe. For example, area dimensions determine the
lengths of lines generated by volumetric models, except those lines for which
you enter a specific length.

The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
 “blank” - Specified pipe only, no volume. model
This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the
complete piping model for this item; however, in addition to discarding all
of the automatically generated lines of pipe, this also discards all the
associated drains/vents and pipe-associated instrumentation. The system
now generates only piping, drains/vents and on-/in-line instrumentation
for those lines that you subsequently define. Once you have used this
option, the other options below cannot be used because the model is
already discarded. If you subsequently re-create a line that the volumetric
model would have automatically created, the associated on-/in-line
instrumentation is automatically “re-created.”
 A - Add line to pipe volumetric model
This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The number
of the new line must be higher than any other automatically created or
user-defined line. For example, if a component generates lines 1 to 6,
then an added line may have the number 7 to 40. The area dimensions
will have no effect on the length of these lines. It is not necessary to add
line numbers in numeric order; however, they will be generated and
reported in numeric order. To associate instrumentation with a new line,
specify that a sensor or control element location is this line number. Line
40 is reserved for drains/vents.
 C - Change lines on pipe volumetric model
This is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically
generated lines of pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The line is
generated exactly at it would have been in the absence of your
specifications, except for the items which you change. You may use this to

change only the metallurgy, diameter or length of a run, or only the
valves and fittings (including setting the quantity to 0) or any combination
of these.
 D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model
This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe and its
associated drains/vents and instrumentation.
 R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model
This option replaces the automatically generated line completely with the
exact line that you specify. If you do not define something for this line,
you do not get it. For example, if you specify a line of fixed length
containing no valves or fittings, then you only get the straight-run of pipe.
To make more than one specification for Pipe – Item Details:
 Click the Add button.
This adds an item specs column to this form.
To delete any unwanted or unused column(s):
1 Click any cell in that column (or drag for a range of columns).
2 Click the Delete button.
Note: Incompletely specified columns must be either completed or deleted
before saving.
Duct
Duct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process ductwork and
associated fittings and insulation. Up to five duct lines may be specified for
each component. Use the same methods described for multiple lines of pipe.
Civil
Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to three different
foundation types/sizes. The available foundation types are listed in the Icarus
Reference.
From the specified foundation types and volumes, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator calculates:
 Excavation and backfill
 Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse)
 Rebar
 Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only)
 Grout
 Anchor bolts/embedments
Steel
The Steel installation bulk specifies the following:
 Ladders

 Stairs
 Platforms
In addition, you can specify up to eight different steel items.
Instrumentation
Instrument installation bulk items specify individual instrumentation loops or
parts of loops with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to
50 loops may be defined for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple instrument
items have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If
Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preference dialog box
(General tab view), selecting Instrumentation will display a dialog box
from which you can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new
item. See page XX53XX for instructions on accessing and entering Preferences.
The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping and
Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s
piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the
Component Specifications form. It displays the instrumentation you are
adjusting on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component loop-by-
loop. Specifications entered on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form
override the project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise
determine the design of all instrument loops.
The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
 “blank” - Specified loop only, no volume. model
This option should rarely be used; it is a rapid way to discard the complete
instrument model for this item. The system now generates

instrumentation for those loops that you subsequently define. To define
new loops, you continue to use this “blank” option for each successive
loop. Once you have used this option, the other options below cannot be
used because the model is already discarded.
 A - Add loop to instr. volum. model
This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number of the
new loop must be higher than any other automatically created or user-
defined loop. It is not necessary to add loop numbers in numeric order;
however, they will be generated and reported in numeric order. For
example, if a component generates loops 1 to 6, then an added loop may
have the number 7 to 50.
 D - Delete loop on instr. volum. model
This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter, cable,
control center connections and final control element.
 R - Replace loop on instr. volum. model
This option replaces the automatically generated loop completely with the
exact loop that you specify. If you do not define something for this loop,
or you selectively delete a part, you do not get it. For example, if you
specify a sensor and transmitter only, then you only get the signal
generated and sent to the control center.
 “+” - Append to previous loop w/same no.
This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to the
immediately preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly specify
the loop number of the preceding loop). It may not be used to append
items to automatically generated loops; to do this, you should first use the
replace option to redefine the loop, then use the “+” option. Whether you
are appending a sensor or control element, you should make entries for
both the sensor and control valve locations.
To define more than one adjustment:
 Use the same methods described earlier for Pipe – Item Details
(page XX325XX).
Instrument Loop Adjustment
On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight Loop
Modification fields, which allow you to remove different elements of the
instrument loop from the project. Select “-” from the drop-down menu to
remove an element.
Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be specified as
quoted (“Q”) or vendor-provided (“V”) equipment. When either “Q” or “V” is
selected, the system includes installation manhours for the element but not
material costs.

Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument piping.
The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together, so
removing one would decrease the amount of cable and supports by half.
The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop elements fit into
the loop design:
Notes:
(A) Junction boxes can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
JUNC-BOX.
(B) Multi-core runs can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
ELECTRONIC SIGNAL WIRE. You can specify it with or without the junction
box.
(C) Control centers can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLLERS (electronic) or PLANT BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENT PANEL – ANALOG (pneumatic).

Electrical
The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting, control
wiring and power/cable and motor starters for up to three different types of
electrical loads. It also includes Communication and Alarm Systems.
Insulation
The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and fireproofing for
component and installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type,
jacket type, thickness and area may be specified. For component and steel
fireproofing, type, rating and area may be specified.
Paint
The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and painting of
component and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is specified under piping.
Entry field specifications include:
 Size of area to be painted
 Number of prime and final coats
 Percent of painted area to be sandblasted
 Galvanizing (for steel)
Quoted Cost Items
Note: This field is applicable only when used with equipment code of
accounts.
 Quoted cost per item – type the cost per quoted item
 Currency unit for matl cost – select the correct currency
 Source of quote – select the source of the quote
Option Description
SG (Default)
(blank)
System Generated
VB Vendor Budget Quote
VBL Vendor Budget Quote Long Lead
VF Vendor Firm Quote
VFL Vendor Firm Quote Long Lead
LQ Licensor Quote
SS Single Source Quote
HD Historical Data

Importing Areas and
Components
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you import entire areas or individual
components from other project scenarios. You can select in Tools| Options |
Preferences | Process whether to also include installation bulks and/or
connected streams (see Chapter 1. Getting Started.Preferences. Process). By
default, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.
To import an area or component:
1 In the Palette’s Projects view, double-click the project scenario from
which you wish to import.
This displays the project areas in the scenario.
2 Expand an area folder to display the components in it.
 To import a component:
o Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer,
Project view.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the component to the area.
 To import an area and its components:
o Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the area and its
components.
 To import all the components in an area to an existing area in the
current project scenario:
o Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project
Explorer.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the components to the area without
creating a new area.
Importing an Entire Scenario
As well as allowing you to import individual areas or components, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-and-
drop operation. This imports all the areas and components in the selected
scenario. You can select in Tools | Options | Preferences | Process
whether to also include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see
Chapter 1. Getting Started.Preferences.Process). By default, installation bulks
are included and connected streams are not.
To import an entire scenario:
1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag the
scenario there.
2 Click on the scenario in the Palette’s Projects view.
3 Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorer’s Project view.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation window.
Note: You can only import scenarios that have the same units of measure as
the current scenario. If the units of measure are not the same, a dialog box
will inform you of this when you try to import.
4 Click Yes.
The areas and components of the selected scenario are imported.

Copying Components
The Copy command copies a selected component and all of its associated
installation bulks. This is useful if you want to add a component that is similar
to an existing item. The item can be copied and modified with less effort than
creating a new item.
Remember to change the Item Description when copying components to
distinguish the copy from the original.
To copy and paste a component:
1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List window (at
area level, so that components are listed), and then click Copy on the
pop-up menu.
You can also copy multiple components at once: select the desired
components on the list window, right-click on one of the components, and
click Copy on the pop-up menu.
2 Right-click on the area to which you want to add the component(s) and
click Paste on the pop-up menu.
The component is added to the area.
Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the one
being pasted, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator changes the new component’s
name so that “#1#” appears at the beginning.
Cut and Paste
If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add (paste) it in
another area, use the same procedure as above, except click Cut instead of
Copy on the pop-up menu.
Drag and Drop
You can also move a component from one area to another by dragging it.
Modifying Components
You can modify the following components using Spreadsheet View:
 Vessels
 Towers
 Heat Exchangers
 Pumps
 Compressors
 Quoted Components

To modify a component using Spreadsheet View:
1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | <the type of
component to modify>.
The <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view appears.
2 On the <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view, click
Options.
3 On the menu that appears, click the option you want to modify.
4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.
5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.
6 Click OK.
Your modifications are made in the project.
Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that
would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.
Copying Areas
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator's Area Cut-and-Paste operations let you:
 Create a new Report Group with the same Area and specs as an existing
Report Group
 Replace an Area and its specs with another Area and its specs
To create a new Report Group with the same Area and Specs as an
existing Report Group:
1 On the Project View tab, right click Main Project.
2 On the menu that appears, click Add Report Group.
A Report Group named New Report Group appears on the tree.
3 Right-click New Report Group; then click Rename Report Group.
4 Type the new name for the Report Group; then click ENTER.
5 Right-click the area you want to copy to the new Report Group.
6 On the menu that appears, click Copy Specs.
7 Right-click the new Report Group.
8 On the menu that appears, click Paste.
The area and its specs are copied into the new Report Group.
To replace an Area and Components with another Area and Specs:
1 On the Project View tab, right-click the area you want to copy.
2 On the menu that appears, click Copy Specs.
3 Right-click the area you want to overwrite with the copied area
information.
4 On the menu that appears, click Paste.
5 A warning message appears, telling you that performing this action may
overwrite some data. If you are sure you want to overwrite the area with
the copied area information, click Yes.

The target Area and its specs are replaced with the data from the source Area
and the source Area's specs.
Deleting Components
The Delete command removes a component and all associated installation
bulks from the project.
To delete a component:
1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view
and click Delete on the pop-up menu.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
page XX53XX).
2 Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the component.
You can also delete multiple components at one time: select the components
on the list window, right-click on one of the components, and click Delete on
the pop-up menu.
Re-numbering Components
After deleting components, you may wish to re-number the remaining
components so that the numbering contains no gaps and reflects the order in
which components were added.
For example, if you add components A, B, C, D, and E in that order, the
automatically generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively
(the Order Number appears on the List view). If you then delete components
B and C and re-number, components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers
1, 2, 3, respectively. The order in which they were created would still
determine the Order Numbers.
To re-number components:
1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.
2 On the menu that appears, click Project Components.

Deleting Areas
The Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of its
components.
To delete an area:
1. Right-click on the area in Project Explorer and click Delete Area on the pop-up menu.
page XX53XX).
3 Click Yes to delete the area.
-or-
Click No to retain the area.
Re-numbering Areas
Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then used by the
Evaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current version of Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. Just as with components, re-numbering is intended to close
gaps in the numbering after deletion.
To re-number areas:
1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.
2 On the sub-menu that appears, click Project Areas.
Using the Custom Model Tool
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Custom Model tool lets you base
component specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use the
tool to send a component’s specification values, connection stream values,
and specified bulk information (pipe-item details, material and man-hour
adjustments) to an Aspen-designed Excel workbook, where you can enter
new specification values based on your own data or formulas. Then, use the
tool to send the new data back to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a pump driver
power based on a flow rate and pump head or to calculate project component
costs using your own custom method in Excel.
The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can change the
specifications in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and then revert back to the

Excel specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed). Once the
tool has been used with a project component, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer associates the customized project component with the last Excel
spreadsheet used. Running the tool at the project level updates all
components for which the tool has already been run.
The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a general
template to use as the starting point for creating files for other components.
However, for components other than pumps and mixers, you must first copy
the general template file (or use Save As) and enter the slot names for the
component specifications you wish to input, as explained below.
To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:
Note: Before using this tool, you must select the Activate Custom Model
option on the Process tab in Preferences. See page X53X for information on
accessing Preferences.
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click the pump or mixer
component that you wish to customize.
2 On the menu that appears, click Custom Model.
The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the name of the
project, scenario, and project component selected for the operation. It also
displays available Microsoft Excel (.xls) template files.

3 Click the Excel template file that you have created for the selected project
component.
4 Click Run.
Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for:
 Input
 Custom Rules
 Output
The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system values from Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator.
 Item information is provided at the top of the worksheet. The item
information is from the Component Specifications form.
 Stream information, if available, is shown toward the bottom.
 Below the stream information is information on the installation bulks for
Material and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.

The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any data that you may
wish to use in the output formulas.
Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along with sample
alterations for the following:
 Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
 Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
 Pipe item details
The Output worksheet displays the same component specification slots as on
the Input worksheet. However, you can customize the values on the Output
worksheet.

The values are in the same column-row position as on the Input worksheet,
so that you can easily reference the Input data when entering formulas.
You send the entries on the Output worksheet to Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer by clicking Apply or OK on the Custom Model tool.
The following include customized values based on the sample alterations on
the Custom Rules worksheet:
 Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
 Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
 Pipe item details
These customizations have been entered solely for example purposes.
5 Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For example, if you
want to double the Input flow rate value provided on Row 10, Column C,
enter the following formula:
=Input!C10*2
6 Go to the Custom Model tool; then click OK to send the output to Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer and close the tool.
When you display the specifications form of the component, you will see the
values from the Output worksheet.
Creating a Template
To create a template for a component:
1 Open GeneralModelTemplate.xls; then save it as another file. The
folder in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the Locations
tab in Preferences (APICustomModelDir). The default is:
AspenTech Economic Evaluation V8.0ProgramAPI Custom Models
2 Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot names
for the specifications that you want to have sent from Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided in Icarus
Technology Object Definitions (API.pdf). For example, to have the tool send
Shell Design Temperature to Excel when the file is run for Fixed Tube
Heat Exchangers, you would need to enter CPDesignTemperatureShell.
3 For connection stream information, enter slot names starting on Row 43,
Column B.
4 For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names starting on row
70, column B.
5 For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row 101, column B.
Running the Custom Model Tool at
Project-Level for Batch Update
The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one of two ways.
 The first method is for a batch update of custom model operations
performed on project components that are already linked to a custom
model template.
 The second method is for a batch update of all selected components.
After using the Custom Model tool for any number of components, you can
continue to experiment with different specifications and easily revert back to
the custom specifications by running the tool at the project level. Simply
right-click Main Project or Project Area in Project Explorer’s Project view;
then click Custom Model.
If more than one project component has been selected for the custom model
(for example, multi-selection, area selection, project selection), a message
box will appear asking you to specify the mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model template and all
of the selected project components will be processed with the one chosen
template.
If you click No, only project components with a link to a custom model
template will be processed with their associated template.
Note: the output will be based on the values in the Output workbook in
Excel. If the Output workbook contains formulas based on input, changes in
input since originally running the Custom Model will affect the output when
the Custom Model is re-run.
This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.

5 Sizing Project Components 343
5 Sizing Project Components
Note: Sizing is only available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are
licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer and you select at startup to use one of
them in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
Overview
Sizing for Project Components Mapped
from Simulator Items
Operating conditions for the project components mapped from simulator
models are obtained from the information loaded into Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator from the simulator report. Any Design Data in the simulator report
is also loaded and used during sizing. The information consists of a unit
operation model and the streams connected to it.
You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways:
 Right-click the component in Project Explorer and click Size Item on the
pop-up menu.
 Click the Size button on the Component Specifications form:

344 5 Sizing Project Components
Interactive Sizing Expert
For the following components, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides the
Interactive Sizing form that lets you adjust sizing specifications. The
Interactive Sizing form appears when you size the component.
Heat Exchangers DHE FIXED-T-S
DHE FLOAT-HEAD
DHE U-TUBE
DRB KETTLE
DRB THERMOSIPH
DRB U-TUBE
Compressors DCP CENTRIF
DCP GEN-SERV
DGC CENTRIF
DGC CENTRIF-IG
DGC RECIP-MOTR
EGC RECIP-GAS
DCP ANSI
DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP NAG DRIVE
Pumps DCP ANSI
DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP NAG DRIVE
Vessels DHT HORIZ-DRUM
DVT CYLINDER
DVT SPHERE
DVT SPHEROID
DVT STORAGE
If interactive sizing is not available, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator sizes the
item automatically using the simulator data.

Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped
from Simulator Items
Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized if they are
connected to streams. See “Creating Streams to Connect to Components” on
page XX346XX for instructions on creating inlet and outlet streams. If the
component is one of those for which interactive sizing is available (see list on
page X360X), the Interactive Sizing form is displayed during sizing. See “Using
the Interactive Sizing Form” for instructions on connecting a component to
streams during sizing.
If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option is unavailable.
Resizing Project Components
If the process conditions associated with a component change, then use the
Re-Size command on the project component pop-up menu to update all
equipment sizing information.
The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and then size
the equipment based on the current process conditions (those that you have
entered and those available from the currently loaded simulator file).
Therefore, if the component being re-sized is one of those for which
interactive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form that appears is
blank.
If you would like to keep some of your component specifications (that is,, not
have them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing Expert), do not use the
Re-size command. Instead, use the Size command or the Size button to
access the Interactive Sizing form with current specifications retained, rather
than cleared. Then, clear all fields except those you want to retain and click
OK to execute sizing. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will re-calculate only the
blank fields.

Creating Streams to Connect to
Equipment Items
For most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires selection of an
inlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid to the equipment item) and an
outlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid from the equipment item).
The set of instructions below show how to create streams to connect to an
item. In the example, inlet and outlet streams are created to carry 49 DEF F
water to a heat exchanger and an outlet stream is created to carry 200 DEG F
water from the heat exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructions
following these, a heat exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to 200
DEG F, using the streams created in the first examples.
To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream:
1 In Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, right-click Streams; then click
Edit.
2 On the Develop Streams dialog box, click the Create tab.

3 In the Streams tree structure, click User. Leave the Basis as Absolute,
since you are creating a completely new process stream.
4 Click Create.
5 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
Process-IN.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Develop Stream specifications form, specify:
o a primary fluid component
o temperature
o pressure
o liquid mass flow
Example:
 In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and click Water.
 In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40.
 In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90.
 In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.
8 Click Apply.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator fills in the rest of the fields in the Liquid
Information section.

9 Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box, where you now
need to create an outlet stream.
10 In the tree structure, click User. Notice that the inlet stream that you just
created is now displayed under User.
11 Click that stream and, in the Basis group, click Relative. The new outlet
stream will be based upon the inlet stream.
12 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
Process-OUT.

13 Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears. Specifications that appear
gray are the same as those of the base stream. Any modifications made will
appear black.
14 Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to temperature to
which the heat exchanger will be heating the fluid. In the example above,
the temperature has been entered as 200 DEG F and the pressure has
been entered as 80 PSIA. The other specifications are the same as the
base stream’s.
15 Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop Streams dialog
box, which you can now close.
Using the Interactive Sizing
Form
With the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform sizing.

To size an equipment item:
1 Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is available (see list
below) and display the Component Specifications form. If you are
following the example, add a floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See
page XX310XX for instructions on adding components.)
It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications form before
starting the Sizing Expert. However, all applicable sizing parameters that are
entered in the component specifications form will be carried over
automatically to the sizing expert and used in calculations.
2 Click the Size button.
The Interactive Sizing form appears.
Note: In order for the Sizing Expert to run, you must select process fluid
streams (one at Inlet and one at Outlet conditions) for at least one side (hot
or cold side).

Any other data you provide (for example,, Duty, Overall heat transfer
coefficient, LMTD, and so on) helps the Expert do its job better, but is not
necessary.
3 Click on the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to access a
drop-down list that includes all utility resources and user-created streams.
Note: “fluid” refers to liquid or gas.
4 If you are heating a fluid, as in the example, select a utility resource to
use as the heating source. The tables on the following page provide
definitions of the utility resources.
To heat a fluid from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, as in the example, the utility
Steam @100PSI-Aspen Process Economic Analyzer UTILITY is appropriate.

-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
cooled.
Utility Resources
If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimate
the actual utility rate required for the heat transfer and use this rate to create
utility streams as though they were user-specified. The utility stream names
are prefixed by “ICU” and are present under the Utility category in the
Develop Streams dialog box. These utility streams differ from utility resources
in that they have an actual flow rate whereas a resource is a “reservoir” that
can provide utility streams at any required flow rate.
Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects
Inlet
temperature
(DEG F)
Exit
temperature
(DEG F)
Operating
Pressure
(PSIA)
Utility
type
Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heat
source
source
source
Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heat
source
High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heat
source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant –
Propylene
-50 -50 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink
Cooling Water 95 75 50 Heat sink
Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects
Inlet
temperature
(DEG C)
Exit
temperature
(DEG C)
Operating
Pressure
(KPA)
Utility
type
Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heat
source
Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heat
source
Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heat
source

Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects
Inlet
temperature
(DEG C)
Exit
temperature
(DEG C)
Operating
Pressure
(KPA)
Utility
type
Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heat
source
High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heat
source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant –
Propylene
-45 -45 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink
Cooling Water 35 24 105 Heat sink

5 Click on the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access the
drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
6 If you are heating a fluid, select again the utility to use as the heating
source.
-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled fluid from
the exchanger.
7 Click on the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access the
drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
8 If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
heated.
9 A If you are following the example, select the Process-IN stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,”
pages XX346XX through XX349XX).
B If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a cooling
medium.
Click the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to access the drop-down
list of utility resources and user-created streams.
If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated fluid from the
exchanger.
 If you are following the example,
select the Process-OUT stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions
(see “Creating Streams,” pages XX346XX
through XX349XX).
If you are cooling a fluid, select again the
heat sink utility to use as the cooling
medium.
10 Click Apply. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator fills in the other fields on the
Interactive Sizing form.

Note: results are not transferred to the Component Specifications form until
you click OK and the sizing is successfully completed (that is,, without
generating error messages).
11 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides a message informing you of the
overdesign factor.
12 Click OK to accept this message.
The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear on the Component
Specifications form.

10 Click OK to save.
You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated by the
Sizing Expert in the item report.
Global Sizing Selection
You can define and/or select a sizing selection library to pre-define the sizing
selection for a project scenario. For each type of component, you can specify
custom models that will be applied in the sizing phase. These rules can also
be modified on a component-by-component basis when working on a specific
project scenario. For example, if you want to have all DCP CENTRIF based
equipment models within a project scenario sized with a specific custom
model, you can edit or create a Sizing Selection library (see Figure 1) to be
used. These libraries must be edited/created outside of a project.

Figure 1: Library tab in palette
To edit the library:
1 Double-click the library name (for example, my sizing).
The Sizing Selection dialog box appears.
2 To view or edit the sizing selection, click on the equipment model. All
equipment models default to “System Sizing” (see Figure 2).
Figure 2: Sizing Selection dialog box
3 To add or remove a custom model to the sizing selection list, click New
Sizing; then click your choice on the list of available custom models (see
Figure 3).

Figure 3: Add new sizing with custom model
The current sizing list for the equipment model is order dependent (see Figure
4).
Figure 4: Current Sizing List with System sizing and two custom models
Once this library has been specified, it must be selected in the project (see
Figure 5).
Figure 5: Selecting the Sizing Selection library for a project scenario
Sizing Areas
The Area sizing feature in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops length and
width of an area from the equipment in the area. When actual area
dimensions are not available, you can get a better estimate of area length
and width from the system when these parameters are not specified in the
area specs form.
The system calculated area length and width is used in the design of all area
bulks. You can use the system calculated area parameters as the area specs.

To have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculate the area:
1 Open the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project.
2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the menu that
appears, clicking Modify.
3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click OK; then click Close.
6 Evaluate the project.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
 AREA BULK REPORT
 AREA DATA SHEET
To specify the area yourself:
3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Enter values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click Area Piping; then enter data for the piping envelope.
6 Click Area Electrical; then enter data for Distance equipment to
panel/DB.
7 Click OK; then click Close.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
 AREA DATA SHEET
To Develop Area Utility Piping and Pipe Racks – system calculated
area length and width:
3 Click Specification | Area Piping; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the data in the Utility length parameter (0) and Utility stations
(-) fields.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Area Steel; then, on the menu that appears, click Modify.
7 Clear the data in the Pipe rack length (0) field; then click OK.
8 Close the Area Specification menu.

Some areas generate utility headers, utility stations. and pipe rack bulks. This
information appears in:
Sizing Requirements,
Calculations, and Defaults
Certain types of components have minimum input requirements for sizing.
Those requirements are provided in the following sections, along with
explanations of how the sizing is calculated for different component types.
Air Coolers
Minimum Input Requirements
 Inlet Stream
 Exit Stream
Sizing Procedure
The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations are given
below:
For thermal design:
Q = U*A*MTD
MTD = f*LMTD
For mechanical design:
A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length
where:
Q = Heat Duty
U = Heat transfer coefficient
A = Bare tube surface area
MTD = Mean Temperature difference
LMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on
purely countercurrent flow
f = Temperature correction factor
N_bays = Number of bays
N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows
N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account the
presence of a fan shaft)
Tube_length = Length of tubes

The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific heat
capacity) are assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler and are
estimated as the mean of the inlet and outlet stream properties. The required
heat duty is calculated from the inlet and outlet process stream conditions if it
is not specified.
The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used along with the
temperatures specified for the air stream (Design Criteria specifications) to
calculate the LMTD. The temperature correction factor is then used to
calculate the MTD.
If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are appropriate,
meaning that there is no temperature crossover and the temperature
approach at the ends is reasonable, then the surface area required for the
given heat duty is estimated using the thermal design equation. The air flow
rate needed to realize this heat duty is then calculated using the specified
ambient and outlet air conditions.
An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler. The sizing
routine calculates the heat duty that can be realized using the specified tube
bundle geometry (bay width, number of tube rows, and tube length). It
assumes defaults for parameters that you have not specified. If the computed
heat duty is larger than the heat duty actually required, the iterative
procedure terminates. The tube bundle arrangement used represents the
specification of the air cooler selected. If the calculated heat duty does not
meet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is chosen (that is,
parameter values are increased) and the above procedure is repeated. The
iterative procedure terminates either when a tube bundle geometry that can
meet the heat duty requirements is found, or when even the largest available
air cooler does not meet the process requirements.
Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations that take
into account the tube bundle geometry.
The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is being used
to evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air across the tube bundle.
The pressure drop thus calculated is used in estimating the fan power
required. The number of fans required is calculated based on the aspect ratio
(tube length/bay width). For any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan is
selected.
Defaults
Tube pitch = 2.5 INCHES
Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES
Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft
Tube rows = 3 to 6
Maximum Tube
length
= 3*Bay width
Inlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)
Outlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Agitated Tanks
 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following equation:
C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)
where:
C = Capacity , CF
Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH
T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES
The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and geometry:
C = (/4) * D^2 * L
where:
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
L = Fluid height, FEET
Vessel height is obtained by the following:
H = L + h_d
where:
H = Vessel height, FEET
h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET
Design parameters are based on the current Design Criteria specifications if
available:
Length/Diameter Ratio:
Default
= 3
Vapor disengagement height:
Default
= 1 FEET
Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR
Driver type: Default = STD
Impeller type: Default = T6FB

Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the report does
not have a value, then the pressure of the inlet stream having the maximum
value is chosen as the operating pressure.
The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user specification is
absent).
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D = 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D = 5
where:
P = Pressure, PSI
L = Fluid height, FEET
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
The project component must have at least one process stream connected to
the inlet and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is based on the liquid
holding period, at least one of the streams should have liquid phase.
The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating pressure
and temperature as modified by your entries on the Design Criteria
Compressors
 Inlet and Exit stream information
 Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)
Sizing Procedure
The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the inlet
stream information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are used to
estimate the total volumetric flow rate through the compressor.
The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the operating
pressures of the inlet and exit stream.
The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-specified
information, if available, or estimated by the sizing expert based on the
Primary Fluid Component.
The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is neither user-
specified nor provided in the simulator report. The engine currently uses a
mechanical efficiency of 100% to arrive at the brake horsepower. The brake
horsepower, thus calculated, is compared against a table of available
standard motor sizes. If the calculated brake horsepower is not found in the
table, then the motor with the next higher horsepower is selected.

If the driver horsepower is either user-specified or provided in the simulator
report, the engine uses this value. However for pricing the compressor, the
table of available standard motor sizes is referred. If the specified horsepower
is not found in the table, then the price of the motor with the next higher
horsepower is used.
In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide information that
may be slightly different. For instance, in the case of AspenPlus, the
compressor calculations take into account any mechanical efficiency specified
during the simulation run. So the “brake horsepower” reported in the case of
AspenPlus already takes into account the mechanical efficiency. However,
other simulators, such as SimSci (“Actual Work”); HYSIM and HYSYS (“Energy
Required”), and ChemCAD ( “Actual Power”); do not account for mechanical
efficiency. Keep this in mind and be aware of what has been accounted for in
the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.
Defaults
Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA
Crushers
Minimum Input Requirement
 Inlet and Exit stream information
 Final product size.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet stream
information. The crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set at 4.
Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce the feed to a
size so that 80% of the product will pass through a 100 micron screen. The
sizing expert in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator assumes a default value of
13.81 for the material work index.
The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using material
work index and the value of the product size.
The following equation is used to estimate the driver power:
P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))
where:
P = Driver power, HP
T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM
W_i = Material work index
d_p = Product size, FEET
d_r = Feed size, FEET

Defaults
 Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton
 Size Reduction Ratio: 4
Crystallizers
Minimum Information Required
Inlet and Exit Stream information
Additional Information
Final Product size
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on the inlet and
exit stream information.
Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user-specified
value is not available from the simulator report.
In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design parameters:
Growth
rate
= 0.36 MM/H
The residence time in hours for a batch crystallizer is determined by the
following relation:
Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g
where:
d_p = Product size, MM
R_g = Growth rate, MM/H
Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the
component specification form, the number of additional crystallizers are
estimated.
Dryers
Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the total
evaporation rate for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers, an average
depth of 2.25 FEET is used to determine the total dryer requirements. For
vacuum and jacketed rotary vacuum dryers, the dryer capacity is determined
by obtaining value of the drying time and the average percentage utilization
of the dryer capacity.
The system defaults are as follows:
Drying
time
= 0.75 HOUR
Average
percentage
utilization
= 25
The number of additional items required for the given drying operation is
determined from the knowledge-based engine in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, which analyzes minimum and maximum values for the required
fields in the specification form.
Dust Collectors
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through the dust
collector using the exit stream information available from the simulator
report.
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of
150 FPS. The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.
Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator is
obtained using Zenz correlation represented by the following equation:
Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16
where:
Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS
D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET
V = Linear velocity, FPS
In case of baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon as the
default filter cloth material to determine the air to media ratio which then
determines the diameter of the separator.

Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM. The default
ratio results in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water when passed through
1 SF of clean fabric.
The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.
The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown in the
component specification form are used to determine the number of identical
equipment items.
Filters
 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product rate based
on the exit stream information. Based on the type of filter selected, the
average dimension of the filter equipment is selected and the filter size is
then optimized for the given operation such that the dimensions selected for
the equipment are within the minimum and maximum values as specified by
the knowledge-based engine.
In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is used. In case
of plate and frame filters, default value of cake thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.
In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08 HOUR.
Based on the actual capacity requirement and the maximum and minimum
sizes provided by the knowledge-based engine, the number of identical items
is determined.
Heat Exchangers
The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area required
for the given operating conditions. The model also performs detail estimation
of the number of tubes, tube length, and other internal components of the
heat exchanger based on either user-defined specifications (from the process
simulator report or the Design Criteria specifications form) or system defaults.
Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information
Sizing Procedure
The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The Primary Fluid
Component class that you specify for the process fluid(s) flowing through the
heat exchanger is used to estimate the following design parameters:

 Latent heats (vaporization and condensation)
 Fouling resistance
 Specific heat capacity of the fluid
 Liquid film resistance
 Overall heat transfer coefficient
Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained from the
simulator report or estimated based on the inlet and exit process stream
information for the process model. In case the fluid undergoes phase change,
a boiling point temperature, Tb, is estimated that would lie between the inlet
and exit stream temperature. The estimated Tb is then used in the calculation
of the sensible and latent heats based on the Primary Fluid Component. The
sensible heat of any solids present in the stream is also accounted for in the
duty calculation.
In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat exchangers, the
2/3rd
Rule is applied if it has been selected on the Design Criteria
specifications form (see page XX199XX).
If only the process fluid conditions are specified by the simulator model, the
heat exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility from the list
of utilities that you specify using the Utility Specifications accessed from
Project Basis view (see page XX212XX). If multiple utilities are available for heat
transfer, then the sizing expert uses the utility fluid with a temperature
approach closest to the process fluid. This minimizes the heat transfer losses.
However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit difference in the final
temperature of the process fluid and the utility fluid must exist for the utility
fluid to be selected for the process. If an appropriate utility fluid is not
available for the heat transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program will
terminate without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.
The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the fluid
temperature for both the shell and the tube side. It also depends on the flow
configuration for shell and tube heat exchangers, which is specified by the
number of shell and tube passes. For reasons of compactness of equipment,
the paths of both fluids may require several reversals in direction. Mean
temperature differences in such cases can be obtained by applying a factor
(called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The logarithmic
mean temperature difference (based on purely counter current flow) is
multiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean temperature difference.
If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate warning
messages are displayed. In such cases it recommended that you check the
inlet and outlet temperatures of the shell and tube side streams and verify
that they are realistic.
The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from the
simulator report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid properties
(film resistance, fouling tendency present for the various processes in the
system database).
The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the fluids in
the shell and tube heat exchanger. The position depends on both the process
and utility fluid class.

If duty is provided by the simulator report, then you can override the value
only through interactive sizing.
The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat transfer area,
calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat Exchanger Minimum
Overdesign Factor. If you do not specify an overdesign factor then the default
value is used from the Design Criteria specifications.
If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for practical
design, the item report will give the appropriate warning message.
FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number of tube
passes. If you enter an odd number for the number of tube passes for any of
these heat exchanger types, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates warning
messages.
The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on the
maximum operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the shell and tube
respectively. The Design Criteria specifications form lets you change them
according to individual project requirements.
Note: If a size is entered for heat exchangers/reboilers after a scaling run is
made, only the area is scaled. If tube diameter is specified, then that value is
retained after scaling. If no diameter is given, then the default diameter is
used in the scaling calculations.
Heat Exchanger Internals
The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual number of tubes
chosen for the equipment. The least surface area of the combination of
numbered tubes and shells is changed for final design.
A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the number of tubes.
System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness, tube pitch and baffle
distances are used if user specifications are not available.
General Information
The utility requirement is estimated only when the system determines the
utility fluid. If both shell and tube side fluid stream information is specified in
the simulator report, then the system assumes that both of the fluid streams
are process streams and that no utility fluid is expended.
Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the material of
construction.
For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer surface area
calculated by the sizing program is greater than the largest heat exchanger
designed by the design and cost engine, then the heat exchanger is divided
into multiple shells with identical configurations. The capital cost estimation is
then calculated based on the complete heat exchanger.

Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG) from
SimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to determine the number of
shells in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the
maximum number of shells in series is 1.
Double Pipe Heat Exchanger
The sizing program in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimates the total
surface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation,
detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for
tube length and number of tubes per shell obtained from the simulator report
or from the user.
Fin Tube Heat Exchanger
The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given
duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat
exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube
obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.
Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger
The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given
duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat
exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube
obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.
Pumps
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for the selected
pump based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid stream(s) obtained from
the simulator.
Flow Rate/Capacity
Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the information
does not exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based on the stream flow
rates. The stream is assumed to be completely liquid phase and no check is
made for presence of vapor phase.
The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is multiplied by
the pump overdesign factor, also referred as the capacity over-design factor,
present in the Design Criteria specifications file.

Pump% Efficiency
Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the value is not
present in the simulator report, then the default value of 70% is used.
Pump Overdesign
You can modify the pump overdesign factor either on the Design Criteria
specifications form or the Interactive Sizing form. Modifying the overdesign
factor using the Design Criteria specifications form (page XX199XX) will applies the
new factor to all the pumps in the project. Modifying the overdesign factor for
a pump using the Interactive Sizing form (page XX349XX) applies the factor only to
that particular pump. This lets you either specify the factor for all pumps or
specify the factor individually for each pump.
Driver Power
If you specify a driver power in the component specification form then this
value is used. If the user does not provide the value then it is calculated by
the cost engine. The Icarus Evaluation Engine calculates the hydraulic
horsepower based on the capacity, viscosity and head, and then uses the
pump efficiency to estimate the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower is
compared against a set of standard available motor sizes to estimate the
pump driver power.
If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of pressure is used
for determining the operating pressure of the equipment.
Defaults (if they are not obtained from the
simulators):
 Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA
 Operating temperature: 77 DEG F
Calculating Pump Head
The total head developed by the pump is composed of the difference between
the static, pressure, and velocity heads. Additionally, friction at the suction
and discharge sides would also contribute to some head loss. The pump head
is calculated using the following relation:
Head,
FEET
= h_d – h_s
where:
H = total pump head, FEET
h_d = discharge head, FEET
h_s = suction head, FEET
Assumptions:
 No friction losses at the entrance and exit.
 No static head on suction and discharge sides.

 Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction and discharge
heads.
Head in feet is estimated by the following relations:
Head,
FEET
= (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)
The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams conditions. The
discharge pressure for the pump is based on the maximum value for the exit
stream(s). The suction pressure is based on the minimum value for the inlet
streams(s).
Screens
 Inlet stream information
 Screen opening size (or average product size)
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on the inlet
flow rate estimated from the stream information.
The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.
The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from the Design Criteria
specifications. The following choices are available:
 Sand and Gravel
 Limestone/Crushed Stones
 Coal
 Cinders
 Coke
 Wood
The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the
amount of solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one square foot of screen
cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50%
or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the screen unit
capacity is chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes that five layers of
particles are present on the screen. The surface area required for the
vibrating screen is obtained.
Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the knowledge base
for the screen capacity, additional items required by the operations are
determined.

Towers
 Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates
 Number of stages
 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the following Icarus
process equipment:
 DDT TRAYED
 DDT PACKED
 TW TRAYED
 TW PACKED
 DC HE TW
The following simulator models can be used to generate the necessary
process information required for successfully executing the application:
Simulator Models used
AspenPlus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC
HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN
Pro/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST, SHORTCUT
Loading Column Model from Simulator
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the rigorous column unit operations loaded
from the simulator report (that is, COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) are
developed in great detail, including all pieces attached to the main column
unit.
Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the main tower
and duties for an associated condenser and reboiler. These duties are used
along with the specified fluid conditions available from the stage information
tables to generate all of the input specifications required for the equipment.
Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower if
necessary during the loading process after all the relevant information is
collected for the models. Once the report is loaded, these units are treated as
separate simulator models which can be mapped and sized independently of
the main tower design.
Sidestrippers
Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main tower
model during the loading process. Sidestrippers load information from the
same tables in the report from which the main tower information is discerned.

For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in Pro/II are:
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
COLUMN SUMMARY
—————— NET FLOW RATES —————— HEATER
TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— ————— ———————— —————— —————— ————— ——————— ———————
1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V
2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
TYPE STREAM PHASE FROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATES
TRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— —————— —————— ————— ——— —————— —————————— ———————————
FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216
FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785
PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325
PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678
Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as for the
main tower unit (Refer to information for obtaining process data for main
tower unit).
Pumparounds
The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained from the
stage information to which the unit is connected. Additionally, the duty
associated with each pumparound is loaded into the unit. This unit is then
separated during the loading process and is treated as an independent
simulator model which can be mapped and sized on its own.
For example, the information required by pumparound units in PRO/II are
obtained from the following part of the column report:
COLUMN SUMMARY
————— NET FLOW RATES ————— HEATER
TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR
———— ————— ———————— —————— ————— ————— ——————— —————————
.
.
.
40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551
PUMPAROUNDS
TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION ——————————— RATES ———————————
FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR
—— —— —————— ————— —————— ————— ————————— ———————— ——————————
40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48
Mapping the Tower Model
Typically, column models in simulators do not include the ancillary equipment
attached to the main tower. For example, a tower unit may really consist of
the following equipment:
 Main tower
 Overhead condenser
 Condenser accumulator
 Overhead split

 Reflux pump
 Overhead pump
 Overhead product sub-cooler
 Reboiler
 Bottoms split
 Bottoms product pump
 Bottoms product heat exchanger
Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and therefore
do not represent any project component. In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
during mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as a quoted
cost item with zero cost.
In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units into more
than one actual piece for reasons of economy. For example, in many
applications, condensers are split into a precooler (which is typically an air
cooler but also can be any other type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler
(typically a shell and tube heat exchanger).
Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in AspenPlus, COLUMN UNIT in
PRO/II and COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSYS) can be mapped into any of the
following ten Aspen Capital Cost Estimator configurations:
 Standard - Single or Standard - Total
o Tower
o Condenser
o Condenser accumulator
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler.
 Full - Single
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Overhead product heat exchanger
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Bottoms product pump
o Bottoms product heat exchanger
 Standard - Split or Standard – Split Total
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcooler

o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
 Full - Split
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
 Standard - Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Full - Single w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Standard – Split Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler

o Trimcooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Full - Split w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow diagrams.
These configurations should be regarded as the “maximum” model with all
potentialities satisfied The components actually developed depend upon the
process conditions. For example, if the main tower model does not have a
condenser and a reboiler, then only the tower model is mapped.
If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid from the
condenser outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.
A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms product
stream has a different temperature from the temperature of the bottom stage
of the tower.
In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into precooler
and trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is obtained from the Design
Criteria specifications form. The overhead vapor stream flowing to the
precooler is assumed to be at dew point if the condensation temperature is
not provided.
Loading Tower Input Information
From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of stage
temperatures, stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow rates and stage molar
liquid flow rates are loaded in the mapping process.
For example, in the case of AspenPlus, the following tables in the RADFRAC
block are loaded by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator in the mapping process:

Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded (Column 1 and
2)
ENTHALPY
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08
2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08
Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor flowrates
are loaded. (Column 1 and 2)
STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATE
LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR
LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR
1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.0000
2 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+05
3 0.2586E+05 2140.
4 0.2595E+05 2286.
5 0.2602E+05 2380.
6 0.2606E+05 2444.
7 0.2610E+05 2493.
8 0.2614E+05 2532.
9 0.2617E+05 2568.
10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05
Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in the mapping
step.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following
portion of the report is loaded in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
INLETS7 STAGE 2
OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1
9 STAGE 10
When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping program loads
all the relevant information present in the sizing sections.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following
portion of the sizing report is loaded in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for every
section:
Case : Tray tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2
ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29
TRAY SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — —
TRAY TYPE SIEVE
TRAY SPACING METER 0.60960
***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER *****

COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228
Case : Packed tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2
ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9
PACKING SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — — — —
PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLE
HETP FT 2.00000
PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000
Determining Tower Process Conditions
 Operating Temperature
The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by column 1) is
used as the operating temperature for the tower.
 Operating Pressure
The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is
used as the operating pressure for the tower.
 Minimum Operating Pressure
The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is
used as the minimum operating pressure for the tower.
 Design Pressure
The maximum value from the stage pressure profile is used for calculating
the design pressure of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined-
design value from the design criteria file). When stage pressures are not
available, the maximum value of pressure from all the inlet streams is
used.
 Design Temperature
The maximum value from the stage temperature profile is used for
calculating the design temperature of the tower (that is, after applying the
user-defined design value from the design criteria file). When stage
temperatures are not available, the maximum value of temperature from
all the inlet streams is used.
 Number of Stages
The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of rows in
Table 1. The final number is determined by taking into account condenser
and reboiler (if they are provided). Also, the number of stages is affected
by the reboiler type depending on whether the reboiler simulated in the
report is kettle or thermosiphon.
For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, consider the
following table:
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08
2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.

4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08
If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is eight.
If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from simulator),
then the number of theoretical stages is nine.
 Liquid Density
Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of
the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density cannot be
obtained from the streams, the density of water is used as default.
 Vapor Density
Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the density
of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density cannot be
obtained from the streams, the vapor density is estimated based on gas
law. The vapor density is estimated at the minimum operating pressure
and operating temperature.
 Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower
Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and exit
streams. The lowest molecular weight of the streams is assigned as the
vapor molecular weight.
 Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower
Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular weight for the
inlet and exit streams.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals desired and
the simulator model used for the operation. The procedure described below
gives a description of the actual steps used by the sizing module to estimate
the sizes for the different types of trayed and packed towers.
Trayed Tower Sizing
General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals):
The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate some of the
properties in designing the tray internals, such as surface tension, foaming
tendency, deration factor if they are not specified in the simulation output
report or on the Design Criteria specifications form.
You can specify the overall column tray efficiency in the Tray Efficiency box
on the Design Criteria specifications form (see pages XX200XX). If the value is not
provided, then it is estimated using Lockett’s modification of the O’Connell
Correlation. This correlation is based on tests on actual plant columns and has
been the standard of the industry.

The tray efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages required
for the separation.
EOC = 0.492 ( L
) -0.245
where:
EOC = efficiency, O’Connell Correlation
L = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE
 = relative volatility of key component
A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key components that
you can modify on the Design Criteria specifications form. The liquid viscosity
is either directly obtained from the report or estimated from the fluid
classification.
 Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on the actual
number of trays), additional height for vapor disengagement and liquid
return is based on your Design Criteria specifications.
 In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator report
represent the theoretical number of stages. However, if detailed design of
the tower has been done by the simulator using tray efficiency, then the
number of trays are actual trays. If Aspen Capital Cost Estimator finds
that the number of trays are actual, then it uses the value to estimate the
height and does not add any additional tray efficiency.
Using Tower Sizing Information
When a simulator report provides sizing information, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator tries to use as much of the information as possible in the final
design. When multiple sections are present in the report, the information
used by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator depends on the equipment to which the
model is mapped.
Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)
If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray spacings,
then the largest values of the diameters and tray spacings are used for the
actual design of the tower.
Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)
For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the sectional
report are used in the design. Once the tower is divided into two sections
(based on diameter), the value of the tray spacing for each section is based
on the stage numbers present in each section. The largest values of tray
spacing for each section are used to estimate the tower height.
For example, for AspenPlus, assume the following sizing information is
obtained from the report after completing the loading process.
Section 1:
Diameter = 5 FEET
Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES
Stages = 2 to 4

Section 2:
Diameter = 6 FEET
Stages = 5 to 7
Section 3:
Diameter = 8 FEET
Stages = 8 to 10
The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the following
dimensions:
Top Section
Diameter
= 6 FEET
Top Section Tray
Spacing
= 30 INCHES
Top Section Stages = 2 to 7
Bottom Section
Diameter
= 8 FEET
Bottom Section
Tray Spacing
= 18 INCHES
Bottom Section
Stages
= 8 to 10
The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage. Then, the
maximum value is used to design the single diameter tower. In case of double
diameter tower, the program estimates the diameter for the bottom section
and the top section based on the cross sectional area estimated for each
stage.
Sieve Tray Design
The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the correlation developed for
entrainment flooding by Kister and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used to
estimate the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the Jeronimo and
Swistowski correlation predicts the clear liquid height at the transition from
the froth to the spray regime. However, empirical evidence has shown that
clear liquid height in the spray regime is much the same as clear liquid height
at that transition.
The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to evaluate the flooding vapor
velocity.
The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity, the derating factor
and the safety factor. (Column default design is 90% of flood.)

Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming tendency of the fluid and
tray spacing. Foaming tendency can be specified on the Design Criteria
The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the downcomer velocity and
the maximum liquid flow inside the tower.
The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding the bubbling area
and the downcomer area.
The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-sectional area by
rounding the area up to the next half foot. The minimum diameter for the
tower is 1.5 FEET.
Valve Tray Design
Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by Glitsch. The
system factors are estimated based on the fluid classification performed on
the fluid flowing through the column. The tray diameter is evaluated for either
single pass trays or two pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacing
and 80% of flood.
Bibliography
“Distillation Design”, by Henry Z. Kister.
“Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical Plant”, Volumes 1
and 3, by Ernest E. Ludvig.
“Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations”, by Tyler G. Hicks
“Chemical Engineers HandBook”, by Perry and Chilton, 6th Edition.
Bubble-Cap Tray Design
The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for bubble-cap
trays have been represented by the Jersey Critical formula which
corresponds to the work by Souder and Brown for column flooding.
  2
1
/
0956
.
0 v
L
v K
W
D 


where:
D = Diameter, FEET
Wv = vapor flow rate, LB/H
L = liquid density, LB/CF
v = vapor density, LB/CF
The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows:
Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+
K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0

Packed Tower Design
Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and structured
packings. The various types of packings supported by the system are
described in the Icarus Reference.
Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure drop at the
flood point as a function of packing factor alone.
FL = .155 (Fp
0.7)
where:
FL = Pressure drop at flood point
Fp
 Packing factor
Note: You can provide the value for the packing factor on the Design Criteria
specifications form. The system defaults are used for each of the different
types of packings if you do not enter a value.
Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the
latest version of GPDC (Generalized Pressure Drop Correlation) charts for
both random and structured packings.
HETP Prediction
You can provide the HETP value on the Design Criteria specifications form. If
the value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction reported in literature are
used to predict the packed tower efficiency.
For random packing columns, the following rules are used for estimating HETP
(FEET):
HETP = 1.5 dp
dp = Packing diameter, INCHES
HETP > DT
for DT
< 2 FEET
For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule of thumb is
used:
HETP,
INCHES
= 1200 /ap + 4
ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF
System Defaults
The following system default values may be modified on the Design Criteria
specifications form and Component Specifications form:
Trayed Tower Defaults
Tray Type = Sieve
Tray Spacing = 24 inches
Flooding Factor = 80 %
Foaming Tendency = Moderate

Packed Tower Defaults
Packing Type = Random
Packing Material = 1.0PPR
Specific area per unit
volume for the
packing
= 0.75 SF/CF
General Defaults
Top vapor
disengagement
height
= 4 FEET
Bottom sump height = 6 FEET
SimSci’s SHORTCUT Column Operation
In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides only the
minimum reflux ratio for the distillation process. To design the tower, the
ratio of the operating reflux ratio and minimum reflux ratio has to be
provided. The system uses the default value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio can
be changed on the Design Criteria specifications form (see page XX200XX). If the
simulator report does not contain information (number of trays) for the
operating reflux ratio, the tower sizing program returns to the system without
performing sizing for the tower.
Vessels
Horizontal Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria
specifications form:
 Residence Time
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
 Average Liquid Particle Diameter
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
 Separation Factor
 Vapor area /cross sectional area
 Separation Factor Multiplier
 Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design)
 Minimum Boot diameter
 Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
Design Requirements
The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams can be
liquid.
Calculating Diameter
Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor velocity inside the
separator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in the vapor.
The following two methods are available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
(chosen from the Design Criteria specifications) to obtain vapor velocity.
 Liquid Entrainment Method
 Particle size separation method.
Calculating Vapor Velocity
Liquid Entrainment Method
The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid entrainment is
obtained as a function of liquid and vapor density and the Separation Factor,
which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid density and vapor and
liquid flowrates. The polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrained
in the vapor and is valid for the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0. Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator lets you override the computed value of Separation
Factor.
W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)
X = ln (SF)
k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)
K = k_v * k_vm
v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)
where:

l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate
v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate
l_rho = Light Liquid Density
v_rho = Vapor Density
K = System Factor
SF = Separation Factor
k_v = Polynomial Function of SF
k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier
A = -1.877478097
B = -0.8145804597
C = -0.1870744085
D = -0.0145228667
E = -0.0010148518
The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a “W”(SF) between 0.006
and 5.0. If “W” falls outside the range, the sizing program gives a warning
message and the limiting value of W is used to estimate Separation Factor.
For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used in the
correlation is 0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0, then the value used
in the correlation is 6.0.
Particle Size Separation Method
This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble in the
vapor space. The maximum allowable vapor velocity is determined as a
percentage of the disengagement velocity.
Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a Reynolds number
of 100. Large drops (greater than 0.3125 INCHES) will deform, with a
resulting increase in drag, and in some cases shatter.
For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to remain in
spherical shape.
The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow conditions.
For laminar flow (K < 3):
v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)
and for turbulent region:
v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5
where:
K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33
v = disengagement velocity
g = gravitational constan
rho_l = liquid density
rho_v = vapor density
dp = liquid bubble diameter

mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)
The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation:
v_m = v * f
where:
v_m = disengagement velocity
f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
v = disengagement
Calculating vessel cross-sectional area
Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity and the
vapor volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is divided by the ratio of
vapor area/cross sectional area to get the total required cross sectional area.
v_csa = v_vol/v_m
t_csa = v_csa/r_vc
where:
v_csa = Vapor area
v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow
r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area
t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area
Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow:
D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /)
where:
D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow
฀ = 3.14
Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user-specified
value of L/D ratio.
The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity and liquid
holdup is used for final design.
Calculating Length
Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid flowrate and
the residence time. The vessel length is then calculated as given below:
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
L = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))

where:
l_vol = Liquid holdup volume
L = Length
l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = Residence time
r_vc = r_vc
Checking L/D Ratio
For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows:
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of
L/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on
the Design Criteria specifications form.
Estimating Boot Dimensions
Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain a heavier
liquid phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid phase volume and
boot liquid velocity.
Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t
Boot cross section area
(bt_csa)
= bt_vol / hl_vel
Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /)
Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/( * d^2)
where:
hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate
hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity
l = boot length
d = boot diameter
Vertical Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria
specifications form:
 Residence Time
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
 Average liquid particle diameter
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
 Separation Factor
 Minimum Disengagement Height
 Minimum height above the mist eliminator
 Height of Mist Eliminator
Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal vessels.
The default value of Separation Factor Multiplier is available in the Design
Criteria specifications.

Calculating Vessel Height
Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate and the
residence time. The liquid height in the vessel is then calculated and the
additional height is added to obtain the overall vessel height.
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2)
h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht
where:
l_vol = liquid holdup volume
l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = residence time
l_ht = liquid height based on residence time
LLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and
tangent line (design criteria)
ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid level
tap (design criteria)
d_ht = disengagement height
me_ht = mist eliminator height
mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator
If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the taps,
specified in the design criteria, then the minimum height is used.
Checking L/D ratio
For all liquid
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of L/D is compared with
the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on the Design Criteria specifications form.

6 Piping and Instrumentation Models 393
6 Piping and Instrumentation
Models
Overview
Icarus provides hundreds of default piping and instrumentation drawings
(P&ID’s), each associated with a process equipment item. If a process
equipment item has a P&ID, the P&ID button is active on the Component
Specifications form.
Using the P&ID Editor
Features of P&IDs
 Functionality equivalent to Icarus 2000 added to Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
 Uses Intergraph RAD technology as drawing engine
 Intelligent P&ID for single component only
 Port based system with Piping, Electronic, Pneumatic, Thermocouple and
Process Connection ports
 Piping and Process Connection ports are uni-directional; others are bi-
directional
 Administrator mode for building components or user P&ID models for
system library
 User mode selects system default models or alternate user P&ID models
 User can modify some characteristics of P&ID in a project
 Uses Aspen Capital Cost Estimator line diameter and length calculations or
user supplied calculations using Line Sizing Equation Editor
P&ID Modes
You can work with P&IDs in two ways:

394 6 Piping and Instrumentation Models
 If you are not in a specific project, you are in Administrator mode. Use
Administrator mode to build components or to build user P&IDs for the
System Library.
 If you are in a specific project, you are in User mode. In User mode, you
can select system default models or user P&ID models. You can also
modify some P&ID characteristics.
P&ID Layout and Structure
To access the P&ID user interface:
1 On the palette, click the Libraries tab.
2 On the Libraries tab, double-click the P&IDs icon .
The P&ID User Interface appears.
The left pane contains the User P&IDs. This is where you can create
customized drawings and manage your library.
The right pane contains the System P&IDs. This is where you view the system
PIDs.

In the User P&ID Libraries area, you can add
 categories
 files
You can create folders to organize your custom drawings. The system PIDs
are organized by equipment type. You cannot add or remove PID files and
folders cannot be added or removed from the system area, but you can
customize a system drawing by copying and pasting or dragging and dropping
into the Users PIDs area.
Each PID file can only be used for a specific equipment type, such as a
horizontal tank. A file can be further limited to an application of that
equipment type, such as Batch operations. You specify this when you initial
create your initial PID.
To add a new category to the User P&ID Libraries area:
1 Right-click User P&ID Libraries.
2 On the menu that appears, click New | Category.
The rename dialog box appears.
3 In the rename dialog box, type the name for your new category.
4 Click OK.
Your new category appears in under User P&ID Libraries.
To add a new User P&ID file:
1 Right-click User P&ID Libraries or the category under which you want to
insert the new file..
2 On the menu that appears, click New | File.
The New File dialog box appears.
3 On the New File dialog box, type:
o the Name for the P&ID file (required)
o a Description of the P&ID file (optional)
Note: Each PID file can only be used for certain equipment types

o the Item Symbol (type of equipment) this new drawing will apply to
(for example, VT). You can browse for the Item Symbol by clicking the
More button .
o the Item Type (optional) to further restrict the drawing to an individual
application (for example, Storage only). You can browse for the Item
Type by clicking the More button .
Note: If you leave the Item Type field blank, the P&ID will apply to all
applications of the selected Item Symbol (for example, all VTs).
4 When you are satisfied with the details of the new file,
 Click OK to insert the new file.
-or-
 Click Cancel to abandon adding the new file.
Note: If you click OK in Step 4 above, this will be a blank drawing where you
must draw the desired drawing.
To Delete (Remove) a User P&ID category or file:
1 Right-click the category or file you want to remove.
2 Click Remove.
Your category or file is removed.
The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID
Layout: Radpfs Interface
This second user interface is the Radpfs drawing tool. This application lets you
view a PID and make changes to it.
The main area of the interface is the drawing area. The symbol menu is on
the left side of the screen and the labels are at the bottom.
The drawing area contains the PID objects and the labels. The labels include:

 PID title
 number
 date
 company name
Use the toolbars at the top for:
 drawing
 zooming
 labeling
 and so on
Note: You can remove the toolbars at the top to give you more drawing
space.
Symbol Menu
The symbol menu is where you can select objects to add to the drawing.
These objects include:
 equipment symbols
 instrument bubbles
 piping lines
 valves and fittings
Symbol Menu – Details
The illustrations below show the details of the Symbol menu.

Symbol menu categories
The Line types section of the Symbol menu includes:
 Electronic
 Pneumatic
 Thermocouple
 Process connections
When you select a line type in the Symbol menu, all of the ports of this type
on the PID appear.
The Piping section of the Symbol menu contains all of the valves and fittings
that have graphical representations. Here are some example Piping objects:
Under the Instrumentation heading of the Symbol menu you will find the
control valves, which can be connected to piping lines and instrument bubbles
to form loops. Here you will also find the instrument bubbles, which can be
connected to equipment symbols or piping lines using process connections
ports; the bubbles are connected to each other and control valves using
electronic and pneumatic ports to form loops.
Here are some example Instrumentation objects:

The last two headings of the Symbol menu contain the equipment symbols:
 Equipment contains the system default equipment symbols.
 Custom Equipment contains any customized equipment symbols.
Working with Ports
The RadPfs PID editor is a port based system. Ports:
 let you connect piping and instrumentation lines to objects in your PID
 appear on the PID as arrows
 display the port name if the cursor is positioned over it
Port Properties
Every port has the following properties:
 Name
 Type – A port can be connected only to another of the same type
o Piping
o Process Connection
o Electrical
o Pneumatic
o Thermocouple
 Direction
o In
o Out
o Bi-directional

Making Ports Visible
To make ports visible:
 On the Symbol menu, under Line Types, click the type of line for which
you want to make the ports visible.
For example, if you want to make the Piping ports visible on your drawing,
under Line Types, click Piping.
The Piping ports are now visible, as shown below.
Forming Connections Using Ports
To use ports to form connections (or draw a line) on the drawing:
1 On the Symbol menu, click the port type you want. Ports of that type are
made visible.
2 In the drawing, left-click the port you want to use. A dotted red line
showing the link moves as you move the mouse.
3 Left-click another port of the type you are using. A line will be drawn
automatically between the two ports. You might use this technique for a
branching pipe or instrument loops.

-or-
In the case of piping lines, drop the other end of the red dotted line onto
a blank area on the drawing. This will also draw the line automatically, but
it will represent a line coming from or traveling to an area outside of the
drawing.
Editing P&IDs
You can make changes to a PID in radpfs, such as:
 adding piping lines
 adding valves and fittings
 adding instrumentation
 adding labels
 deleting objects
Adding Piping Lines
Remember that at least one end of a line of pipe will be connected to a piping
port on the equipment symbol or another line of pipe. The other end of the
piping line can be
 connected to a piping port or it can be
 dropped onto white space to represent originating from or traveling to a
destination outside of the PID
The suggested order is to:
1 Add the line of pipe.
2 Supply a pipe number.
3 Add valves and fittings.
To add a piping line:
1 On the Symbol menu, click the Piping line type.
2 Click a port you want to use. As you move the mouse around the screen
you will see a red dotted line.

3 Click to assign the other end of the line of pipe. A line will be drawn
automatically for you.
The next step is to supply a pipe number.
To supply a pipe number:
1 Right-click on the newly created piping line.
2 On the menu that appears, click Number Piping Line.
3 Type a pipe number for the piping line number.
4 Click OK.
The next step is to add valves and fittings.
To add a valve or fitting:
1 In the left pane, expand Piping.
2 Click the name of the type of valve (or other fitting) you want to add.
A graphical representation in the lower left pane. The example below is of a
butterfly valve.
3 Click the location on the line of pipe where you want to add the valve or
fitting.
It is drawn and connected automatically.
To display the line number or the description on the PID:
1 Right-click on a line.

2 On the menu that appears, click:
o Display Piping Number
o Display Piping description
To display more information about this line of pipe
1 Right-click the line of pipe.
2 On the menu that appears, click select View Piping Properties.
The Piping Line Properties dialog box appears.
 Use the Description field to change the description of this line of pipe at
the top of the screen.
 Use the fields in the Fitting group to add valves and fittings which do not
have graphical representations, such as elbows or tee’s. You can see that
the first two valves are grayed out – these have graphical representations,
so they must be added or deleted on the PID itself.
 Use the remainder of the fields to select fittings to add.
 Use the fields in the Line Sizing group to specify line sizing details. The
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID system lets you write line sizing rules
that calculate diameter and length relative to aspects of the component,
such as volume or flow rate. See Line Sizing Tutorial, page XX416XX, for details
about how to create a new rule. The Line Sizing area is where you can
select a rule for use on this piping line.
The Temperature and Pressure Type fields are for:
 gas compressors
 double diameter towers
 heat exchangers

Use these fields to tell the system where this line of pipe is connected to one
of these pieces of equipment.
The Connect to equipment location field is used for nozzle sizing for
vessels and towers only.
Adding Instrumentation Loops
All instrumentation and control valves in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
system are grouped as loops. If you are familiar with the Icarus system,
especially the instrumentation installation bulks form, a helpful concept is
that:
By selecting bubbles and editing the Instrumentation Properties, you
provide the exact same information you would find in the Installation
Bulk – Instrumentation screen.
The suggested workflow for adding an instrument loop is:
 Add the desired bubbles to the PID.
 Connect the loop together.
 Provide a loop number.
The instrument bubbles are found in the Symbol Menu.
They are organized by location, then by process variable.
Location is important because it will affect the pieces of equipment generated
in your estimate: for instance, if you choose a local control bubble only, you
will not get a run of instrument cable from the field to the control center.
Control center bubbles will not have process connection ports, so choose
bubbles which represent your process most accurately.
To add instrument bubbles and control valves to the PID:
Note: This example is a pressure loop with a control valve.
1 On the left pane, expand Instrumentation.
2 Click the instrumentation type you want to place.
3 Move the cursor into the drawing where you want to place the
instrumentation bubble; then click.

The bubble is placed in the drawing.
4 Add the next instrumentation bubbles one by one.
5 Add a control valve (Instrumentation | Control Valves | <name of
control valve>) if necessary.
Next, the process connection ports are used to connect the local bubbles to
the piping line or equipment symbol.
6 In the left pane, click Line Types | Process Connection to display the
Process Connection ports so you can attach the bubble to a line of pipe.
A dotted red line appears when you move the cursor, showing you where the
line will be drawn.
7 Click again where you want the line to connect.
8 In the left pane, click Line Types | Electronic to display the Electronic
ports so you can connect the rest of the loop.

9 Click an Electronic port.
A dotted red line appears when you move the cursor, showing you where the
line will be drawn.
10 Click again where you want the line to connect.
The line is connected.
11 Continue connecting bubbles and ports until the loop is complete.
12 Right-click anywhere on the loop.
13 On the menu that appears, click Number Loop.
You can modify the loop, by:
 removing parts of the loop from the estimate
 adding a Back of Panel Option
 changing instrument quantity
 and so on
To modify the loop:
1 Right click the loop.
2 On the menu that appears, click View Loop Properties.

The Loop Properties dialog box appears.
If you are familiar with the instrumentation installation bulk form, you will
probably notice that this interface provides many of the same inputs.
The following inputs are unavailable, because they are determined graphically
by the PID loop bubbles:
o Process Variable
o Panel Action
o Sensor Type
o Instrument Location
o Signal Type
3 Use the Loop Properties dialog box to customize:
o Description: Loop name
o Back of Panel Option
o Quantity
o Number of Solenoids
o Loop Modifications
 Remove specific pieces of the loop from the estimate
4 When you have finished customizing the loop, click OK.

Adding or Editing P&ID Labels
Each PID has space at the bottom for:
 title
 number
 date
 company name
To add or edit P&ID labels:
1 At the bottom of the drawing, double click in the box you want to edit.
The text in the box becomes red, indicating you can edit it.
2 Type your additions or edits.
3 Click anywhere else in the drawing.
Adding Miscellaneous Labels
You can add miscellaneous labels throughout the PID.
To add a miscellaneous label:
1 On the Label toolbar, click the Label icon as shown below.
Note: If the Label toolbar is not visible,
A Click View | Toolbars.
B Select Label.
C Click OK.
2 Click in the drawing where you want to place the label, moving your
cursor to make a box into which the label will go.
3 Type your label into the box.
4 Click anywhere else in the drawing.
Deleting Pipe, Instrumentation, and Valves
To delete any objects from your drawing:
1 Right-click the object you want to delete.
2 On the menu that appears, click Delete.
When deleting objects, one common situation that is created is a
disconnected line of pipe because you delete a valve or fitting from the middle
of it, as shown here.

After deleting a valve
To reconnect the line:
1 Delete one of the loose ends.
2 Right click the other loose end.
3 On the menu that appears, click Reconnect Source or Reconnect
Destination, depending on the direction of the pipe.
Line reconnected
Efficient PID Creation
When you create a drawing from scratch, the recommended workflow is to
add items in this order:
1 Equipment symbol
2 Lines of pipe
3 Pipe numbers
4 Valves and fittings

5 Instrument bubbles
6 Control valves
7 Instrument connections
8 Instrument loop numbers
9 Labels
AspenTech has found that efficiency is improved by positioning the objects in
the drawing before using ports to form connections. This is because moving
the objects into position before making all the connections saves
readjustment effort later.
Cosmetic Tips
You can adjust the position of any lines on your PID by dragging and
dropping, as shown here.
When you move objects around, you may see that there are kinks in some
lines.
To straighten kinked lines:
1 Right-click the line you want to straighten.
2 On the menu that appears, click Align.

You can move all objects on the PID, including line numbers, descriptions,
and text boxes, by dragging and dropping.
Adjusting line intersection points
To adjust the position of connection points between two lines:
1 Position the mouse over the connection point.
2 When the arrow appears, click and hold to drag and drop the connection
up and down the line.
When you use branch or join ports to connect one piping line to another, the
branch port is always on the top of the line, and the join port is on the
bottom. Sometimes this isn’t what you want.
To reverse the connection:
1 Position the mouse over the connection point.
2 Click and drag to reverse the connection.
Radpfs toolbars
The most often used toolbars are:
 the Symbol menu
 Label
 Main
 Draw

To add or delete toolbars:
1 On the main menu click View | Toolbars.
The Toolbars dialog box appears.
2 On the Toolbars dialog box, select or clear the check boxes for the
toolbars until you are satisfied.
3 Click OK.
You can shift toolbars around the screen (undock them), by dragging and
dropping.
Zooming
Use the Zoom icons on the Main toolbar to control your view of your
drawing.
Use this icon to
Zoom Area
highlight an area to zoom in on
Zoom In
zoom in
Zoom Out
zoom out
Fit
fit the viewable area to the full drawing area
Pan
move the drawing around in the drawing space

Custom Equipment Symbols
In addition to using the system default equipment symbols, you can create
custom symbols. You can:
 customize the default symbols
 import symbols
 create your own symbols from scratch
Getting Started with Custom Equipment Symbols
To add a new symbol to the system:
1 Double-click a blank PID file to open Radpfs.
Note: You can find a blank file by expanding List of All P&ID Library Files
in the center pane.
2 On the Main menu bar, click File | Add Custom Equipment Model.
The Add Custom Model dialog box appears.
3 In the Enter model name field, type a name for the new model.
4 If you want, in the Enter display name field, type a description for the
new model.
5 In the Select category field, tell the system where in the folder structure
you want to keep this new symbol (this is where you will find it in the
Symbol menu). We recommend adding new symbols to the Custom
Equipment heading.
Note: On this interface you can create new subfolders by double clicking
on the New category items.

Modifying a system equipment symbol
To modify a system equipment symbol:
1 Click File | Add custom equipment symbol.
2 Click File | Open.
3 In the /AspenTech/RADPFS <version>/icons/AspenEQ/ directory,
click a file.
4 Click the equipment symbol to highlight it.
5 Click Edit | Copy; then select Window | <your new symbol file>.
6 Right-click; then click Paste.
7 Drag and drop the symbol to position the symbol in the middle of the
drawing area.
Now you add ports to the system equipment symbol.
When you are customizing a symbol, the Port menu is visible on the left-
hand side of the Radpfs interface instead of the Symbol menu
To add a port:
8 Right-click a type in the Port menu; then click add port.
9 Give the port a descriptive name that indicates the intended function of
the port.
10 Select a type; then click OK.
11 You can now put this port into position by dragging and dropping onto the
equipment symbol.
12 Use right-click and rotate to adjust the orientation of the port.
13 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add all the ports you think you’ll need
14 Save the ports in the CustomEQ folder for use in future PIDs
15 Save the symbol file in the CustomEQ folder.
This new symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.
Importing an equipment symbol
In addition to customizing an Icarus equipment symbol, you can import a
symbol image from an outside drawing package, such as AutoCad or
Microstation, and add ports to it.
To import a system equipment symbol:
2 Click File | Open.
3 Open an outside drawing instead of a symbol file from the AspenEQ
folder.
4 Left-click the equipment symbol and copy it.
5 Use the Window menu to switch back to the screen where you are defining
the customized symbol.

6 Right click and paste the symbol; drag and drop to position the symbol in
the middle of the drawing area.
To add a port:
the port.
equipment symbol.
14 Save the symbol file in the CustomEQ folder.
This imported symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.
Creating an equipment symbol from scratch
The third option for creating new equipment symbols is to draw your own
using the Microsoft drawings tools, found on the Draw toolbar.
To create a system equipment symbol from scratch:
2 Use the shapes in the drawing toolbar to create your symbol
To add a port:
the port.
equipment symbol.

10 Save the symbol file in /AspenTech/RADPFS
<version>/icons/CustomEQ/.
This new symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.
Line sizing Tutorial
Instead of using the system default rules for calculating pipe length and
diameter, you can write your own. You can use the Line Sizing Equation
Editor to create new rules which size the pipe according to equipment
properties such as:
 volume
 height
 flow rate
To access the line sizing Equation Editor:
 Without a project open, on the Libraries tab in the right pane of the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface, double-click Line Sizing
Equation.
The Equation Editor dialog box appears.
The main list box contains the equations which are part of the system at this
time. When you are editing an individual equation, you will use the inputs at
the bottom of the interface.
Line Sizing Equations
Each line sizing equation is either a rule for calculating the pipe length or
diameter. Each equation:
 is either a Length or Diameter rule (determines starting letter L or a D)
 has a reference number (example: 1001)
 has a Descriptor line (example: D1001D)
 has a Equation line (example: D1001E)
The first line in the definition of a rule is the Descriptor line. This contains
the text description and the unit of measure basis.

The second line contains the equation itself.
Note: You can add as many comment lines as you want in the list box to
describe an equation or section of equations.
In the example above,
 the unit of measure basis is IP
 the length is calculated as the Diameter of the equipment component
divided by 2 plus 10 feet
To create a new line sizing equation:
1 Without a project open, on the Libraries tab in the right pane of the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface, click Line Sizing Equation.
The Equation Editor dialog box appears.
2 On the Equation Editor dialog box, click the Add button three times to
add three more lines.
There are three steps to creating an Equation:
Step 1: Add a comment or comments
Step 2: Specify the Descriptor and Units of Measure
Step 3: Specify the Equation itself
Step 1 To add a comment or comments:
1 Click the first of the newly-added lines to highlight it.
2 Click Edit.
3 In the Comment field, type any comments you want to describe this
equation/section.

4 Click Apply.
Your comment appears in the main window.
Step 2: To specify the descriptor and Units of Measure:
1 Click the second of the newly-added lines to highlight it.
2 On the Card Type list, click Length or Diameter.
The other fields in the row are now available.
3 In the Ref. No. field, type a unique Reference Number.
4 On the Data Type list, click Descriptor.
5 In the Description field, type a text description for this equation.
6 On the Units list, click the unit of measure basis for this equation.
Note: The line sizing system has been constructed so that all quantities
used in the equations are assumed to be in the selected unit of measure
basis.
o An I-P equation will result in a length in feet or diameter in
inches.
o A metric equation will calculate a length in meters or a
diameter in mm’s.
o All variables used in the equation will also be calculated in
terms of the selected unit of measure basis. For this reason
your equations can be used by both Metric and I-P projects with
equivalent results.
7 Click Apply.
Step 3: To specify the Equation itself:
1 Click the third of the newly-added lines to highlight it.
This line will contain the equation used to calculate the Length or Diameter of
the piping line.
2 Create an equation using:
o real numbers
o variables selected from the Symbols drop-down box
o operator symbols from the Operators and Operands area
3 When you are satisfied with your equation, click Apply.
4 Click Compile to add the new equation to your system.

5 If you are prompted as to whether to save your changes before compiling,
click Yes.
6 Click Close.
You can now use this new equation in any PID by selecting the equation in
the Piping Line Properties screen – Length or Diameter drop-down boxes.
To open the default drawing for a component:
 Click the arrow of the P&ID button and, on the drop-down menu;
then click Open Default.
This opens the drawing in the P&ID Editor, where you can print the drawing
(File | Print) or send the drawing through electronic mail (File | Send).

You can use the P&ID Editor to make modifications to the drawing.
Modifications affect only the active project.
You can also use the P&ID Editor to create your own P&ID’s and build a User
P&ID Library. Then, when adding an equipment item in a project, you can
select to use your custom P&ID instead of the default.
The following sections explain how to create custom P&ID’s and how to use
them in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Using Custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
There are several ways to use custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
 Set a custom drawing as a component’s default P&ID. This will make your
custom drawing the component’s default P&ID in all future projects, until
the default is reset.
 Attach a custom drawing to a single component added to a project.
 Set a custom drawing as a component’s default P&ID for only the active
project.
Setting a Component’s Default P&ID
You can make a custom drawing a component’s default P&ID. This must be
done with no project open.
To set a component’s default P&ID:
1 In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, with no project open, click the Libraries
tab in the Palette.
2 Double-click P&ID to open the P&ID Libraries.
3 Click the Components tab in the Palette.

4 Right-click on a component; then click Set Default P&ID on the pop-up
menu.
The Set Default P&ID dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays the name, location, and application type of the
default drawings for the selected equipment item. The Location column
shows Sys for system drawings and User for custom user drawings in the
user folder.
5 Click the default P&ID you want to change out; then click Default.

The Selection dialog box appears.
6 Click a P&ID file (it will display the complete path of the file at the bottom
of the dialog box); then click OK.
7 Click OK to close the Set Default P&ID dialog box.
Resetting the Default P&ID
You can reset the default to the original system P&ID.
To reset a component’s default P&ID:
1 In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, with no project open, click the Libraries
tab in the Palette.
2 Double-click P&ID to open the P&ID Libraries.
3 Click the Components tab in the Palette.
4 Right-click on the component.
5 On the menu that appears, click Set Default P&ID.

The Set Default P&ID dialog box appears.
6 Click the P&ID file you want to change out; then click Reset.
The original default file replaces the user-selected one.
7 Click OK.
Attaching a Custom P&ID to a Component
You can attach a custom P&ID to a component:
 when adding a component to a project
 when modifying a previously added component
To attach a custom P&ID to a component:
1 On the Component Specifications form, click the P&ID button’s
drop-down arrow and click Select and Open Alternate.

2 On the Selection dialog box, click the custom drawing; then click OK.
3 After the drawing is displayed, on the File menu click Exit and click No in
the Close dialog box for saving changes.
Setting a Component’s Default P&ID in Active
Project Only
To set the default P&ID for an active project:
1 Attach a P&ID file to the component (see above).
2 Click the P&ID button’s arrow; then click Set as Default on the menu.
Default P&ID Options: Always FULL or
Determined by User Options
When you open the default P&ID for an equipment item the system will open
the FULL model if this is an option. This behavior is independent of your input
in the Piping and Instrument Design fields at the Project or Area levels.
(The options for these fields are STD (standard) or FULL). If you prefer to
have the system to check these inputs when selecting the default P&ID, you
can change the behavior of the system by navigating to the following
directory:
…/Program Files/Aspen Tech/Economic Evaluation
V8.0/Program/Sys/Drawings/
The text file pnidcros.tbl determines this behavior.
To have the system to consider the STD or FULL input:
1 Delete the existing pnidcros.tbl file.

2 Copy STDorFULLpnidcros.tbl; then rename the new copy pnidcros.tbl.
To revert to the default behavior (default is always FULL):
If you want to revert back to the default behavior (default is always “FULL”)
repeat this process with the “ORIGINALpnidcros.tbl” file.
Working with Non-Graphic
P&ID Data
Inside a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, you can open a component
form with piping and instrumentation data, then save that information as
non-graphical P&ID in a P&ID library file.
You can also create non-graphical P&ID libraries outside a project from the
Library tabs and save them in new or existing library files.
Saving Component Information as Non-
Graphical P&ID
To save component information as non-graphical P&ID:
1 Open a component form.
2 Add or modify piping and/or instrumentation data.
3 Save the information by clicking Apply.
4 On the toolbar, click the arrow to the right of Options.
5 On the menu that appears, click Non-graphical P&ID.
6 Click Save P&ID in a library.
A list of existing library files along with an option to create a new library file
appears.
7 Either create a new library file, or click a library file on the displayed list.
8 Specify a unique name for the P&ID and save it in the library file.
Note: P&ID information will be saved without diameter and length
information for pipes.
Creating Non-Graphical P&ID Libraries
Outside a Project
To create non-graphical P&ID libraries outside a project:
1 On the Library tab, click Non-graphical P&ID.
A list of existing library files appears. You can also or create a new library file
folder.
2 Click the desired library file folder; then right-click.

3 On the menu that appears, click Create New.
4 On the dialog box that appears, type the P&ID name; then click OK.
A window appears similar to component form, with options only for piping and
instrumentation installation bulks.
5 Specify information for lines and loops; then save the P&ID information in
the library file.
You can also copy an existing P&ID in a library file, assign it a new name,
modify it, then save in the same or different library file.
Importing External P&ID Data
Generate project estimate by importing piping and instrumentation
information from SPPID (Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID, an external P&ID
drawing tool) in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Importing of P&ID Drawings generated in Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID into
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comprises of two steps:
1. Export the P&ID Drawing to an XML file through the Use of TEF.
2. Import the XML file using the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator framework.
The import process generates piping and instrumentation installation bulk
sets for all P&ID equipments in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. No Graphical
data is imported.
Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, and add
equipment components to the new project.
Because the equipment data in a P&ID drawing is not sufficient to develop
equipment components in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you must create the
equipment components (present in P&ID drawings) in a Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator project. Subsequently, the PID XML file is imported using the
Import P&ID Drawing on the File menu.

Browse to the location where the exported XML files are stored, and select the appropriate
exported XML File.

Upon selecting the XML File:
 PID Data (Equipment, Lines, and Loops) are imported into a Temporary
Access Database.
 A Preliminary Evaluation of the Project is performed to generate
Volumetric (or Installation) Bulk Pipe Lines.
 A Mapping GUI is Launched: The GUI displays Equipment and Lines from
both the P&ID Drawing, and the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project.
 You are expected to map SPPID Equipment to Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Equipment, and SPPID Pipe line to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Installation bulk pipe.
 Alternately, you can select Automap, and map equipment and lines by
user tag and line tag.
Select the desired SPPID Equipment to map:
 Details about the selected equipment appear in the lower text area.
 P&ID Lines connected to the Equipment are listed in the P&ID Line list.
 Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment that are similar or have the same
tag are listed in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment list.
 When you hover over any item on any list, a tooltip lists details about the
item.
 Select the SPPID Equipment and an appropriate Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Equipment; then click the Map button.

Continue until all equipment are mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator;
then proceed to map the SPPID Lines to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
equipment or lines.
 Select the desired SPPID line to map:
 Details about the selected line appear in the lower text area
 When you hover over any line, a tooltip lists details about the line

 A PID Pipe Line can be mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Equipment or to an individual Aspen Capital Cost Estimator pipe line
o Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment to map to
o Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator line to map
o Click the Map button
Note: You can choose to map one long SPPID line to two Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator lines. In this case, fittings are partitioned between the two
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines.
In the example given below, Line P-13802-4”-1S3984 is mapped to the
centrifugal pump; if you wanted to map it to the centrifugal pump inlet, then
the SPPID line can be mapped to DCP-2 Line 2.
Continue mapping SPPID lines to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment or
Lines until all the interconnecting lines are mapped. If a single SPPID line is
mapped to two Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines, the fittings on the line are
distributed to both lines of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
When All Equipment and Lines have been mapped, you can choose to do one
of three things:
 Save mapping and exit, for instance, to import more drawings (the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator Project not yet updated with lines and loops)
 Update the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project with line/fittings and
loop/instrument data
 Cancel and quit the mapping GUI.
After all piping and equipment from one or more drawings have been
imported and mapped, the project is updated. This results in piping and
instrumentation installation bulk sets for all P&ID equipments in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. No Graphical data is imported.

Interconnecting Volumetric
P&ID Lines
Connect pipelines between components in a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
project, estimate the project, and create piping line list report for connected
lines with the same line tag.
Open a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
project
Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, add equipment
components to the new project.
Run Interconnect Piping Lines
To run interconnect piping lines:
1 On the main tool bar, click Run.
2 Click Interconnect Piping Lines to launch the GUI as shown below:

The GUI displays five lists. All equipment and its associated pipelines in the
project are displayed in two groups:
 Connect From
 Connect To
The first two lists display equipment and piping lines in the Connect From
group.
The third list displays all connected lines.
The fourth and fifth lists display piping lines and equipment in the Connect
To group.
3 On the list in the Connect From and Connect To groups, click the
desired equipment item.
The line lists will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected
equipments. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line, the tooltip
in the list provides additional information related to this item. The related
additional information is also displayed in the bottom text area when clicking
on an equipment or a line.
Connecting Piping Lines
To connect two lines:
1 Select the Auto Generate Line Tag check box, or, in the Line Tag field,
type a unique line tag.
2 In the Connect From line list, click a piping line.
3 In the Connect To line list, click the desired line.
4 Click Connect.

5 Repeat Steps 1-4 above to connect all the desired lines between the
equipment items.
Note: Use Filter to display all disconnected equipment or all disconnected
lines.
Disconnecting Piping Lines
To disconnect all existing pipeline connections between all
equipments:
 Click Disconnect All.
All connected lines will be removed from middle list and will be displayed in
the respective line list.
To disconnect a specific line between the two equipments:
 In the middle list, click a line item; then click Disconnect.

Renaming a Line Tag
To rename a line tag:
1 On the Connecting list, click the desired item.
2 In Line Tag field, edit the line tag.
3 Click Rename Line Tag.

Saving All Connections and (optionally)
Updating the Project
To save all the connections and update the project:
 Click the Update Project.
To save all the connections without updating the project:
 Click the Save Mapping & Exit.
All connections on the GUI are saved, but the project is not updated.
Getting the Connected Line List Report
To get the connected line list report:
1 Evaluate the above project.
2 Click View | Capital Cost View.
The Select Report Type to View dialog box appears.
3 On the Select Report Type to View dialog box, click Interactive
Reports; then click OK
The reporter is active.
4 Click Excel reports.
5 Click Other reports | Discipline | Pipe:
o Connected Line List
-or-
o Model Line List
as shown below:
6 Click Run Report.

The report is shown below:
Connected Line List
Model Line List
Mapping Streams to Piping
Lines
Note: For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer Overlay project, see the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer user
guide (AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV8.0-Usr.pdf).
In an existing or new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (or Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay) project, you
can assign stream physical properties to lines in order to size the line
diameter.
Importing 3D Piping and
Structure Data Using the

SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus
Interface
Overview
The process of using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus Interface is composed
of two steps:
1 Exporting data from SmartPlant 3D using a reporting feature.
2 Importing data to create components in an Aspen Icarus project.
Step 1: Exporting Data from SmartPlant 3D
The goal of the first step is to create spreadsheet reports containing the data
exported from SmartPlant 3D. SmartPlant 3D can generate three types of
reports.
 Pipe Rack data
 Open Steel Structure data
 Pipe Run data
To generate these reports:
1 On the SmartPlant 3D Tools menu, click Run Report.
The Run Report dialog box appears.
2 On the Run Report dialog box, on the Catalog Reports tab, click the
report that includes the desired data.

Pipe Racks:
Structure:

Pipe Runs:
3 In the File name field, type the output file name; then click Run.
Step 2: Importing the data to Aspen Icarus
The goal of the second step is to import the data in the spreadsheets
generated in the first step into Aspen Icarus to generate components. During
the import process, the spreadsheets being imported are broken into two
types.
 The Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets
 The Non-Pipe Runs spreadsheets:
o Pipe Rack spreadsheets
o Steel Structure spreadsheets
Note: All the spreadsheets to be imported in one run must be in the same
folder.
To import the spreadsheets generated in the first step, you follow these three
steps:
1 Selecting the Non-Pipe Run spreadsheets to import
2 Selecting the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets to import.
3 Loading the spreadsheets.
Step 1: Selecting the Pipe Runs and Fitting
Spreadsheets to Import.
To select the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets to import:
1 Open a project in Aspen Icarus with the desired basis of design
configured.
2 On the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator File menu, click Import SP 3D.

The Add SP 3D Spread Sheets dialog box appears.
3 On the Non-Pipe Runs Sheets pane, click Add Sheet.
The Select Non-Pipe Run file dialog box appears.
4 On the Select Non-Pipe Run file dialog box, click a spreadsheet exported
from SP 3D other than the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets.

5 Repeat Step 4 above as many times as desired, typically once for Pipe
Racks and once for Steel Structures.
Step 2: Selecting the Pipe Runs and Fitting
Spreadsheets for Import
Importing Pipe Run data requires has two steps.
A Selecting the Pipe Run data
B Selecting the Pipe Fitting data that goes with the Pipe Run data selected.

Step A: Selecting the Pipe Run spreadsheet
1 On the Add SP 3D Spread Sheets dialog box, on the Pipe Sheets with
Fitting sheets pane, click Add Sheets.
The Pipe Runs file dialog box appears.
2 On the Pipe Runs file dialog box, click a Pipe Runs spreadsheet.

Step B: Selecting the Pipe Fitting data
The Select a Fitting file dialog box appears.
3 On the Select a Fitting file dialog box, click the corresponding file.
4 Repeat the Add Sheets process as many times as necessary.

Step 3: Loading the Data
5 After selecting all the sheets to import, on the Add SP 3D Spread
Sheets dialog box, click OK.
The main Aspen Icarus interface is hidden and a progress dialog is displayed.
When the process is complete, the Aspen Icarus interface is re-displayed and
the components imported have been created.
Adding or Updating Codes to this Interface
In cases where undefined codes are specified in the spreadsheets published
by Smart Plant 3D for different piping, fitting, or structural attributes (for
example, materials, fittings type, pipe schedule, pipe rack type, and so on),
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will generate a loading error log file
(SP3Derr.log) detailing the incompatible/unrecognized codes. The current
OOTB interface contains codes received from Intergraph mapped to an
appropriate equivalent in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. At times, there may

be changes or updates to these codes or the inclusion of company specific
codes which will not be present in the OOTB solution. The following
procedure describes the steps necessary to account for such changes in the
codes so the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator loading process can proceed
without error:
1 Locate the following XML file (SP3DIConfig.xml) in (V8.0 location):
Program FilesAspenTechEconomic Evaluation
V8.0ProgramSysloader.
2 Backup this file as this file contains all valid codes for both applications
in the OOTB solution.
3 Edit this xml file (in a manner consistent with the existing xml format)
to add the new or changed codes in the relevant SPAttribute section:
Example: For new pipe material codes add the new code(s) under
CpPipeMaterial, new fittings codes under SpFittingType, new
pipe rack codes under CpPipeRackType, and so on.
4 Provide an appropriate mapping to the new codes for the desired
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator attribute. The mappings need to be
recognized by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator; otherwise an error will
occur when loading the data. The existing xml file has many of the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator mapping codes available, so this can be
used as a reference. In addition, you can refer to the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator GUI if certain attributes are not present in the XML file
and are desired to be used (for example, pipe materials).
5 Save the changes, ensuring the file name is maintained as
SP3DIConfig.xml. The new file with added codes will be used the
next time a load is performed for new projects.
6 For existing projects where the old codes (that is, the old xml file) was
used, you will not see the updated codes when reloading the data
unless the following is performed:
a. Open the old project
b. Locate the iccache directory (OOTB V8.0 location:
Documents and SettingsUserNameLocal SettingsApplication
DataAspenTechEconomic Evaluation V8.0ProjectsProject
Name
c. In this location, delete the SP3DIConfig.xml file.
d. Reload the SP3D spreadsheets, the new codes will be used.
It is recommended that an administrator perform these changes/updates and
distribute the new xml file to users as needed. In addition, in order to use
this updated data with future versions of Economic Evaluation, this xml file
will have to be copied to the appropriate location of the new installation
version. In cases where Aspen Tech makes changes to this file, previous
company specific changes should be merged with Aspen Tech changes if
necessary.
Note: It is highly recommended the installed version of the xml file be
backed up and retained prior to making any changes in the event the original
file is required.

Known Issues
Slab Thickness
An issue with the Export of slab thickness export exists – Integraph is
working to resolve the issue.
Piping Design Pressure
In Version 2004.2, an issue with the import of piping design pressure existed.
This is resolved in Icarus 2006 and subsequent versions. Because we expect
the pipe schedule data to be exported, the design pressure data is not
required for the evaluation.

7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries 447
7 Developing and Using Cost
Libraries
Overview
The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a tree-structure. Most
of the libraries listed access project specifications (explained in Chapter 3).
The Cost Libraries are unique, however, in that they comprise collections of
particular cost items that you can add as project components. The cost
libraries are customizable; you can add items to the libraries provided, as well
as add your own libraries.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator includes two types of cost libraries:
 Equipment Model Library (EML)
 Unit Cost Library (UCL)
Each library type may include one or more library files, which in turn may
contain one or more library items, each representing a particular type of cost
item.
Equipment Model Library (EML)
Note: If you are interested in accessing data as Unit Cost Libraries from
Aspen Richardson's WinRace or another third party data source, see
Accessing External Unit Cost Data in Chapter 6, Developing and
Using Cost Libraries, in Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V8.0 User Guide
(AspenInPlantCostEstimatorV8.0-Usr.pdf).
The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which you create
component specification forms. In a project, you can add an item from the
EML as a component and fill out the form that you earlier created.
The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in discrete sizes,
such as an extruder, or an equipment item that follows a continuous
cost-capacity relationship such as linear, semi-log or log-log.

448 7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries
Unit Cost Library (UCL)
The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and installation
man-hours, which are based on a simple unit of measure (for example, the
cost of a material item or installation man-hours per unit of area, per unit of
length, per item, and so on). Costs can also be stored in a library for indirect
items such as project management man-hours per month, crane rental (plant
hire) on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, and so on
For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit cost
library may be used to create a dummy item for recall and modification in a
project. The dummy item is stored in the library with as little data as possible.
This can be retrieved and modified in as much detail as required whenever
you need a one-time cost added into a project.
Developing and Using an
Creating an EML
The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an EML. The
instructions in the sub-sections that follow this one, which show you how to
add an item to an EML and then add the item to a project, use a single
example that can be added either to an Inch-Pound EML that you created or
to one of the two Inch-Pound EML’s provided.
To create an EML:
1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure; then expand Equipment
Model Library.
The Cost Libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure
basis, as in the example used in these instructions, right-click on
Inch-Pound, then on the menu that appears, click New.

The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.
4 Type a file name (required) for the EML and a brief description (optional);
then click OK.

An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new library.
Adding an Item to an EML
The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow a single
example from item creation through the addition of the item to a project.
Using the example provided will define the item in such a way that it
automatically generates a foundation and/or electrical power supply bulks.
To add an item to an EML:
1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and you
can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
2 Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
3 Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and either Inch-Pound
or Metric. (If following the example provided, select Inch-Pound.)
4 Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then click
Modify on the pop-up menu.
5 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
6 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies
the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library
items. The first character must be a letter.
7 Click OK.

8 Enter the descriptive data for the item in the Develop Equipment Model
Library form. If following the example, enter the data exactly as shown
below. Be sure to correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR; Aspen Capital Cost Estimator knows to use GPM (or L/S for
METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.
Note: Sizing method: the data is in the form of either a continuous curve
(linear, log-log or semi-log) or a set of discrete tabular values. When an
equipment model library item is retrieved into a project, the specified size for
the project component is used to develop the appropriate cost, man-hours
and weight from the library data.
9 Click OK to save your specifications.
The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you can now close.
Adding an EML Item as a Project
Component
To add an EML item as a project component:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For the purposes
of this example, you can use either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to add
the EML item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up
menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a
project component name for the item.
4 Click Equipment Model Library; then click OK.
5 On the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog box, click the
EML to which you added the item.
6 Click OK.
7 At the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog box, select the
item you added and click OK.

8 Enter your specifications for the item at the Component Specifications
form, as shown below. Note that the Size parameters CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR are included on the form.
9 Click OK to apply and save the specifications.
The item will now be included in project evaluations.
Note: If you want to use sizing parameters with the EML, you must use one
of the sizing parameter symbols listed below:
Symbol Description
AREA Heat Exchanger Area
AREAH Area Height
AREAL Area Length
AREAW Area Width
CAP Liquid Volume
CAPACITY Liquid Volume

CAPFLOW Liquid Flowrate
CAPREF Refrigeration Capacity
DENS Fluid Density
DENSITY Fluid Density
DIA Vessel Diameter
DIAMETER Vessel Diameter
DIA1 Bottom Diameter
DIA2 Top Diameter
DTMP Design Temperature
DTMP2 Alt Design Temperature
DUTY Heat Transfer
FLOW2 Alt Gas Flow
FLOWRATE Gas Flow
HEAD Fluid Head
HEIGHT Vessel T-T Height
HGT Vessel T-T Height
HGT1 Bottom Height
HGT2 Top Height
JPRES Jacket Pressure
LENGTH Equipment Length
LTH Equipment Length
MWGT Molecular Weight
NITEMS Multiple Items
POWER Power
PRES Pressure
PRES2 Alt Pressure
PRESSURE Pressure
PWRDRVR Power
RAT Flow
SPGR Specific Gravity
TMP Temperature
TMP2 Alt Temperature
VISCOS Viscosity
VOL Gas or Solid Volume
VOLUME Gas or Solid Volume
WIDTH Equipment Width
WTH Equipment Width
Developing and Using a Unit
Cost Library (UCL)
The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos abatement
(ASBABT) costs and man-hours. This example has been selected because
environmental remediation data is difficult to model, since costs and

man-hours tend to vary greatly based on site conditions and project types.
Items of a unique and/or variable nature are ideal for storing in a UCL.
The instructions take this example through the following stages:
1 creating a unit cost library
2 adding items to the library
3 adding a library item to a project as a component
4 forming an assembly in the project out of multiple UCL items
Creating a Unit Cost Library
To create a unit cost library:
1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view. Expand Cost
Libraries in the tree structure, and then expand Unit Cost Library.
The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
2 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure
basis, as in the ASBABT example used in these instructions, right-click on
Inch-Pound and click New on the pop-up menu.
3 In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, type a file name (required) for
the UCL and a brief description (optional).

4 Click OK to create the new UCL.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new UCL.
Adding an Item to a UCL
To add items to a UCL:
1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and you
can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
A Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
B Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or
Metric.
C Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then
click Modify on the pop-up menu.
2 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
3 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the
library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items.
The first character must be a letter.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for the new
item.
Note: Costs for the item will be allocated to the specified Code of Account
(COA). See Icarus Reference Chapter 34 for COA definitions.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the Material Cost Per Unit and Labor Cost
Per Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours Per Unit is specified
and Labor Cost Per Unit is left blank, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will
calculate the labor cost using the project wage rates at the time of the
estimate.
The Unit of Measure can be designated for “each” or by any appropriate unit
(for example, “1000 SF”). Be sure to sufficiently describe the item so that you
know what the unit costs include when the item is retrieved at some future
date. The quantity is entered when the library item is retrieved into a project.
The Date and Source are for your reference and are not transferred into an
estimate.
6 When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.
7 To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the process
(Steps 2-4) to add the following items in addition to the one shown in the
previous graphic.

Refere
nce No.
Item
Description
Code
of
Accou
nt
Mat’l
Cost
Per
Unit
Labor
Cost
Per
Unit
Unit of
Measu
re
Date
of
quotat
ion
AAB200 Polyethylene
Sheeting
800 .021 .004 SF 04APR0
1
AAB201 Duct Tape
(300’ roll)
800 3.50 ROLL 04APR0
1
AAB202 Adhesive
Spray (60’ /
can)
800 6.00 CAN 04APR0
1
AAB300 Decontamin
ation
Shower
800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR0
1
AAB301 Neg Air
Pressure
System
800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR0
1
AAB400 Lighting
Fixture
Removal
800 .01 EACH 04APR0
1
After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear as shown
below.
8 When done adding items to the UCL, click close on the Library dialog
box.
Adding a UCL Item to a Project
To add a single UCL item to a project:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To add an item
from the ASBABT library developed as an example in the previous

instructions, you can open either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.
the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up
menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a
project component name for the item.
4 Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.
5 At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL to
which you added the item and click OK.
6 At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the item you
added and click OK.

7 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-down
button and select Unit Cost Items.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator retrieves the unit cost data you set up in
Libraries.

8 You can now enter the quantity data and modify any of the retrieved data.
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items
This section shows how to add several items from the library to form an
assembly. In the example, the items from the ASBABT library are added to
form an Asbestos Abatement Area Preparation Assembly.
To create an assembly of UCL items in a project:
the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up
menu.
2 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as the
project component name a description of the assembly.

3 Click Unit cost library; then click OK.
4 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, click the UCL
containing the first item to add to the assembly; then click OK.
5 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, click the first item to
add to the assembly; then click OK.

6 On the Component Specifications form, click the Options drop-down
button; then click Unit Cost Items.
7 Click Add.
8 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, click the UCL
containing the next item to add to the assembly; then click OK.
9 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, click the next item
to add to the assembly; then click OK.

10 Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains columns for all
the items in the assembly.
11 After entering quantities for the items, click OK.
The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project Explorer
(Project view) and the List view.
You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page XX563XX for instructions).
An Item Report would summarize total costs and man-hours, as well as list
each assembly item’s costs and man-hours.

Working with Cost Libraries
Equipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions described in this
section.
Copying a Library Item
When adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is easier to
copy the existing library item and modify the necessary specifications.
To copy a library item:
1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box; then click Copy.
2 Enter a Reference ID for the new item.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies
the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library
items. The first character must be a letter.
3 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the new item with all the same data as the
original — only the Reference ID has changed.
Deleting a Library Item
When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the library
file.
To delete a library item:
1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Delete.
A dialog box appears to confirm the delete.
2 Click Yes to delete the selected library item.
-or-
Click No to retain the library item in the library file.
Escalating Library Costs
Library items contain costs that change over time due to inflation. Escalating
library costs bring the library costs up to date.
To escalate library costs:
1 Click Escalate on the Library dialog box.

The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.
2 Enter the escalation specifications.
In this field type
New Base Date The date of escalation or the date at which the prices are
current.
Material Escalation The amount by which to escalate material costs.
Labor Escalation The amount by which to escalate labor costs. Because EMLs
only include setting man-hours, not labor costs, this field
appears only when escalating unit cost libraries.
3 Click OK to escalate all library items in the library file.
Importing a Cost Library
You can import UCL files, which have the extension “.LIB”, and EML files,
which have the extension “.EML”, from elsewhere on your computer or
network.
To import a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the appropriate Units of
Measure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric).

2 Click Import.
The Select a File for Import dialog box appears.
3 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, click the file; then click
Open.
The file is now included in the Palette, and its items can be added as Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator project components.
Duplicating a Cost Library
To duplicate a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library you wish to
duplicate; then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new library.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Library dialog box for the new
Library, which contains the same items as the original. You can add, modify,
or delete the items without affecting the original.
Deleting a Cost Library
To delete a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library to be deleted.
2 On the menu that appears, click Delete.

8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location 469
8 Changing Plant Capacity
and Location
Note: In order to have access to the features covered in this chapter, you
must be licensed to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. You must also
select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator environment.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you evaluate alternate plant capacities
and locations.
When you change plant capacity, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer re-sizes
each project component to a desired plant capacity. Unique expert system
rules, based on engineering principles, provide the basis for revising the size
of every project component in the process facility that is implicated in stream
flows, as well as the size of other plant facility components in the plant
layout, including process and utility components inside battery limits (ISBL)
and outside battery limits (OSBL), associated installation bulks, piping, cable
runs, buildings, structures, pipe racks, and site improvements.
Changing Plant Capacity
Changing the production capacity affects not only every stream flow, but the
size, and in some cases, the number of project components. Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer’s Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) automatically examines
each element of a project, applies a set of scale-up rules unique to that
element and recreates the entire plant description according to the new
production capacity.
ASM contains hundreds of rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen Icarus
project components. Rules are based on engineering principles for elements
that are directly linked to production capacity. For other elements that are
footprint oriented such as building and structures, rules based on heuristics
are applied.
When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are developed for
the newly sized components are designed to meet the needs of a project.
Further, revisions to P&IDs and similar user adjustments contained in the
baseline project are also treated in the same way. The idea is to design a
scaled project as it is intended to be built. This methodology eliminates the

470 8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location
need for applying a factor to the baseline plant cost to scale it up or down.
Given a new capacity, ASM recreates the entire plant.
The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of components to
meet a revised capacity and the project evaluation engines do the difficult,
time-consuming evaluation work. Users find ASM performs its re-sizing
operation results to be similar to engineering design methods with the added
benefit of much reduced time and resources. Further, equal confidence can be
applied to evaluation results before and after using ASM as rules are
discipline-based and the before and after evaluation processes are identical.
To change plant capacity:
1 Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario name that
reflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project
remains intact, separate and apart from your about-to-be scaled project.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on the
toolbar.
The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.
3 Select the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box.
4 Type the desired percentage adjustment or select it using the Up/Down
arrow buttons. For example, if you need to revise the capacity by a value
beyond 600% to 700%, scale your project twice. For this, the Evaluate

Project check box should be cleared. Then you can split the desired 700%
into two parts: first use 350%, and on completion, scale it again at 350%.
5 Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module.
6 Upon completion, save the scaled project.
Analyzer Scale-Up Module
(ASM)
How ASM Works
Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step process.
1 The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor
1 analyzes each specification in your project
2 applies the appropriate scale-up rule
3 revises the specification to a new value
4 moves on to the next specification
You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item names in the
display at the bottom of your screen.
2 The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs, develops
quantities, hours, costs, and so on, and prepares the basic set of reports
for your project at the new capacity. On completion of this step, you can
proceed to prepare special reports and perform other analyses on your
newly scaled project.
Save the project after the scale-up operation.
Scale-Up Rule Set
Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost elements that
are based on (a) engineering design principles for scale-up of all process
equipment, stream flows, etc and (b) heuristics for plant items that are based
on footprint and plot plan. The current rule set in some instances modifies the
number of items rather than change sizes, as in the simple example of trees
along a fence line, where the number of trees would be revised rather than
the size of each tree. In the current rule set, there is no automatic provision
for increasing the number of project components.
Limiting Conditions
It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain equipment
or bulk items may surpass a system limiting value. In this case, an error
condition would be issued. The user would then examine the scaled model for
the particular item(s) and revise the size and number of out-of-range items
accordingly, as an item in an error condition would be excluded from the
estimate.
Warning messages are generated after project scaling (via ASM) is performed
notifying users if scaling rules could not be applied to certain equipment

components due to min/max limits on equipment specs being reached. In the
event scaled values fall outside either min. or max. equipment spec limits, the
pre-scaled value is retained. Once an error condition is met, you have the
option to either stop the scaling operation or continue. If stop is clicked then
further operations based on your selection in the Decision Analyzer dialog (for
example, evaluation) will not be run. These error messages are similar to
scan errors dialog and will provide you with a listing of components in which
the ASM rules cannot be applied (see example below).
Scale-up Candidates
ASM rules apply to the following types of project information:
 Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight
 Project Component specs: specific rules based on item type and
specification, typically size dimension, capacity, power and occasionally
number of items
Note: Several sanitary process equipment items associated with batch
food processing will not be scaled.
 Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric specs for piping,
duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint. Text-based sizes such as pipe
schedule, wire size, and so on, are symbolic and are not scaled.
 Project Component Quoted Cost: While ASM has rules for quoted cost, the
ASM rule may not be the best for your type of item. Here, it’s better to
apply a % Adjustment to the system’s estimated cost in an amount that
will bring the estimated cost up to your quoted value. Then, on scaling,
the new reported cost will be calculated by applying your % Adjustment to
the estimated cost. Based on the scaled sizes.
 Quoted hours: based on item type
 Quoted weight: based on item type
 Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis
Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of parallel
trains, joining up to meet downstream units. Situations such as these are best

handled by creating models of these sections at a standard capacity and then
scaling desired sections to say 50% capacity. You would then import the
various sections into an overall model, with multiple trains being imported as
many times as required. The resulting model would then be evaluated for
capital investment and process economics.
Analyzer Relocation Module
(ARM)
The Analyzer Relocation Module lets you evaluate the impact of worldwide
location on capital cost and a variety of other econometrics. Specifically, you
can “relocate” a project from one basis to any one of 89 worldwide locations.
You can choose to retain the location of your engineering workforce or choose
any one of 89 worldwide locations.
When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer and/or
construct in a different city or country location, ARM will quickly and
automatically revise your project parameters with those contained in its
location knowledge base. The ARM knowledge base includes key location-
dependent data and rules to properly convert your project from its starting
basis to your selected location(s) using location dependent values for design
parameters, engineering and construction work forces, cost of materials, and
engineering, material and construction indirects. You can use ARM in
combination with the Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) and Analyzer
Economics Module (AEM) all in the same run or separately from the other
modules.
Relocation Terminology
 Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM.
 Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline project.
 Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated project
(baseline project) to a new location (relocated project).
 Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and country name,
which is used to represent a particular EPC function. The function may or
may not be physically sited in that city.
 Engineering location: city and country name used to characterize the
engineering workforce assigned to the project.
 Plant location: city and country name used to characterize the plant site.
Workflow
The figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs, contained in
the ARM rule set are applied to the user’s model. A description of the
elements in the table is provided in the section following the Workflow.

How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module
(ARM) Works
Relocation Reports
For New
Engineering and
Plant Location
Baseline Reports
For Base
Engineering and
Plant Location
Relocated
Project
Baseline
Project
ARM Specs
Project
Specs
Project
Contingency
Construction
Hours
Construction
Rates
Construction
Cost
Construction
Indirects
Construction
Fee
Construction
Contingency
Engineering
Hours
Engineering
Rates
Engineering
Cost
Engineering
Indirects
Engineering
Contingency
Material
Cost
Materials
Contingency
Materials
Indirects
Material
Quantities
Analyzer
Project
Relocation
Module

1 Because ARM processing is automatic, it is wise to first save your base
project under a new scenario name in advance of running ARM. Use a
scenario name that refers to the planned new capacity. This will ensure
that your baseline project remains intact for further evaluations.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the A button on the
button bar:
This will display the Decision Analyzer dialog box.
Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate Project on the
four-part Decision Analyzer dialog box.
3 Select the Change Plant Location to check box.
4 Select the Plant Location from its pull-down list.
5 Select the Engineering Location from its pull-down list.
6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to
o Enable escalation for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects.
o Retain your defined construction start date and duration. If unchecked,
a new date will be developed on relocation.
Note that the last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box displays three
pieces of information:
 plant location
 currency name
 currency symbol, in parentheses

This information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics Module
(AEM) who are interested in reporting costs in currency different from the
plant location currency. For this, two entry slots are provided for an exchange
rate and symbol. If AEM is not invoked, values so entered will not affect the
reporting aspects of relocation aspects. In Figure 2, the user elected to run
AEM. This would take place immediately after ARM completed the relocation
process, described as follows.
Example: The illustration below is for a plant to be engineered in Rotterdam
and constructed in Singapore. The currency of the plant location is displayed
in the last wire-frame.
Relocating the Project
7 Once having completed the choices, click OK to run the project. If you
choose CANCEL, all choices will be ignored and control will return to the
explorer view.
With your OK, Decision Analyzer’s relocation module automatically converts
your base location project to the selected engineering and plant location. Your
project then contains the results of the relocation, which you can review and
modify.
To do this:
1 Click the Project Basis view and click the desired basis category.
2 Open the associated form, review the data and modify the data, as you
desire.

3 When you are satisfied with the results, save the project, ensuring that it
is saved under a scenario name that describes the relocation and, most
important, that your baseline project is not disturbed by the save.
4 Evaluate the project and review the results.
5 When you are satisfied, a final save will save the results.
ARM Knowledge Base
The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand location-
specific data values plus rules that govern the way the location data will be
applied to your baseline project. The ARM knowledge base is derived from a
variety of qualified sources including:
 Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data from this
source (also used to prepare the Aspen Richardson International Cost
Factor Manual) were analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formats
for use in ARM
 Proprietary sources
 Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and associates
 Surveys
 Technical publications that specialize in international construction costs
 Government sources: seismic, climate data and other location data
 Financial sources: exchange rates, etc.
 Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas
Five Bodies of Data
The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data:
 Location specs
 Project specs
 Engineering specs
 Construction specs
 Material Cost specs
Highlights of each component follow.
Location Specs
ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations listed below
include the four Icarus country base locations. The locations are similar to
those in the Aspen Richardson International Cost Factor Manual list.
Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country and city.
For Canadian and US locations, names include state, province or territory.
Conventional short forms of country and city names are used for simplicity.
 Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed in Table 1.
 City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2
 US locations are listed in Table 3.

TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each Region
Region Number of locations
Africa 3
Asia 15
Australia 3
Canada 6
Central America 2
Europe 12
Middle East 6
South America 5
United States 37
All Locations 89
Non-US Locations 52
TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations
Region City, Country Near
Africa El Hassania, Morocco Casablanca
Ibadan, Nigeria
Johannesburg, South Africa
Asia Beijing, China
Guangzhou, China
Shanghai, China
Bhopal, India New Delhi
Mumbai (Bombay), India
Jakarta, Indonesia
Kobe, Japan
Tokyo, Japan
Kuantan, Malaysia Kuala Lumpur
Manila, Philippines
Singapore, Singapore
Seoul, South Korea
Taipei, Taiwan
Samut prakan, Thailand Bangkok
Binh Duong, Vietnam Hanoi
Australia Melbourne, Australia
Perth, Australia
Sydney, Australia
Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala
Mexico City, Mexico
Canada Calgary, Canada
Montreal, Canada
Toronto, Canada

Vancouver, Canada
Windsor, Canada
Winnipeg, Canada
Europe Brussels, Belgium
Paris, France
Frankfurt, Germany
Dublin, Ireland
Milan, Italy
Amsterdam, Netherlands
Rotterdam, Netherlands
Warsaw, Poland
Moscow, Russia
Barcelona, Spain
London, United Kingdom
Manchester, United Kingdom
Middle East Cairo, Egypt
Kuwait City, Kuwait
Dammam, Saudi Arabia Al Jubail
Jeddah, Saudi Arabia
Gebze, Turkey Istanbul
Abu Dhabi, UAE
South America Buenos Aires, Argentina
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
Medellin, Colombia
Lima, Peru
Caracas, Venezuela

TABLE 3. List of US City Locations
Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore, MD
Boston, MA
Cape Girardeau, MO
Cayey, PR
Charlotte, NC
Chicago, IL
Cincinnati, OH
Dallas, TX
Denver, CO
Fairbanks, AK
Green Bay, WI
Houston, TX
Huntsville, AL
Indianapolis, IN
Kansas City, MO
Knoxville, TN
Las Vegas, NV
Los Angeles, CA
Louisville, KY
New Orleans, LA
New York, NY
Newark, NJ
Oakland, CA
Philadelphia, PA
Phoenix, AZ
Portland, ME
Portland, OR
Sacramento, CA
San Francisco, CA
Seattle, WA
Sherman, TX
Spartanburg, SC
St Louis, MO
Syracuse, NY
Wilkes-Barre, PA

Project Data
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values for project
level data. These should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of
a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in
their relocated project with more representative values obtained from
company surveys of the intended site.
 Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the basis year, with
exchange rate and currency units scaled to meet Icarus currency formats.
Scaled currency units are provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-
character name and 24-character description. Values are listed in Table 4.
o Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM locations share the
same currency
o Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge base works with
exchange rates relative to the currency of each of the five country
bases (US, UK, JP, EU, ME). The currency table contains the rates as
of the listed date.
o Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform to Icarus exchange rate
formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)
o Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are defined to
conform to Icarus format; these contain symbols such as K to
represent thousands and M to represent millions of scaled currency
units, as indicated in Table 4.

Table 4: List of Currencies
Current European Union Locations:
 Belgium
 France
 Germany
 Ireland
 Italy
 Netherlands
 Spain
Country
Currency
Description
Currency
Name
Currency
Symbol
Exchange Rate
, per USD
(1 Jan 2012)
Argentina Argentine Peso Peso-A P 4.3124
Australia Australian Dollar Dollar-A A$ 0.9802
Brazil Brazilian Real Real R 1.8651
Canada Canadian Dollar Dollar-C C$ 1.0223
China Chinese Yuan
Renminbi
Renminbi R 6.379
Colombia K Colombian Peso K Peso K-P 1.94989
Egypt Egyptian Pound Pound-E PDE 6.0607
European Union Euro Euro EUR 0.7718
Guatemala Guatemalan Quetzal Quetzal Q 7.9612
India Indian rupee Rupee R 54.8
Indonesia K Indonesian Rupiah K Rupiah K-R 9.15751
Japan K Japanese Yen K Yen K-Y 0.0769557
Kuwait Kuwaiti Dinar Dinar DK 0.2788
Malaysia Malaysian Ringgit Ringgit R 3.1768
Mexico Mexican Peso Peso-MX P 13.9575
Morocco Moroccan Dirham Dirham-M D 8.662
Nigeria K Nigerian Naira K Naira K-N 0.164397
Peru Peruvian Nuevo Sol Nuevo Sol NS 2.7133
Phillipines Phillipine Peso Peso-P P 43.9452
Poland Polish Zloty Zloty Z 3.4749
Russia Russian Rouble Rouble RBL 32.0114
Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal Riyal R 3.7513
Singapore Singapore Dollar Dollar-S S$ 1.297
South Africa South African Rand Rand ZAR 8.1396
South Korea K South-Korean
Won
K Won K-W 1.16171
Taiwan Taiwan Dollar Dollar-T T$ 30.5026
Thailand Thai Baht Baht B 31.988
Turkey Turkish New Lira New Lira NL 1.8936
United Arab
Emirates
Utd. Arab Emir.
Dirham
Dirham-U D 3.6734
United Kingdom British Pound Pound-UK PDS 0.6437
United States US Dollar DollarUS USD 1
Venezuela Venezuela Bolivar
Fuerte
Boliv-F B 4.3049
Vietnam K Vietnamese Dong K Dong K-D 21.1348

Note: Certain combinations of location currencies and country base
currencies may result in exchange rates that exceed the format bounds for
exchange rate. In such cases, ARM will automatically scale the exchange rate
ratio and revise the currency units, usually with a prefix of "K" to indicate
thousands of the above-listed currency unit. Example: The exchange rate for
Plant location: India, at 46.899 per USD and Country Base: Japan at
0.092586 is 495.74 R/K Yen, which is beyond the exchange rate bound: the
resulting ratio will be scaled by 1000 to 0.496 KRupee/K Yen, and costs will
be reported in KRupee (KR)
 Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS, or EN 13445
depending upon the plant location)
 Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing depth, low/high ambient
temperatures, wind velocity, hand excavation
 Electrical: power supply frequency
 Equipment Rental: a Construction Technology Level (CTL) parameter
(L, M, and H) is assigned to each location. Locations assigned as H-level
draw from the entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-level
locations select from a smaller slate than M-level locations.
 Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is assigned a value for
the heavy lift option
Engineering Work Force
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of engineering
workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge
base values in their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work force location:
 Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering workforce slate.
Hourly rates are provided in the currency of the engineering location.
During the processing of a project, these rates are converted, for
consistent cost reporting, to the currency of the plant location using the
exchange rate ratio:
Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency = Discipline Rate in the
Engineering Location Currency x Plant Location Exchange Rate /
Engineering Location Exchange Rate
 Engineering workforce productivity – one value is provided for each
engineering location, relative to the engineering productivity at the
country base location
 Engineering Indirect Costs – values are provided for each location for each
of the eight phases of engineering:
o Expense rates
o Payroll burdens
o Office indirects
The eight phases of engineering are:
o Basic Engineering
o Detail Engineering

o Procurement
o Engineering Management
o Home Office Construction Services
o Field Office Supervision
o Construction Management
o Start-up, Commissioning
 Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of engineering
contingency. Engineering contingency is computed as the root-mean
square value of the user engineering contingency and engineering
confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation
UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the
computed contingency after relocation is
=  (UC2
+ LC2
) =  (182
+102 )
= 20.6%
Construction
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of construction
workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge
base values in their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each construction work force location:
 Field Craft rates – hourly rates (“nearly all-in”) for each of 28 field crafts
in the construction work force slate and a foreman differential for each
location. By “nearly all-in”, we mean that each craft rate is a unique
composite of the following rate contributions:
o Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate
o Health, Welfare, Pension
o Fringe Benefits
o Hourly Indirect Rate for:
 Temporary Construction
 Consumables and Small Tools
 FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation
Insurance
 Multi-level construction
Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include indirect
construction costs for the following categories as these would be
determined during project evaluation:
o Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil, Lubrication,
Maintenance (FOLM)
o Field Supervision
o Contractor Home Office Costs
 Construction workforce productivity – one value is provided for each plant
location, relative to the construction productivity at the country base
location

 Field indirect costs, including construction equipment rental (see Project
Data, below), field supervision, home office costs
 Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime
 Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project Data, below)
 Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation
 Construction confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of construction
contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of
the user construction contingency and construction confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after
relocation is:
=  (UC2
+ LC2
) =  (182
+102 )
= 20.6%
Material Costs
 Location Indexing
The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location indexes which will
adjust country base material costs to the plant location. Two sets are
provided. The first deals with equipment costs. The second applies to bulk
materials. Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered as a
starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should
replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with
more representative values obtained from company surveys of the
intended site.
The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values for the average
split of local vs. imported materials. Costs of local and imported materials
are figured by applying location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and other
expenses. Location indexes are stored for each of the four country bases
and are used to characterize material costs by account code (100 to 299
for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk materials.)
 Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of the plant
location
 Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of material cost
contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of
the user material contingency and material cost confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after
relocation is:
=  (UC2
+ LC2
) =  (182
+102 )
= 20.6%

ARM Notes:
Wire size conversion and wire size input issues in ARM.
 Beginning with V8.0, relocation in ARM to locations which have wire size
input units as M or A show the correct wire size tables in the wire size
fields by setting the wire size units input field correctly in the input
units of measure form .
 The wire sizes if specified anywhere in the project also change from
AWG/KCMIL to the equivalent size in MM2 from the corresponding table
and vice versa.

9 Aspen Utility Modules 487
9 Aspen Utility Modules
Introduction
Important: In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, only the AUM_Air Utility Module
is available. However, if you load Aspen Process Evaluator (Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer) when you load Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the
AUM_CW Cooling Water Utility Module is also available.
Both Utility Modules are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. For
convenience, the documentation for both is presented in this chapter.
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design
and Scope Generators for Utility Systems
One of the difficulties with process economic analyses, both capital cost and
payback determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process or
outside boundary limit (OSBL) portions of the project. With AUM modules
creating utility systems in harmony with the process sections of a project,

488 9 Aspen Utility Modules
more accurate, realistic and confident business assessments can be made for
cost and economics.
Each AUM module works in the same way. It extracts information on the
specific utility needs of each project component and area in your project. You
can then interactively revise default values for design preferences and
configuration, evaluate messages, review reports of design results. On
completion, a press of a Load button will automatically transfer to your
project, a list of selected, sized, designed project components assembled
within a unique date- and time-stamped utility area. Should a prior utility
area of the same type be present in your project, you can chose to delete the
old one and replace it with new scope.
All of this takes place in times measured in minutes rather than traditional
days and weeks. Of course, evaluation time depends on the size of the
project. For front end engineering design work, AUM modules can be revisited
in each cycle of scope change to ensure the project needs are properly
satisfied by each utility system.
A Control Panel, a task bar button and numerous hypertext links provide for
easy navigation and rapid access to a status report, specs for preferences and
configurations, reports, an a guide. Messages are provided to assure data
integrity; an error condition will disallow loading of results into your project.
AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection,
Sizing, and Design Module
The cooling water utility module requires Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer plus Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to
identify cooling water resource streams and their flow conditions. Up to four
cooling water systems can be configured for a project, each with its own set
of sized components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection
pumps, supply and return distribution piping, valves, and fittings.
You can interactively define design conditions such as ambient air
temperatures, size limits to distribution piping, equipment types, and assign
individual areas to each cooling water system. Redundancy capabilities
include stand-alone pumps, two 50% capacity pumps, stand-by spares.
Distribution piping includes expansion loops for long runs and circuits include
main lines, branch lines, area headers, and risers and laterals for 3D-type
areas. Each line type has its own “iso” for valve and fitting type. Line sizes
and pump heads are pressure drop based.
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility
Selection, Sizing, and Design Module
The air utility module can be accessed by either Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. AUM_ Air gathers air requirements
from your project in two ways:
 Instrument air: From a count of air operated control valves and controllers
and instrument air flow required for each based on control valve size

 Plant air: From an air usage model based on a common air tool usage set,
with area utility stations derived from area size and equipment count
within an area
Up to four air plant units (APU) can be configured for a project, each with its
own set of sized components:
 air intake filters/screens
 ductwork
 compressors
 interstage coolers
 air receivers
 pre-filters
 air dryers
 after-filters
 piping distribution network
You can interactively define design premises such as ambient air conditions,
equipment types, equipment redundancy, etc. and assign individual areas to
be served by each air plant unit. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone
compressors, start-up compressors, receivers, dryers. Redundancy choices
include one at 100% capacity, two at 50% capacity, stand-by spares.
Distribution piping includes two sets, each sized for the required flow of
instrument air and plant air. Piping isos for line segments include expansion
loops for long runs, valves and fittings, Line segments are defined for main
feeders, main manifolds, main lines branch lines, area feeders, area headers
and for 3D–type areas, risers and laterals. Each line type has its own “iso” for
valve and fitting type. Line sizes are pressure drop based.
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)
Cooling Water (AUM_Water)
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module
(AUM) Cooling Water
Cooling Water Selection, Sizing, Design Model
This section is divided into four parts:
1 Overview
 Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)
 Cooling Water Design Model
o Value in Time and Effort
o The Key Steps
2 Working with the Cooling Water Model
 Preparation Workflow

 The Workflow Cycle
 Accessing The Cooling Water Model
o Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
 Interactive Session Workflow – The Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
3 Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets
 Introduction
o Worksheets
o Button actions
 Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets
 Worksheet Details
o Status Worksheet
o Preferences Worksheet
 How to Revise Default Values
 Design Preference Categories
o Circuits Worksheet
 Initial Configuration
 Step 1: Assignment of Areas to Circuits
 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between Areas
 Status messages and Values Used for Circuit Design
4 Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model
o General Flow sheet for cooling water service
o Cooling Water Model Circuitry
o Cooling water distribution network
o Naming conventions
 Project cooling water area
 Areas Requiring Cooling Water
 Plant bulk pipe item descriptions
 Distribution Piping Line types
o Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
o Cooling Water ”Footprint Model”
o Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count
o Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations
 Projects with a prior cooling water utility model area
 Cooling towers- terminology and the defining stream
temperatures

1. Overview
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Water
One of the difficulties with economic analysis, both capital cost and payback
determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process utility or outside
boundary limit portions of the project. The Analyzer Utility Module, AUM, was
created as the “home” for a series of automated utility design models to
address this difficulty. The Cooling Water Selection, Design and Sizing Model
is the first utility design model in AUM and its functionality and method of use
is described in detail in this chapter.
Cooling Water Design Model
The Cooling Water Design Model is an automated, interactive and rapid design
module that is contained in Aspen Decision Analyzer and works with stream-
based projects. The cooling water model identifies heat exchanger equipment
or any other type of project component that requires cooling water by its
connection to a cooling water utility resource stream.
To access the Cooling Water Design Model:
1 Starting with an open project that contains utility streams as part of its
definition, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, simply click the U
button to access utility models.
2 Click Cooling Water.
At this point built-in design and processing procedures do all the hard work
under your control and guidance and a few minutes later, your project will be
augmented with a new cooling water utility area that contains designed
cooling water circuitry and associated project components. You can use the
model results using its set of adjustable design parameters or revise any and
default values within prescribed limits to suit your needs.
In the discussions to follow, the term early design metrics is used to
indicate values prepared by the cooling water model during an interactive
design session. These are presented for guidance in advance of final design
values that would be prepared on completing a project evaluation run.
Note: Worksheet names are shown in italic bold face to distinguish the
names from text.
Value in Time and Effort
The cooling water design model does all the hard work – design, selection,
reporting, loading the design results – in minutes rather than traditional hours
and days. It is a powerful resource in the development of a typical Front End
Engineering Design:
 Early process technology evaluation stage - focus is on Inside Battery
Limits (ISBL) components

 With the process technology selected and additional scope, total project
costs are sought. Outside Battery Limits (OSBL) components are
required, particularly cooling water utility service.
The cooling water design model
 Automatically selects, designs, and adds sized utility system components
to the project scope definition
 Can be revisited in each cycle of scope change.
The Key Steps
On initiating the cooling water model, the model automatically analyzes your
project for cooling water requirements and automatically generates selected,
sized and designed cooling water utility service project components – all
based on initial default design preferences and circuitry. Two interactive
workbooks Preferences and Circuitry enable you to revise default values for
the design and selection basis. Studying design alternatives starts with either
a click of an option box or a data entry. Being interactive, the cooling water
model enables you to cycle from design basis to early design results in a
matter of mouse clicks. Each new specification results in a new design and a
report of key decision metrics. The list of sized project components is
retained until you choose to load the results into your project. Messages and
metrics reports are provided extensively to guide you quickly and knowingly
through a study of design alternatives.
When you have settled on a design, you can load the results into your
project. The loading operation begins with a click of a Load button and
processing is automatic. After a minute or so, the loading process will be
complete and the Project Basis view will be displayed on your screen. Scope
items added to your project include a uniquely named cooling water area
followed by a list of cooling water utility project components: cooling towers,
circulation pumps, chemical injection pumps, working and stand-by spares,
and distribution piping, valves and fittings. Each component is selected,
designed and sized in harmony with your design basis and the needs of heat
exchange equipment in your various project areas.
2. Working with the Cooling Water Model
Preparation Workflow
The Cooling Water Design model requires a stream-based project built in
either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Decision Analyzer, with
components that require cooling water connected to one or more cooling
water utility resources.
The flow rates, water temperatures, duties and components provide the basis
for the design requirements. The cooling water model will first diagnose the
project’s requirements and initiate a design. The user can then revise the
design basis and review early design metrics for a variety of design scenarios,
settle on a design basis and load the design results into the project.

The Workflow Cycle
Figure 2.1 illustrates the cooling water design cycle: from project to design
model and back to the project with added new scope. Two buttons control the
process:
 U to select the cooling water model
 Load to load designed results
Using these two actions, you can participate interactively in the design
process, making design selections, reviewing early metrics, revising
selections, and clearing any error messages.
Figure 2.1. The Workflow Cycle, extracted from the Welcome worksheet
To initiate a cooling water design model session, three steps are required
1 Save the project under a new scenario name.
2 Evaluate the project
3 Run the Cooling water utility model
Each of these steps is detailed and illustrated in the following sections.
Accessing the Cooling Water Utility Model
1 SAVE AS: Since AUM-Cooling Water processing is automatic, it is wise to
first save your base project under a new name. This will ensure that your
base project remains intact for further evaluations.

2 Evaluate the project: Click Run |Decision Analyzer as in Figure 2.2a or
click the A button as in Figure 2.2b. This will provide the Decision Analyzer
dialog box, Figure 2.2c. Check Evaluate Project and provide a file name.
Figure 2.2a. To evaluate from Run:
Figure 2.2b. To evaluate using the A-button.
Figure 2.2c. Choose Evaluate Project.
The reason for this step is to ensure that the project scope and cooling water
requirements developed during evaluation are current and up to date. It will
also eliminate an error message (Figure 2.2d) that would be displayed when
accessing the cooling water model no evaluation data were available.
.
Figure 2.2d. Error message if the project was not evaluated
3 Select the Cooling Water Model: To do this, click Run | Utility Model
(Figure 2,2a) or press the “U” button on the button bar (Figure 2.3a):

Figure 2.3a. To obtain utility models using the U-button.
This will bring up the Utility Model dialog box, Figure 2.3b. A blank value
under Status indicates the project does not contain a prior cooling water
model area. If a project contained a prior area, the Status field would
indicate Loaded.
Figure 2.3b. Utility model selection
3b Select Cooling Water: Click OK. This will either initiate an interactive
Cooling Water Design session in MS Excel and display a Load option or
display a project-not-evaluated error message (see Step 2 above).
Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase
Overview
When the cooling water model is invoked, it:
(a) analyzes for project cooling water requirements
(b) works from Preferences (user-modifiable, default set of design
parameter values)
(c) prepares an initial design.
Results of the initial design and any subsequent interactive scenario are
presented in a Capture worksheet. If the design meets with the user’s
approval, a user click of the parked Load button will load the design results
into the project, at which time the project can be re-evaluated.
The Preferences and Circuits worksheets allow the user to modify the
default design basis. Each spec change will result in a new design. Hyperlinks
provide rapid access from one sheet to another and sections in a sheet. The
Control Center toolbar button opens the Control Center worksheet, which
has hyperlinks to other sheets and their major categories. Worksheet tabs
are color coded to match hyperlinks at the top of each worksheet.

The following sections provide a detailed description of the work process as
well as detailed descriptions of each worksheet, category and item.
Details of the Work Process
With the click of the OK button in step 3b above, three actions will occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior cooling water model area is present in
the project. If present, the user can choose to Delete the prior area and
continue with the model or return to the project. If Delete is chosen, the
utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time
to load the new results.
2 If no prior cooling water utility area is detected, the Welcome screen is
displayed and remains present during a time when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c A Load | Cancel | Minimize option is provided (Figure 2.4). To
continue, click the minimize button at the top. This will park the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel will end the cooling
water model session and return normal project functions with no change
to the project.
Figure 2.4. Load-Cancel-Minimize button boxes
 a Control Center button bar (figure 2.5) is provided to access the
Control Center worksheet from any worksheet
 Seven worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
o Welcome
o Control Center
o Status
o Preferences
o Capture
o Guide
3 The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to all
other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) or
failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design
parameters.
The Initial Design
On initiation, the cooling water model will report the Status of the design on
the Control Center (see Figure 2.5) worksheet under Status Report, and if

any, will identify clashes on the Status worksheet and further, on the
Preferences and Circuits worksheet.
A Status Report message: “Successful. A Load can proceed” indicates all is
well between project requirements, design parameters and design
methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by
accessing the Captured Results worksheet (see Figure 2.6). The user can
return to Preferences and Circuits to study design alternatives. If captured
results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button will (1) carry the
design results into the project, (2) close the worksheets and (3) return to the
project for evaluation of the augmented project.
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error
messages and flags will be displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.
The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center
Worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where
checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the
Preferences and Circuits input worksheets.
Figure 2.5. Illustration of the Control Center Worksheet, with display of
Control Center toolbar and Load button

Figure 2.6. A section of a Results Capture sheet showing values in the project
units of measure set.
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model
Worksheets
Introduction
Worksheets: Seven worksheets are provided, of which Preferences and
Circuits are for user input, to revise the design basis:
 Welcome: greetings, workflow graphic
 ControlCenter: navigation
 Status: message center
 Preferences: design selections
 Circuits: circuit definition
 Capture: early design metrics
 Guide: help
Button Actions: The Control Center toolbar is always available during a
model session. A click will open the Control Center worksheet and a hyperlink
click will direct you to a chosen worksheet. When the Control Center toolbar is
parked together with the Excel Web toolbar you can quickly search forward
and backward.

You can step from one sheet to another, revise the design basis, review
status and results, decide on an alternate design basis, make revisions,
review the results and when ready, click the Load button (see Load-Cancel-
Minimize) to inject the results in the project. Or, you can refuse the design
using Cancel. Clicking Load conveys the design results to the project, the
cooling water design model’s Excel sheets and return to normal Analyzer
functions. Cancel bypasses the cooling water model and returns to Analyzer.
Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets
The SPECS cooling Model workbook consists of
 Two design basis sheets – this is where you input your selections
o Preferences: process and mechanical design specs:
 Red error flags and messages are displayed for out of
range or missing data values
 Uses click boxes for either/or choices, “B” and “R”
switches to select base (default) or revised value and
user value to replace the base value
o Circuits: assignment of areas to a circuit, spacing of areas in
a circuit along the main line:
 Assignment uses 1, 2, 3, 4 to assign an area to a circuit
 Spacing uses the “B” and “R” switch method and user
spacing to replace the base Hfootprint modelH value
 Status sheet – all messages are summarized here for your review and
repair
o Key status message is highlighted in color (green: Loading can
be performed, red: Errors must be cleared)
o Summarizes other messages, links directly to input locations for
revision
 Capture Results: displays early design metrics for decision making,
provides the basis for alternative choices of preferences or circuitry.
By “early design metrics” is meant values in advance of those created
during project evaluation
 Guide: provides instructions, describes data entry, color coding
 Control Center: hypertext links interconnect all sheets and main
categories for rapid navigation
 All sheets: are conveniently color coded, with red flags appearing on
error condition. All error conditions must be cleared before results can
be loaded
 Welcome sheet: Welcome, displayed during the initiation process,
contains a workflow graphic
On completion of an error-free interactive session, pressing the LOAD button
will automatically load and inject the results into the project. The project will
then contain new scope additions: (1) a uniquely named, time-stamped
cooling water area will be used to contain (2) a selected, designed list of
cooling water utility project components. Each item so added by the model
may be opened, reviewed, revised in the same way as any other project
component.

Worksheet Details
Status Worksheet
The Status sheet reports messages and has hypertext links to source
locations in the event of a reported error. Major report categories are:
 Overall status
 Existing cooling water area is in the project
 Cooling circuit components – wet bulb temperature, minimum
approach temperature, lowest desired cooling water temperature
 Cooling water resources: naming, excluded streams and reasons, net
number
 Project components: total, number served by cooling water
 Project areas: total number, those served by cooling water
 Cooling water loads: total flow rate, total heat duty, excess capacity,
total flow rate at excess capacity
 Layout distances: number of parameters out of range
 Pumps specs out of range
 Piping specs out of range
 Circuit assignments out of range
 Spacing assignments out of range
Figure 3.1 illustrates an extract of a Status sheet
Figure 3.1 Extract, sample of a Status Sheet
Preferences Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Preferences worksheet correspond to those
defined in the project. Error messages are displayed alongside each entry;

errors are flagged in red. This sheet uses click boxes and data entry fields for
specifying design preferences. Each preference is provided with a
explanatory text, limit values, user entry field and a default value which is
used in the initial design and any subsequent design should the user not
provide an over-ride selection or value.
How to Revise Default Values
This worksheet uses two methods, check boxes and data entries controlled by
switch boxes to revise the supplied set of default (base) design parameters.
Throughout data entry discussions, the term used for a model-supplied set of
data is referred to as default values. For a particular parameter, the model-
supplied value is termed a base value, symbolized by the letter B. A value
supplied by the user is termed a revised value and is symbolized by the letter
R. A mouse click will switch between using a base value and a revised value.
See Figure 2.2c (page X494X) for information on how to use a check box:
 A default value is provided to the left of the check box
 A check box title signifies the alternative to the default value
 The resulting choice is displayed to the right
 A status message is displayed that provides additional information
Figure 3.2 Extract, sample of a Preferences sheet showing click box method
of selection
Design Preference Categories:
 Cooling Tower (values in this section affect the circuitry, sizing of
cooling towers and flow-related equipment such as circulation pumps
and distribution piping)
o Design Capacity, excess capacity
o Design Temperature: Summer wet bulb temperature
(see HCooling TowerH discussion of wet bulb temperature,
approach gradient, range)
o Messages relating to cooling water resource requirements
vs. design preferences

o Number of Cooling Towers
o Multiple Cooling Towers: choose either one tower for all
circuits or one for each circuit
o Working “Twin”: choose a single tower at 100% capacity or
two “(twins), each at 50% capacity
 Layout (these are dimension limit checks that are applied to entries on
the Circuits worksheet
o Distance
 From tower to first branch to an area
 Minimum value to first branch to an area (often defined
by fire regulations)
 From a branch to an area header
 Maximum spacing between areas (a limit check)
 Status messages related to distance
 Pumps
o Area Pressure Drop: pressure drop for equipment requiring
cooling water, applies to all areas
o Working Pumps
 Limiting value for number of working pumps in a circuit
 Pump type: horizontal (CENTRIF or API 610 model
types) or vertical (TURBINE model type, at low speed
only)
 Pump speed: low or high RPM
 Stand-by pumps if four or less pumps in a circuit: yes
or no
 Stand-by pumps if more than four pumps in a circuit:
yes or no
 Electrical power to pumps based on voltage choice: LV
(low-voltage), MV (mid-voltage), HV (high-voltage).
Limiting values of power per pump motor are displayed
based on project specifications. A voltage choice defines
the maximum power to a motor driver and hence, the
number of pumps in a circuit. Recall that each change
to a specification results in a completely new design; a
voltage selection results in a design value for the
number of pumps and can produce an error condition
and message if the number of pumps exceeds the
limiting value for number of pumps in a circuit.
 Design messages for pumps and piping for each of four
possible circuits
 Piping: Limiting values for line size, by line type, where line sizes are
in the units of measure of the project, either “IN DIAM” or “MM DIAM”
 Suction line size for circulation pumps (a flow rate per
pump suction line based on selected line size is provided
for information purposes)
 Main line segment line size
 Branch line size

 Area header line size
 Risers line size (for 3D area types)
 Laterals line size (for 3D area types)
Circuits Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Circuits worksheet correspond to those defined
in the project.
This worksheet is designed to handle up to one hundred cooling water areas.
Areas are listed vertically. The worksheet is divided into five major categories
in columns of data:
1 Initial Configuration
See Figure 3.3 for the initial configuration
Figure 3.3 Extract from Circuits sheet – Initial Configuration (left), Step 1
(right)
The following (see Figure 3.3, left side) are reported for each area being
served by a recognized cooling water utility resource stream:
 Initial Sort Sequence: sequenced by area, from the area with highest
cooling water requirements to the area with the lowest
 Area Name: user-assigned name, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
 Area Type: user-assigned area type, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
 Area CW Rate: area cooling water (CW) flow rate, the sum of all
recognized cooling water flow rates for equipment in an area as
adjusted by the Excess Capacity value in the Preferences worksheet
 Initial Circuit Number: always 1 as all areas are initially assigned to a
single circuit
 Initial Circuit ID: always “A”
2 Step 1 – Assignment of Areas to Circuits (User entry one of two)
Please refer to Figure 3.3 (right side):

 Enter a Circuit Number 1, 2, 3, or 4: user value is required; if only
one area requires cooling water, enter 1. If two areas, use 1 for both
or assign 1 to one area and 2 to the other. The design model will
sequence the areas. In an error condition, an error message and a red
flag will be displayed. Error conditions must be resolved to obtain
loadable design results.
 System-Assigned Circuit Id: The model will assign a letter ID (A, B, C,
D) to each area based on circuit assignments and total circuit flow
rate. If the project contains four or more areas, then it is possible to
assign areas to circuit numbers 1 to 4. The model will collect all the
area flow rates in each circuit and sequence the circuits from greatest
flow to least in the sequence A, B, C, D. The “A” circuit will have a
larger total flow rate than circuit “B”, “B” will be greater than circuit
“C” and “D” will have the least flow rate. Similarly, for three areas in a
project, valid circuit numbers range from 1 to 3 and circuit IDs assign
to these circuits, based on total flows will be sequenced and labeled A,
B and C. A one-area project will be assigned a circuit ID of “A.”
 Status
o Status of all entries: summarizes number or errors to be
resolved; if none, “OK” is displayed
o Status for individual entries: message is issued for invalid
circuit numbers and field is flagged in red
3 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
Please refer to Figure 3.4
Figure 3.4 Extract of Circuits sheet – defining area spacing using the B/R
switch
Each line item in this section represents an area and its properties. Areas are
sorted and sequenced in descending total circuit flow rate and then by area
flow rate. Circuits are labeled A, B, C, D with circuit A being the one with the
highest flow rate; B is next etc. An area that was tagged as circuit 2 in step 1
may be in a circuit with the lowest flow and would be organized accordingly
and given a Circuit ID letter depending on the other circuit flows.
This section displays the properties and attributes of each area in the
sequenced list.

Values displayed for information purposes are:
 New Sort Sequence: displays values vertically in the sequence 1, 2, 3,
etc
 HInitial Sort SequenceH: displays the initial sort sequence number for
the area
 HID of Area In Report Group (ArRg): H the ArRg ID for the area
 Area name: user-assigned project area description
 HArea CW RateH: displays the cooling water rate, as adjusted by the
Preferences value for excess capacity
 Area Heat Duty: heat duty requirements for all equipment within the
area identified as requiring a valid cooling water resource
 User circuit number: value entered in Step 1, for reference purposes
 HCircuit IDH: letter A, B, C, D assigned by the cooling water model based
on sequencing circuit flow rates
 Position Of Area In Circuit: Only one area can be first in line in a
circuit. “First” if the area has the highest flow rate of all areas in the
circuit, otherwise no a blank display. The area with a “First” position
will take on a default distance from the cooling tower as defined by the
Preferences value for that distance.
4 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between areas
Each line item in this section corresponds to item 4 above. A line item
represents an area and its properties, with areas being sorted and sequenced
in descending circuit and area flow rate.
This section enables the user to revise base values for the spacing of areas
along the main line. It uses the “Switch” method to revise a base value as
described in the section on Preferences.
 Base Value for Spacing Along Circuit Main Line: This is the run length
of the main segment between the prior and current area as developed
by the Hfootprint modelH.
 Enter Switch: B for Base, R to revise. Choose a blank entry or enter
either a B (or b) to indicate use of the base value. Use R (or r) to
indicate use of a revised value
o Switch value is blank: design will use the base value
o Switch value is B or b: design will use the base value
o Switch value is R or r: indicates a forthcoming user value will
revise the default spacing value. The design will use the
revised value if the user value is within range of prescribed
limits.
 Enter Revised Spacing Along The Circuit Main Line: This value will
replace the base value if it meets range limit conditions specified in the
Preferences worksheet. By spacing is meant the distance between
successive areas. As the line items in this section represent areas that
are sorted and sequenced, the spacing for a particular line item is the
spacing between the start of the prior area and the start of the current
area. This spacing is a measure of the area’s main line segment. See
the section on the HCooling Water Footprint ModelH. Piping runs lengths are
typically longer than spacing as they include pipe to configure fittings,
expansion loops, etc.

Enter a value. The resulting action depends on the corresponding switch
value
o Switch value is blank, B or b: user value is ignored, base value
will be used
o Switch value is R or r: user value is tested against range limits
and design criteria. If error free, the user value will be
displayed as the Applied Value. Error conditions will display
instructional status messages, red flag, and prevent completion
of a valid design
5. Status messages and values used for design
o Flag: A red flag is displayed to indicate a line item error
condition
o Status: B (Base) uses base value, R (Revise) uses revised value
or status message (displays limiting values, error messages)
o Value used for spacing along circuit main line: The value used
in the design
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design
Model
This section describes the basis of the cooling water design model. It is
presented with numerous graphics to enable a clear understanding of the
work being performed by the model when it is analyzing and designing
cooling water project components that are in harmony with your design
preferences and the needs of components requiring cooling water.
General Flow Sheet for Cooling Water Service
Figure 4.1 is a schematic diagram of a typical cooling water circuit. In this
figure, circulation pumps draw cooled cooling water, the cooling water supply
stream, from the supply basin at the bottom of a cooling tower and distribute
it through piping to heat exchanger located in one or more project areas.
Cooling water return streams are combined and sent to a cooling tower where
it is cooled, principally by evaporative cooling. Motor driven fans mounted on
the tower draw (induced draft) or force (forced draft) ambient air into the
cooling tower where it contacts the downward flow of cooling water. The
cooled cooling water drops down from the tower into a supply basin, awaiting
withdrawal by the circulation pumps.
Water is added to make up for losses through evaporation, air-born drift and
for blow-down. Water drawn from the system to prevent the build-up of
contaminants is termed “blow-down.”
See below for more on Hcooling towersH, terminology and defining stream
temperatures
Cooling water in such a circuit tends to accumulates algae, corrosion
contaminants and particles that slough off the distribution system. Water
treatment chemicals are added to alleviate these conditions, with the degree
of such treatment depending on the water supply source and environmental
conditions. Five types of treatment chemicals are typically used in small

quantities to control the water quality. The cooling water model provides each
cooling tower with a diaphragm type of pump and a stand-by for each of the
treatment chemicals. The model uses the following labels to identify the
types:
 Sulfuric acid (pH control)
 Sodium hypochlorite (pH control)
 Biocide (algae growth control)
 Corrosion inhibitor
 Dispersant (suspended particles control)
Figure 4.1 Illustration: Cooling Water Flow Diagram
Cooling Water Model Circuitry
The cooling water model is designed to support up to four independent
cooling water circuits. Each circuit can have its own cooling tower or all
circuits can be defined to share a cooling tower. A circuit consists of pumps
and distribution piping to and from project areas. It is the P&ID specs that
define the component’s hook-up piping to the cooling water model’s circuitry.
Summarizing, the cooling water model develops piping runs to a project area
and distributes cooling water to components in the area via an area header or
risers and laterals in the case of 3D area types. Each circuit is provided with
a supply and return distribution network; what is supplied must be returned:
one supply line implies one return line.
Figure 4.2 is a schematic diagram showing several areas that have equipment
requiring cooling water and one that does not. The cooling water model will
not serve an area that does not have cooling water requirements. If such an
area is to be included, then it is recommended that one or more exchangers
connected with cooling water utility streams be introduced in that area.
The cooling water model allows for a one cooling tower (or two 50% towers)
to serve all circuits or individual cooling tower (or two 50% towers) for each
circuit. Clearly, if only one area requires cooling water, only one circuit can
be defined, up to two circuits for two areas, up to three circuits for three

areas and a maximum of four circuits for four or more areas requiring cooling
water.
Figure 4.2 Single, Independent Cooling Water Circuit
Figure 4.3, case (a) is a diagram showing a single treed circuit. Figure 4.4,
case (b), illustrates multiple treed circuits. The difference between the two
cases is (a) one cooling tower for each circuit or (b) one for all circuits. Case
(a) would apply to projects with a single area or for multiple circuits, with
each circuit being served by its own cooling tower.

Figure 4.3 (case a). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve a set of
areas in a single circuit. The model will permit up to four single circuits, each
having its own cooling tower and circulation pumps.
Figure 4.4 (case b). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve multiple
circuits. For this case, the model will provide one cooling tower for all
circuits and a set of circulation pumps for each circuit.

Cooling Water Distribution Network
This section describes the methodology used in circuit design
 Naming conventions
 Sequencing of areas on the main line
 Cooling water footprint model
 Pipe, valves and fittings count
 Line sizing and pressure drop calculations
Naming Conventions
Project Cooling Water Utility Area: The cooling water design model will create
a cooling water model utility area to contain project components for each
circuit. On loading, the area will be named with a date and time stamp to
ensure it is unique and can be detected and properly deleted when a new
design is to take its place.
The naming convention is: “AUMCoolWater ddmmmyy_tttt”, where
 dd is the day number of the session month (1, 2, 3, ….., 31)
 mmm is a three character representation of the session month (jan,
feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, dec)
 yy is the last two digits of the session year (05 for 2005, etc)
 tttt is the decimal fraction of the session day
Utility project components are time-stamped in a similar manner. As only
four digits are used (tttt), it is possible that a load action might span two tttt
times (one ten-thousandth of a day, duration of 8.64 seconds) with no
significant resulting consequence.
Once a cooling water utility area is loaded in the project, the user may access
any item in the usual way, by using the Project View, clicking on any
component and viewing the design parameters in the forms view. Any and all
data in the cooling water utility area may be modified as required.
Areas Requiring Cooling Water: Each area that requires cooling water is
identified by a unique ArRg number that is made up of system–assigned
numeric values for Area ID and Report Group. An ArRg value of 201 indicates
Area ID = 2 in Report Group 1. The user-assigned area description, which
may not be unique in a given project, is printed in reports along with its
unique ArRg value.
Plant Bulk Pipe Item Descriptions: The naming convention above is combined
with the Area Code and is time stamped when loaded into the project. For
example, “MainSeg, ArRg 201_T7883” is the item description for main line
supply and return line segment that serves area 2 in report group 1, time
stamped T7883.
Distribution Piping Line Types: The distribution network in this cooling water
model consists of the following named types of lines:
 Main line segment: a portion piping along the main line
o “MS”
o “MainSeg”
o “MainChk” for a main segment that contains a check valve

 Branch segment: a short run of pipe, from the main line to a specific
project area
o “B”
o “Branch”
o “BrChk” for a branch that contains a check valve
 Area header: a line of pipe, valves and fittings that distributes cooling
water along the long dimension of the base of a project area
o “AH”
o “Area Header”
o “ArHdrChk” for an area header that contains a check valve
 Risers – vertical runs of pipe to bring cooling water to each level in a
3d structure
o “R”
o “Risers”
o “RiseChk” for a riser that contains a check valve
 Laterals – horizontal runs of pipe that distribute cooling water to each
floor in a 3D structure
o “L”
o “Laterals”
o “LatChk” for a lateral that contains a check valve
 Vents and drains – high-point vents, low-point drains on supply and
return lines, short runs of small bore pipe
o “VD”
o “VentDrain”
Lines with check valves are of minimal length to satisfy the plant bulk PIPE
mode and are separate line items as only one check valve is assigned to a
supply-return line pair.
Figures 4.5 and 4.6 illustrate these line types for 2D (PAD, GRADE) and 3D
area types (OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Figure 4.5 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 2D area type (PAD, GRADE)
Figure 4.6 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 3D area type (OPEN,
EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
Upon identifying which areas that require cooling water and their assigned
circuit, the cooling water model arranges the areas in decreasing cooling
water usage. The largest consuming area is placed at the front of the line
and the smallest consumer is placed at the end. In this way, min line
segments will be larger in diameter at the front of the line and decrease as
each consumer reduces the total flow rate to the next area.
Figure 4.7 illustrates various line types and sequenced areas.
Figure 4.7 Schematic of Line Types Serving Areas Requiring Cooling Water
Cooling Water “Footprint Model”
Upon identifying an area as one that requires cooling water, the footprint
model develops an area footprint by using (a) the total number of
components in an area, (b) the area type (2D or 3D), (c) the number of level
and (d) a packing density (number of components in a bay) and (e) area
aspect ratio, length:width, of 1.5:1.0.
The result of the footprint model is a set of dimensions for each area requiring
cooling water. These dimensions are used to develop a default value of the
spacing between the start of one area along the main line and the next area.
The default spacing distances are reported in the Step 2 of the CIRCUITS
worksheet and can be over-ridden by the user.
Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count
Each line type is provided with a piping iso model that consists of set of pipe,
valves and fittings. Pipe and fitting diameter is determined by volumetric flow
rate and limiting line velocity (suction lines being different from distribution

lines). Line length is determined by (a) minimum length of pipe required to
each type of fitting and (b) the long area dimension, which is developed from
a cooling-water “Hfootprint modeHl” for each project area and area type.
Fittings are assigned to each line type from a list that includes elbows (EL),
tees (TE), reducers (RE), flanges (FL), blind flanges (BL), gate valves (GA),
check valves (CH).
Each line type is based on five configuration components. The total line
length is determined by as the sum of the linear run distance plus pipe
lengths of pipe to satisfy the make-up of the configuration components. The
make-up of each configuration component is based on line type and consists
of quantities of the following:
 “Main run” component: pipe, of length determined by (a) the footprint
model, or (b) user preference value
 “Fixed” component: FL, GA, CH fittings, pipe length based on diameter
of run
 “Head” component: EL, FL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of
run, to provide directional change
 “Branch point” component: TE, RE, FL, BL fittings, for connection to
next line type
 “Vent and drain station” component: TE, FL GA fittings, pipe;
frequency of placement is based on linear run distance
 “Expansion loop” component: EL fittings, pipe length based on
diameter of run, frequency of placement is based on linear run
distance
Expansion loops and vent and drain stations are placed along the run based
on line length
The configuration of each line type serving each area is defined as a project
component located in the cooling water area created by the cooling water
model. Once loaded in the project, any line configuration can be reviewed
and modified in the usual manner by opening that project component in its
form.
Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations
The Cooling Water Model has a Preferences worksheet where, in the Piping
section, limiting sizes of each line type are defined. Once areas are assigned
to a circuit, the flows through the circuit are known. Areas are ordered in
sequence according to their flow requirements, with the largest consumer at
the head of the line. The computations are interactive and a new design will
be computed unnoticed each time a design value is revised. It is wise to
check early design results that are displayed in the Capture worksheet when
revising design specifications.
Line size and pressure drop computations take place in this general manner:
 Starting point is limiting velocity, as defined in the Icarus Reference
Guide
 Flow rate combined with limiting velocity results in required flow area
 Maximum line size determines number of parallel lines
 Built-in iso for each line type defines valve and fitting count

 Line length is derived from spacing between areas from circuitry input,
minimum spacing between areas and minimum lengths from line
 Total run length is a combination of line length and number of parallel
runs
 Pipe friction is based on Fanning type equation
 Line-size based fitting resistances are used to determine fitting friction
losses
 A single average value for the pressure drop across cooling water
usage components in any area is defined in the Preference worksheet
 Pressure at junctions, where flows meet, is common to junction
streams
 Overall circuit pressure drop comes from a stepwise calculation across
all junctions
 An addition head loss due to cooling tower elevation completes the
pressure drop determination
It is possible that the limiting line size for branch and area headers may be
too small for some circuits with large flows. This would result in a cluster of
two or more parallel lines. To alleviate this condition, consider increasing the
limiting line size.
Projects with a Prior Cooling Water Utility Model Area
The cooling water model will allow a single cooling water utility area of its
making in a project. If a project contains a prior area, the model will detect
its presence and defer action until the user decides to load a new cooling
water model design. Choosing to load will delete the prior area and the new
one will be loaded. Is the choice is not to load, the model worksheets are
closed with a return to the normal view.
Cooling Towers: Terminology and the Defining Stream Temperatures
Figure overview_4.8 shows a cooling tower with air and cooling water
streams and their temperatures.
Terms used in the cooling tower industry, illustrated in Figure 4.8, are:
 Cooling tower: a device used to cool water by the countercurrent
action of ambient air against a downward flowing stream of water to
be cooled. The cooling process involves the cooling of entering water

by evaporative cooling of water and sensible heat to a much lesser
degree
 Cooling water supply stream: cooling water supplied to heat
exchangers for purpose of cooling process streams
 Cooling water return stream: cooling water streams leaving heat
exchangers, combined for return to a cooling tower
 Range: cooling water return temperature, Tr – cooling water supply
temperature, Ts, directly related to the heat duty
 Approach Gradient: the difference between the wet bulb air
temperature and cooling water leaving the cooling tower.
Theoretically, the cooling water temperature can not drop below the
air wet bulb temperature. For a given cooling water flow rate, as the
approach gradient decreases, the cost of a cooling tower will increase.
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM)
Users:
Cooling Water utility resources that must accounted in the Analyzer Utility
Model (AUM) should be named either:
Cooling Water or "Cooling Water xx"
where:
xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99,
for example, Cooling Water 01
User created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example,
CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water
streams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.
Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be
assigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas
assigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow
rate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuit
flow rate.
Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew
point of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient
will determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that
your specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, please
review the limits for the two cooling water models:
 CTWCOOLING
 CTWPACKAGED

AUM_Air
Utility Design and Scope Generator
for Instrument and Plant Air
Overview
The Air Utility Module automatically and interactively:
 selects, designs, and sizes air plant project components that conform to
your:
o Project scope design basis
o Interactive entries for air utility design and configuration
preferences
 Augments the scope of your project with a list of designed air utility
project components in a unique air utility area on the click of the Load
button
 Interactive session enables a review of results prior to LOAD creates
o Status messages, suggestions to alleviate design clashes
o Interactive report of equipment and distribution piping design
results
With the Air Utility Module, you can review, revise, add other project
components and/or Run the augmented project to obtain a new project
evaluation.
The Air utility model can be
 applied to projects that have been created using
o Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Decision
Analyzer
o Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
 within Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
Project areas and their project components
 Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer projects:
o Each group of project components is contained in a unique
“Report Group”
o A report group is a project area
 Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects: You can create
o A project area
o A report group to coordinate a group of project areas
o The AUM Air utility module works with each project area and its
air requirements

Benefits:
 You get early design metrics for decision making
 Decide what’s best, then trigger the LOAD operation
 With LOAD, a new Air utility area will be inserted into your project with its
designed list of air system project components
 Before LOAD, air system project components are interactively
o Selected based on your selection preferences
o Designed in accordance with your project basis and air design
preferences
o Sized
o Reported
 In a small fraction of the time and effort it takes to do this work in the
traditional manner
 Change the project scope? Re-run the utility module!
How AUM_Air Works
General AUM_Air Workflow
1 Press U button to initiate.
2 Select Air Utility.
AUM_Air opens in MS Excel
3 Move the supplied Control Center toolbar to the top and click it.
4 Check Status.
5 Review the Guide, page X525X.
6 Select and enter Preferences.
7 Check messages, review results in Report.
8 Revise Configuration parts 1 and 2.

9 Check messages, review results in Report.
10 Click the Load button to close AUM_Air and load the design results into
your project.
11 Review Area and components.
12 Run the project, review results.
Using AUM_Air
Accessing AUM_Air
To access AUM_Air:
1 Starting with an open project that has been evaluated, click Run, then
click Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears:
2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.
3 Click OK.
Three actions now occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior Air – Instrument, Plant
model area is present in the project. If present, you can choose to
Delete the prior area and continue with the model or return to the
project. If you click Delete, the utility model will proceed with the
design and delay deletion until it is time to load the new results.
2 If no prior Air – Instrument, Plant utility area is detected, the
Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a time
when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which
links to all other worksheets and provides an indication of success

(green signal) or failure (red signal) to create an initial design
based on default design parameters.
3 A Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box is provided.
4 To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This parks the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel ends the Air –
Instrument, Plant model session and returns normal project functions
with no change to the project.
Note: A Control Center button bar is provided to access the
Control Center worksheet from any worksheet.
Nine worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
 Welcome
 Control Center
 Guide
 Status
 Preferences
 Config 1
 Config 2
 EquipStats
 PipeStats

The Initial Design
On initiation, the Air – Instrument, Plant model reports the status of the
design on the Control Center worksheet under Status, and if there are any,
identifies clashes on the Status worksheet and, further, on the Preferences
worksheet.
A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all is
well between project requirements, design parameters, and design
methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by
accessing the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.
If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button:
 carries the design results into the project
 closes the worksheets
 returns to the project for evaluation of the augmented project
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error
messages and flags are displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.
The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center
worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where
checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the EquipStats
and PipeStats worksheets.
To load the Air – Instrument, Plant data into your Icarus project:
When you are satisfied with the model and the Status worksheet shows that
there are no errors, you can load the Air – Instrument, Plant model into
the project.
1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.

2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML
data into Icarus.
When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,
the following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data
When you have loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data in your project, you
modify that data using the AUM_Air module.
To Modify Air – Instrument, Plant Data:
1 On the main menu, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, click the U
button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears. Note that the Status column says
Loaded.

2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.
3 Click OK.
The following warning message appears:
Note: Clicking Yes does not actually delete the Air – Instrument, Plant
data in your project. You can click Yes, modify the Air – Instrument, Plant
data, then choose not to replace the previous Air – Instrument, Plant data
with the modified data by clicking Cancel on the Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.
4 Click Yes.
5 Modify the data to your satisfaction.
If you want to replace the loaded data with your modified data, follow the
steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML
data into Icarus.
When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,
the following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
If you want to keep loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data and not replace it
with your modified data, follow the steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Cancel.
The following warning message appears:
3 Click Yes to cancel the loading process.
Your original loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data is retained.
Guide for the Air Utility Model
(AUM)

SPECS Organization Chart
About this SPECS Book

About an Air Plant Unit

About Distribution Piping for an APU
Methods
In the conceptual design phase, lacking a plot plan, this method is used to
develop air distribution piping.
 Some runs may be long, some short.
 Components in the augmented project scope definition may be modified,
deleted, new ones added.
The following is a brief description of the methods used.
 Areas assigned to an APU are collected in the sequence of the project and
are assembled in a column-row array
 Array dimensions are determined from area dimensions
 Row and column dimensions are figured from total area, number of areas
and an initial aspect ratio of 3:2
Air Distribution
 Piping is developed for Instrument Air as well as Plant Air.
 Piping for each service is developed in the same way, except for
volumetric flow and line size
Distribution Piping
 The APU feeds air to the array through a Main Feeder (MF)
 The Main Feeder length is defined in Preferences
 Two Main Manifolds (MM) are used on extra-wide arrays, els one or none
for an array one column wide
 Each MM feeds a Main Line (ML)
 Main lines feed Branch Lines (BR)
 A tee of the Branch line supplies air to an Area Feeder (AF)
 Area Feeders connect to Area Headers (AH)
 Area headers, for 2-D area types such as Grade, Pad, etc supply air to the
I-P transducers, control valves
o P&ID information from the original project provide the
requirements for I-P and control valve components
o Utility station requirements are developed for each area based
on anticipated air tool usage and area size
 A plant air connection is made off the Area Header Plant
for each utility station
 Area headers, for 3-D area types such as open steel structures, etc supply
air to Risers, then Laterals which then connect to I-P transducers and
control valves.
o Utility station requirements are developed for each 3-D type
area based on anticipated air tool usage and area size

Schematic
The following schematic was prepared to illustrate a large project of 78 areas:
Configuration of Air Utility
Project Components
 Project Components
 An Air Plant Unit - APU

 Schematic of an APU
 Multiple APUs
 Compressor Redundancy
Project Components
The Instrument and Plant Air Utility Model creates a set of project
components in accordance with the needs of your:
 Project Scope definition
 Design and selection preferences for Instrument and Plant Air
Typical components
 Air Compressors
 Interstage and After-coolers
 Air Filters
 Air Receivers
 Air Dryers
 Air distribution piping (instrument, plant air)
 Utility Stations (air, water, steam, condensate drain services)
 Associated installation bulks would be developed during project run
Components are contained in a uniquely defined
Area
 Area Title contains a unique time and date to differentiate one run from
another
 Area can be modified or deleted in the usual way using Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer
An “Air Plant Unit” - APU
 Air intake screens
 Air intake ductwork
 Air compressors
o One main compressor at 100% capacity or two at 50%
capacity each
o Optional standby spare compressor
o Optional start-up compressor
 Interstage and after-stage coolers
o Optional TEMA water cooled or fin-fan air cooled exchangers
 Air receivers
o Optional individual receivers for instrument and plant air or
combined receiver
o Optional main receiver or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional stand-by receiver

 Air filters – pre-filter and post-filter, one or more of each
 Air dryers - dual tower type (one working, one regenerating)
o One main at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional standby spare air dryer
o Optional dryer for Plant Air
 Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
 Distribution piping
o Instrument and plant air
o Utility stations
o Cooling water, steam/condensate headers
o Interconnects between two or more air plant units
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit

General Layout
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas
One or up to four Air Plant Units to serve area air requirements.
Two distribution networks for each APU:
 instrument air
 plant air

Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-
by, Start-up
Design Considerations
 Units of Measure
 Designed Components
 Volumetric Air Flow Rate
 Equipment Selection and Design
o Compressor Model Selection
o Interstage and After Coolers; choice of
 Air Coolers (for rack mounting)
 Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers
o Air Receivers
o Air Filters
o Air Dryers
Units of Measure
Values are reported in the Unit of Measure set of the user’s project, in the:
 Utility Module interactive worksheets and reports
 Augmented user’s project file

Air Utility Area
 Designated as AUM_Air_ddmmyy_tttt (date and time stamped)
 Contains Air Utility system project components
Air Utility Project Components
Each item is selected and sized:
 Area headers for cooling water/return, steam/condensate, instrument and
plant air
 Air intake screens
 Air intake ductwork
 Compressors
 Interstage coolers
 Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
 Plant and Instrument Air Receivers
 Air Pre-filters, After-filters
 Air Dryers
 Distribution Pipe, Valves, Fittings
o Distribution circuits: up to four circuits (one to four air plant
units)
o Distribution piping, for 2D, 3D area types
o Utility stations (total number of stations)
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow
Rate

Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate
Compressor Model Selection Method
Sizes compressor based on
 Total project air flow
 Number of desired air plant units
 Project areas assigned to each air plant unit
 Air plant unit redundancy (working spares, stand-by spares)
 Specs for start-up compressor
Model type is based on compressor air flow rate
 Low flow rates – reciprocating
 High flow rates – centrifugal
 Flow rates less than model minimum -reciprocating

Reciprocating Compressor for Low Capacity
Range
Gasoline Motor-Driven Reciprocating Compressor
for Low Capacity Range, Stand-by Spare

Centrifugal Compressor for High Capacity Range
Inter- and After-compression stage Coolers

Air Filters
Air Receivers

Air Dryers
Interactive Specs
 Design Basis
o Equipment Redundancy
o Equipment Configurations
o Selection Specs
o Design Preferences
o Air Distribution
 Areas and Air Plant Units
 Layout
 Air Distribution Configuration
o Assignment of APUs to Areas
User Preferences
 User enters specs interactively in MS Excel SPECS workbook
 Preferences worksheet– design and equipment configuration basis
o Organized by category
o Color coded
o Either/or selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Numeric selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Help messages assist selections
o Error messages are issued for out-of-limit or design clash
conditions
 CONFIG worksheets: basis for distribution air piping to areas
o Part 1: Assignment of plant air to areas devoid of equipment
o Part 2: Assignment of an APU to an area

Equipment Redundancy
 Main item at 100% capacity
 Main item split into two, each at 50% capacity
 Stand-by spare
o Optional
o Same size as main item or main item at 50% capacity
o Power option for stand-by compressors
 Electric motor drive
 Large compressors: steam turbine drive
 Small compressors: gasoline engine drive
 Start-up compressors only
o Optional
o Size based on user % of total capacity of main item
Equipment Configurations
Equipment configuration choices:
Combined air train
Individual Instrument air train
Wet or dry plant air train

Basis for Design: Preferences - 1
With the exception of item 1 (Conversion of “Quoted cost” items ….) where no
default value is provided, every other user preference is supplied with a
default value and minimum and maximum limit values where appropriate.
Item 1 requires user entry for an exchange rate which is used in an air utility
internal cost model to evaluate costs of air intake screen/filters.
1 Conversion of "Quoted cost" items to Project Currency Units (PCU)
o Exchange rate, Project Currency Units per USD:
Note: This entry is required.
2 Ambient Air Conditions (one set for all APUs)
o Dry bulb temperature
o Wet bulb temperature
o Atmospheric pressure
3 Air Requirements - Capacity for Instrument and Plant air (one set for all
APUs)
o Excess capacity, %
 Instrument air
 Plant air
o Air system leakage, %
o Install utility stations?
o Number of utility stations, % adjustment
4 Air intake screens/filters (uses an AUM_Air cost model)
o Air to media ratio
o Adjustments to model estimate
 Cost
 Hour to install
 Weight
5 Compressors (one set of specs for all APUs) Main compressor:
o Main compressor
 One at 100% capacity or two each at 50% capacity
 Limiting flow rate for a single main compressor, % of
model maximum flow
o Stand-by spare compressor
 Install?
 Driver type (electrical or other: turbine, gas motor)
o Start-up compressor
 Install?
 Minimum flow rate to qualify for installation
 Running time
o Interstage Coolers
 Type:
 Water cooled (small: Pre-engineered type or
large: TEMA BEU)

 Air cooled (AIR COOLER)
 Cooling water inlet and rise temperature
 Air temperature rise for fin-fan air coolers
Notes:
If low capacity type is selected, may generate multiple low capacity
compressors
High capacity compressors may require project mid- and/or high voltage
power distribution levels.
o Utility services for compressors
 Steam lines: run distance from boiler house to turbines
 Cooling water lines: run distance from cooling water
plant
6 Air Receivers
o Common or separate receivers for instrument air and plant air?
o One main receiver at 100% capacity or two, each at 50%
capacity
o Install a stand-by spare?
o Horizontal or vertical vessels?
o Maximum diameter
o Maximum tangent-to-tangent length
o Instrument air supply time during emergency shut-down
o Plant air supply time during emergency shut-down
7 Air Dryers (Dual Bed–one working, one regenerating)
o Common air dryer for instrument and plant air?
o Is plant air to be dried?
o One main dryer at 100% capacity or two, each at 50% capacity
o Air purge rate
8 Air Filters
o Instrument air
 Number of pre-filters
 Number of post-filters
o Plant air
 Number of pre-filters
 Number of post-filters
9 Distribution piping
o Minimum line size for air piping
o Distance from APU to process area
o Typical tie-in run length from one APU to another

Configuration Layout Method and
Distribution
Basis for Air Utility Model Piping
o Layout and primary distribution piping is based on the specs for
all areas assigned to an APU
o Area feeder and header, risers, laterals are based on area specs
Area layout in lieu of a project plot plan
o Project areas are arranged in project sequence
o Each area is given an ID code based on its report group and
area number
 Example:
 Report group 2 “Solvent Recovery”
 Area 4 description: “Distillation”
 Is given an ID code of 100 x 2 + 4 = 204
 ID code 204 is characterized by its report group
name and area description
o Areas are placed in a rectangular array according to the total
number of areas with an initial aspect ratio of 2:3 (fewer
columns than rows)
o Column-row arrangement is modified to obtain a row-column
balance
o A branch line is run across each row with area feeder take-offs
to each area in a row
o Area headers (and risers and laterals for 3D area types)
connect to individual project components in that area
o Branches are fed using a Main Line
o Main Lines are fed by Main Manifolds for wide arrays
o Main Manifolds are fed by a Main Feeder from the Air Plant Unit
APU Configuration:
o Choose default (one APU for all) or assign each Report Group to
one of four APUs

Example layout – group of areas served by
APU “A”
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs
 Worksheet provides a list of Project Areas and air consumption
 Configuration in two parts:
o Part 1: enables areas with no Instrument air requirements to
be provided with plant air, else no air is provided
o Part 2: enables each area to be assigned to an APU
 Initial configuration: all areas are assigned to APU “A”
o Design results are presented for the initial configuration
 Revised configuration: use of up to four (4) APUs
o Design results are presented for the revised configuration

Sample Layouts: One APU
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs
Design Methods
 Sizing Distribution Piping
 Schematic of Distribution Piping
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping
 Configuration (IA = instrument air; PA = plant air)

o Assignment of an APU to Project Areas
o Initial configuration: all are areas assigned to one APU
o APU Air flow for IA and PA is determined from sum of area
usage requirements
 Sizing
o Air Module uses a built-in layout model to estimate air
distribution piping line lengths
o Each line type is assigned an “Iso” with valve and fitting counts,
expansion loops for long runs
o Areas provides air flow requirements for each line
o Lines are sized based on air consumption and a pressure drop
of 1 PSI per 100 ft [22.6 KPAG/100 M] or less with a minimum
line size as defined in Preferences
o Design pressure: 150 psig [1350 KPAG]
Air Distribution Piping to Project Areas

Distribution for a 3D-Type Area
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets
Displayed below are sample AUM_Air worksheets. Note the following details
about AUM_air and these sample worksheets:
 sheets are non-functional
 all worksheets visible to the user have the version number printed at the
bottom of the sheet
 the project illustrated is Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ETOH Sample
Project
 except for currency and exchange rate, sheets are in the user's units of
measure defined in the user's project specs
o currency is referred to as PCU - project currency unit
o you must enter an exchange rate when opening a project for
the first time. The exchange rate value will be "remembered"
on opening the project thereafter
o ControlCenter, Status and Preferences sheet will always
show an error because you must enter an exchange rate for the
currency of the project (hyperlinks lead you from ControlCenter
to Status to Preferences to the item to be revised)
o on entering a proper value, the error message is not displayed
List of AUM_Air Worksheets
 Welcome
 ControlCenter

 Guide
 Status
 Preferences
 Config_1
 Config_2
 EquipStats
 PipeStats
Welcome Worksheet
Control Center Worksheet

Guide Worksheet

Status Worksheet

Preferences Worksheet

Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant
Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas
to an APU

Note: For clarity in this documentation, the following screen shot is shown
below the one above it. On the actual Config 2 Worksheet, they are side by
side.
Report – Equipment Component Stats

Report – Pipe Stats

10 Evaluating the Project 563
10 Evaluating the Project
Running a Project Evaluation
After all the process simulator data has been properly mapped and defined,
you are ready to run a project evaluation. The project evaluation produces
capital costs reports that can then be viewed in Aspen Icarus Reporter and
Icarus Editor. If any of the components are modified, the evaluation process
must be re-run.
To run a project evaluation:
1 Click on the toolbar.
– or –
On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.
2 The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file name,
Cap_Rep.ccp. This is the report reviewed in Icarus Editor. If you want to
give this file a different name, type the file name in the Report File field.
3 Click OK.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator scans
the project specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any found are

564 10 Evaluating the Project
listed in the Scan Messages window.
Note: You can select in Preferences to skip the scan for errors (see
page X53X).
There are four types of messages:
Scan Message Description/Importance Level
INFOrmational For your information
WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to problems
ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item
FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems
You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process (except in the
case of FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation process). You should carefully
review these and fix any problems before proceeding.
When the project evaluation is done, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lists all
errors found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.
If you are using the default preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
automatically displays reports in Icarus Editor when the evaluation is
complete.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have Icarus Editor automatically
appear after the evaluation (see page X53X).

Reviewing Results in Icarus
Editor
Icarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document Interface (MDI) text
editor program.
Accessing
If you are using the default preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
automatically displays evaluation reports in Icarus Editor immediately after
you run a project evaluation. If you have selected not to automatically display
results, you will need to complete the steps below to display evaluation
reports in Icarus Editor. Even if you are using the default preferences, you
may want to use the following procedure if the project was evaluated
previously and has not changed since.
To display evaluation reports in Icarus Editor:
– or –
On the View menu, click Capital Costs View.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.
2 Select the Evaluation Reports check box; then click OK.

Icarus Editor opens displaying the evaluation reports.
The right-hand pane contains the reports. The left-hand pane contains a tree-
structure Contents view that lets you jump to different sections.
Note: Click on the toolbar to turn the Contents view on and off (or click
Contents on the View menu).
Printing a Single Section
The Contents view also lets you print a single section, rather than the entire
report.
To print a single section:
1 Right-click a section.
2 Click Print Barcharts.
Icarus Editor Toolbar
Click this to
New
open a new document in the Document View
Open
open an existing document

Save
save current document to disk
File Properties
view selected properties of current
document
Print
print the current document
Print Preview
print preview the current document
Page Setup
specify how the current document will be
printed
Cut
cut selected text to windows clipboard
Copy
copy selected text to windows clipboard
Paste
paste contents of windows clipboard into
insertion location
Bold
bold selected text
Italic
italicize selected text
Underline
underline selected text
Select Font
specify font for selected text
Find (CTRL+F)
find any text string within the current
document
Preferences
set and save your preferences
Toggle Contents
turn OFF/ON the Contents View
Cascade
display multiple documents cascaded
Tile Horizontal
display multiple documents tiled horizontally
Tile Vertical
display multiple documents tiled vertically
Help Contents
display on-line help
Report Sections
Title Page
The Title Page includes the following:
 Estimate Base: financial quarter from which cost basis is derived and date
of Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE).
 IEE version number.
 Run Date: Date and time that project evaluation was run.
 Currency symbol used in the report.
 Telephone numbers to call for technical support.

Contract Structure
The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and reporting
arrangement.
Contents
The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on which
each starts. The number of sections may vary depending on the number of
report groups. If the project contains only one, then there will be only a single
summary. If more than one, there will be a separate summary for each, plus
a summary for the total project.
Project Summary
The Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.

Project Data Sheet
The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing user-
entered values and system default values.

Project Schedule
Total Manpower Schedule
The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower loading based on
the CPM Construction Schedule.
Ways to influence this schedule include:
 Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the workweek using the
General Rates specifications form and the Craft Rates specifications form.
These forms are accessed in Project Basis view under Project BasisBasis
for Capital CostsConstruction Workforce.
 Indexing man-hours either at the Project level (Project BasisBasis for
Capital CostsIndexing) or at the Area level.
The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by summing the
labor assigned to all the work items that fall within the period represented by
that bar in the barchart.
Cashflow Summary
The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.

This barchart schedule assumes that the DESIGN ENG’G AND PROCUREMENT
monies are already spent at the start of construction - the curve is not truly
tied to the CPM schedule. During construction, capital is then spent for
material, direct field labor, equipment rental and subcontract work, Home and
Field Office, Start-up, and so on, as the cost is incurred. By the end of
construction, the TOTAL,AMOUNT given in the Project Summary is indicated
here.
Operating costs, such as start-up utilities, raw materials, initial catalyst
charges, and so on, are not included.
Project Schedule Data Sheet
The Project Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship times for
equipment items by class and provides barcharts of the following:
 General Schedule: Balanced display of Basic and Detail Engineering,
Procurement and Construction (EPC).
 Engineering Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail Engineering and
Procurement; summary for Construction.
 Construction Schedule: Details for Construction- others summarized.
 Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a single contractor
is performing all work, this schedule shows no new information.

Contract Summary
The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.
Summaries By Report Group
Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor costs and
manhours by report group for all areas reporting to that group.

Area Lists of Equipment and Bulk Material
For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided into three
sections. First there is the Component List, followed by the Area Bulk Report,
and finally the Area Data Sheet. Following the last Area of each Report Group,
there are two more reports - the Report Group Summary and the Report
Group Equipment Summary.
Appendix A- Detailed Bulk Material and Field
Manpower Listing
Appendix A lists the design and cost details for every component, whether
system-generated or user-added. The results are reported in the sequence
that the items appear in the Area tree diagram.
Appendix B- Bulk Material and Field Manpower
Summary- by Report Group
Appendix B consists of one summary of the material and manpower man-
hours and cost for all direct costs in the project. There is one report per
Report Group; if there is only one Report Group, then this report is
eliminated. It is replaced by the project bill of material (see Appendix C
description below).
Appendix C –Bulk Material and Field Manpower
Summary - Total Project
Appendix C is a project bill of material (BOM) providing a material and
manpower summary for each plant bulk category. Due to the fact that the
numbers are large, this is the best source of material costs and man-hours for
calibration.
Appendix D – Direct Material and Manpower
Summary by Major Account - Total Project
Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM) providing direct material and
manpower summary by major account for the total project.

Appendix E – Units of Measure Data Sheet
Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any user
modifications.
Reviewing Results in Aspen
Icarus Reporter
Accessing Aspen Icarus Reporter
To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:
– or –
Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.
2 Keep Interactive Reports selected; then click OK.
Reporter imports and loads the reports from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window appears.

Reporter allows you to select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel
reports or Update On Demand reports. These selections can be remembered
by clicking the Remember Selections button shown in the figure below.
These selections are retained and shown the next time the Reporter
application is run. Beginning with V7.3, reporter remembers these selections
product as well as project wise.
In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are
displayed. Beginning with V7.3 these selections are retained until you choose
to do otherwise.

Remembering selections product wise
In V7.2 and prior versions, reporter does not remember these selections
product wise separately and only remembers the last selections made among
all the three Economic Evaluation Products (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and Aspen Economic Analyzer). Beginning with
V7.3, this limitation has been removed and reporter can remember the
selections for all the three types of products separately.
When a reporter application is run on a newly created project, last
remembered selections (if any) for that product type are shown by default.
Similarly, for an existing unsaved project last remembered selections (if any)
for that product type are shown by default.

Remembering selections project wise
Beginning with V7.3, you can save selections product wise as well. These
selections remembered by clicking Remember Selections can be saved
permanently with the project by selecting the File | Save menu item or
clicking the Save Project toolbar button on the main Economic
Evaluation frame window. When the reporter is invoked on such a saved
project, it retains the selections saved with the project.
Note: Clicking Remember Selections saves or updates the selections for
the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or Update
On Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other
type of reports then you need to select that report type and then click
Remember Selections after selecting the reports.
Clear these selections before adding or removing any new custom reports.
Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar
File Menu
Click this to
Import Data Import project reports. See page XX601XX for instructions.
Run Report Run selected report. See pages XX579XX (Standard reports), XX594XX (Excel
reports), and XX589XX (HTML reports) for instructions.
Open
Workbook
Open the last Excel workbook created. See page XX597XX for instructions.
Create User
Database
Export SQL database. See page XX602XX for instructions.
Exit Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.
Trend Menu
Click this to
Add Trend
Data to
Database
Add the trend data from the project reports currently loaded in Aspen
Icarus Reporter to the trending database. See page XX599XX for
instructions.
Create New
Trend in Excel
Export trending database to Excel. See page XX599XX for instructions.
View Existing Open the trending data workbook in Excel. See “Data Trending,”

Trend Data pages XX598XX through XX601XX, for instructions.
Clear All
Saved Trends
Clear the trending database. See page XX598XX for instructions.
Which Report Mode?
Four report modes are available:
 Standard reports
 HTML reports
 Management reports
 Excel reports
 Update on Demand
All but Management reports present Capital Costs and Design and Basis
reports. Management reports contain snapshots of project data frequently
requested by project management.
Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same data in
different applications. Because of the differing capabilities of the applications,
data is presented differently in each. The choice of mode may depend upon
what you wish to do with the data at a particular time.
Standard Reports
With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports
section displays a tree structure grouping of standard reports.
Report Descriptions
Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report
to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.

Note: See page X578XX for descriptions of all Standard reports.
Opening a Report
Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this user’s
guide. For example, the Contents view only appears on reports with multiple
sections. In order to see all the features described, select the Contractor –
COA Summary report located in the following folder:
Capital Cost ReportsDirect CostsCOA Summaries
To open the selected report:
 Do one of the following
 Click the Run Report button.
-or-
 On the File menu, click Run Report.
-or-
 Double-click on the report.

The report window appears.
Navigating
If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view appears on the
left side of the window, allowing you to jump to a section simply by clicking
the section in the Contents.
The arrow buttons on the toolbar allow you to page through the report:
Next Page Previous Page
Last Page First Page
Since the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking the Last
Page button is a convenient way to access them.
Magnification
To change the magnification level:
 Click in the Magnification box; then click the desired level from the
menu.

You can also click directly in the Magnification box (without clicking ) and
then zoom in and out using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.
When viewing the report at large magnification, you may wish to hide the
Contents view by clicking the Toggle Group Tree button . This makes
more room for the report.
Segregating a Cost Section
If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed over a cost
section’s title or totals, you can double-click to open a separate tab window
containing only that cost section.
For example, under Civil in the Contractor – COA Summaries report, the
cursor changes into a magnifying glass when placed over the Concrete cost
section’s title or totals.
Double-clicking on this cost section’s titles or totals opens a separate tab
window.

Note: Here, the Concrete cost section is displayed in a separate tab window,
where it can be viewed and printed apart from the rest of the report.
Searching
To search the report:
2 Enter the text string for which you want to search and click Find Next.
The next instance of the text string is framed in red.
Printing
To print the report:
2 The Print dialog box appears.
3 Make any desired changes to the default settings and click OK.

List of Standard Reports

HTML Reports
With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section
displays a tree structure grouping of HTML reports.
Report Descriptions
Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report
to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.

Opening an HTML Report
To open the selected report:
-or-
-or-
A status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you would
like to view the report now.
2 Click Yes.
Your browser displays the report.
Note: Generating the report as .htm file allows the report to be sent in an
e-mail.
Management Reports
When Management Reports is selected as the Report Mode, the Reports
section displays a tree structure grouping of Management reports. These
reports are intended to serve as snapshots of the project scenario.

Opening a Management Report
To open a Management report:
 Select the report and do one of the following:
-or-
-or-
The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured below is the
Detailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping reports in the Discipline
folder.
Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown below,
show simply a bottom-line total.
Exporting Management Reports to Excel
You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly useful for
when you want to be able to e-mail the report.

To export a Management report to Excel:
1 Click Export to Excel on the Viewer’s File menu.
2 Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a
report.
 If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to specify a worksheet
name (see step 3) and creates a workbook – either DefaultWB.xls in the
Reporter output folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-
booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbook
to which you exported since starting your computer.
 If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog
box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,
append the report to the existing workbook, or create a new workbook.
Click To do this
Overwrite existing
workbook
Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing
workbook
Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you select a
folder and enter a file name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
3 Make your selection and click OK.
4 Enter a name for the worksheet.
5 Click OK.
The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is done and asks
if you would like to open the workbook now.

4 Click Yes to open the workbook.
Excel displays the report.
Excel Reports
When you select Excel reports as the Report Mode, the Reports section
displays a tree structure grouping of Excel reports.
Report Descriptions
You can have Aspen Icarus Reporter display a description of the selected
Excel report.
To display a brief description of a report:
1 Open the necessary category and sub-category folders.
2 Click a report to display a brief description of that report in the
Description section.

Opening an Excel Report
To open a report:
1 Mark the checkbox next to the desired report.
You can mark multiple report checkboxes to open multiple reports.
Marking a folder’s checkbox will open all of the reports in the folder.
2 Click the Run Report button or click Run Report on the File menu.
Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.
 If no existing workbook is found and this is your first export to Excel
during this session, Reporter creates DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter
output folder:
...Economic Evaluation V8.0ic_cacheReporterOutput
 If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported from Reporter to
Excel since you last started you computer (to a file that’s since been

moved or deleted), Reporter creates a workbook with the file and path
name of the last workbook to which you exported.
 If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog
box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,
append the report to the existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create a
new workbook.
Click to do this
Overwrite existing
workbook
Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing
workbook
Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you enter a
workbook path and name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
3 After you make your selection, click OK. Excel opens a workbook
displaying the report.

Note: Exporting the report to an .xls file allows it to be sent in an e-mail
AutoFilter
Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
take advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel. In order to view a report
that includes AutoFilter, open the following report:
Capital Cost ReportsDirect CostsItem SummariesCombined
When AutoFilter is available, clicking next to a column displays a list of
all entries made in the column. Selecting an entry displays only rows that
contain that entry in the column.
For example, clicking 105 – Misc. Item Allowance in the COA Description
column of the Item Summary Combined report would display only accounts
with Code of Account (COA) 105.
 Clicking Top Ten displays only items that contain one of the top ten most
frequent entries.
 Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only rows that
contain a blank cell in the column, while clicking NonBlanks displays only
rows that contain a value in the column.
Opening Workbook without Running a Report
To view the last workbook created without running a new report, click Open
Workbook on the File menu.
Update on Demand Reports
The Update on Demand option is intended for data modification, for
example:
 deleting line items
 modifying line items

 calculating intermediate results
The Update on Demand option is available only if stored table and stored
queries entries exist.
In the Stored Reports table, specify:
Set type = UoD.
Click the Update on Demand option to run any query in the Stored
Queries table.
Your query is run only when a user specifies it with the Update on
Command option.
Data Trending
Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you to review
capital cost summaries of different scenarios in a single Excel workbook. If,
for example, you created three different scenarios for a project, you could use
the Data Trending feature to display the direct costs of each on one
spreadsheet, with a separate row for each scenario.
Clearing Trending Database
Since you only wish to compare certain scenarios, the first step is usually to
clear the database used to populate the Excel trending workbook.
To clear the trending database:
1 On the Trend menu, click Clear All Saved Trends.
2 Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box appears when this is done.
3 Click OK.
Adding Trend Data to Database
The next step is to add trend data to the database.
To add the current project reports’ trend data to the database:
1 On the Trend menu, click Add Trend Data to Database.
The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter has finished
adding the trend data.
2 Click OK.
You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the other
scenarios you are comparing. For each of the other scenarios, open the
reports in Reporter and complete the Adding Trend Data to Database
instructions above.
Using Reporter’s import function, you can open the other scenarios’ reports in
Reporter without opening the scenarios in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See
Creating a New Trend in Excel
After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports of the
scenarios you are comparing, you are ready to create a new trend in Excel.
To create a new trend in Excel:
1 On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.

The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you the choice of
either appending the trend data to the existing file or creating a new file.
2 Make you selection and click OK.
The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By default, all six
capital cost categories are marked.
3 Clear any categories you wish to exclude from the workbook and click OK.
The Export Status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if
you would like to open the trending workbook now.
4 Click Yes.
Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for each of the
capital cost categories. Each set of trend data entered into the trending
database is displayed on a separate row. (The workbooks for any categories
excluded at the Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box are blank).

After having created the trending workbook, you can access it from Reporter
by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View menu.
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter
When you have a project scenario open in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
select Capital Costs (Interactive) from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Reporter
automatically imports that project scenario’s Capital Cost reports as it opens.
However, once you’re at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you can import a
project scenario’s Capital Cost reports without having the project scenario
open in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
To import a Capital Cost report:
1 On the File menu, click Import.

The Import Selection dialog box appears.
2 Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder, which should be
at:
...DataArchives_Aspen Capital Cost Estimator[Project][Project
Scenario]
After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should appear in the File
set to import section.
3 Select PROJID and click Import.
Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenario’s reports
can be run from Reporter.
Creating a User Database
You can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation attributes used
by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
file.
Note: Icarus Reference, Chapter 35, “Database Relations”, defines the Icarus
Database Relations and the different attributes under each.
To create a user database:
1 On the File menu, click Create User Database.
Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.

If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation, the Create
User Database dialog box appears with only one Export Option: Create
New Workbook. The lower part of the dialog box provides fields for selecting
a path and filename.
However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options also include
Overwrite Existing Workbook. This option is marked by default, so the
lower part of the dialog box is not visible until you mark the Create New
Workbook checkbox.
2 Select a folder, enter a database name, and then click OK.
Reporter creates the .mdb file.
To review and work with the database:
 Start Microsoft Access and open the .mdb file.
Splitting Very Large CCP Reports
Because very large Capital Cost Project (CCP) Reports (greater than 100mb)
can cause problems, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator splits CCP Reports greater
than 100 MB by section and content. The entire data file still loads initially,
but navigating through the results will be done via section selected
You select the section you want to view in left side content pane (for
example, Design Data Sheets).

Only results for the selected section appear (which helps improve speed of
the application).
Notes:
 You cannot move/print above or below that section in the main
window.
 Searching capabilities only apply to section selected.
 Projects with CCP Reports less than the 100 MB are not split.
You can specify the split file size when using the splitting workflow.
To specify the Split File Size:
1 On the Report Editor menu bar, click Options | Preferences.
2 On the Preferences dialog box, click the Document tab.
The Document tab appears.
3 On the Document tab, in the Documents group, specify the Split File
Size.
Reviewing Investment Analysis
Note: Investment Analysis is only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if
you are licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer) or Analyzer and you select at startup to use one of them in the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
automatically displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main
Window after you run a project evaluation. You can set Preferences so that

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator does not automatically display the spreadsheets,
in which case you would have to select to view them as described below.
Viewing Investment Analysis
To view the Investment Analysis:
–or –
 Click Investment Analysis View on the View menu.
2 Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the four
spreadsheets.
Equipment Summary
The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project components
used in the analysis.
For each component, the summary contains the following information:
Area Name The name of the operational unit
area.
Component Name The name of the project
component.
Component Type The type symbol for the
component.
Total Direct Cost The total direct material and labor
costs associated with the project
component (including installation

bulks), in the project currency.
Project Summary
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for the capital
costs (equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This worksheet also includes
operating unit costs (labor wage rates and utility unit costs), utility flow/use
rates (steam/water flow rates, and so on) and operating and maintenance
costs.
Project Summary Input Data
The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is user-
entered, except where noted:
Project Information
Project Name Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name
Project
Description
Brief description of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
project, from Project Properties
Analysis Date
and Time
The date and time this analysis was performed
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from which
process data was imported
Simulator
Version
The version of the process simulator
Simulator Report
File
The name of the process simulator report file
Simulator Report
Date
Date and time of the process simulator report file
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for the

Analysis Type evaluation
Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator
Version
Version number for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
system
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator project
Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)
Scenario
Description
Description of the current scenario, from Project
Title in General Project Data
Capital Cost Evaluation Basis
Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis
Country Country basis for the capital costs/schedule
analysis
Units of Measure Units of Measure for analysis
Currency (Cost)
Symbol
System currency symbol which depends on the
selected country basis
Currency
Conversion Rate
Conversion factor between user-selected
currency to the currency used by the system
internally for the selected Country basis. For
example, if the US country basis is selected, the
internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US
Dollars. However, if a currency conversion rate
of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be
multiplied by 1.5 and then reported
System Cost Base
Date
The capital costs basis date of the system. The
Adjusted Total Project Cost represents the
calculated capital cost of the project (calculated
at this base date) escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Type Project type identified in the standard basis
specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator
Plant Location Location of the plant
Time Difference
Between System
Cost Base Date
and Start Date for
Engineering
Number of days between the date of the
system’s Cost Base data (for example, first
quarter, 2000) and the project’s start date for
basic engineering.
User Currency
Name
User assigned name for the currency
User Currency
Description
User assigned description of the currency
User Currency
Symbol
User assigned symbol of the currency. This is
the symbol used for reporting the cost results in
the reports.
Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more detail under
Investment Parameter specifications (page XX216XX).
Time Period

Period Description Duration of time
Operating Hours per
Period
Number of hours in specified period
Number of Weeks per
Period
Number of weeks in specified period
Number of Periods for
Analysis
Set to 20 periods for investment analysis
Schedule
Start Date for
Engineering
The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC Phase The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Length of Start-up
Period
Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
beyond the end of the EPC phase
Duration of
Construction Phase
The calculated construction duration in weeks
Completion Date for
Construction
The calendar date for the end of EPC
Capital Costs Parameter
Working Capital
Percentage
Percentage of total capital expense per period
required to operate the facility until the
revenue from product sales is sufficient to
cover costs.
Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Supplies Indicates the lump-sum cost of operating
supplies.
Laboratory Charges Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratory
charges.
User Entered
Operating Charges
(as percentage)
Indicates the user-entered value for total
operating charges.
Operating Charges
(Percent of
Operating Labor
Costs)
Includes operating supplies and laboratory
charges. If the user enters a lump-sum value
for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory
Charges”, the addition of the two values will
override the “User Entered Operating Charges”
Plant Overhead
(Percent of
Operating Labor
and Maintenance
Costs)
Consists of charges during production for
services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on
G and A Expenses
(Percent of Subtotal
Operating Costs)
General and administrative costs incurred
during production such as administrative
salaries/ expenses, R&D, product distribution
and sales costs.
General Investment Parameters
Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that must
be paid to the government.

Desired Rate of
Return
Indicates the desired (that is, user- entered)
return rate, in percent per period, for the
investment.
Economic Life of
Project
Indicates the length of time in terms of periods
over which capital costs will be depreciated.
Salvage Value
(Fraction of Initial
Capital Cost)
The expected value of an asset at the end of its
usable life for the company. The difference
between an asset’s cost and its salvage value is
the amount to be depreciated over the asset’s
usable life.
Depreciation
Method
There are four depreciation methods allowed in
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: Straight Line,
Sum of the Digits, Double Declining (Balance),
Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS). See
“Investment Parameters” in Chapter 3 for a
detailed definition of each depreciation method.
Escalation
Project Capital
Escalation
Rate at which project capital expenses may
increase expressed in percent per period. If the
addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
period and start-up period is greater than one
whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used
to escalate the capital expenses for periods
beyond the first period.
Products Escalation Rate at which the sales revenue from products
of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in
terms of percent per period.
Raw Material
Escalation
Rate at which the raw material costs of the
facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms
of percent per period.
Operating and
Maintenance Labor
Rate at which the operating and maintenance
costs of the facility are to be escalated
(increased) in terms of Escalation percent per
period. The operating labor costs include
operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the
anticipated utility price increase each period.
Project Summary Output Data
The following OUTPUT data is generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator :
Project Results Summary
Total Project
Capital Cost
The total capital cost investment needed for
the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs expenditure
will be spread out over the length of the EPC
period.
Total Raw Materials
Cost
The total raw material cost of the facility ex
pressed in terms of cost per period.
Total Products The total product sales of the facility expressed

Sales in terms of cost per period.
Total Operating
and Maintenance
Labor Cost
The operating labor (including operators/shift
and supervisors/shift) and maintenance labor
costs in terms of cost per period. The
maintenance cost includes maintenance labor
and supplies.
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in cost
per period.
Total Operating
Cost
The total of raw material, utility, operating
labor, maintenance, operating charges, plant
overhead and G and A expenses.
Operating Labor
Cost
Includes operators per shift and supervisors
per shift costs.
Maintenance Cost Maintenance cost of the equipment including
labor and materials.
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
charges.
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on
Subtotal Operating
Cost
Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating labor,
utilities, maintenance, operating charges, and
plant overhead.
G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurred
during production. This is calculated as a
percentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.
The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken
down into individual elements under Project Capital Summary:
Project Capital Summary
Purchased
Equipment
The total material cost of process equipment
and quoted equipment cost items. Material cost
is accounted for in the codes of account 100 -
299.
Equipment Setting The total construction labor cost for setting
equipment in place.
Piping
Civil
Steel
Instrumentation
Electrical
Insulation
Paint
The cost reported for each of these items
indicates the total material and construction
labor cost calculated for the category. The
above cost items may have originated from
two sources:
Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus
Reference).
User: The user can add project components
that create cost items in these categories. The
project components may be in the following
categories: Plant bulks, Site development and
Buildings.
Other This item is the total of the following costs:
design, engineering, and procurement costs;
material charges (freight and taxes); and

construction field indirect costs (fringe
benefits, burdens, consumables/small tools,
insurance, equipment rental, field services,
field office construction supervision, and plant
start-up).
Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This cost
item is normally zero in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator.
G and A
Overheads
General and administrative costs associated
with engineering, materials, and construction
work.
Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for engineering,
material, construction, any subcontracted
work.
Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount. This
cost item is normally zero in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
Contingencies The additional costs required to bring this
project to completion. In Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, this cost item is automatically
calculated based on the project type and
process complexity.
Total Project Cost The total project capital cost of the plant
calculated by the Icarus Capital Costs Engine
as of the “System Cost Base Date”.
Adjusted Total
Capital Cost
Indicates the Total Project Cost (described
above) adjusted to the Start of Basic
Engineering. The Total Project Cost is
escalated (using the Project Capital Escalation
Parameter) from the system Cost Base date to
the start date of basic engineering.
Raw Material Costs and Product Sales
Raw Materials Cost
per Hour
Total raw material usage cost per hour
specified in the Raw Material Specifications
file.
Total Raw Materials
Cost
Total cost of raw materials per period. This
number is generated by multiplying Raw
Products Sales per
Hour
Total produced product sales expressed in
cost per hour.
Total Products Sales Total product sales per period. This number is
generated by multiplying Products Sales per
Hour by Operating Hours per Period.
Main Product Name The main product of the plant is considered to
be the product which produces the largest
sales figure per period. This field contains the
description of the main product (assigned by
the user).
Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product.
Main Product Unit
Cost
The unit cost rate of the main product.
Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) of
Production Basis the main product (LB,
GALLONS, and so on).

Main Product Rate
per Period
The production rate of the main product per
period .
Main Product Sales The total sales figure of the main product per
period.
By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of the by-
products (that is,, products other than the
main product of the plant).
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs
Operating Labor
Operators per Shift The number of operators per shift per hour
necessary to operate the plant.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed in
cost per operator per shift.
Total Operating
Labor Cost
Total operating labor cost obtained by
multiplying number of operators per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Maintenance
Cost/8000 Hours The cost of maintaining the facility equipment
for 8000 hours of operation of the facility.
Total Maintenance
Cost
The total maintenance cost of the facility per
period.
Supervision
Supervisors per Shift The number of supervisors per shift per hour
necessary to oversee personnel who operate
the facility.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressed
in cost per supervisors per shift.
Total Supervision
Cost
Total supervising labor cost obtained by
multiplying number of supervisors per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Utilities Costs
The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potable
water, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process utilities
such as steam. The description of each utility includes:
Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms of
amount per hour.
Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per amount.
Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per period.

Cashflow
Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the Net Present Value (NPV), Internal
Rate of Return (IRR), Profitability Index (PI), payback period, and so on
The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by period. The
beginning part of the spreadsheet contains data/results carried over from the
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet.
Item Description
TW Number of Weeks per Period
T Number of Periods for Analysis
DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase
DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup
WORKP Working Capital Percentage
OPCHG Operating Charges
PLANTOVH Plant Overhead
CAPT Total Project Cost
RAWT Total Raw Material Cost
PRODT Total Product Sales
OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost
UTILT Total Utilities Cost
ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate
AF ROR Annuity Factor
TAXR Tax Rate

IF ROR Interest Factor
ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project
SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
DEPMETH Depreciation Method
DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id
ESCAP Project Capital Escalation
ESPROD Products Escalation
ESRAW Raw Material Escalation
ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
ESUT Utilities Escalation
START Start Period for Plant Startup
PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and Startup Phases). Reserved
for future use.
POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.
DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting: Reserved for
future use.
END End Period for Economic Life of Project.
GA G and A Expenses.
DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of Construction.
OP Total Operating Labor Cost.
MT Total Maintenance Cost.
Sales
A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted for all prior
phases (engineering, procurement, construction and startup phases) has
expired.
SP (Products
Sales)
The total products sales value per period
calculated in PROJSUM.ICS.
SPF
(Forecasted
Sales
Annuity
Factor)
Reserved for future use.
SF
(Forecasted
Sales)
Reserved for future use.
S (Total
Sales)
Indicates the amount received per period from
sold products. This number is either SP or SF.

Expenses
Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period
listed below.
CAP (Capital
Costs)
Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to
startup.
Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates
the total capital costs spent through the current
period. This is based on the Total Project Capital
Cost in PROJSUM.ICS.
Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount of
initial, non-variable costs associated with the
project. This number is based on the Total Project
Capital Cost found in PROJSUM.ICS.
Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital
expenditures through period n. For example, the
number in period 4 represents the total capital
expenditures beginning in period 1 and ending in
period 4.
Working: Indicates the amount required to
operate the facility before the revenue from
product sales is sufficient to cover costs. Working
Capital is a lump-sum amount which takes effect
during the start-up period. It is escalated at rate
equal to the Project Capital Escalation rate.
OP
(Operating
Costs)
Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on the
following items necessary to keep the facility
operating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost,
Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges,
Plant Overhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G
and A Costs. This number is the Total Operating
Cost imported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in
this field after capital expenditures cease.
(R)Revenue
Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital and
operating expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting
Capital Costs and Operating Costs from Sales.
DEP Indicates the amount by which the value of the capital cost decreases
each period. The Total Project Capital Cost is depreciated, via the chosen
depreciation method, over the useful Economic Life of the facility. The
Straight Line Method assumes that the item will depreciate by a constant
amount over its Economic life. When the Sum of the Years Method is used,
the depreciation expense decreases during each year of the project’s useful
life. When the Double Declining Balance Method is used, the project is
depreciated in geometric increments. The Accelerated Cost Recovery System
assumes that the project begins operating in the second half of the first year,
rather than in the beginning of the first year.

E Indicates the funds available after all expenses have been paid. This
number is obtained by subtracting the Depreciation and the Interest Expenses
from the Revenue.
TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This number is obtained by
multiplying the tax rate by Earnings Before Taxes.
NE Indicates the funds available after taxes have been paid. This number
is obtained by subtracting the Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.
TED Indicates total cash available from project. This number is computed
by adding the Depreciation Expense to the Net Earnings. Since the
depreciation expense is a non-cash expense (no cash actually leaves the
facility in order to pay the depreciation expense) adding the depreciation to
the net earnings gives the total cash flow obtained from the project. Inclusion
of the Depreciation Expenses reduces the amount of taxable income.
TEX Specifies the total expenses of the project including capital, operating,
and any interest expense.
FVI Sums the Sales received through period n and indicates what the Sales
would be if they had been received in the current period. For example, the
value in period 4 is what the sales in periods 1-4 would have been if all of
these funds had been received in period 4.
PVI Indicates the current worth of all the cash received through period n.
For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the sales
generated in periods 1 through 4 would be if those sales were received in the
first period. This number is obtained by summing all of sales from prior time
periods adding this amount to sales in the current time period. Using the
specified interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time
period.
PVOS If the user enters a number for PODE, this number indicates the
current worth of all of the cash paid through period n.
PVOP Indicates the current worth of all of the cash paid through period n.
For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the expenses
paid in periods 1 through 4 would be if those expenses were paid in the first
period. This number is obtained by summing all of the outflows (Capital
Costs, Operating Costs, Interest Expense) from prior time periods and adding
this amount to the outflows in the current period. Using the specified interest
rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period .
PVO Represents PVOS or PVOP depending on whether or not you entered a
desired payout period. If you entered a desired payout period, the basis for
the cash outflow calculation is the Forecasted Sales. Otherwise, the basis is
Product Sales.
PV Indicates the present worth of the Total Earnings received in the
current period. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that
the Total Earnings generated in period 4 discounted back to the first time
period.
Final results are shown below:

NPV Indicates the current worth of all the Net Earnings received through
period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the
Net Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if those earnings were received
in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the Net
Earnings from prior time periods and adding this amount to the Net Earnings
in the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then
discounted back to the first time period. The sign of this value determines the
analysis result. If, in a certain period, the sign of the net present value is
negative, then the proposed investment appears not to be profitable, thus far.
For example, if the sign of the net preset value is negative in period 3, then
the project does not appear to be profitable during periods 1, 2, and 3.
However, if the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable,
from period 3 onward. If the net present value equals zero, then the project
does not incur any losses or gains (break-even point).
IRR Is the rate at which the present value of all cash flows is zero. It is
also known as the Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return. This value is
calculated at the “End Period for Economic Life of Project” (that is,, “Economic
Life of Project” and considering the length of EPC and Startup Period). At the
“End Period for Economic Life of Project”, it is assumed the salvage value of
the plant and the working capital are recouped. IRR is the after-tax interest
rate at which the organization can borrow funds and break even at the end of
the project life.
MIRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The internal rate of return is
the interest rate which equates the present value of a project’s expected cash
inflows to the present value of the project’s expected costs (or outflows). The
internal rate of return for each period is calculated by dividing the Present
Value of Cumulative Inflows by the Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and
raising this to a power and multiplied by 100. Two criteria are critical in
evaluating the internal rate of return. First, if the sign of the rate of return is
negative, the project appears not to be profitable. If the sign is positive, then
the project appears to be profitable. If the rate of return equals zero then the
project incurs no losses or gains (break-even point). In addition, if the rate of
return is greater than the rate which could be obtained from other
opportunities (that is,, investing in a bank), then the project probably should
be undertaken.
NRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The net rate of return for each
period is calculated by dividing the Net Present Value by the Present Value of
Cumulative Outflows and then multiplying the result by 100.
PO Represents the expected number of years required to recover the
original investment in the project. This row will indicate the length of time
that the facility needs to operate in order to recover the initial capital
investment (total capital cost plus working capital). If a number is entered for
the Desired Payout Period, the spreadsheet will determine the amount of
Sales necessary to meet this desired payout.
ARR Measures a project’s contribution to the firm’s net income. This
number is the ratio of the project’s Average Annual Expected Net Income to
its Average Investment. For example, the Average Annual Expected Net
Income for the fourth period is determined by summing net earnings from
periods 1 through 4 and divided by 4. The Average Investment is determined
by finding the Salvage Value, and adding this number to the Total Project

Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the accounting rate of return is greater
than one, then this is an indication that the project might be a profitable
undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the project does not appear to be
profitable. If this number equals zero then the project incurs no losses or
gains (break-even point).
PI The profitability index shows the relative profitability of any project; it
shows the present value of the benefits relative to the present value of the
costs. For each period, this number is computed by dividing the Present Value
of the Cumulative Cash Inflows by the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash
Outflows. If the profitability index is greater than one, then the project
appears to be profitable. If this index is less than one, then the project
appears not to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project
incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).
Analysis
Analysis results are shown by period. “( - )” indicates the project in the
current period appears unprofitable, while “0” indicates break-even status.
Depreciation Calculations
This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.
Executive Summary
Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary intended to
be reviewed by executives and other business decision makers.
It contains the following information:
PROJECT NAME Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project

name
CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product
PLANT LOCATION Location of plant
BRIEF
DESCRIPTION
Brief description of project, from
Project Properties
SCHEDULE
Start Date for
Engineering
The beginning date for EPC
(engineering, procurement, and
construction)
Duration of EPC
Phase
The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Completion Date
for Construction
The calendar date for the end of EPC
Length of Start-
up Period
Number of weeks scheduled for start-
up beyond the end of the EPC phase
INVESTMENT
Currency
Conversion
Conversion factor between user-
selected currency to the currency used
by the system internally for the
selected Country basis. For example, if
the US country basis is selected, the
internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported
in US Dollars. However, if a currency
conversion rate of 1.5 is specified, all
internal values will be multiplied by 1.5
and then reported
Total Project
Capital
The total capital cost investment
needed for the project. If the calculated
EPC period is more than a year, the
capital costs expenditure will be spread
out over the length of the EPC period
Total Operating
Cost
The total of raw material, utility,
operating labor, maintenance,
operating charges, plant overhead and
G and A expenses
Total Raw
Materials Cost
The total raw material cost of the
facility expressed in terms of cost per
year
Total Utilities
Cost
The total utilities usage cost expressed
in terms of cost per year
Total Product
Sales
The total product sales of the facility
expressed in terms of cost per year
Desired Rate of
Return
Desired rate of return expressed in
terms of percent per year.

PROJECT INFORMATION
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from
which process data was imported
Version The version of the process simulator
Report File The file name of the process simulator
report file
Report Date Date and time of the process simulator
report file
Economic
Analysis Type
The name of the Icarus system used for
the evaluation
Version Version number of the Icarus system.
System Cost Base
Date
The capital costs basis date of the
system. The Adjusted Total Project Cost
represents the calculated capital cost of
the project (calculated at this base
date) escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator project
Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.
Country basis Country basis for the capital
costs/schedule analysis
Project Type Project type identified in General Specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the
process evaluator
Using the Reporting Assistant
The Reporting Assistant feature lets you create your own customized report
spreadsheets, combining information from all other Icarus generated
spreadsheets.
To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template:
1 On the Tools menu, click Options and then Reporting Assistant.

The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.
2 On the Report File tab view, click New.
3 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file that will contain
your customized spreadsheet. For example, type “Custom” as shown
below.
4 Click Save.
5 Switch to the Report Templates tab view.

6 In the Template Files section, click New.
7 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file (for
example, “summary”) and click Save.
Note: This example creates a reporting template for future use called
Summary.tra.
8 In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the Column Label
field, enter a label (for example, “Project Name”) for the first column on
your custom report spreadsheet. The Display Column box should
automatically display “1”.
9 The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in the above
column. Select a file name in the Source box, then enter the column and
row of the source data.
For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C, Row 8 of
Project.ics has been specified to appear in the customized report
spreadsheet’s Project Name column.

10 Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries. You can use
a variety of sources. For example, adding the following entries will result
in a report template that uses all three of the previously discussed .ics
files as sources.
Column Label
Display
Column Source
Source
Column Source Row
Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8
Start Date for
Engineering
2 projsum.ics C 61
Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112
Purchased Equipment
Cost
4 projsum.ics C 172
Total Project Cost 5 cashflow.ics C 14
Total Maintenance
Cost
6 cashflow.ics C 40
Completion Date for
Construction
7 execsum.ics B 17
11 When all the template entries are added, return to the Report File tab
view. To the right of the Template File field, click Browse.
12 Select the newly created template file (for example, Summary.tra) and
click Open.
13 Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.
Generating the Custom Report
To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant:
1 Run a project evaluation.
2 On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting Assistant.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates the report based upon the template
created in the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered under List of

Entries on the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears as columns
in the spreadsheet.
Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest data is
entered on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can compare results.
Item Evaluation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you run an evaluation on a single
component and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed can
be selected in Preferences (see page XX54XX).
To run an item evaluation and display the Item Report:
1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view,
and then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator runs the item evaluation.
2 Right-click the component; then click Item Report on the pop-up menu.
You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component Specifications
form to run the item evaluation and display the Item Report.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Item Report in the Main Window.

Note: If the evaluation has already been run, you only have to select Item
Report.
You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the List view
(area level), select the desired components, right-click on one of the
components, and click Item Report on the pop-up window. The resulting
Item Report lists individually the summary data (cost or sizing) for each
selected component.
Sample Item Report
The following Item Report is for a floating head shell and tube heat exchanger
with “Example” as its item description:

Sample Item Report (continued)

11 Introducing IPS 629
11 Introducing IPS
ICARUS Project Scheduler (IPS) is the intelligent scheduling interface between
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Primavera Enterprise Project Manager
(P3E). IPS creates complete P3E project networks, including all of the
activities, resources, and durations that represent the engineering and
construction work contained in your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
estimate.
IPS provides three types of networks:
 AREA
 ITEM
 FULL
AREA - Summary activity for all similar components per area
IPS generates a concise, easy-to-manipulate, summary bar chart schedule
with a detailed overview of the engineering, procurement and a summary
overview of construction phases of the project.
ITEM - One summary activity per major code of accounts (COA) for each
component
IPS generates a concise, easy-to-manipulate, summary bar chart schedule
similar to AREA type except in the construction phase it will generate one
summary activity per major COA for each component in an area.
FULL - Detailed list of activities for each component
IPS generates a detailed overview of engineering, procurement, and detailed
installation tasks in each bulk account (piping, steel, civil etc.) for each
project component.
Depending on your need, IPS can present you with a P3E project showing
summary tasks to more detailed construction installation tasks. The network
developed from IPS contains many chains of activities and adapts them
dynamically to the scope of your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project.
Relationships are re-evaluated based on actual tasks to be performed as
identified in the estimate. You can also make any desired modifications to
condense or delete activities, add or delete relationships to activities, and/or
change durations for activities using options in the IPS Project Schedule
Settings.
IPS jump-starts your effort by providing your planning staff with the
opportunity to benefit from engineering knowledge and project scope data

630 11 Introducing IPS
previously validated by the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimate. Additional
benefits can be derived by configuring the estimators’ data to include the
planner’s recommendations for duration adjustments, delivery times, and
parallel work areas.

12 Getting Started With IPS 631
12 Getting Started With IPS
Installing Icarus Project
Scheduler (IPS)
The Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) product requires successful installation of
a number of Primavera products in order to function. Although the Primavera
documentation provides all the necessary information for installation, the
information is distributed over various unrelated documents, and, often, not
readily available. A brief summary is presented here to summarize the
essential requirements for the Aspen IPS product to function. This is not
intended to replace the Primavera documentation, and the sole purpose of
providing this summary information is to provide Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator/IPS users with a checklist of installation requirements. For further
details, consult the appropriate Primavera documentation.
Installation Steps and Sequence
Primavera Project Management (P3E) stores scheduling data into the SQL
Server/Oracle database (default database name is PMDB).
A successful installation of P3E and Integration API would require the
following steps in order:
1. Install database and load application data
The latest version of Primavera Project Management (version 6.0 and
above) software includes SQL Server Express 2005. This can be installed
by running setup.exe in the SQLSERVER directory. It can also be
installed by selecting Primavera-Standalone option when prompted
during installation step (see step 2 below). Selecting this option also
installs client applications, an empty database and sample data (optional).
If you already have the database server installed, you can use the P3E
database wizard for creating a new database structure and loading the
application data into the database. You can run the Database wizard to
create a new database from a client computer that has the Microsoft SQL
Server client or Oracle installed or Primavera Project Manager client
application (version 4.0 and above), or you can run the wizard from the
server itself. The Database wizard creates any necessary file structures
and users for you. The project manager database (PMDB) stores the
project manager data used by Primavera Enterprise. Installation of the
database is required.

632 12 Getting Started With IPS
This wizard can be run by executing dbsetup.bat file (located in the
installdatabase directory) in Primavera Project Management Application
Version 6.0 and above.
Use ConfigAsst.exe (located in the installdatabase directory) to invoke
the database wizard for version prior to Primavera Project Management
Application Version 6.

2. Install the Primavera Project Manager Enterprise Client
Application and configure database
After installing the Primavera database in step 1, install the Primavera
Project Manager Enterprise Client application, by running the Setup wizard.
The application requires approximately 23 MB of disk space. Administrator
rights are required to install the Primavera client application.
Selecting the Custom option when prompted lets you install Project
Management and Job service.
On the Configure SQL Server Connection dialog box or the Configure
Oracle Connection dialog box, enter the database connection settings. If
you are configuring Microsoft SQL Server or SQL Server Express, type the
database host name and database name. The database name was
specified when the database was created; for example, PMDB. The host
name is the name of the computer or IP address where Microsoft SQL
Server is installed. If you are configuring Oracle, type the Oracle database
name.
The screenshot below shows an example for configuring database
connection for SQL Server.
Where,
Host Name: P3EPRIMAVERA
P3E: System name where SQL Server is running
PRIMAVERA: SQL Server instance name.

Database name: PMDB$PRIMAVERA
PMDB: Name of the database created during step 1 on PRIMAVERA SQL
Server.
3. Install the Primavera Job Service
If the Primavera Job Service component is not installed in step 2, install it
by running the setup wizard again. The Primavera Job Service lets you
configure scheduling, summarizing, exporting, and applying actual
operations to run in the background. The Primavera Job Service runs as a
Windows NT/2000 service and can support an unlimited number of jobs,
each with its own schedule of execution. Jobs are defined in Project
Manager and stored in the enterprise’s project manager database. If you
are working with more than one project manager database, you can run
jobs for all of the databases from one Windows NT/2000 server. If you do
not have a Windows NT or 2000 service, you will not have the project
scheduled after loading from the IPS software. Then, you must manually
use the Tools | Options | Preferences | Schedule menu in the Project
Manager application.
4. Configure Primavera Project Management Application
Have the Primavera administrator configure the licenses to allow access to
both the Primavera Project manager and the integration API. The
Primavera enterprise user licensing can be modified using the Admin |
Users menu item in Primavera Project Management application.
Corresponding licenses should also be available.
Follow the steps below to configure Primavera Project Management to use
Primavera Integration API:
1. Open and login to Primavera Project Management application.
2. Click the Admin | Users top level menu item
3. Select Integration API.

5. Know your SQL Server database port
The SQL Server database host port is required while configuring Primavera
Integration API.
To identify Database Host Port perform following steps
1. Open and login to Primavera Project Management application.
2. Click Help | About Primavera.
3. The System tab in the About Primavera dialog displays username,
database name, SQL Server name, SQL Server Database Host Port.
For example, 1153 is the Database Host port as shown below

6 Install the Java Runtime Environment or Java Development Kit
A copy of JRE (Java Runtime Environment) is included in the
installdatabase directory. JRE or JDK (Java Development Kit) can also be
downloaded from the Sun Microsystems Web site. If you are using the
Java SDK, ensure that it is installed before running the Integration API
setup. It is essential that the JDK be installed in a directory that does not
have spaces in its name. Presumably this limitation will be removed
shortly.
During installation of Java Integration API, a suitable Java Virtual Machine
(JVM) needs to be specified by selecting its java.exe file from the java
installation (bin) directory.
7 Install the Integration API
Go to the root folder of the Integration API Installation CD-ROM; double
click setup.exe. Specify the installation mode to be Local Mode, using it
without the Java RMI. Specify the database type to be the same as what
you installed earlier. Specify the database connection parameters. The
first time you install the Integration API, choose Create a new
configuration. This is necessary to support the addition of new
configuration settings for the release.
Use the database configuration wizard to configure the Integration API
license.

Where,
Default User Name: pubuser
Default Password: pubuser
Database Name: Same as in step 2 above
Database Host Address: Same as in step 2 above
Database Host Address: From step 5 above.
8 Configure User, Password and API location in the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator/IPS Application.
After successful installation of the P3E enterprise client and the
Integration API, it is necessary to provide information regarding the P3E
user name, password, and the location of installation of the Integration
API in the client machine (since IPS only supports local mode installation
of the API). All three data may be added to the IPS through the use of
Tools | Options | Preferences | Schedule menu, or changed inside a
project by adding to the Primavera Project information tab in the Project
basis tab of the IPS and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator products.

System Requirements for the Integration
API
The Primavera Integration API has the following system requirements for
local mode installation:
 Java Runtime Environment
JRE 1.4 or higher (developers will require Java SDK 1.4 or higher,
which includes the JRE)
You can download the JRE or Java SDK from the Sun Microsystems
Web site. If you are using the Java SDK, ensure that it is installed
before running the Integration API setup. Install it in a directory
without blanks in the names.
 Operating Systems
The Primavera Integration API is fully supported on Windows operating
systems.
 Project Manager Database
Primavera version 4.0 or higher, and a Project Manager database
(Oracle, and SQL Server are supported) are required. Either a SQL
Server or Oracle client must be installed on the machine or, alternately
you can install the database from the server machine.
Primavera Enterprise Client and Server
Requirements
 Supported Platforms for Primavera Enterprise
Client Applications
o Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition
o Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a recommended)
o Microsoft Windows 2000, (SP1, SP2)
o Microsoft Windows XP
o Microsoft Windows Vista, 7.0 (32-bit)
 Minimum Client Configurations
For clients running Project Manager:
o 128 MB of RAM, 256 MB free recommended
o 40 MB of hard-disk space (per application)
o Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1
o Netscape Communicator 4.75
o TCP/IP network protocol
Starting Icarus Project
Scheduler
After completing the installation, you can start IPS.

Creating a Primavera Schedule
For both IPS and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator/IPS, the primary step towards
scheduling a project involves clicking the Run | Project Scheduler button as
shown below.
Upon completion of loading the Aspen scheduling engine results into the
Primavera database, the P3E (or P3E/C for Construction) interface is launched
automatically. You must enter the password as shown in the next figure.

Upon entering the password, the primavera project manager screen “Select
Project Portfolio” appears. Select the “Open Existing Project” button and
choose the appropriate project from the P3E project list. (IPS creates P3E
projects with titles specified in the Project Basis View using the IPS project
schedule settings ->Schedule Appearance Adjustments -> Title form). This
brings up the Project Manager “Home” screen where the user may select the
activities button in the left hand pane to arrive at a schedule layout as shown
in the subsequent page.
Primavera Addendum
In EEV8.0 we have added support for Primavera P6 V8.2. Although the
Primavera documentation provides all the necessary information for
installation, the information is distributed over various unrelated documents,
and, often, not readily available. A brief summary is presented here to
summarize the essential requirements. This is not intended to replace
Primavera documentation, and the sole purpose of providing this summary
information is to provide Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator users with a checklist of installation requirements. For further
details, consult the appropriate Primavera documentation.

Prerequisites for Primavera P6 V8.2
The Primavera P6V8.2 has the following requirements for installation:
 Java SDK
JDK 1.6.x: This can be downloaded from Oracle’s website.
 SQL Server 2005/2008 Express or any other edition.
Installation Steps and Sequence
A successful installation of P6 and Integration API would require the following
steps in order
1 Install Project Management Database (PMDB)
Primavera Project Management (P6) stores scheduling data into SQL
Server database. The default name of the database is PMDB. You need to
install this database using database setup utility which comes with Oracle
Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management (EPPM).
Below are the steps to install this database
1 A new PMDB database can be created by using “Primavera Database
Setup Wizard”. This wizard can be run by executing dbsetup.bat file
(located in the p6suitedatabase directory of root directory of P6
Enterprise Project Portfolio installation DVD)
2 Select “Install a new database” from “Database Options”. Select
“Microsoft SQL Server” as “Server Type”
3 Provide database Connection Information (DBA user name, DBA
password, Database host address and Database host Port)

Where:
PETEST: The host name of the computer where Microsoft SQL Server
is running.
PRIMAVERA: Name of the SQL Server Instance.
4 Configuring Microsoft SQL Server
Default database name is PMDB.

5 Create SQL Server Users (privuser, pubuser and pxrptuser)
6 In the “Configuration Options” dialog set Administrator
usernamepassword as adminadmin and Install the database.

2 Installing Primavera P6 Professional for EPPM R8.2
1 Run setup.exe from the root directory of installation DVD and choose
Typical Installation. Choosing the Typical installation option is required
to install or upgrade only the P6 Professional application, for use with
the EPPM database installed.
Please note that do not install Professional database as this is not
compatible with Integration API.
2 Select Microsoft DQL Server as a s P6 Professional driver type in
Database Configuration Utility dialog box.
3 On the Configure SQL Server Connection dialog box enter the database
connection settings. Type the SQL Server host name and name of the
PMDB database created above.

The screenshot below shows an example for configuring database
connection for SQL Server.
4 Enter Public Login Information: Enter SQL Server username and
password created above.

3 Installing P6 Integration API R8.2
1 Run setup.exe from the root directory of Integration API installation
DVD. Specify the installation mode to be Local Mode Packages only.
2 Select P6 Integration API root name and browse the path where you
want to install the product. Note that the user should have both read &
write access to this path. Specify the database connection parameters.
The first time you install the Integration API, choose Create a new
Configuration. This is necessary to support the addition of new
configuration settings for the release.
3 Use the database configuration wizard to configure the Integration API

Navigating the Schedule in P3E
It is possible to view the predecessors, successors, resources, and activity
codes under the activity layout using the Show/Hide Bottom Layout icon
on the P3E activity pane. A number of example layouts are provided in the
AspenTech Economic Evaluation V8.0ProgramSchedule folder;
these can be imported by pressing the Layout dropdown button in the
activities screen. These layouts are named Aspen Icarus ---.plf. In a similar
manner, a number of standard reports have been created and placed in the
AspenTechEconomic Evaluation V8.0ProgramReports directory.
These reports (.ERP files) may be imported into P3E using the Tools |
Reports | Reports menu function on the P3E activities screen. Once the P3E
Reports screen appears, right click on the Report Name button to locate and
import the desired report. These reports can be run using the P3E database.
Developing Schedule Basis Libraries
Development of the Icarus Project Scheduler settings input is not a trivial
task. To facilitate reuse of prepared input models, you can use the library
option. Outside a project, it is possible to create a “Project Scheduler” library.
As shown below, use the Library tab to create different prepared input
models.
Selecting a Project Scheduler Library brings up the IPS input tree structure,
which can be edited with the input forms described earlier. Right-clicking the
Default file allows editing and/or duplication into user customized library
files.

Selecting a Schedule Basis inside a Project
After an IPS basis is created, it can be used inside a project to load company
specific data. Inside a project, right-clicking the IPS project schedule settings
brings up a list of IPS basis files that have been created. Selecting the
appropriate basis file will lead to the reuse of previously generated IPS input
data. Use of a standardized IPS basis, which can be company-specific, leads
to rapid schedule generation.

13 IPS Project Schedule Settings 651
13 IPS Project Schedule
Settings
IPS Project Schedule Settings
Note: IPS Project Schedule Settings are only included in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS). You
need to create an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project with Project Execution
Schedule Settings and Evaluate the project in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
before you can open the project in the IPS user interface.
If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) and selected
to use IPS in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment at startup or start
the IPS product separately, the IPS Project Schedule Settings folder is
included in the Project Explorer’s Basis view.
The Project Schedule Settings discussed in this section let you make
adjustments to the Primavera Enterprise schedules produced by Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.

652 13 IPS Project Schedule Settings
Changes made to the IPS Project Schedule Settings will be reflected in the
scheduling reports generated for display in Primavera. The following are
descriptions of the settings.
Schedule Appearance Adjustments
Title
To enter a project schedule title to replace the system-generated
title:
1 Double-click Title (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up menu).
2 Enter a title, up to 60 characters.
3 Click Apply.
Note: Regardless of the IPS Project/Scenario Name, any title entries made
here will become, by default, the P3E project name.

Description Modification - Engineering
To modify an engineering activity description:
1 Double-click Engineering (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu).
one blank column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to add a
new column in which to enter a modification.
Activity Number.
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Activity Numbers are listed in Appendix A have 10
characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter
“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two
preset fields) must contain numbers.
engineering phase:

characters are “00”. The engineering contract number is determined
based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital
Costs in the Project Basis. It must be a number between 01 and 98. If
all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks
(**).
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
 Sequence in account group number
Note: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the
Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C.
tag.
the Engg. activity description field (up to 32 characters).

7 Click Apply/Ok when done to commit the changes. Click Cancel to close
the form without committing the changes.
Description Modification – Construction
To modify a construction activity description:
1 Double-click Construction (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu).
one blank item column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to
add a new item column in which to enter a modification.
Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER.
Construction Activity Numbers are listed in Appendix B have 12 characters. If
you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in
some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers.
 Area number
The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the Area
number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as substations,
control panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91. If
activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
 Identification number
number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant bulks.
For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation
reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the
System default reference number of 00. If all reference numbers are to be
selected, enter three asterisks (***).

 Equipment type
Appendix D for Equipment Code definitions. All other activities have a
fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as
listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table in Appendix B. Enter
two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are to be selected.
See page Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.
listed in Appendix B. If all account group numbers are to be selected,
enter an asterisk (*).
The construction activities are listed in Appendix B, by the last three
characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form
the account group number and account code.
 Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth digits of the Activity Code for the activities to
be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character,
which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to
be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
 Contractor number
tag.
the Constr. activity description field (up to 32 characters).
Schedule Adjustments by Duration
The activity duration and construction crew size are interrelated, such that an
adjustment to the duration will cause an inversely proportional adjustment to
the activity crew size, and vice versa. You can specify a duration adjustment,
a maximum crew size, a minimum crew size, or all three. If a conflict occurs,
the crew size adjustment will override the duration adjustment.

If not adjusted, durations are calculated for each activity based on the type of
activity and associated direct construction man-hours.
Crew Size
You can adjust the system activity durations by entering minimum/maximum
crew sizes for various construction activities within each account group.
To adjust crew size:
1 Double-click on Crew Size (or Right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu).
2 Specify minimum and maximum crew sizes for each construction crew
type.
Crafts
The Craft Adjustments form lets you modify the system-defined crafts. The
craft code and craft description may be completely replaced by a user-defined
code and description.
In addition, the maximum craft pool sizes may be modified as required.
Modifying the craft pool sizes will affect the activity durations and the overall
job durations.

To adjust a craft:
1 Double-click on Crafts (or right-click; then click Edit on the pop-up
menu).
2 Select the craft to be adjusted by entering the System craft code. See
Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for lists of craft codes by Country Base.
3 Enter a numeric (01-99) User craft code to substitute for the preceding
System craft code.
Note: If you specify a craft code already in use (that is,, a system craft code
or a previously added user craft code), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will
combine all pool sizes and resource requirements for the specified craft code
and the existing code.
4 Enter a description for the craft in the User craft description field, up to
20 characters.
5 Enter the number of men in the user craft pool or enter an adjustment
relative to the system craft pool size. The system craft pool size is
calculated based on the system craft man-hours and schedule duration.
6 Enter a 4-character user craft symbol. If nothing is entered, the system
craft symbol is used.
7 To enter another adjustment, click Add. This adds another column where
you can repeat the process.
Durations
The engineering, construction, and procurement duration forms can be used
to adjust durations by percentage.
Engineering
 Engineering Duration Adjustments
You may enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the
system for Basic Engineering, Detail Engineering, and/or Procurement.

 Client Review Period (Future Implementation)
You can use the Basic engineering review period field to set the duration
of Activity 0000003013, “CLIENT APPROVAL-ESTIM&SCHED”. Since all Detail
Engineering activities are preceded, directly or indirectly, by this activity, you
may impose a delay of any duration on the continuation of engineering
activity. This effectively breaks up the work flow to simulate, for example,
budget approval delay.
Construction
You may enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the
system for nine different construction activities. Any change in activity
duration will cause a corresponding change in activity resource (crew).
Procurement
For each equipment group, you can enter the number of weeks needed to
fabricate and ship the equipment to the site after vendor data approval.

If you make no adjustment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the following
durations:
Equipment Group Duration
Vessels 24 weeks
Towers 36 weeks
Storage Tanks 32 weeks
Pumps 22 weeks
Compressors 50 weeks
Turbines 50 weeks
Heat Exchangers 32 weeks
Boilers 55 weeks
Furnaces 40 weeks
Air Coolers 28 weeks
Package Refrigeration 44 weeks
Generators 26 weeks
Air Dryers 24 weeks
Conveyors 28 weeks
Mills 45 weeks
Fans 16 weeks
Elevators 26 weeks
Motors 16 weeks
Dust Collectors 30 weeks
Filters 16 weeks
Centrifuges 40 weeks

Mixers 16 weeks
Cooling Towers 32 weeks
Miscellaneous Equipment 26 weeks
Package Items 36 weeks
Packings and Linings 20 weeks
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic
Logic Modification
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides sequencing logic, varying with the
activities present, for all engineering and construction activities, except the
following:
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted for system-designed
activities, such as project site development.
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted because the activity is
user-specified.
 Where a logical chain of activities has been substantially broken by
deletion of activities.
The Logic Modification forms provide the means to either add relationships
between successor and predecessor activities not provided by the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator logic or to modify the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
logic by adding and deleting relationships. Separate forms are provided for
engineering and construction sections of the network. When adding
relationships, a particular relationship type may be specified. However, when
deleting relationships, all relationships between the specified activities are
For engineering activities, only engineering predecessors are allowed. For
construction activities, engineering and construction predecessors are
allowed.
To add or delete an engineering relationship:
1 Double-click Engineering (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu) to display the Logic Modification form for engineering.

3 Select a successor activity, or group of activities, for which logic
modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Activity Number.
SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A,
have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter
“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two
preset fields) must contain numbers.
See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers
o Engineering phase
engineering phase:

o Engineering contractor number
engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities,
these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is
determined based on your specifications for contractors under
Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (refer to the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator User Guide for further information). It must
be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor
numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
Accounts.
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of
the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26).
The eighth character of the Activity Number is fixed and the same for all
activities. It is always “0”.
The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within
the major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers
within a sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks
(**).
Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the
4 Select an activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as
predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. Use the fields under

PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY to select an activity the same way you
selected a successor activity.
7 Click Apply.
8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat the
process.
To add or delete a construction relationship:
Note: Enter either an engineering or a construction predecessor, not both.
1 Right-click Construction; then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

3 Select a successor construction activity, or group of activities, for which
logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of
the Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR
ACTIVITY. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B,
 Area number
asterisks (**).

 Identification number
 Equipment type
 Account group number
 Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth characters of the Activity Code for the
 Contractor number
4 You can select either an engineering or a construction activity, or group of
activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified
Successor. This is done by entering all or part of an engineering or
construction Activity Number.
To specify an engineering activity, enter all or part of an engineering
Activity Number in the fields under PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY.
Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A, have 10
characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter
“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the
two preset fields) must contain numbers.
 Preset engineering field 1
See Appendixes A and B for lists of Engineering and Construction Activity
Numbers.
 Engineering phase
engineering phase:
See Appendix D for the
Equipment Code
definitions.
The construction
activities are listed in
Appendix B by the last
three characters of the
Activity Number. These
last three characters form
the account group
number and account
code.

 Engineering contractor number
in the Project Basis (see page 151). It must be a number between 01 and
asterisks (**).
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the
Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C
 Sequence in account group number
Note: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
are defined in Appendix C.
To specify a construction predecessor activity or group of activities, enter
all or part of a construction Activity Number it in the fields provided under
PREDECESSOR – CONSTR. ACTIVITY, the same way you specified a
successor construction activity.

7 Click Apply.
Activity Modification
The Activity Modification forms for engineering and construction allow you
to modify the coding of activities. Activities may be combined within a
common activity number or deleted entirely.
Activities can be combined by changing an activity number to another existing
number. Specify all or part of an existing activity number, then all or part of
the other activity number that will replace it. Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)
will sort the activities into numerical order, merging all identically numbered
activities, including the craft resources.
Activities can be deleted by selecting an activity and then entering asterisks
instead of the number of a modified activity.
To modify engineering activities:
1 Right-click Engineering; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 Select a source activity, by specifying all or part of the Engineering
Activity Number.
The parts of the Engineering Activity Number are broken up into the fields
under SOURCE ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are
listed in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of
activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of
the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
Note: See Appendix A for a list of Engineering Activity Numbers
 Engineering phase
engineering phase:
 Engineering contractor number
characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is
determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis
for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page 151). It must be a

number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are
to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
defined in Appendix C, page 705.
 Sequence in account group number
defined in Appendix C.
4 Click Apply.
To modify construction activities:
1 Right-click Construction and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

2 Select a source activity. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Construction Activity Number.
The Construction Activity Number is broken up into the fields under
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in
Appendix B, have 12 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities,
you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the
 Area number
asterisks (**).
 Identification number
 Equipment type

Note: See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions
Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last
three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters
form the account group number and account code.
 Account code
Enter the tenth and eleventh characters of the Activity Code for the
 Contractor number
4 Click Apply.
Primavera Information
To edit Primavera information:
1 Right-click Project manager information in the Primavera
information folder and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

2 You can specify the following information:
o User name
o Password
o Database name
Name of Primavera database where Aspen IPS data will be
loaded (for example, pmdb).
o Remote or local host server
Indicates mode of operation, remote server (RMT) or local
machine (LCL).
o Enterprise project structure ID
Project structure ID for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is
entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name is
used.
o Enterprise project structure name
Project structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is
entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name is
used.
o Enterprise project manager name
Name of manager (OBS) responsible for Primavera Enterprise.
If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
name is used.
o Enterprise project WBS name
Work Breakdown structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If
nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
name is used.
3 Click Apply to save changes.

IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers 675
IPS Appendix A: Engineering
and Procurement Activity
Numbers
Numbering Convention
Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers include both fixed and
variable numbers, as follows:
 Fixed numbers – activities relating to the overall project.
 Numbers that are repeated for each engineering contract, varying the
digits that identify each contractor.
 Numbers that vary for each class of equipment required within each area
(see “Equipment Codes” on page XX707XX).
As illustrated by the table on the following page, the first three characters and
the eighth character in the ten-character ID number are always “0” for all
Engineering and Procurement activities. The rest of the characters – the
fourth through seventh, the ninth, and the tenth – are used to indicated the
engineering phase, area number, contract number, account number,
equipment class, or simply sequential grouping, as described below:
 The fourth character indicates the major engineering phase:
o 0 Basic Engineering
o 1 Detail Engineering
o 2 Procurement
 The fifth and sixth characters indicate the engineering contract number.
For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00” (unless
contracts are used). The engineering contract number is determined by
your specifications for contractors in the estimating system input and
must be a number between 01 and 98.
 The seventh character indicates the Code of Account series:
o 0, 1, 2 Either Equipment or General
o 3 Piping

676 IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers
o 4 Civil
o 5 Steelwork
o 6 Instrumentation
o 7 Electrical
o 8 Insulation
o 9 Paint
 The ninth and tenth characters simply provide sequential grouping within
the major hierarchy of the first eight characters.
Note: There is one exception to the numbering conventions discussed here.
Where applicable, the process equipment class is indicated by the seventh
and ninth characters and can be a number from 01 to 26. See page XX705XX for
Equipment Class definitions.
Engineering and Procurement – Activity Numbering Conventions
Category Range
Basic Engineering:
Fixed, project-level 000-0-CC-0-0-01 through 000-0-CC-7-0-09
Equipment, by contractor and class 000-0-CC-X-0-X1 through 000-0-CC-X-0-X9
Detail Engineering:
Fixed, project-level 000-1-CC-0-0-11 through 000-0-CC-9-0-02
Variable, by contractor 000-1-CC-1-0-21 through 000-1-CC-7-0-97
Procurement:
Variable, by contractor 000-2-CC-0-0-01 through 000-2-CC-9005
Equipment, by contract and class 000-2-CC-X-0-X1 through 000-2-CC-X-0-X5
CC = Contract Number (01-40)
XX = Process Equipment Class (01-26); see page XX705XX.
List of Activity Numbers
The Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers are listed below, divided
by Phase:
 Basic Engineering: page XX676XX
 Detail Engineering: page XX686XX
 Procurement: page XX692XX
Activity
Number Definition
Basic Engineering
Preliminary
0000000001 AUTHORIZATION TO PROCEED
0000000002 START ENGINEERING
0000000003 STAFFING, MOBILIZATION

0000000004 REVIEW PREVIOUS JOB
0000000005 PROJECT STAFF CONFERENCE
0000000006 CUSTOMER COORDINATION MEETING
0000000007 ANALYZE OUTSTANDING CLIENT INPUT
0000000008 ONGOING CLIENT INPUT
0000000009 RECEIVE ALL CLIENT INPUT
Basic Engineering – Project Level
Materials, Vessels STDS
0000002071 PREP PRELIM MATERIALS OF CONST
0000002072 MATERIALS DEPARTMENT REVIEW
0000002073 PREP & ISSUE VESSEL STANDARDS
0000002074 CLIENT APPROVAL VESSEL STDS
0000002075 REVISE & REISSUE VESSEL STDS
User-Specified Drawings – General
0000002080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX)
0000002081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX)
0000002082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX)
Process Scope Estimating
0000003001 PREPARE PRELIM PROCESS SCOPE
0000003002 PROCESS SCOPE 50% COMPLETE
0000003003 ISSUE PROCESS SCOPE
0000003004 CLIENT APPROVAL PROCESS SCOPE
0000003005 UPDATE PROCESS SCOPE
0000003006 PREPARE BUDGET ESTIMATE
0000003007 CLIENT APPROVAL BUDGET ESTIMATE
0000003008 REVISE PROCESS SCOPE
0000003009 CLASS 2 ESTIMATE WORKSHEETS
0000003010 UPDATE CLASS 2 ESTIMATE
0000003011 COMPLETE 70% CLASS 2 ESTIMATE
0000003012 COMPLETE CLASS 2 ESTIMATE
0000003013 CLIENT APPROVAL - ESTIM & SCHED
User-Specified Drawings – Piping

Project Scope
0000004001 PREP & ISSUE PRELIM SCOPE DOC
0000004002 PREP & REISSUE PROJECT SCOPE
Fire Protection
0000004011 REVIEW FIRE PROTECTION REQMTS
0000004012 PREP & ISSUE FIRE PROTN SPECS
0000004013 CLIENT APPROVAL FIRE PROTECTION
Soils
0000004021 SOILS ANALYSIS
0000004022 PREP & ISSUE SOILS REPORT
Environmental
0000004031 PRELIM ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGTN
0000004032 ISSUE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA
Structural
0000004041 PREP & ISSUE STRUCTURAL SPECS
0000004042 CLIENT APPROVAL STRUCTURAL SPECS
0000004043 PRELIM FOUNDATION DESIGN
0000004044 CIVIL,ARCHITECTURAL & HVAC ESTIM
Utilities
0000004051 UTILITY DIAGRAM WORKSHEETS
0000004052 DRAFT & CHECK UTILITY FDS
0000004053 UPDATE & ISSUE UTILITY FDS
0000004054 CLIENT APPROVAL UTILITY FDS
0000004055 REVISE & REISSUE UTILITY FDS
0000004056 DRAFT & CHECK UTILITY P&IDS
0000004057 CLIENT APPROVAL UTILITY P&IDS
0000004058 UPDATE & ISSUE UTILITY P&IDS
Electrical
0000004061 PREP & ISSUE ELEC STANDARDS
0000004062 CLIENT APPROVAL ELEC STANDARDS
0000004063 PREP & ISSUE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
0000004064 UPDATE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
0000004065 PREPARE MAJOR ELEC EQPT REQNS
0000004066 APPROVE MAJOR ELEC EQPT REQNS
0000004067 MAJOR ELEC EQUIPMENT QUOTES
0000004068 TAB & SELECT ELEC EQPT VENDOR
0000004069 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC EQPT VENDOR
0000004070 PREPARE AREA CLASSIFCN PLAN
0000004071 DRAFT & CHECK CLASSIFCN PLAN
0000004072 CLIENT APPROVAL,CLASSIFCN PLAN
0000004073 REV & ISSUE CLASSIFICATION PLAN
0000004075 ELECTRICAL COST ESTIMATE

User-specified Drawings – Civil/Building
PFD’s
0000005001 ANALYZE PROCESS REQUIREMENTS
0000005002 HEAT & MATERIAL BALANCE
0000005003 PROCESS FLOWSHEETS
0000005004 DRAFT & CHECK PFDS
0000005005 UPDATE & ISSUE PFDS(1)
0000005011 CLIENT APPROVAL PFDS(1)
0000005012 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS(2)
0000005013 CLIENT APPROVAL PFDS(2)
0000005014 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS(3)
Instrumentation
0000005021 PREPARE INSTRUMENT STANDARDS
0000005022 CLIENT APPROVAL INSTRUMENT STDS
0000005023 REVISE & REISSUE INSTRUMENT
0000005024 PREPARE INSTRUMENT INDEX
Piping
0000005031 PRELIMINARY P&ID WORKSHEETS
0000005032 INTERNAL REVIEW P&IDS
0000005033 DRAFT & CHECK P&IDS
0000005034 UPDATE & ISSUE P&IDS(1)
0000005035 CLIENT APPROVAL P&IDS(1)
0000005036 REVISE & REISSUE P&IDS(2)
0000005037 PREPARE & ISSUE LINE LIST
0000005041 PREP & ISSUE PIPING STANDARDS
0000005042 CLIENT APPROVAL PIPING STDS
0000005043 REVISE & REISSUE PIPING STDS
0000005044 PIPING ARRANGEMENT STUDIES
0000005045 DRAFT INTERCONNG PIPING DWGS
0000005046 REV & ISSUE INTERCONNG PIPING
0000005047 PIPING MATERIAL TAKEOFF
Plot Plans
0000005051 PREPARE SITE PLANNING MODEL
0000005052 GA, PLOT PLAN STUDIES
0000005053 DRAFT & CHECK GA, PLOT PLANS
0000005054 UPDATE & ISSUE GA, PLOT PLANS
0000005055 CLIENT APPROVAL GA, PLOT PLANS

0000005056 REVISE & REISSUE GA, PLOT PLANS
User-Specified Drawings – Steelwork
0000005061 PRELIM SIZING MECHANICAL
0000005062 PREPARE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST
0000005071 PREPARE & ISSUE MECH STANDARDS
0000005072 CLIENT APPROVAL MECH STANDARDS
0000005073 UPDATE & ISSUE MECH STANDARDS
Process Studies
0000006001 PROCESS STUDIES
Control System
0000006010 PANEL/CONSOLE LAYOUT STUDY
0000006011 DRAFT & CHECK PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS
0000006012 APPROVE PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS
0000006013 REV & ISSUE PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS
0000006020 SCOPE SHARED DISPLAY SYSTEM
0000006021 IFQ DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
0000006022 APPROVE DIG CONTROL SYSTEM
0000006030 PREPARE CONTROL PANEL SPECS
0000006031 IFQ CONTROL PANEL REQNS
0000006032 APPROVE CONTROL PANEL REQNS
User-Specified Drawings – Instrumentation
Misc, Documentation
0000007001 PREPARE PRELIM EQUIPMENT LIST

0000007002 SCHED & ESTIMATE PROCESS WORK
0000007003 PREPARE EARLY ENGINEERING CPM
0000007004 PREPARE EQUIPMENT STATUS LIST
0000007005 UPDATE & ISSUE EQUIPMENT LIST
0000007006 PREPARE & ISSUE BIDDERS LIST
0000007007 CLIENT APPROVE BIDDERS LIST
0000007008 REVISE & REISSUE BIDDERS LIST
0000007009 PREPARE & ISSUE PROJECT CPM
User-Specified Drawings – Electrical
Basic Engineering – Equipment, Variable by Class and
Contractor
Vessels
0000010011 PROCESS SPECS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010012 REV PROC SPECS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010013 MECH DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010014 PREPARE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010015 OBTAIN QUOTES, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010016 SELECT VENDORS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010017 APPROVE VENDOR, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010018 APPROVE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010019 REISSUE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01
Towers
0000010021 PROCESS SPECS, TOWERS-01
0000010022 REV PROC SPECS, TOWERS-01
0000010023 MECH DESIGN, TOWERS-01
0000010024 PREPARE REQNS, TOWERS-01
0000010025 OBTAIN QUOTES, TOWERS-01
0000010026 SELECT VENDORS, TOWERS-01
0000010027 APPROVE VENDOR, TOWERS-01
0000010028 APPROVE REQNS, TOWERS-01
0000010029 REISSUE REQNS, TOWERS-01
Storage Tanks
0000010031 PROCESS SPECS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010032 REV PROC SPECS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010033 MECH DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010034 PREPARE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010035 OBTAIN QUOTES, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010036 SELECT VENDORS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010037 APPROVE VENDOR, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010038 APPROVE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010039 REISSUE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01
Pumps
0000010041 PROCESS SPECS, PUMPS -01
0000010042 REV PROC SPECS, PUMPS -01
0000010043 MECH DESIGN, PUMPS -01
0000010044 PREPARE REQNS, PUMPS -01
0000010045 OBTAIN QUOTES, PUMPS -01
0000010046 SELECT VENDORS, PUMPS -01
0000010047 APPROVE VENDOR, PUMPS -01
0000010048 APPROVE REQNS, PUMPS -01
0000010049 REISSUE REQNS, PUMPS -01
Compressors
0000010051 PROCESS SPECS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010052 REV PROC SPECS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010053 MECH DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010054 PREPARE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010055 OBTAIN QUOTES, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010056 SELECT VENDORS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010057 APPROVE VENDOR, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010058 APPROVE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010059 REISSUE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01
Turbines
0000010061 PROCESS SPECS, TURBINES -01
0000010062 REV PROC SPECS, TURBINES -01
0000010063 MECH DESIGN, TURBINES -01
0000010064 PREPARE REQNS, TURBINES -01
0000010065 OBTAIN QUOTES, TURBINES -01
0000010066 SELECT VENDORS, TURBINES -01
0000010067 APPROVE VENDOR, TURBINES -01
0000010068 APPROVE REQNS, TURBINES -01
0000010069 REISSUE REQNS, TURBINES -01
Heat Exchangers
0000010071 PROCESS SPECS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010072 REV PROC SPECS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010073 MECH DESIGN, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010074 PREPARE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010075 OBTAIN QUOTES, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010076 SELECT VENDORS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010077 APPROVE VENDOR, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010078 APPROVE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010079 REISSUE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01
Boilers
0000010081 PROCESS SPECS, BOILERS -01
0000010082 REV PROC SPECS, BOILERS -01

0000010083 MECH DESIGN, BOILERS -01
0000010084 PREPARE REQNS, BOILERS -01
0000010085 OBTAIN QUOTES, BOILERS -01
0000010086 SELECT VENDORS, BOILERS -01
0000010087 APPROVE VENDOR, BOILERS -01
0000010088 APPROVE REQNS, BOILERS -01
0000010089 REISSUE REQNS, BOILERS -01
Furnaces
0000010091 PROCESS SPECS, FURNACES -01
0000010092 REV PROC SPECS, FURNACES -01
0000010093 MECH DESIGN, FURNACES -01
0000010094 PREPARE REQNS, FURNACES -01
0000010095 OBTAIN QUOTES, FURNACES -01
0000010096 SELECT VENDORS, FURNACES -01
0000010097 APPROVE VENDOR, FURNACES -01
0000010098 APPROVE REQNS, FURNACES -01
0000010099 REISSUE REQNS, FURNACES -01
Air Coolers
0000011001 PROCESS SPECS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011002 REV PROC SPECS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011003 MECH DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011004 PREPARE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011005 OBTAIN QUOTES, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011006 SELECT VENDORS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011007 APPROVE VENDOR, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011008 APPROVE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011009 REISSUE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -01
Pkg Refrigeration
0000011011 PROCESS SPECS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011012 REV PROC SPECS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011013 MECH DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011014 PREPARE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011015 OBTAIN QUOTES, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011016 SELECT VENDORS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011017 APPROVE VENDOR, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011018 APPROVE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011019 REISSUE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01
Generators
0000011021 PROCESS SPECS, GENERATORS -01
0000011022 REV PROC SPECS, GENERATORS -01
0000011023 MECH DESIGN, GENERATORS -01
0000011024 PREPARE REQNS, GENERATORS -01
0000011025 OBTAIN QUOTES, GENERATORS -01
0000011026 SELECT VENDORS, GENERATORS -01
0000011027 APPROVE VENDOR, GENERATORS -01
0000011028 APPROVE REQNS, GENERATORS -01
0000011029 REISSUE REQNS, GENERATORS -01
Air Dryers
0000011031 PROCESS SPECS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011032 REV PROC SPECS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011033 MECH DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011034 PREPARE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011035 OBTAIN QUOTES, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011036 SELECT VENDORS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011037 APPROVE VENDOR, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011038 APPROVE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011039 REISSUE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01
Conveyors
0000011041 PROCESS SPECS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011042 REV PROC SPECS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011043 MECH DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01
0000011044 PREPARE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011045 OBTAIN QUOTES, CONVEYORS -01
0000011046 SELECT VENDORS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011047 APPROVE VENDOR, CONVEYORS -01
0000011048 APPROVE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011049 REISSUE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01
Mills
0000011051 PROCESS SPECS, MILLS -01
0000011052 REV PROC SPECS, MILLS -01
0000011053 MECH DESIGN, MILLS -01
0000011054 PREPARE REQNS, MILLS -01
0000011055 OBTAIN QUOTES, MILLS -01
0000011056 SELECT VENDORS, MILLS -01
0000011057 APPROVE VENDOR, MILLS -01
0000011058 APPROVE REQNS, MILLS -01
0000011059 REISSUE REQNS, MILLS -01
Fans
0000011061 PROCESS SPECS, FANS -01
0000011062 REV PROC SPECS, FANS -01
0000011063 MECH DESIGN, FANS -01
0000011064 PREPARE REQNS, FANS -01
0000011065 OBTAIN QUOTES, FANS -01
0000011066 SELECT VENDORS, FANS -01
0000011067 APPROVE VENDOR, FANS -01
0000011068 APPROVE REQNS, FANS -01
0000011069 REISSUE REQNS, FANS -01
Elevators
0000011071 PROCESS SPECS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011072 REV PROC SPECS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011073 MECH DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01
0000011074 PREPARE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011075 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEVATORS -01
0000011076 SELECT VENDORS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011077 APPROVE VENDOR, ELEVATORS -01
0000011078 APPROVE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011079 REISSUE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01
Motors
0000011081 PROCESS SPECS, MOTORS -01
0000011082 REV PROC SPECS, MOTORS -01
0000011083 MECH DESIGN, MOTORS -01
0000011084 PREPARE REQNS, MOTORS -01
0000011085 OBTAIN QUOTES, MOTORS -01
0000011086 SELECT VENDORS, MOTORS -01
0000011087 APPROVE VENDOR, MOTORS -01
0000011088 APPROVE REQNS, MOTORS -01
0000011089 REISSUE REQNS, MOTORS -01
Dust Collectors
0000011091 PROCESS SPECS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011092 REV PROC SPECS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011093 MECH DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011094 PREPARE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011095 OBTAIN QUOTES, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011096 SELECT VENDORS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011097 APPROVE VENDOR, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011098 APPROVE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011099 REISSUE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-01
Filters
0000012001 PROCESS SPECS, FILTERS -01
0000012002 REV PROC SPECS, FILTERS -01
0000012003 MECH DESIGN, FILTERS -01
0000012004 PREPARE REQNS, FILTERS -01
0000012005 OBTAIN QUOTES, FILTERS -01
0000012006 SELECT VENDORS, FILTERS -01
0000012007 APPROVE VENDOR, FILTERS -01
0000012008 APPROVE REQNS, FILTERS -01
0000012009 REISSUE REQNS, FILTERS -01
Centrifuges
0000012011 PROCESS SPECS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012012 REV PROC SPECS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012013 MECH DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012014 PREPARE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012015 OBTAIN QUOTES, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012016 SELECT VENDORS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012017 APPROVE VENDOR, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012018 APPROVE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012019 REISSUE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01
Mixers
0000012021 PROCESS SPECS, MIXERS -01
0000012022 REV PROC SPECS, MIXERS -01
0000012023 MECH DESIGN, MIXERS -01
0000012024 PREPARE REQNS, MIXERS -01
0000012025 OBTAIN QUOTES, MIXERS -01
0000012026 SELECT VENDORS, MIXERS -01
0000012027 APPROVE VENDOR, MIXERS -01

0000012028 APPROVE REQNS, MIXERS -01
0000012029 REISSUE REQNS, MIXERS -01
Cooling Towers
0000012031 PROCESS SPECS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012032 REV PROC SPECS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012033 MECH DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012034 PREPARE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012035 OBTAIN QUOTES, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012036 SELECT VENDORS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012037 APPROVE VENDOR, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012038 APPROVE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012039 REISSUE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01
Misc. Equipment
0000012041 PROCESS SPECS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012042 REV PROC SPECS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012043 MECH DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012044 PREPARE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012045 OBTAIN QUOTES, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012046 SELECT VENDORS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012047 APPROVE VENDOR, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012048 APPROVE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012049 REISSUE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01
Package Items
0000012051 PROCESS SPECS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012052 REV PROC SPECS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012053 MECH DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012054 PREPARE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012055 OBTAIN QUOTES, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012056 SELECT VENDORS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012057 APPROVE VENDOR, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012058 APPROVE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012059 REISSUE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
Packings and Linings
0000012061 PROCESS SPECS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012062 REV PROC SPECS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012063 MECH DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012064 PREPARE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012065 OBTAIN QUOTES, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012066 SELECT VENDORS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012067 APPROVE VENDOR, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012068 APPROVE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012069 REISSUE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01
Detail Engineering
Project Level
CPM
0001000011 UPDATE & ISSUE PROJECT CPM

0001000012 FINALIZE CPM FOR CONSTRUCTION
Definitive Estimate
0001000021 DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE MTO
0001000022 PREPARE DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE
0001000023 REVIEW & ISSUE DEFIN ESTIMATE
0001000024 UPDATE DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE
0001000025 FINALIZE CONTROL ESTIMATE
Site Development
0001001011 CIVIL DESIGN,LAYOUT STUDIES
0001001012 PREP SITE GRADING DRAWINGS
0001001013 DRAFT & CHECK SITE GRADING DWGS
0001001014 PREP SITE DEVELOPMENT DETAILS
0001001015 DRAFT & CHECK SITE DEVEL DETAILS
0001001016 CLIENT APPROVE SITE DEVEL DWGS
0001001017 REV & ISSUE SITE DEVELOPMT DWGS
Equipment Layout
0001002001 UPDATE EQUIPMENT LIST
0001002010 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT STUDIES
0001002011 REVIEW EQUIP LAYOUTS & FREEZE
Line List
0001003000 PREPARE & ISSUE LINE LIST
Piping Model (if specified)
0001003010 PREPARE MODEL
0001003011 PROJECT REVIEW,UPDATE MODEL
0001003012 CHECK & IFC MODEL
0001003015 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS
Civil
0001004000 PREP & ISSUE BUILDING SPECS
0001004001 REBAR, CONCRETE BULK MTO
0001004002 PREPARE & ISSUE REBAR REQNS
0001004003 CLIENT APPROVE REBAR REQNS
0001004004 MTO & REQN EARLY UNDERGRND MATL
Structural
0001005002 PRELIM STRUCTURAL MTO
Control System
0001006004 MTO & REQN JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE
0001006007 INSTRUMENT CABLE TRAY STUDY
0001006070 PREP CONTROL ROOM/CONSOLE DWGS
0001006071 DRAFT&CHK CONTRL RM/CONSOLE DWGS
0001006072 APPROVE CONTROL RM/CONSOLE DWGS
0001006073 REV CONTROL RM/CONSOLE DWGS
Electrical
0001007000 UPDATE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST
0001007001 MTO & REQN ELEC BULK MATLS
0001007002 MTO & REQN MINOR ELEC EQUIP
0001007003 MTO & REQN CABLE TRAY, HARDWARE
0001007004 MTO & REQN ELEC TRACING MATL

0001007007 ELEC CABLE TRAY STUDY
0001007008 ELEC HEAT TRACING STUDY
0001007009 LIGHTING STUDY
Insulation
0001008000 PREP & ISSUE INSULATION SPECS
0001008001 CLIENT APPROVE INSULATION SPECS
0001008002 REV & ISSUE INSULATION SPECS
Paint
0001009000 PREP & ISSUE PAINTING SPECS
0001009001 CLIENT APPROVE PAINT SPECS
0001009002 REVISE & ISSUE PAINTING SPECS
Detail Engineering – Variable by Contractor
Equipment Layout (GA’s)
0001011022 REV,IFD EQUIP LAYOUT DWGS -01
User-Specified Drawings – General
Rotating Equipment
0001012012 ROTATING EQP STRESS ANALYSIS -01
Piping
0001013001 BULK PIPING MTO (80%) -01
0001013002 PREP PIPING REQNS (80%) -01
0001013003 PREP REMOTE SHOP REQNS -01
0001013017 REVISE & ISSUE P&IDS -01
0001013021 PREPARE PIPING LAYOUT -01
0001013022 UPDATE PIPING LAYOUT -01
0001013023 PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS -01
0001013031 DRAFT & CHECK PIPE ARNGMNT -01
0001013032 CLIENT APPROVAL PIPE ARNGMNT -01
0001013033 UPDATE,IFC PIPING ARNGMNT -01
0001013041 DRAFT & CHECK ISOMETRICS -01
0001013042 CLIENT APPROVAL ISOS -01
0001013043 REVISE & ISSUE ISOS -01
0001013045 FINALIZE LINE INDEX -01
0001013051 PREPARE PIPE TEST SCHEDS -01
0001013052 CHECK,IFC PIPE TEST SCHEDS -01

0001013055 FINALIZE UTILITY P&IDS -01
0001013060 DESIGN SPECIAL HANGERS -01
0001013061 DRAFT & CHECK ENG HANGERS -01
0001013062 APPROVE HANGER DRAWINGS -01
0001013063 REV & ISSUE HANGER DWGS -01
0001013071 DRAFT & CHECK STM TRACING DWG-01
0001013072 APPROVE STEAM TRACING DWGS -01
0001013073 REV,IFC STEAM TRACING DWGS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Piping
0001013080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) -01
0001013081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) -01
0001013082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) -01
Civil
0001014010 DESIGN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS -01
0001014011 DRAFT & CHECK EQUIP FDN DWGS -01
0001014012 APPROVAL, EQUIP FDN DWGS -01
0001014013 REV & IFC,EQUIP FDN DWGS -01
0001014020 DESIGN STEELWORK FOUNDATIONS -01
0001014021 DRAFT & CHECK STEELWORK FDNS -01
0001014022 APPROVE STEELWORK FDN DWGS -01
0001014023 REV & IFC STEELWORK FDN DWGS -01
0001014030 DESIGN PAVING -01
0001014031 DRAFT & CHECK, PAVING DWGS -01
0001014032 APPROVAL, PAVING DWGS -01
0001014033 REV & IFC PAVING DWGS -01
0001014040 DESIGN MISC. CONCRETE -01
0001014041 DRAFT & CHECK, MISC CONC DWGS-01
0001014042 APPROVAL, MISC CONCRETE DWGS -01
0001014043 REV & IFC MISC CONCRETE DWGS -01
0001014050 PREP UNDERGROUND PIPE LAYOUT -01
0001014051 DRAFT & CHECK U-GRND PIPING -01
0001014052 CLIENT APPROVE U-GRND PIPING -01
0001014053 REV & ISSUE U-GRND PIPING -01
Buildings
0001014060 PREP BUILDING PLANS,ELEVNS -01
0001014061 DRAFT&CHECK BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS-01
0001014062 APPROVE BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS -01
0001014063 REV,IFC BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS -01
0001014071 DRAFT & CHECK ARCH DETAILS -01
0001014072 APPROVE ARCH DETAILS -01
0001014073 REV & ISSUE ARCH DETAILS -01

User-Specified Drawings – Civil/Building
Steelwork
0001015010 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN -01
0001015011 DRAFT & CHECK STRUCT DWGS -01
0001015012 CLIENT APPROVE STRUCT DWGS -01
0001015013 REV & ISSUE STRUCT DWGS -01
0001015021 DRAFT & CHECK MISC STEEL -01
0001015022 APPROVE MISC STEEL DWGS -01
0001015023 REV & ISSUE MISC STEEL -01
0001015031 DRAFT & CHECK GRATING DWGS -01
0001015032 APPROVE GRATING DWGS -01
0001015033 REV & IFP GRATING DWGS -01
0001015034 MT0 & REQN GRATING -01
0001015035 APPROVE GRATING REQNS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Steelwork
Instrumentation
0001016000 PREPARE, IFC INSTR INDEX -01
0001016001 FINALIZE, IFC INSTR INDEX -01
0001016003 MTO & REQN TAGGED ITEMS -01
0001016010 DESIGN LOOP DIAGRAMS -01
0001016011 PREP LOOP DIAGRAMS, IFP -01
0001016012 APPROVE INSTR LOOP DGS -01
0001016013 REVIEW LOOP DIAGRAMS -01

0001016014 REVISE,IFC LOOP DIAGRMS -01
0001016021 DRAFT&CHECK INSTR LOCN PLANS -01
0001016022 CLIENT APPROVAL INSTR LOCN -01
0001016023 REV & IFC INSTR LOCN PLANS -01
0001016031 DRAFT & CHECK 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS-01
0001016032 APPROVE 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS -01
0001016033 REV & IFC 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS -01
0001016041 DRAFT&CHECK INSTR SCHEMATICS -01
0001016042 APPROVE INSTRUM SCHEMATICS -01
0001016043 REV & IFC INSTR SCHEMATICS -01
0001016051 DRAFT&CHK CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS-01
0001016052 APPROVE CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS -01
0001016053 REV & IFC CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS-01
0001016061 PREP,CHECK CABLE SCHEDULES -01
0001016062 APPROVAL, CABLE SCHEDS -01
0001016063 REV & ISSUE CABLE SCHEDS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Instrumentation
Electrical
0001017010 PREPARE LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017011 DRAFT & CHECK LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017012 APPROVE LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017013 REV & IFC LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017015 PREPARE GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017016 DRAFT & CHECK GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017017 APPROVE GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017018 REV & IFC GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017020 PREPARE CABLE TRAY DRAWINGS -01
0001017021 DRAFT & CHECK CABLE TRAY DWGS-01
0001017022 APPROVE CABLE TRAY DRAWINGS -01
0001017023 REV & IFC CABLE TRAY DWGS -01
0001017025 REV,IFD ELECTRICAL ONE LINES -01
0001017026 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC ONE LINES-01
0001017027 FINALIZE ELECTRICAL ONE LINES-01
0001017030 PREPARE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS-01
0001017031 DRAFT ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS -01
0001017032 APPROVE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS-01
0001017040 PREPARE POWER DISTRIBUTION -01
0001017041 DRAFT POWER DISTRIBUTION DWGS-01

0001017042 APPROVE POWER DISTRIB DWGS -01
0001017050 PREPARE CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG-01
0001017051 DRAFT CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG -01
0001017052 APPROVE CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG-01
0001017060 PREPARE SUBSTATION LAYOUT -01
0001017061 DRAFT SUBSTATION LAYOUT DWGS -01
0001017062 APPROVE SUBSTATN LAYOUT DWGS -01
0001017065 ASSEMBLE,CHECK POWER PKG -01
0001017066 REV & ISSUE ELEC POWER PKG -01
0001017070 PREPARE ELEC TRACING DWGS -01
0001017071 DRAFT&CHECK ELEC TRACING DWGS-01
0001017072 APPROVE ELEC HEAT TRACING -01
0001017073 REV & IFC ELEC TRACING DWGS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Electrical
Procurement
Fixed Activities
0002001000 ASSEMBLE,IFC SITE DEVL DWGS
0002002000 ASSEMBLE,IFC EQUIPMENT DWGS
0002002009 EXPEDITING -EQUIP DELIVERY
0002003000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,PIPING DWGS
0002004000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,CIVIL DRAWINGS
Control System Procurement
0002004011 OBTAIN REBAR QUOTES
0002004012 TAB & RECOMMEND REBAR VENDOR
0002004013 CLIENT APPROVE REBAR VENDOR
0002004014 ISSUE BLANKET P.O., REBAR
0002004016 QUOTE & PURCHASE U-GRND MATL
0002004017 DELIVER EARLY U-GRND PIPING
0002005000 ASSEMBLE,IFC STRUCTURAL DWGS
0002006000 ASSEMBLE,IFC C0NTROL SYSTEM DWGS
0002006011 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM QUOTES
0002006012 SELECT DIGITAL CONTRL SYSTEM
0002006013 APPROVE DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
0002006014 PURCHASE DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
0002006015 RECEIVE VENDOR DATA,DIG CTRL SYS

0002006016 REVIEW VENDOR DATA,DIG CTRL SYS
0002006017 FAB & DELIVER DIG CONTROL SYS
0002006021 CONTROL PANEL QUOTES
0002006022 TAB & RECOMMEND PANEL VENDOR
0002006023 CLIENT APPROVE PANEL VENDOR
0002006024 ISSUE P.O., CONTROL PANEL
0002006025 RECEIVE VENDOR DATA, PANEL
0002006026 REVIEW VENDOR DATA, PANEL
0002006027 FABRICATE CONTROL PANEL
0002006028 INSTALL PANEL INSTRMTS & SHIP
0002006031 PURCHASE JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE
0002006032 DELIVER JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE
Electrical
0002007000 ASSEMBLE,IFC ELECTRICAL DWGS
0002007011 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEC BULKS
0002007012 TAB & SELECT VENDOR, ELEC BULKS
0002007013 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC MATL VENDOR
0002007014 PURCHASE ELECTRICAL BULK MATLS
0002007015 DELIVER ELECTRICAL BULK MATLS
0002007021 OBTAIN QUOTES,MINOR ELEC EQUIP
0002007022 TAB&SELECT VENDOR,MINOR ELEC EQ
0002007023 APPROVE VENDOR, MINOR ELEC EQ
0002007024 PURCHASE MINOR ELEC EQUIPMENT
0002007025 DELIVER MINOR ELEC EQUIPMENT
0002007031 ISSUE MAJOR ELEC EQUIP P.O.
0002007032 RECV VENDOR DATA,MAJOR ELEC EQ
0002007033 REVIEW,RETURN MAJOR ELEC EQ DATA
0002007034 FAB,DELIVER MAJOR ELEC EQUIP
0002007041 OBTAIN QUOTES, CABLE TRAY
0002007042 TAB & SELECT VENDR,CABLE TRAY
0002007043 APPROVE VENDOR, CABLE TRAY
0002007044 PURCHASE ELEC CABLE TRAY
0002007045 DELIVER ELEC CABLE TRAY
0002007071 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEC TRACING
0002007072 TAB & SELECT VENDOR,ELEC TRACING
0002007073 APPROVE VENDOR,ELEC TRACING
0002007074 PURCHASE ELEC TRACING MATERIAL
0002007075 DELIVER ELEC TRACING MATL
Insulation
0002008000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,INSULATION SPECS
Paint
0002009000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,PAINTING SPECS
Procurement – By Contractor
0002010001 PREPARE MECHANICAL BID PACKAGE
0002010002 APPROVE MECHANICAL BID PACKAGE
0002010003 BID CYCLE, MECHANICAL CONTR
0002010004 APPROVE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
0002010005 MOBILIZE, MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
Procurement – By Equipment Class Contract

Vessels
0002010011 ISSUE P.O., PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010012 REC VENDOR DATA,PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010013 REVIEW DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010014 APPROVE DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010015 FAB & SHIP PRESS VESSELS-01
Towers
0002010021 ISSUE P.O., TOWERS -01
0002010022 REC VENDOR DATA,TOWERS -01
0002010023 REVIEW DESIGN, TOWERS -01
0002010024 APPROVE DESIGN, TOWERS -01
0002010025 FAB & SHIP TOWERS -01
Storage Tanks
0002010031 ISSUE P.O., STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010032 VENDOR DATA STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010033 REVIEW DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010034 APPROVE DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010035 FAB & SHIP STORAGE TANKS-01
Pumps
0002010041 ISSUE P.O., PUMPS -01
0002010042 REC VENDOR DATA,PUMPS -01
0002010043 REVIEW DESIGN, PUMPS -01
0002010044 APPROVE DESIGN, PUMPS -01
0002010045 FAB & SHIP PUMPS -01
Compressors
0002010051 ISSUE P.O., COMPRESSORS -01
0002010052 REC VENDOR DATA,COMPRESSORS -01
0002010053 REVIEW DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01
0002010054 APPROVE DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01
0002010055 FAB & SHIP COMPRESSORS -01
Turbines
0002010061 ISSUE P.O., TURBINES -01
0002010062 REC VENDOR DATA,TURBINES -01
0002010063 REVIEW DESIGN, TURBINES -01
0002010064 APPROVE DESIGN, TURBINES -01
0002010065 FAB & SHIP TURBINES -01
Heat Exchangers
0002010071 ISSUE P.O., HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010072 REC VENDOR DATA,HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010073 REVIEW DESIGN, HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010074 APPROVE DESIGN, HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010075 FAB & SHIP HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
Boilers
0002010081 ISSUE P.O., BOILERS -01
0002010082 REC VENDOR DATA,BOILERS -01
0002010083 REVIEW DESIGN, BOILERS -01

0002010084 APPROVE DESIGN, BOILERS -01
0002010085 FAB & SHIP BOILERS -01
Furnaces
0002010091 ISSUE P.O., FURNACES -01
0002010092 REC VENDOR DATA,FURNACES -01
0002010093 REVIEW DESIGN, FURNACES -01
0002010094 APPROVE DESIGN, FURNACES -01
0002010095 FAB & SHIP FURNACES -01
Air Coolers
0002011001 ISSUE P.O., AIR COOLERS -01
0002011002 REC VENDOR DATA,AIR COOLERS -01
0002011003 REVIEW DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01
0002011004 APPROVE DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01
0002011005 FAB & SHIP AIR COOLERS -01
Pkg Refrigeration
0002011011 ISSUE P.O., PKG REFRIG -01
0002011012 REC VENDOR DATA,PKG REFRIG -01
0002011013 REVIEW DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01
0002011014 APPROVE DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01
0002011015 FAB & SHIP PKG REFRIG -01
Generators
0002011021 ISSUE P.O., ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011022 REC VENDOR DATA,ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011023 REVIEW DESIGN, ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011024 APPROVE DESIGN, ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011025 FAB & SHIP ELEC GENERATR-01
Air Dryers
0002011031 ISSUE P.O., AIR DRYERS -01
0002011032 REC VENDOR DATA,AIR DRYERS -01
0002011033 REVIEW DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01
0002011034 APPROVE DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01
0002011035 FAB & SHIP AIR DRYERS -01
Conveyors
0002011041 ISSUE P.O., CONVEYORS -01
0002011042 REC VENDOR DATA,CONVEYORS -01
0002011043 REVIEW DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01
0002011044 APPROVE DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01
0002011045 FAB & SHIP CONVEYORS -01
Mills
0002011051 ISSUE P.O., MILLS -01
0002011052 REC VENDOR DATA,MILLS -01
0002011053 REVIEW DESIGN, MILLS -01
0002011054 APPROVE DESIGN, MILLS -01
0002011055 FAB & SHIP MILLS -01
Fans
0002011061 ISSUE P.O., FANS -01
0002011062 REC VENDOR DATA,FANS -01

0002011063 REVIEW DESIGN, FANS -01
0002011064 APPROVE DESIGN, FANS -01
0002011065 FAB & SHIP FANS -01
Elevators
0002011071 ISSUE P.O., ELEVATORS -01
0002011072 REC VENDOR DATA,ELEVATORS -01
0002011073 REVIEW DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01
0002011074 APPROVE DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01
0002011075 FAB & SHIP ELEVATORS -01
Motors
0002011081 ISSUE P.O., MOTORS -01
0002011082 REC VENDOR DATA,MOTORS -01
0002011083 REVIEW DESIGN, MOTORS -01
0002011084 APPROVE DESIGN, MOTORS -01
0002011085 FAB & SHIP MOTORS -01
Dust Collectors
0002011091 ISSUE P.O., DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011092 REC VENDOR DATA,DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011093 REVIEW DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011094 APPROVE DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011095 FAB & SHIP DUST COLLECTR-01
Filters
0002012001 ISSUE P.O., FILTERS -01
0002012002 REC VENDOR DATA,FILTERS -01
0002012003 REVIEW DESIGN, FILTERS -01
0002012004 APPROVE DESIGN, FILTERS -01
0002012005 FAB & SHIP FILTERS -01
Centrifuges
0002012011 ISSUE P.O., CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012012 REC VENDOR DATA,CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012013 REVIEW DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012014 APPROVE DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012015 FAB & SHIP CENTRIFUGES -01
Mixers
0002012021 ISSUE P.O., MIXERS -01
0002012022 REC VENDOR DATA,MIXERS -01
0002012023 REVIEW DESIGN, MIXERS -01
0002012024 APPROVE DESIGN, MIXERS -01
0002012025 FAB & SHIP MIXERS -01
Cooling Towers
0002012031 ISSUE P.O., COOLING TOWER-01
0002012032 REC VENDOR DATA,COOLING TOWER-01
0002012033 REVIEW DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01
0002012034 APPROVE DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01
0002012035 FAB & SHIP COOLING TOWER-01
Misc. Equipment

0002012041 ISSUE P.O., MISC EQUIP -01
0002012042 REC VENDOR DATA,MISC EQUIP -01
0002012043 REVIEW DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01
0002012044 APPROVE DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01
0002012045 FAB & SHIP MISC EQUIP -01
Package Items
0002012051 ISSUE P.O., PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012052 REC VENDOR DATA,PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012053 REVIEW DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012054 APPROVE DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012055 FAB & SHIP PACKAGE ITEMS-01
Packing and Linings
0002012061 ISSUE P.O., PACK&LININGS -01
0002012062 REC VENDOR DATA,PACK&LININGS -01
0002012063 REVIEW DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01
0002012064 APPROVE DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01
0002012065 FAB & SHIP PACK&LININGS -01
Activities Variable by Contractor
Piping – Material Vendor
0002013011 PIPING (80%) QUOTES -01
0002013012 TAB & RECOMMEND VENDOR -01
0002013013 APPROVE PIPING VENDOR -01
0002013014 ISSUE P.O., PIPING(80%) -01
0002013015 DELIVER PIPING (80%) -01
0002013016 ISSUE P.O., FINAL PIPING -01
0002013017 DELIVER FINAL PIPING -01
Piping – Remote Shop
0002013021 PIPE FAB SHOP QUOTES -01
0002013022 TAB & RECOMMEND PIPE SHOP -01
0002013023 CLIENT APPROVAL, PIPE SHOP -01
0002013024 ISSUE PO, PIPE FABRICATION -01
0002013025 FAB & SHIP SPOOLS (80%) -01
0002013026 FAB & SHIP FINAL SPOOLS -01
Civil Contract
0002014001 PREP CIVIL&STRUC BID PACKAGE
0002014002 APPROVE CIVIL&STRUC BID PACKAGE
0002014003 BID CYCLE, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
0002014004 APPROVE CIVIL&STRUC CONTRACTOR
0002014005 MOBILIZE, CIVIL CONTRACTOR
Civil
0002014015 FAB & DELIVER,REBAR,INBEDS -01
0002014021 PREPARE BID PKG,BUILDINGS -01
0002014022 APPROVE BID PKG, BUILDINGS -01
0002014023 OBTAIN BIDS, BUILDINGS -01
0002014024 SELECT CONTRACTOR,BUILDINGS -01
0002014025 APPROVE CONTRACTOR,BUILDINGS -01
0002014026 SIGN CONTRACT,BUILDNGS -01
0002014027 MOBILIZE,BUILDING CONTRACTOR -01

Steel
0002015006 QUOTE,SELECT STEEL FABRICATOR-01
0002015007 RECEIVE SHOP DWGS, STRUCTURAL-01
0002015008 REVIEW SHOP DWGS ,STRUCTURAL -01
0002015009 FAB & SHIP STRUCTURAL STEEL -01
0002015010 MISC STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS -01
0002015011 REVIEW SHOP DWGS, MISC STEEL -01
0002015012 FAB & SHIP MISC STEEL -01
0002015020 QUOTE & PURCHASE GRATING -01
0002015021 DETAIL,FAB & DELIVER GRATING -01
Instrumentation
0002016041 QUOTE INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016042 SELECT VENDORS,TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016043 APPROVE VENDORS,TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016044 PURCHASE INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016045 DELIVER INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01
Insulation Contract
0002018001 PREPARE BID PACKAGE, INSULATION
0002018002 APPROVE BID PACKAGE, INSULATION
0002018003 BIDS,SUPPLY & INSTALL INSULATION
0002018004 APPROVE INSULATION CONTRACTOR
0002018005 MOBILIZE, INSULATION CONTRACTOR
Painting Contract
0002019001 PREPARE BID PACKAGE, PAINT
0002019002 APPROVE BID PACKAGE, PAINT
0002019003 OBTAIN BIDS, PAINTING
0002019004 APPROVE PAINTING CONTRACTOR
0002019005 MOBILIZE, PAINTING CONTRACT

Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers 699
Appendix B: Site
Development and
Construction Activity
Numbers
Numbering Conventions
The table below illustrates IPS Site Development and Construction activity
ID’s as they are described below. The first seven characters of the ten-
character activity ID indicate the functional source of the activity (for
example, a pipe-rack or a particular item of equipment), and the last three
characters indicate the type of work, with a standard description.
The first seven characters contain variables, as described below:
 The first and second characters indicate the schedule Area number, 01
through 90; and other project-level items, such as substations, control
panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91.
 The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified tag number
(columns 5 - 7) from the estimating system input for equipment items and
plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the
specified, the System default reference number of 00.
 The sixth and seventh characters contain an IPS Equipment Code
corresponding to the Equipment Symbol (see Appendix D).
All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the
activity number, as listed in the table on the following page.
 The eighth through tenth characters always refer to the type of work
performed in the activity. These last three characters generate a standard
activity description, as listed in the Activity ID’s list.

700 Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers
Note: For Control Centers or Operations Centers, the fifth and sixth
characters contain the Center reference number (01-99) specified by the
user.
Site Development and Construction – Activity Numbering Conventions
Category Range
Construction – Areas
Equipment Items AA-XXX-YY-2-00-NN through AA-XXX-YY-
2-35
Plant Bulks, Buildings, Area SD items AA-XXX-91-1-00-NN through AA-XXX-91-
9-35
Area Bulks AA-XXX-91-3-00-NN through AA-XXX-91-
9-35
Construction – project-level
Unit Substation 91-OBB-00-4-00-NN through 91-OBB-00-
7-27
Main Substation 91-1BB-00-4-00-NN through 91-1BB-00-
7-27
Control Center 91-20C-C0-6-00-NN through 91-20C-C0-
6-35
Operations Center 91-21C-C0-6-00-NN through 91-21C-C0-
6-35
Transmission Line 91-300-00-7-29-NN through 91-300-00-
7-30
Elec. Hookup and Testing 91-300-00-7-31-NN through 91-300-00-
7-33
Demobilize Project 91-450-00-0-80-NN only
AA – Schedule area number
BB – Substation reference number
CC – Control or operation center reference number
NN – Contractor number
XXX – Component reference number
YY – Equipment type
List of Activity Numbers
The following Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers are listed
by the last three characters only of the 10-character Activity Number. The
first seven characters will be listed according to numbering conventions
discussed above.

Note: A blank description or * indicates no logic provided by Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
Site Development
100 EARLY SITE DEVELOPMENT
COMPLETE
* 101 DELIVER SITE MATERIAL
102 SUBCONTRACT SITE
DEVELOPMENT
103
104
105 SOIL BORINGS
106 DEMOLITION
107 CLEAR SITE
108 DEWATERING
109 PILING
110
111
112 WATER WELLS
113 RETAINING WALLS
114 SITE FILL AND COMPACTION
115 HAULING EARTH
116 BULK EXCAVATION
117 EMBANKMENTS AND DIKES
118 SOIL STABILIZATION
119 ROCK EXCAVATION
120
121 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
122 BASE PREPARATION
123 SUBPAVING
124 ASPHALT PAVING
125 CONCRETE PAVING
126 CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK
127 TRENCH AND STRUCTURAL
EXCAVATION
128 HAND EXCAVATION
129 RAILROADS
130 MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS
131 FENCING
132 LANDSCAPING
133
134 SITE DEVL USER SUPPLIED
ITEM
135 MISCELLANEOUS SITE
DEVELOPMENT
Equipment Setting
200 EQUIPMENT SETTING
* 201 DELIVER EQUIPMENT
202 SUBCONTRACT EQUIPMNT
203 FIELD FABRICATE VESSEL
204 FIELD FABRICATE TOWER
205 SET VESSEL IN STRUCTURE
206 SET TOWER IN STRUCTURE
207 SET EXCHANGER IN STRUCTURE
208 PUMP SETTING
209 DRIVER SETTING
210
211 VESSEL SETTING
212 TOWER SETTING
213 SETTING COOLING TOWER
214 SETTING PACKAGE BOILER
215 FIELD ERECT EQUIPMENT
216 SETTING STORAGE TANK
217 FIELD ERECT STORAGE TANK
218 TURBINE SETTING
219 FURNACE SETTING
220 REACTOR SETTING
221 COMPRESSOR SETTING
222 HEAT EXCHANGER SETTING
223 AIR COOLER SETTING
224 CONVEYOR SETTING
225 FAN/BLOWER SETTING
226 STACK/FLARE SETTING
227 MILL/CRUSHER SETTING
228 CRANE/HOIST SETTING
229 BLENDER/MIXER SETTNG
230 EQUIPMENT SETTING
231 INSTALL LININGS
232 INSTALL PACKINGS
233
234 EQUIPMENT USER SUPPLIED
ITEM
235 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
SETTING
Piping
300 PIPING WORK
* 301 DELIVER PIPING MATERIAL
302 SUBCONTRACT PIPING
* 303 DELIVER PREFABRICATION
PIPE
304
305
306 FIELD SHOP PIPING
FABRICATION
307 FABRICATE PIPE SUPPORTS
308 ERECT PIPE SUPPORTS
309 ERECT PIPING
310
311 FIELD WELD PIPE, FITTINGS
312 ERECT VALVES
313 BOLT UP CONNECTIONS
314 MAKE THREADED CONNECTION
315
316

317 UTILITY PIPING
318
319
320 BURIED PIPE
321 COAT AND WRAP PIPE
322 PROCESS DUCTWORK
323 STEAM TRACING
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332 PIPING SYSTEM TESTNG
333
* 334 PIPING USER SUPPLIED ITEM
335 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING
Civil
400 CIVIL WORK
* 401 DELIVER CIVIL MATERIAL
402 SUBCONTRACT CIVIL
403
404 EXCAVATE FOUNDATION
405
406 EXCAVATE TRENCH
407
408 BACKFILL AND COMPACT
409 SHORING EXCAVATIONS
410 GRADE AND COMPACT BASE
411 FIELD FABRICATE FORMWORK
412 INSTALL FORMWORK
413 STRIP AND CLEAN FORMWORK
414
415 FIELD FABRICATE REBAR
416 INSTALL REBAR
417
418 FIELD MIX CONCRETE
419 POUR AND FINISH CONCRETE
420 CONCRETE CURING TIME
421
422 SET ANCHOR BOLTS
423 GROUT BASE PLATE
424
425 BUILDING STRUCTURAL
426 BUILDING PLUMBING
427 BUILDING ELECTRICAL
428
429 SAND MAT FOUNDATION
* 430 INSTALL PRECAST UNIT
431 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
432
433 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
434 CIVIL USER SUPPLIED ITEM
435 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL WORK
Steel
500 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
* 501 DELIVER STRUCTURAL STEEL
502 SUBCONTRACT STEELWORK
503
504 UNLOAD AND HANDLE STEEL
505
506 ERECT STEEL STRUCTURE
507 ERECT PIPERACK STEEL
508 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STEEL
509
510 GRATING, STAIRS, AND SO ON
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534 STEEL USER SUPPLIED ITEM
535 MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK
Instrumentation
600 INSTRUMENTATION
* 601 DELIVER INSTRUMENTS
602 SUBCONTRACT INSTRUMENTS
603
604 INSTALL LOCAL INSTRUMENTS
605 INSTALL INSTRUMENT PIPING
606 INSTALL INSTRUMENT WIRING

607 INSTALL JUNCTION BOXES
608 INSTALL CONTROL PANEL
609 CONNECT PANEL INSTRUMENTS
610
* 611 COMPUTER INSTALLATION
* 612 COMPUTER TEST RUNS
613
614 INSTRUMENT TESTING
615 INSTALL TUBE BUNDLES
616 PULL MULTICORE RUNS
617
618 INSTALL TERMINATION
CABINETS
619 INSTALL RELAY/PC CABINETS
620
621 INSTALL DATA HIGHWAY
622
623 INSTALL CONSOLE/VDU
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632 INSTRUMENT CONTINUITY
CHECK
633 CONTROL SYSTEM TEST
634 INSTRUMENT USER SUPPLIED
ITEM
635 MISCELLANEOUS
INSTRUMENTION
Electrical
700 ELECTRICAL WORK
* 701 DELIVER ELECTRICAL
MATERIAL
702 SUBCONTRACT ELECTRICAL
703
704 INSTALL BURIED CABLE
705 INSTALL CABLE TRAYS
706 CABLE IN TRAYS
707 INSTALL CONDUIT/FITTINGS
708 PULL WIRE IN CONDUIT
709
710 ELECTRICAL TRACING
711 RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
712 INSTALL PANELBOARDS
713 INSTALL LIGHT FITTINGS
714 PUSH BUTTON, PILOT LIGHT
715 BUS DUCT
716
717 SUBSTATION STEEL STRUCTURE
718 INSTALL SWITCHGEAR
719 INSTALL SUBSTATION
DISCONNECT
720 INSTALL TRANSFORMER
721 INSTALL MOTOR CONTROL
CENTER
722
723 BUILDING LIGHTING
724
* 725 INSTALL CATHODIC
PROTECTION
726
727 GROUNDING SYSTEM
728
729 TRANSMISSION TOWERS
730 TRANSMISSION LINES
731 ELECTRICAL POWER HOOK-UP
732 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CHECK
733 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TEST
734 ELECTRICAL USER SUPPLIED
ITEM
735 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL
Insulation
800 INSULATION WORK
* 801 DELIVER INSULATION
MATERIAL
802 SUBCONTRACT INSULATION
803
804 PIPE INSULATION
805 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
806
807
808
809
810 FIREPROOFING
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
* 820 ACID RESISTANT TILE
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828

829
830
831
832
833
834 INSULATION USER SUPPLIED
ITEM
835 MISCELLANEOUS INSULATION
Paint
900 PAINTING WORK
* 901 DELIVER PAINT MATERIAL
902 SUBCONTRACT PAINTING
903
904 SURFACE PREP - STEELWORK
905 PAINT STEELWORK
906
907 SURFACE PREP - EQUIPMENT
908 PAINT EQUIPMENT
909
910 SURFACE PREP - PIPING
911 PAINT PIPING
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
* 934 PAINT USER SUPPLIED ITEM
935 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING


IPS Project Schedule Settings 705
Appendix C: Equipment Class
Definitions
Equipment Class Number
Vessels 01
Towers 02
Storage Tanks 03
Pumps 04
Compressors 05
Turbines 06
Heat Exchangers 07
Boilers 08
Furnaces 09
Air Coolers 10
Package Refrigeration 11
Generators 12
Air Dryers 13
Conveyors 14
Mills 15
Fans 16
Elevators 17
Motors 18
Dust Collectors 19
Filters 20
Centrifuges 21
Mixers 22
Cooling Towers 23
Miscellaneous Equipment 24
Package Items 25

706 Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions
Packings and Linings 26

Appendix D: Equipment
Codes
The Equipment Code identifies the component. In addition, equipment codes
can include non-equipment items. The Equipment Codes are as follows.
Equipment
Item
Symbol Description
Equipment
Code
AC Air Compressor 01
AD Air Dryer 03
AG Agitator 72
AT Agitated Tanks 04
BL Blender 06
C Condenser 07
CE Crane 09
CO Conveyor 10
CP Centrifugal Pump 11
CR Crusher 12
CRY Crystallizer 13
CT Centrifuge 14
D Dryer 16
DC Dust Collector 17
DD Drum Dryer 18
DDT Double Diameter Tower 15
E Evaporator 19
EG Electric Generator 20
EJ Ejector 21
EL Elevator 22
F Filter 24
FE Feeder 26
FL Flaker 27
FLR Flare 28
FN Fan 29

708 Appendix D: Equipment Codes
FU Furnace 70
GC Gas Compressor 32
GP Gear Pump 34
HE Heat Exchanger 36
HO Hoist 37
HT Horizontal Tank 38
HU Heating Unit 39
K Kneader 42
LIN Lining 73
M Mill 43
MOT Motor/Motor Reducer 68
MX Mixer 44
P Pump 45
PAK Packing 74
R Reactor 48
RB Reboiler 69
RD Rotary Drum 49
RU Refrigeration Unit 50
S Scale 52
SE Separation Equipment 54
ST Stock Treatment 53
STK Stack 55
T Thickener 57
TDS Tray Drying System 58
TUR Turbine 71
TW Single Diameter Tower 60
VP Vacuum Pump 62
VS Screen 63
VT Vertical Tank 64
WFE Wiped Film Evaporator 65
WTS Water Treatment
System
66
Other 76
Non-Equipment Codes
Description Code
Open Steel Structure and Mill Building 00
Pipe Rack 01
Pad 02
Shell 03

None 04
Buildings 11-20
Supplemental Bulks 31-80
Area Bulks
91

710 Appendix D: Equipment Codes

Appendix E: Tutorial
In this appendix, a brief tutorial for modifying and preparing the IPS project
schedule settings is discussed. Under the tree node IPS Project Schedule
Settings | Schedule Appearance Adjustments, the Title of the IPS project
is the first input. The default P3E project title (that is,, IPS project title) is the
same as the scenario name of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project.
Typing the IPS project name results in a P3E project with the same name,
and the corresponding P3E Enterprise Project Name has also the same name.
The EPS project name and EPS Id can be modified using the input provided
under Primavera Information | Project Manager Information.
Modification of activity description is performed using the Description
Modification node of the input tree.
As an example, consider a detailed engineering activity, (variable by
contractor) under civil account with an activity id 0001014013 with an internal
description REV & IFC,EQUIP FDN DWGS. You might want to change to a
less detailed description “PREPARE CIVIL DRAWINGS” as shown above. All
the input is entered from the activity number, and the new activity description
is entered. Several similar examples are provided above. Description
modification for construction is very similar.
Adjustments to calculated durations for the generated activities can be
performed using the schedule adjustment by duration node. Duration for
the engineering and procurement activities can be adjusted as shown below.

712 Appendix E: Tutorial
All three phases can be zeroed out; if the detailed engineering durations are
zeroed out, basic engineering activities are automatically set to zero; and if
procurement activities are set to zero, basic and detailed engineering
activities are zeroed out. In a similar manner, duration of construction
activities may be modified as shown below. The durations of construction
activities are adjusted by account. Duration of procurement activities are
modified by providing the fabrication and ship time of equipment as shown in
the next page.

The IPS-generated activities may be replaced or combined to generate
activities as per the user requirements using the activity modifications node.
As an example, the figure below shows engineering activity modification
screen, and item 1 shows the use of * (in the contract number, activity
sequence number and account group number) for the source activity, to
combine all basic engineering activities into one single activity with an id of
000003013. Item 2 shows that all detailed civil engineering activities
(0001014010 through 0001014097) have been combined into one single civil

714 Appendix E: Tutorial
design activity 0001**4013. Item 3 shows how steel activities are combined
into one.
If activities are modified and combined, it becomes necessary to generate
logic for created activities. In the figure given below, logic modification for
several detailed engineering activities are listed, owing to the fact that all
basic engineering activities have been combined to one. As an instance,
activity 1**2011 (design equipment and piping layout) is assigned a
predecessor 1**6007 (Instrument cable tray study) in item 2 of the figure
shown below. Existing predecessors for 1**6007 are removed in item 1.

The remaining schedule adjustments by crew size and crafts have been
described in the main section; note that craft adjustment is simply used to
replace the system craft code and description by users, and does not serve to
modify the schedule duration.

Index
2
2/3 rule 199, 364
A
About command
Help menu 48
Absolute Basis
streams 297
Access Control Systems 99
Account allocation
Code of Accounts 126
ACCUM, escalation 108
Activate Custom Model option
Preferences 56
Activity modification
IPS project schedule settings 179,
664
Add a Construction Workforce 121
Add button
Engineering Discipline Info form
112
Pipe Details form 321
Add Contractor command 148
Add Project Component command
308
Add Stream button
toolbar 297
Add Stream command
View menu, PFD 293
View menu, PFD 297
Add Trend Data to Database
command
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
Reporter 573, 595
adding
templates 28
Adding
areas 302, 303
barchart items 161
COA sets 124
contractor sets 151
contractors 147
custom pipe specs 96
drawing types 114
EML items 446, 447
Equipment rental items 137–138
lines to pipe volumetric model 320
loop to instrument volumetric
model 323
power distribution items 140
process control items 143
project components 306–308
project directories 56–61
rental days 137
simulation units 187
streams 223, 230–232, 342–345
UCL items 452, 454
Adjusting schedule and barcharts
project execution schedule
settings 158–159
Air coolers
design criteria specifications 199
Air supply
instrumentation loop 324
Allow Docking command 41
Allow Pipeline Areas
General Project Data dialog box
23–24
Alternate project directories 59
Analyzer
importing from 24–26
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)
465–469
Anchor bolts
civil installation bulk 321

718 Index
Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
Design Criteria 199
Apply button
Develop Stream specifications
form 225, 343
Installation Bulks form 314
Interactive Sizing form 350
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments form
318
Preferences dialog box 53
Area
icons 30
List view display of items 33
mapping 273
simulator 265, 273, 277, 290
Area Information dialog box 302
Area Insulation 305
Area Networking 98
Area title 305, 306
Areas
adding 302, 303
deleting 331
dimensions 305, 306
electrical specifications 305, 306
equipment specifications 305, 306
importing 326
index manhours 305
index material costs 305
insulation specifications 305, 306
linking to Consets 152
linking to unit substations 141
paint specifications 305, 306
piping specifications 305, 306
pop-up menu 308
re-numbering 331
steel specifications 305, 306
title 305, 306
type definition 303, 305, 306
ASM See Analyzer Scale-Up Module
(ASM)
Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)
using in Kbase environment 163
Aspen Icarus Reporter
Data trending 594
Excel reports 585–93
HTML reports 584–85
importing data 597
Management reports 585–89
menu bar 573
report mode 574
standard reports 574–84
Aspen Plus
link to Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer 257, 261
map specs 190
models used in sizing towers 369
AspenTech
Aspen Plus simulator program
190
AspenTech support 16
AspenTech Support Center 16
Auto Filter 593
Automatic Item Evaluation
checked command
Tools menu 46
Automatic task backup 55
B
Backup/Recovery options
Preferences 55
Barcharts
custom-designed bars 161–162
project component activity bars
160
Schedule Adjustments
specifications form 158–159
Base stream 226
Base Stream
Develop Streams dialog box 297
BaseCase, default scenario name 21
Basic engineering 110
Basis
Map dialog box 274
streams 297
Basis for Capital Costs
Code of Accounts 123–128
construction workforce 115–120
contingency and miscellaneous
project costs 107
contracts 146
design basis 83
equipment rental 137–138
escalation 107–109
indexing 130
input units of measure 77
introduction 76
libraries 233
output (reports) units of measure
customization 82
systems 139–146
Bend for elbow field 91

BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
displaying 267
Drag & Find feature 268
introduction 267
right-click commands 269
View menu 271
Zoom commands 269–270
Bottom sump height
towers, design criteria 200
Branch for tee field 91
Buildings 301
C
Cached project information 50
Cancel button
form 225
Capacity
changing 465
Capacity over-design factor See
Pump overdesign factor
Capital Cost errors 560
Capital Costs
depreciation 213–214
escalation 214
investment parameters 214
reports 54
View command 271, 292
Capital Costs View
View menu 46
CARBONST.DAT 92
Cascade command
Window menu 33, 47
Cash Flow Summary
reports, Icarus Editor 566
Cashflow spreadsheet 609–14
CASHFLOW.ICS
Cashflow spreadsheet 609–14
CCTV 98
changing the length of pipe per
fitting going to Remote Shop. 84
ChemCAD
map specs 191
simulator report preparation 258–
259
Civil
installation bulk 321
material costs and man-hours 314
specs, design basis 96
Clear All Saved Trends command
Reporter 594
Close command
File menu 44
Closed Circuit TV Systems 98
COA See Code of Accounts (COA)
Code of Accounts (COA)
adding a COA set 124
allocating costs to 126
allocating UCL item costs to 453
exceptions to account allocations
127
introduction 123
Codes of Accounts (COA)
instrumentation field hook-up 247
Cold Inlet Stream field 350
Cold Insulation Schedule 305
Cold Outlet Stream field 350
Color coding
Component Specifications form
312
Communication and Alarm Systems
325
Minimum Area for 99
Component Map Information 276,
278
accessing 311
color coding 312
Options button 312, 313
P&ID button 319, 322
Component Status 277
Components See Project components
Components view
Palette 37, 38
Compressors
sizing 340
Configuration options
mapping 275, 278
Connectivity, stream
explanation 229
Consets
adding 151
deleting 155
editing 153–155
linking 152
unlinking 153
Construction
equipment rental 137–138
management 107, 110, 158
manpower, escalation 107

720 Index
schedule 158, 567
workforce 115–120, 148
Construction workforce number
117
Contingencies
Project Summary spreadsheet
(PROJSUM.ICS) 607
Contingency and miscellaneous
project costs 107
Contract scope
definitions 150–155
Contractor
adding 147
assigning engineering drawings
115
definition, editing 149
deleting 150
linking to workforces 148
reports 567
sets 150–155
unlinking from workforce 148
Contracts
Contractors tree diagram 146–150
introduction 146
Scope tree diagram 150–155
control cable lengths 80
control cable wire type 82
Control center
adding 143–145
instrument volumetric models 323
introduction, power distribution
143
linking to area 145
linking to power distribution items
141
Control Center button bar 516
Control centers
Control signal
Control valve
instrumentation loop 323–324
Conversion factor
input units of measure 22, 79
simulator units of measure 186
Conversion rate
currency 23
Copy command
project components 328
Cost libraries
deleting 464
duplicating 463
444–449
importing 462
introduction 443
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 451–460
Costs
total direct cost, Equipment
Summary (EQUIP.ICS) 601
total project cost, Cashflow
spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS)
609
Country Base 23
CPM barchart
project schedule 158
CPM Schedules 13
Craft code 121
Craft names
modifying 123
Craft rates
construction workforce
specifications 119–121
Craft Wage rate 121
Create New Project dialog box 20,
25, 61
Create New Trend in Excel command
Reporter 573, 595
Create Stream dialog box 230, 231,
343, 344
Create tab view
Create User Database command
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
573, 598
Create User Database dialog box
Aspen Icarus Reporter 599
creating
line sizing equations 413
Creating
project scenario 20–24
streams 223, 230–232, 342–345
creating projects by importing
templates 28
Crew mixes
modifying 122–123
Crew size
653
Currency Conversion Rate 23

(PROJSUM.ICS) 603
Currency Name 23
Currency Symbol 23
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603
Currency unit for matl cost 325
Current Map List
Project Component Map
Specifications dialog box 189
Custom Model
instructions 331–335
Preferences 56
Custom P&ID's
attaching to a component 419
setting as component’s default in
active project only 420
setting as component's default 416
Custom piping specs
design basis 84–96
Custom Tasks command
Tools menu 46
Customer External Files
selecting in project 157
customer support 16
Customized External Steel Costs
File
Exporting 243
customizing
instrument field hook ups 245
Customizing Steel Costs Using an
External File 239
Cut command
Cyclone inlet linear velocity
D
Data trending
Decision Analyzer command
Run menu 45
DEFAULT.DAT 92
Delete a Construction Workforce 122
Delete button
Pipe Details form 321
Delete Mappings command 277
Deleting
areas 331
components 330
contractors 150
cost libraries 464
cost library items 461
mappings 277
power distribution items 142
process control items 146
projects and project scenarios 49
specification files 239
streams 232
Delivery times
equipment classes 160
project components 160–161
Density
form 227
Depreciation method
Cashflow spreadsheet
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610, 611, 614
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Depreciation Method
Design allowance 305
Design basis
editing 106
introduction 83
Design Criteria
specifications, project basis 195–
207
Design deflection 305
Design engineering 158
Design pressure
applying 2/3 rule for 199, 364
sizing agitators 359
sizing heat exchangers 365
sizing towers 375
utility specifications 210
Design temperature
sizing agitators 359
sizing heat exchangers 365
sizing towers 375
Desired rate of return
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
Executive Summary spreadsheet
(EXECSUM.ICS) 615
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
spreadsheet 605
Desired Rate of Return
investment parameters
specifications 213

722 Index
Detail engineering 110
Develop Equipment Library Model
form 447
Develop Product Specifications dialog
box 221
Develop Schedule command
Run menu 45
Develop Stream specifications form
225, 343, 345
Develop Streams dialog box 230,
231, 343, 344
Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog
box 208
Diameter option 305
Dimensions, areas 305, 306
Direct costs
instrument field hook-ups 245
Directories
project, locations - Preferences
56–61
Disciplines
engineering 111
Disconnect command
streams 299
Disconnected Streams dialog box
299
Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return
See Internal Rate of Return
(IRR)
Display results after evaluation
Preferences 54
Docking 41
Documentation 15
Double-jointed pipe requirement
pipeline area specifications 307
Draw Disconnected Stream button
toolbar 299
Draw Disconnected Stream
command
View menu, PFD 299
Draw Disconnected Stream
command
View menu, PFD 293
Drawing count
engineering workforce
specifications 114
Drawing number 114, 115
Drawing type
engineering workforce
specifications 113
Duct installation bulk 321
Durations
654
E
e-bulletins 16
Economic Life of Project
Economy - local and world,
escalation 107
Edit Connectivity button
toolbar 294, 295
Edit Connectivity command
View menu, PFD 293, 294
editing
external steel material file 240
EI (escalation indices) 109
Electrical
specs, areas 305, 306
Electricity
operating unit costs specifications
217
E-mail
reports 585, 586, 592
EML See Equipment Model Library
(EML)
Engineering
assigning responsibility for 154
disciplines 111
drawings 113
management 110
phases 110
schedule 567
workforce 148
Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
period
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
EQUIP.ICS
investment analysis spreadsheets
601
Equipment
adding 306–308
class delivery times 160

item delivery times 160
number 137, 138
rental 137–138
specifications, areas 305, 306
adding an item to 446
adding EML item as a component
447
creating 444
definition 443
Equipment Rental Summary report
138
Equipment Summary
investment analysis spreadsheets
601
ERROR message 560
Escalating library costs 461
Escalation
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Estimate Class 76
Estimate Date 76
EU country base 23–24
Euro
currency, General Project Data 23
Evaluate button
312, 620
Evaluate Item command 620
Evaluate Project button
toolbar 43, 559
Evaluate Project command
Run menu 45, 559
Evaluation
item 620
Preferences 54
project 559
Evaluation Engine 367, 598
Excavation and backfill
Excel Custom Model files 331–335
Excel reports
Auto Filter 593
descriptions 589
opening 590
EXECSUM.ICS 614–16
614–16
Exit command
Kbase File menu 46–48
EXOPEN 303
Export to Excel Trending Report
dialog box
Export to Excel Workbook dialog box
Aspen Icarus Reporter 587, 591
Export to Icarus SPECS File
command
File menu 44
Export Trend Data into Excel dialog
box
Exporting a Customized External
Steel Costs File 243
External Simulation Import Tool 47
External Steel Costs File
Exporting customized 243
external steel file
using 239
external steel material file
editing 240
F
Facility Type
FATAL message 560
Field
instrumentation, process control
143
supervision, project schedule 158
Field hook-up assembly and parts
245–252
Fieldbus system
instrumentation specs, design
basis 97
short-circuit protection 97
Fields group 55
File menu
menu bar 44
Aspen Icarus Reporter menu
bar 573
Fireproofing
insulation specs 100
Fit into one page
Zoom dialog box 270
Float in Main Window command 41
FLOOR 303

724 Index
Flow rate units
product specifications 222
Fluid classes
utility streams 209
Foaming tendency
trayed towers, design criteria 202
Form work
Fraction basis 227
Freeze Content button
Properties Window 40
Fuel
217
Furnace fractional efficiency
heat exchanger design criteria 199
G
G and A expenses
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604, 606
G and A Expenses
Galvanizing (for steel)
civil/steel specs, design basis 97
General and administrative costs
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
General materials, escalation 107
General Project Data
creating a new project scenario 23
defining the Project Basis 75
General rates
construction workforce
General Wage Rate/Productivity
specifications form 117
GRADE 303
Gray borders
312
Green borders
312
Grid Settings command
View menu, PFD 293, 294
Grids
viewing in Block Flow Diagram
(BFD) 272
viewing in Process Flow Diagram
(PFD) 294
Grids Visible command
View menu, BFD 272
Grout
H
HD 325
Heat exchangers
sizing 363–366
help desk 16
Help menu 48
HETP (height equivalent of a
theoretical plate)
packed towers, design criteria 201
Historical Data 325
Hook-ups
customizing 245–252
extra wire for 97
instrumentation 97, 245–252
Hot Inlet Stream field 347
Hot Insulation Schedule 305
Hot Outlet Stream field 350
HTML reports
descriptions 584
Item Report 54
opening 585, 586
HYSIM
map specs 192
261
HYSYS
map specs 193
I
Icarus Editor
printing report section 562
reviewing results 561–69
toolbar 562
Tools menu 46

Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) 367,
598
Icarus interface 29–42
Icarus Project Component Selection
dialog box 448, 455, 457
Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) See
Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)
IEE See Icarus Evaluation Engine
(IEE)
Import command
File menu 44
Libraries view, Palette 236, 462
Import Connected Streams option
Preferences 56
Import Data command
573
597
Import Installation Bulks option
Preferences 56
Import Selection dialog box
Importing
areas 326
components 326
project from previous version 24–
26
scenarios 327
specification files 236
Inasmbly.dat 245
Inch-Pound (IP), units of measure
21, 234, 236
Incomplete items 34
Indexing
Project Basis specifications 130
Indicating signal
Indices
escalation (EI) 109
system base 108
user base 108
Indirect costs
general wage rates 118
(PROJSUM.ICS) 606
reports 606
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 444
Indirects field
Wage General Info specifications
form 118
INFOmational message 560
Inparts.dat 245, 246, 247
Input units of measure customization
21–22, 77–79
Input Units of Measure Specifications
dialog box 21, 79
INSCLD##.DAT 100
INSHOT##.DAT 100
Installation bulks
accessing 313
civil 321
duct 321
electrical 325
instrumentation 322
insulation 325
introduction 313
material man-hour additions 318
paint 325
pipe details 319
pipe spec 318
Preferences 54
steel 321
Installation Details report 245
Installation guide 15
Installation, assigning responsibility
for 154
Instrument air
217
instrument field hook-ups
customizing 245
Instrument field hook-ups 245–252
Instrument volumetric model
adding loop to 323
deleting loop on 323
instrument bulk items 322–324
replacing loop on 323
Instrumentation
customizing field hook-ups 245–
252
Fieldbus system 97
loop adjustments 323–324
Insulation
material costs 315
Insulation Equivalent Length
library 101
Interactive sizing 339–352
Interactive Sizing form 274, 276,
346, 350

726 Index
Interface layour
customizing 41
Interface layout
Save Window States option 54
understanding 29–42
Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609, 613
Intrusion Detection Systems 99
Investment Analysis
project specifications 211–223
Investment Analysis View
View menu 601
Investment Analysis View command
View menu 601
Investment Parameters
project specifications 211
IP, units of measure 21, 234, 236
IPE 5.0/5.1
importing from 24–26
IPS Also See Aspen Icarus Project
Schedulaer (IPS)
IPS project schedule settings
activity adjustments 179, 664
appearance adjustments 164,
648
displaying Also See Aspen Icarus Project
Schedulaer (IPS)
duration adjustments 168, 653
logic adjustments 173, 657
IRR See Internal Rate of Return
(IRR)
Item evaluation
running 620
sample item report 621
Item Report
instructions for running 620
Preferences 54
sample 621
Item Report command 620
J
Japan
country base, General Project Data
23
Job Number field 76
JP country base 23–24
Junction boxes 143
K
Kbase Project Workflow 14
KbaseLog.txt
Preferences, Logging 62
Known Issues 15
K-Yen (KY)
L
Labor cost per unit
Labor hours per unit
Labor Unit Costs
216, 217
Laboratory charges
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
Laboratory Charges
Ladders, steel - installation bulks
321
LAN 98
Large CCP Reports
splitting 599
Length of delivered pipe section
Length of Start-up Period
Length/fitting to remote shop
85, 87
Libraries
Basis for Capital Costs 77, 233
cost libraries 331–464
444
moving to another directory 244
specification libraries 233–239
view 36
Licensor Quote 325
line sizing equation
creating 413
Line Sizing Equations 412
Line sizing Tutorial 412
Link Area command
process control 145
scope definitions 152
Link Control System command

power distribution 141
Link to Const. Work Force command
148
Link to Engg. Work Force command
148
Linking
contractor sets to areas 152
contractor sets to power
distribution 152
contractor sets to process control
152
Liquid entrainment method 204, 382
List view
description 33
mapped components 277
relationship to Project Explorer 33
simulator file name 265
Status column 277, 309
Load Data button
toolbar 265
Load Data command
Run menu 265
Local economy, escalation 107
Locations
preferences 59
Logging
Preferences 62
Logic modification
657
Loops
instrumentation field hook-ups 246
instrumentation installation bulks
322
modifications 323–324
LQ 325
M
Magnification
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 269–
270
Main Area
default report group 302
Main substations
adding 140–141
Main Window
display options 41
interface, default position 30
printing 44
Make minimum schedule
mandatory 96
Management reports 585–89
Man-hour indexing 130
Manpower Productivity Expert
(MPE)
Tools menu 46
Map All Items option
Map dialog box 273
Map command
pop-up menu 273
Map dialog box 273
Map Items button
toolbar 272
Map Items command
Run menu 45, 272
Map Selected Item(s) option
Map dialog box 273
Mapping simulator models
design criteria 195–207
instructions 272–277
specifications 189
units of measure mapping specs
185–188
unsupported models 56
Mass flow
form 226
Material adjustments
indexing, area level 305
Material and man-hour additions 318
Material and man-hour adjustments
314
installation bulks 333
Material and man-hour indexing 130
Material cost per unit
Material costs
code of account allocations 127
escalation 248
indexing 130
inparts.dat file 248
Material Index Info form 131
Material piping specs 92
Material streams
Mean temperature difference (MTD)
364
Menu bar
46–48
Kbase 30
Merging Areas Into Projects 156

728 Index
Merging Projects 156
Meteorological Monitoring Systems
99
Metric, units of measure 21, 234,
236
Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
file 598
Mixture button
form 225
Mixture Specs
developing streams 227
Modify command
simulator block 266
streams 299
Modify tab view
MODULE 303
Monthly Rate field
equipment rental specifications
138
MTD See Mean temperature
difference (MTD)
Multi-core runs
MUSE
N
Net Present Value (NPV)
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613
Net Rate of Return (NRR)
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613
New command
File menu 20, 24, 44
New Component Information dialog
box 309
New Mapping button
Specifications dialog box 189
New Project button
toolbar 20, 43
no. of push buttons 81
NPV See Net Present Value (NPV)
NRR See Net Rate of Return (NRR)
Number of Periods for Analysis
Number of shifts 117
number of terminations 80
Number of Weeks per Period
O
OK button
form 225
Installation Bulks form 55, 314
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments form
318
OPEN 303
Open button
toolbar 27, 43
Open command
File menu 26, 44
Palette Projects view 27
Open Workbook command
573, 593
Operating and Maintenance Labor
Escalation
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Operating charges
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
(PROJSUM.ICS) 606
Operating costs
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 611
615
product specifications needed to
evaluate 221
raw material specifications needed
to evaluate 218
Operating hours per period
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
total operating labor cost
calculation 608

total product sales calculation 607
total supervision cost calculation
608
Operating Hours per Period
Operating labor and maintenance
costs
investment parameters 215, 216
Operating Mode
Operating supplies
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
Operating Supplies
Operating Unit Costs
Operator center
adding 143–145
143
Options button
312, 313
Options menu
Component Specifications form 55
Options sub-menu
Tools menu 46
Order Number 330
Output (reports) units of measure
customization 82
Overall column efficiency
tower sizing 376
Overdesign factor 351
heat exchangers 199, 365
pumps 196
Overwrite Project Backups option 54,
56
P
P&ID See P&ID button; P&ID
Libraries; P&ID Editor; Piping
and instrumentation drawings
(P&ID’s)
P&ID button 319, 322, 415
P&ID Editor 412
P3 setup 62
Packed towers
sizing 380
PAD 303
PAGA 98
Paging and General Alarm Systems
98
Paint
material costs 315
specs, areas 305, 306
Palette
Components view 37, 38, 308
cost libraries 444–464
deleting a project from 50
description 35–39
docking and undocking 41
dragging components from 308
floating in Main Window 41
hide/display 38
Libraries view 36, 233–239, 444–
464
opening projects 27
Projects view 27, 36, 39, 50, 52,
59
Recent Items folder 308
specification libraries 233
unlocking projects from 52
View menu 46, 292
Paste command
Period Description
Phases
engineering 109
Pipe Details installation bulk 319
Pipe Spec installation bulk 318
Pipeline Also see Pipeline area;
Pipeline project; P&ID Editor;
Piping and instrumentation
drawings (P&ID’s)
fluid type, pipeline area
specifications 307
internal lining type, pipeline area
specifications 307
title, pipeline area specifications
307
Pipeline area
adding 307
allowing 23–24
editing 307
specifications 307
Pipeline project
creating 23–24
description 23–24

730 Index
Piping
installation bulks 318, 319–321
specs, design basis 84–96
volumetric model r 320
Piping and instrumentation drawings
(P&ID’s)
Editor 412
manual 319, 322
printing 415
sending through electronic mail
415
Piping specifications
areas 305, 306
Piping volumetric model
adding lines to 320
changing lines on 321
deleting lines on 321
replacing lines on 321
Plant bulks 301
Plant capacity
changing 465
Plant overhead
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
Plant Overhead
Platforms, steel - installation bulks
322
PLC (Programmable Logic Control)
center
adding 143–145
143
Ports Visible button
toolbar 294
Ports Visible command
View menu, PFD 293
Potable water
operating unit costs specifiations
217
utilities costs, Project Summary
spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS)
608
Pounds (PS)
Power distribution
adding items 140–141
deleting items 142
introduction 139
links to areas 141
links to control systems 141
Power supply frequency
electrical specs 98
Precooler
suffix for mapping 275
tower configurations 279, 371, 373
Preferences
accessing 53
Backup tab view 55
buttons 53
description 53
General tab view 53
introduction 53
Locations tab view 56–61
Logging tab view 62
Process tab view 56
prompts 53
saving window states 54
Schedule 62
Spreadsheet Views tab 55
Tools menu 46
Prepared By field
General Project Data 76
Primary fluid component 225, 227,
343
Primavera Information 183, 668
Primavera user name 62
Prime contractor 147
Print command
Kbase File menu 44
Print Preview command
File menu 44
Print Setup command
File menu 44
Printing
forms and reports in Main
Window 44
Icarus Editor 562
Pro/II
map specs 193
R/R minimum 200
264
Problem description
SimSci report preparation 263
Process connection

intrumentation loop 324
Process control
adding items 143–145
deleting items 146
editing items 144
introduction 143
linking to a contractor set 152
linking to contractor sets 152
links to areas 145
Process Design specifications 162–
210
Process equipment 301
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 290–
299
Process Fluids
Process options
Preferences 56
Process Stream field
raw material specifications 219
Process vessel height to diameter
ratio
vessel sizing procedure 385, 387
Procurement
engineering phases 110
schedule settings 158
Product specifications
investment analysis specifications
220–223
Productivity adjustments 118
Products Escalation
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Profitability Index (PI) 614
Programmable Logic Control (PLC)
centers
adding 143–145
143
Project areas See Areas
Project Basis
Basis for Capital Costs 76–162
default specifications 233
introduction 73
Investment Analysis 211–223
Process Design 162–210
Project Properties 74
specification libraries 233
Streams 223–233
view 30
Project Capital Escalation
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Project component
connecting to stream 295
Project Component Map Preview
dialog box 274, 276, 278
Specifications
dialog box 188
project specifications, Process
Design 188–194
Project components
adding 308
component specifications 311
copying 328
deleting 330
items 447
importing 326
re-numbering 330
scheduling 160–161
Unit Cost Library (UCL) item 454
Project Data Sheet
Project Description
(PROJSUM.ICS) 602
Project Description field
Project Properties 21, 75
Project directories
alternate directories 59
copying 52
default, setting 61
Project evaluation
Preferences 54
running 559
scan for errors 54, 559
Project execution schedule settings
project basis specifications 158–
162
Project Explorer 30

732 Index
relation to Palette 35
View menu 46, 292
Project in use - message 51
Project Indirect Summary report
equipment rental items 138
Project menu
Contracts command 146
Project Name
Aspen Plus - Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer simulator
link 257, 261
(PROJSUM.ICS) 602
Project Name field
creating a new project 20
Project Properties
creating a new project 21
defining the Project Basis 74
Project scenarios
creating new 20–24
deleting 49
importing 327
salvaging 50
saving 48
unlocking 51
Project Schedule Data Sheet
Project Summary
spreadsheet, reviewing investment
analysis 602–8
Project Title 603
Project Type
616
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603
Project view 32
projects
creating from imported templates
28
Projects
copying 52
creating 20–24
deleting 49
view 36, 39
PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet
description 602–8
Prompts
Preferences 53
Properties Window
description 39
Freeze Content button 40
relationship to specifications form
39, 312
View menu 46, 292
PROVISION See SimSci's Pro/II with
PROVISION
Pump overdesign factor
design criteria specifications 196,
367
sizing procedures 366, 367
Pumps
sizing 340
Q
Question mark in Status column 309,
311
component specifications 277
Quoted cost item
mapping overhead/bottoms split to
371
mapping unsupported models to
56
Quoted cost items
mapping unsupported models to
189
Quoted cost per item 325
Quoted equipment 301, 313
R
Radio Systems 98
Rate field
Rate Units field
Raw material
costs, project specifications 220
escalation 214
Raw Material Costs

615
Raw Material Escalation
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Raw Material Specifications
investment analysis, project basis
217–220
Rebar
Recent Items folder 308
Reconnect Sink command
stream, Process Flow Diagrams
(PFD) 299
Reconnect Source command
streams, Process Flow Diagram
(PFD) 299
Red borders
312
Refrigerant 348
Relation attributes 598
Relative Basis
streams 297
Remarks field
project properties 21, 75
Rental action code 137, 138
Rental Days Required field
equipment rental specifications
137, 138
Re-number command
Run menu 45, 330, 331
Re-numbering
areas 331
Report Editor 46
Report files
Reporting Assistant 617
Report groups
adding 301
deleting 302
Preferences, deletion prompt 54
Preferences, display 54
renaming 302
showing, Preferences option 32
Report templates
Reporter See Aspen Icarus Reporter
Reporting Assistant 616–20
Reports
data trending 594–96
Excel 585–93
HTML 584–85
Item report 620
Management reports 585
producing 620
Standard reports 574–84
Reroute All Streams command
Run menu 291
Reset button
form 225
Residence time
design criteria specifications 202,
203, 204
sizing crystallizers 361
sizing vessels 382, 384, 387
Re-Size command
project component pop-up menu
274, 341
Rotating equipment spares 305
Run menu 45
Run Report command
573
S
Sales
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609, 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605, 607, 608
Salvage Project As dialog box 50
Salvage Value
605
Salvage Value (Percent of Initial
Capital Cost)
impact on depreciation 213
Salvaging project scenarios 50
Sample_Inasmbly.dat 245, 246
Sample_Inparts.dat 245, 247
Save As command
File menu 44, 48
Save button
toolbar 43, 48
Save command

734 Index
File menu 44, 48
Save Project As dialog box 49
Save Window States checkbox
Preferences 54
Saving
cached information 50
project scenarios 48
window states 54
SBI (System Base Indices),
escalation 108
Scan for Errors before evaluation
Preferences 54
Scan for Errors command
Run menu 45
Scan Messages 560
Scenario Description
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603
Scenario Name field
Create New Project dialog box 20,
25
Save Project As dialog box 49
Scenarios
creating 20–24
deleting 49
importing 24, 327
salvaging 50
saving 48
unlocking 51
Schedule
Project Schedule Data Sheet 567
settings 158–162
Schedule Adjustments
specifications form 158–159
Scheduling and cost tracking
user name, Preferences 62
Screens
Seismic data
civil/steel specs 96
Select command
Project Basis pop-up menu 244
Select Import Type dialog box 26
Sensor
instrumentation loop 323–324
Separation factor
sizing vessels 382
SG 325
Shop fab maximum diameter 305
Show Page Bounds
View menu, BFD 272
View menu, PFD 293
Sieve tray design 378
Signal cabling, instrumentation -
SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION
map specs 193
R/R minimum 200, 381
SHORTCUT column operation 381
264
Simulation reports
Aspen Plus 254–256, 369, 371
ChemCAD 258–259
HYSIM 259–261, 369, 371
HYSYS 369, 371
loading 32
Pro/II 262–264, 369
selecting 265
Simulation units 187
Simulator data
loading 264
mapping 272–277
mapping specifications 189
unsupported models 56
Simulator File Name
Design 264
Simulator Type
616
Design 264
(PROJSUM.ICS) 602
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping
Specs
Design 185–188
Single Component Summary Report
Preferences 54
Single Source Quote 325
Site development 301
Size button 339, 346
Size Icarus Project Component(s)
options
Map dialog box 274
Size Item option 296, 339
Sizing
calculations 356–387

ChemCAD items 259
defaults 356–387
HYSIM items 260
mapped components 274, 276,
339
overview 339
parameters 194, 199, 200, 201,
202, 204, 205, 207
requirements 356–387
Sizing Expert 208, 274, 296, 339–
352
Sizing Method field
447
sizing parameter symbols 449
Slot Template dialog box 129
Snap to Grid checkbox
Grid properties 294
Snap to Grid command
View menu, BFD 272
View menu, PFD 293
Solids handling information
Source
Map dialog box 273
Source of quote 325
Spare parts
equipment specs, design basis 84
SPC center
adding 143–145
143
Specialty center
adding 143–145
143
Specification basis
Specification files
creating 234
deleting 239
duplicating 237
importing 236
introduction 233
modifying 235
selecting 244
selecting for use in project 244
Specification libraries
customizing 234
introduction 233
specifying
split file size 600
split file size
specifying 600
Splitting Very Large CCP Reports 599
SPREAD, escalation 108
Spreadsheet Views 55
Spreadsheets
viewing investment analysis 601
SQL database
exporting to Microsoft Access 598
SS 325
Stairs, steel - installation bulks 322
Standard Basis
file, changing location 61
file, selecting 244
input file, General Project Data
76
Standard reports
descriptions 574
navigating 576
opening 575
printing 578
searching 578
Starting program 17, 634
Start-up period, length
Startup, commissioning
engineering phases 110
Status bar 30
View menu 46, 292
Status column
List view 277, 309
Steam utility 348
Steel
design basis specifications 96
fireproofing - insulation specs 100
galvanizing cost civil/steel specs,
design basis 97
specifications, areas 305, 306
Streams
absolute basis 231
adding 296
basis mode 231
connecting to equipment during
sizing 345–352
connectivity, Process Flow Diagram
(PFD) 294

736 Index
creating 296
creating from Project Explorer 223,
230–232, 342–345
deleting 232, 299
material 220
modifying 224
process 222
relative basis 231
Streams List command
View menu, BFD 272
View menu, PFD 293
Stress relief option 305
structural steel members
specifying weight break-down for
242
Subcooling
tower configurations 279
Subtype 128
Suffixes
mapping 275
Supervision
costs, Project Summary
608
number of supervisors per shift,
(PROJSUM.ICS) 608
wage rate, Project Summary
608
support, technical 16
System Base Indices (SBI),
escalation 108
System cost base data
603
Systems
power distribution 139–142
process control 143–146
T
Tax Rate
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
technical support 16
Telephone Systems 98
Template files
templates
adding 28
creating projects from 28
Templates Tab 41
terminations
number of 80
Tile command
Window menu 33, 47
Timed backup 55
Timed Recovery 55
Toolbar
buttons 43
description 43
docking 43
View menu 46, 292
Tools menu 46
Total Manpower Schedule
Total pipeline length
Total project cost
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
Tower configurations
mapping 275, 280–288, 370–373
Transducers
Transmission lines
adding 140–141
Transmitters, instrumentation -
Trayed towers
sizing 376, 377, 380
Tree diagrams
Contractors 146–150
Power Distribution 139–142
Process Control 143–146
Scope 150–155
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
573, 595
Trending database reports 594–96
Trim cooler
suffix for mapping 275
tower configurations 279, 371, 373
Type definition, area 305, 306

U
UBI (User base indices), escalation
108
UCL See Unit Cost Library (UCL)
UK country base 23–24
Unique Project Backup options 56
Unit Cost field
Unit Cost Library (UCL)
adding an item to 452
adding UCL item to a project 454
creating 451
definition 444
Unit substations
adding 140–141
linking to areas 141
United Kingdom
23
United States
23
Units of measure
input customization 21, 77
output (reports) customization 82
project properties 21
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603
Units of Measure group 55
Units of Measure Specification dialog
box 186
Unlink command
contractors 148
power distribution 142
Unlock command 51
Unsupported simulator models
Preferences 56
Update button
form 225
US country base 23–24
USD
User base indices (UBI), escalation
108
User Custom Model 331–335
UserData folder 245
using
external steel file 239
Utilities
costs 608, 615
escalation 605, 610
list of availiable utility resources
348
usage estimation 228
Utilities Escalation
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Utility costs
heat-transfer utilities 210
non-heat transfer utilities 217
Utility Specifications
Utility stream
creating 208
modifying 208
Utility Unit Costs
(non-heat transfer utilities) 217
utility specifications (heat-transfer
utilities) 210
V
Valve tray sizing 379
Valves
Design Basis instrumentaton specs
97
instrumentation installation bulks
323
piping installation bulks 320
Vapor disengagement height
towers, design criteria 200
VB 325
VBL 325
Vendor Budget Quote 325
Vendor Budget Quote Long Lead 325
Vendor Firm Quote 325
Vendor Firm Quote Long Lead 325
Vessel
design criteria specifications 205–
207
height to diameter ratio 203, 385,
387
sizing 340, 381
VF 325
VFL 325
View Existing Trend Data command
Reporter 573, 597

738 Index
View menu 46, 292
Voltage levels
electrical specs 98
Volumetric models
instrumentation installation bulk
322–323
introduction, main features 13
piping installation bulk 320–321
W
Wages
construction workforce 115–120
WARNing message 560
web site, technical support 16
Weld efficiency 305
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get
Zoom dialog box 270
Wind data
civil/steel specs 96
Wind design required 305
Window menu 47
Window states, saving 54
Wire distribution system
electrical specs 98
Workbook mode
View menu 46, 292
Workforce reference base
General Wage Rates 118
Workforces
construction 115–120
linking to contractors 148
Working capital
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 611
Working capital percentage
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
Working Capital Percentage
World economy, escalation 107
WYSIWYG
Zoom dialog box 270
Y
Yen
Z
Zoom
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 269–
270

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User s Guide.pdf

More Related Content

What's hot

Similar to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User s Guide.pdf

More from Samantha Vargas

Recently uploaded

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User s Guide.pdf